Specification Part 3 of 3

SEPTEMBER 2018 PROJECT NO.
18006+
Q GARDENS BOUTIQUE RESIDENCES
ARJAN, DUBAI – U.A.E.

ARJAN, DUBAI, UAE
PART 3 OF 3
MEP SPECIFICATION
SEPTEMBER 2018
Rev 0
CVTEC PLUS Page 1 of 399 SECTION 3 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES STANDAR SPECIFICATION

SEPTEMBER 2018 PROJECT NO. 18006+
Amendment Record Sheet Amendment Record Sheet
Revision Description Date Approved

SD0 Schematic Design Stage Issue 08.03.2018 SD
T0 Issued for Tender 05.05.2018 CT

Contents
Amendment Record Sheet Amendment Record Sheet ...........................................................................................2
3.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 26
3.0.1 General Electrical Standards .................................................................................................................... 26
3.0.2 General Standards ................................................................................................................................... 26
3.0.3 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................... 27
3.0.4 Electricity Supply ..................................................................................................................................... 27
3.0.5 Facilities for other trades ......................................................................................................................... 27
3.0.6 Position of all Points, switches, etc .......................................................................................................... 27
3.0.7 Mounting Heights .................................................................................................................................... 28
3.0.8 Segregation of wiring systems ................................................................................................................. 28
3.0.9 Fire and smoke barriers ........................................................................................................................... 28
3.0.10 Design Criteria ......................................................................................................................................... 28
3.0.11 Supports and fixings ................................................................................................................................ 29
3.0.12 Expansion Joints ...................................................................................................................................... 29
3.0.13 Quality of Materials ................................................................................................................................. 29
3.0.14 Faulty materials and Workmanship ......................................................................................................... 30
3.0.15 Specialized Tools ...................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1 EARTHING ................................................................................................................................................ 30
3.1.1 Reference Documents .............................................................................................................................. 30
3.1.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1.3 Earth Electrodes ....................................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.4 Conductors .............................................................................................................................................. 32
3.1.5 Joints and Connections ............................................................................................................................ 33
3.1.6 Inspection Pits ......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.1.7 Supports and Fixings ................................................................................................................................ 34
3.1.8 Installation............................................................................................................................................... 34

3.1.9 Extension and alteration to existing installation ...................................................................................... 35
3.1.10 Generator ................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.1.11 TN-C-S Systems ........................................................................................................................................ 35
3.1.12 External Socket Outlets and Equipment ................................................................................................... 36
Section 3.2 LV POWER DISTRIBUTION .................................................................................................................. 36
3.2.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 37
3.2.3 Factory Built Assemblies .......................................................................................................................... 37
3.2.4 Switchboards ........................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2.5 Drawings .................................................................................................................................................. 39
3.2.6 Terminations & Switchboard Connections ............................................................................................... 39
3.2.7 Safety and Maintenance Aspects ............................................................................................................. 40
3.2.8 Identification and Notices ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.2.9 Phase Colouring ....................................................................................................................................... 40
3.2.10 Current Transformers and Instruments .................................................................................................... 41
3.2.11 Metering .................................................................................................................................................. 41
3.2.12 Testing ..................................................................................................................................................... 41
3.2.13 Rubber Matting ....................................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.14 Distribution Boards .................................................................................................................................. 42
3.2.15 MCB Distribution Boards ......................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.16 Consumer Units ....................................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.17 Residual Current Device ........................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.18 Air-Break Switches ................................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.19 Moulded-Case Circuit-Breakers ................................................................................................................ 43
3.2.20 Fuses ........................................................................................................................................................ 43
3.2.21 Miniature Circuit-Breakers ....................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.22 Power Factor Correction .......................................................................................................................... 44

3.2.23 Surge Protection Device ........................................................................................................................... 45
3.3 HV / LV CABLES AND WIRING ................................................................................................................... 45
3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................... 46
3.3.2 Cables in Conduit and Trunking................................................................................................................ 47
3.3.3 Installation............................................................................................................................................... 47
3.3.4 Circuit Protective Conductor (refer to Section 3.1 also) ........................................................................... 48
3.3.5 Materials ................................................................................................................................................. 48
3.3.6 LSOH Insulated and Sheathed Cables – Surface Installation ..................................................................... 48
3.3.7 Mineral Insulated Cables ......................................................................................................................... 48
3.3.8 Terminations ........................................................................................................................................... 49
3.3.9 Boxes ....................................................................................................................................................... 50
3.3.10 Installation of Mineral Insulated Cable .................................................................................................... 50
3.3.11 Low Voltage Armoured Cables ................................................................................................................. 52
3.3.12 Straight Joints, Tees and Breeches ........................................................................................................... 52
3.3.13 Cables Terminations ................................................................................................................................ 52
3.3.14 Core Terminations and Jointing ............................................................................................................... 53
3.3.15 Installation of XLPE Armoured Cables ...................................................................................................... 53
3.3.16 Installation of XLPE Armoured Cables Underground. ............................................................................... 54
3.3.17 Straight Joints, Tees and Breeches ........................................................................................................... 55
3.3.18 Sealing Boxes ........................................................................................................................................... 55
3.3.19 Core Terminations and Jointing ............................................................................................................... 55
3.4 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................................ 56
3.4.2 Light Switches .......................................................................................................................................... 57
3.4.3 Socket Outlets ......................................................................................................................................... 57
3.4.4 Fused Connection Units ........................................................................................................................... 58

3.4.5 Lamp holders ........................................................................................................................................... 58
3.4.6 Ceiling Roses ............................................................................................................................................ 59
3.4.7 Lamps ...................................................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.8 Flexible Cables ......................................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.9 Control Switches ...................................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.10 Shaver Sockets ......................................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.11 Cooker Control Units................................................................................................................................ 59
3.5 CONDUIT AND CABLE TRUNKING ............................................................................................................. 60
3.5.2 Protection against Corrosion .................................................................................................................... 60
3.5.3 Metallic Conduit ...................................................................................................................................... 61
3.5.4 Metallic Conduit Fittings .......................................................................................................................... 61
3.5.5 Metallic Conduit and fittings installation ................................................................................................. 62
3.5.6 Conduit installation concealed ................................................................................................................. 64
3.5.7 Metallic conduit installation surface ........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.8 Metallic flexible conduit .......................................................................................................................... 65
3.5.9 Non Metallic Conduit ............................................................................................................................... 65
3.5.10 Non Metallic Conduit Fittings .................................................................................................................. 66
3.5.11 Non Metallic Conduit Installation ............................................................................................................ 66
3.5.12 Non Metallic Conduit Concealed Installation ........................................................................................... 68
3.5.13 Non Metallic Conduit Surface Installation ................................................................................................ 68
3.5.14 Non Metallic Flexible Conduit .................................................................................................................. 69
3.5.15 Metallic Cable Trunking ........................................................................................................................... 69
3.5.16 Non Metallic Cable Trunking .................................................................................................................... 71
3.6 CABLE TRAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................. 72
3.6.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 72

3.6.3 Installation of Cable Tray ......................................................................................................................... 73
3.6.4 Installation of Cables ............................................................................................................................... 73
3.7 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS ........................................................................................................................ 73
3.7.2 Luminaires ............................................................................................................................................... 76
3.8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMS................................................................................................................. 77
3.8.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.8.3 Control and Indication ............................................................................................................................. 77
3.8.4 Standby Power Supplies........................................................................................................................... 78
3.8.5 Sounders .................................................................................................................................................. 78
3.8.6 Manual Call Points ................................................................................................................................... 78
3.8.7 Fire Detectors .......................................................................................................................................... 78
3.8.8 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................... 78
3.8.9 Future Extensions .................................................................................................................................... 79
3.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING ............................................................................................................................ 79
3.9.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 79
3.9.3 Batteries .................................................................................................................................................. 79
3.9.4 Control Equipment ................................................................................................................................... 79
3.9.5 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................... 80
3.10 Lightning Protection................................................................................................................................. 80
3.11 ELECTRICITY GENERATING PLANT ............................................................................................................. 80
3.11.1. Reference Document ............................................................................................................................... 80
3.11.2. Performance Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 83
3.11.3. Electricity Generating Plant – General ..................................................................................................... 84
3.11.4. Engine – General ...................................................................................................................................... 85

3.11.5. Engine Speed Governing .......................................................................................................................... 86
3.11.6. Engine Cooling System ............................................................................................................................. 86
3.11.7. Engine Lubricating System ....................................................................................................................... 87
3.11.8. Engine Starting System ............................................................................................................................ 87
3.11.9. Engine Fuel System .................................................................................................................................. 87
3.11.10. Engine Exhaust System ...................................................................................................................... 87
3.11.11. Alternator .......................................................................................................................................... 88
3.11.12. Automatic Voltage Regulator ............................................................................................................ 88
3.11.13. Generator Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 89
3.11.14. Generator Set Monitoring ................................................................................................................. 90
3.11.15. Ventilation and Cooling ..................................................................................................................... 90
3.11.16. Noise Control ..................................................................................................................................... 90
3.11.17. Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 90
3.11.18. Commissioning and Testing ............................................................................................................... 91
3.11.19. Works to be test prior dispatch ......................................................................................................... 91
3.11.20. Commissioning Following Installation ............................................................................................... 91
3.11.21. Site Tests and Demonstration ............................................................................................................ 91
3.11.22. Operation and Maintenance Manuals ............................................................................................... 91
3.11.23. Schedule of Contractors Submittals ................................................................................................... 92
3.12 MOTORS, DRIVES AND CONTROLS ........................................................................................................... 93
3.12.1. Reference Documents .............................................................................................................................. 93
3.12.2. General .................................................................................................................................................... 93
3.12.3. Three Phase Motors ................................................................................................................................. 93
3.12.4. Single Phase Motors ................................................................................................................................ 94
3.12.5. Installed Motor and Drive Capacity .......................................................................................................... 95
3.12.6. Belt Drives ............................................................................................................................................... 95
3.12.7. Guards ..................................................................................................................................................... 95

3.12.8. Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 96
3.13 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS .......................................................................................................... 96
3.13.2 Motor Starters and Controllers – General ................................................................................................ 96
3.13.3 Motor Starters – General ......................................................................................................................... 97
3.13.4 Motor Starter Contactors and Overload Protection ................................................................................. 97
3.13.5 D.O.L. Motor Starters ............................................................................................................................... 98
3.13.6 Star/Delta Motor Starters ........................................................................................................................ 98
3.13.7 Closed Transition Star/Delta Motor Starters ............................................................................................ 98
3.13.8 Part Winding Motor Starters .................................................................................................................... 99
3.13.9 Electronic Soft Start ................................................................................................................................. 99
3.13.10 Eddy Current Coupling Drives ................................................................................................................. 100
3.13.11 Variable Frequency Invertor Drives ........................................................................................................ 101
3.13.12 Motor Control Panels – Construction ..................................................................................................... 102
3.13.13 Motor Control Panels – Electrical Requirements .................................................................................... 102
3.13.14 Motor Circuit Wiring .............................................................................................................................. 103
3.13.15 Control Circuits ...................................................................................................................................... 103
3.13.16 Control Relays ........................................................................................................................................ 103
3.13.17 Control Switches .................................................................................................................................... 103
3.13.18 Lamp Indication ..................................................................................................................................... 104
3.13.19 Panel Labels for Information and Warnings ........................................................................................... 104
3.13.20 Motor Isolation ...................................................................................................................................... 104
3.13.21 Stand Alone Motor Starters ................................................................................................................... 104
3.13.22 Electro Magnetic Interference ................................................................................................................ 104
3.13.23 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning.................................................................................................. 105
3.13.24 As Fitted Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals .................................................................... 105
3.13.25 Schedule of Contractors Submittals ....................................................................................................... 106

3.14 UNITERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES........................................................................................................ 106
3.14.1 Reference Documents ............................................................................................................................ 106
3.14.2 General .................................................................................................................................................. 106
3.14.3 UPS Module ........................................................................................................................................... 106
3.14.4 Batteries ................................................................................................................................................ 108
3.15 BUSBAR SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................................. 109
3.15.2 General .................................................................................................................................................. 109
3.16 CABLES DUCTS AND TRENCHES .............................................................................................................. 109
3.16.2 Routes ................................................................................................................................................... 110
3.16.3 Segregation ............................................................................................................................................ 110
3.16.4 Supports and Fixings .............................................................................................................................. 110
3.16.5 Trenching ............................................................................................................................................... 111
3.16.6 Warning Tapes and Covers ..................................................................................................................... 112
3.16.7 Ducts...................................................................................................................................................... 112
3.16.8 Laying of Ducts....................................................................................................................................... 113
3.16.9 Handling of Cables ................................................................................................................................. 114
3.16.10 Sealing Ducts and Openings ................................................................................................................... 115
3.16.11 Cable Guards.......................................................................................................................................... 115
3.16.12 Marking of Cables .................................................................................................................................. 115
3.16.13 Redundant Cables .................................................................................................................................. 116
3.17 INSPECTION AND TESTING ..................................................................................................................... 116
3.17.2 General .................................................................................................................................................. 116
3.17.3 Information ........................................................................................................................................... 116
3.17.4 Testing Methods .................................................................................................................................... 116

3.17.5 Power Cables ......................................................................................................................................... 117
3.17.6 Alarm, Control, Communication and Monitoring Cables. ....................................................................... 117
3.17.7 Conduit and Trunking ............................................................................................................................ 117
3.17.8 Earth Electrodes ..................................................................................................................................... 117
3.17.9 Lightning Protection............................................................................................................................... 118
3.17.10 Earth Fault Loop Impedances ................................................................................................................. 118
3.17.11 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems ......................................................................................................... 118
3.17.12 Emergency Lighting System ................................................................................................................... 118
3.17.13 Records and Certificates ........................................................................................................................ 118
3.18 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS BY CONTRACTOR ................................................................................... 118
3.18.2 General .................................................................................................................................................. 118
3.18.3 Installation Drawings and Documents ................................................................................................... 119
3.18.4 Builder's Work Drawings ........................................................................................................................ 119
3.18.5 As-Installed Drawings ............................................................................................................................ 119
3.18.6 Maintenance and Operating Instructions............................................................................................... 120
3.19 SPECIAL LOCATIONS ............................................................................................................................... 121
3.19.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 121
3.19.2 Locations Containing A Bath Tub Or Shower .......................................................................................... 121
3.19.3 Swimming Pools .................................................................................................................................... 122
3.19.4 Saunas ................................................................................................................................................... 123
3.19.5 Construction Sites .................................................................................................................................. 123
4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 127
4.1.1 Pipework ............................................................................................................................................... 127
4.1.2 Joints and Fittings .................................................................................................................................. 127
4.1.3 Pipe Supports......................................................................................................................................... 129
4.1.4 Sleeves and Wall Plates ......................................................................................................................... 131

4.1.5 Pipework Expansion and Contraction .................................................................................................... 131
4.1.6 Welding ................................................................................................................................................. 132
4.1.7 Draincocks ............................................................................................................................................. 133
4.1.8 Drainage of Water Reservoirs ................................................................................................................ 133
4.1.9 Air Eliminators ....................................................................................................................................... 135
4.2 STEAM AND CONDENSATE INSTALLATIONS (NOT APPLICABLE) .............................................................. 143
4.3 CLOSED SYSTEM HEATING AND CHILLED WATER SERVICES .................................................................... 143
4.3.1 Pipework and Fittings ............................................................................................................................ 143
4.3.2 Expansion Joints .................................................................................................................................... 144
4.3.3 Valves and Cocks ................................................................................................................................... 144
4.3.4 Isolation Valves...................................................................................................................................... 145
4.3.5 Drain Taps .............................................................................................................................................. 146
4.3.6 Automatic Air Vents............................................................................................................................... 146
4.3.7 Non-Return Check Valve ........................................................................................................................ 146
4.3.8 Flexible Pipe Connections, Vibration Absorbers Expansion Bellows and Fan Coil Connections .............. 147
4.3.9 Pressure Gauges .................................................................................................................................... 150
4.3.10 Strainers ................................................................................................................................................ 150
4.3.11 Radiators - Cast Iron .............................................................................................................................. 150
4.3.12 Thermostatic Radiator Valves & Matching Lockshield Valves ................................................................ 150
4.4 DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 151
4.4.1 Pipework and Fittings ............................................................................................................................ 151
4.4.2 Draw – Offs ............................................................................................................................................ 153
4.4.3 Valves and Stop Valves .......................................................................................................................... 153
4.4.4 Strainers ................................................................................................................................................ 155
4.4.5 Special Requirements for C.W. Services ................................................................................................. 155
4.4.6 System Cleaning..................................................................................................................................... 156
4.4.7 Systems Testing ..................................................................................................................................... 156

4.5 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPE SYSTEMS .................................................................................................. 156
4.5.1 Scope ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
4.5.2 Quality Assurance and Standards .......................................................................................................... 157
4.5.3 Workmanship ........................................................................................................................................ 157
4.5.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling .............................................................................................................. 157
4.5.5 Pipework Installation – General ............................................................................................................. 157
4.5.6 PVC-U Pipework and Fittings ................................................................................................................. 158
4.5.7 High Temperature PVC Waste System ................................................................................................... 159
4.5.8 Connections to Sanitary Fittings............................................................................................................. 161
4.5.9 PVC-U Pipework Installation .................................................................................................................. 161
4.5.10 System Access ........................................................................................................................................ 163
4.5.11 Floor Gullies and Gratings ...................................................................................................................... 163
4.5.12 Overflows .............................................................................................................................................. 164
4.5.13 Pipework Sleeves ................................................................................................................................... 164
4.5.14 Access Doors .......................................................................................................................................... 164
4.5.15 Sealing Pipework Open Ends .................................................................................................................. 164
4.5.16 Testing ................................................................................................................................................... 164
4.5.17 Completion ............................................................................................................................................ 165
4.6 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT) .................................................................. 165
4.7 VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS ........................................................................ 165
4.7.1 Ducting – General .................................................................................................................................. 165
4.7.2 Low Velocity Ducting ............................................................................................................................. 166
4.7.3 Ducting Supports ................................................................................................................................... 167
4.7.4 Manually Operated Leaf Dampers ......................................................................................................... 167
4.7.5 Fire Dampers ......................................................................................................................................... 168
4.7.6 Inspection and Cleaning Openings ......................................................................................................... 168
4.7.7 Test Holes .............................................................................................................................................. 169

4.7.8 Kitchen Canopies ................................................................................................................................... 169
4.7.9 Kitchen Extract Baffles ........................................................................................................................... 170
4.7.10 System Testing ....................................................................................................................................... 170
4.8 THERMAL INSULATION ........................................................................................................................... 170
4.8.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 170
4.8.2 Methods of Application – Pipework ....................................................................................................... 175
4.8.2.1 Extent of Insulation and Application ...................................................................................................... 175
4.8.2.2 Hot Water Heating ................................................................................................................................. 175
4.8.2.3 Domestic Hot Water Service .................................................................................................................. 176
4.8.2.4 Domestic Cold Water (including mains and tank water services) ........................................................... 176
4.8.2.5 Chilled Water ......................................................................................................................................... 177
4.8.2.6 Condenser Water ................................................................................................................................... 178
4.8.2.7 Air Bottles and Automatic Air Vents ...................................................................................................... 178
4.8.2.8 Relief Pipes ............................................................................................................................................ 178
4.8.3 Method of Application – Ductwork ........................................................................................................ 178
4.8.3.8 Insulation Specification - Sheet Metal/Plastic/Rigid Ductwork............................................................... 179
4.8.3.9 Flexible Ductwork .................................................................................................................................. 180
4.8.4 Vapour Barriers...................................................................................................................................... 180
4.8.5 Thermal Insulation of Equipment in the Plant Rooms and in Ventilation Plant Rooms .......................... 181
4.8.6 Thermal Insulation of Pipework in Plant Rooms and Ventilation Plant Rooms and that Exposed to view
Elsewhere. ............................................................................................................................................. 182
4.8.7 Thermal Insulation of Ductwork in Plant Rooms and Ventilation Plant Rooms and Exposed to View
Elsewhere .............................................................................................................................................. 183
4.8.8 Thermal Insulation of Pipework in Service ducts, Voids and Ceiling Spaces and Boxing Out (Not in Plant
Rooms) .................................................................................................................................................. 183
4.8.9 Thermal Insulation of Ductwork in Service Ducts, Voids and Ceiling spaces (Not in Plant Rooms) ......... 184
4.8.10 Thermal Insulation of Services External to Building Either Exposed or in Ducts, etc ............................... 184
4.8.11 Thermal Insulation of Water Storage and Feed and Expansion Tanks .................................................... 186

4.8.12 Thickness of Insulation .......................................................................................................................... 187
4.10 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE) ...................................................................................... 191
4.11 AIR HANDLING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 191
4.11.1 Fans - General ........................................................................................................................................ 191
4.11.2 Centrifugal Fans ..................................................................................................................................... 192
4.11.3 Axial Flow Fans ...................................................................................................................................... 193
4.11.4 Propeller Fans ........................................................................................................................................ 194
4.11.5 In-Line Centrifugal or Mixed Flow Fans .................................................................................................. 194
4.11.6 Mechanical Roof Extract Units ............................................................................................................... 194
4.11.7 Mechanical Wall Extract Units................................................................................................................ 194
4.11.8 Twin Fan Mechanical Extract Units ........................................................................................................ 195
4.11.9 Smoke Extract Fans ................................................................................................................................ 196
4.11.10 Air Filters General .................................................................................................................................. 197
4.11.11 Replaceable Medium Type Filters .......................................................................................................... 199
4.11.12 Disposable Type Panel Filters ................................................................................................................. 199
4.11.13 Open Cell Plastics Cleanable Type Filters................................................................................................ 200
4.11.14 Automatic Fabric Roll Filters .................................................................................................................. 200
4.11.15 Heating Coils .......................................................................................................................................... 200
4.11.16 Cooling Coils .......................................................................................................................................... 201
4.11.17 Refrigerant Direct Expansion Coils ......................................................................................................... 203
4.11.18 Air Washing and Humidifying Plant - General ........................................................................................ 203
4.11.19 Humidifiers ............................................................................................................................................ 203
4.11.20 Air Terminal Devices - General ............................................................................................................... 203
4.11.21 Toilet Extract Grilles ............................................................................................................................... 204
4.11.22 Diffusers ................................................................................................................................................ 204
4.11.23 Linear Diffusers ...................................................................................................................................... 204
4.11.24 Induction and Terminal Units ................................................................................................................. 205

4.11.25 Induction Units ...................................................................................................................................... 205
4.11.26 Single Duct Terminal Units ..................................................................................................................... 205
4.11.27 Variable Air Volume Units ...................................................................................................................... 206
4.11.28 Fan Coil Units ......................................................................................................................................... 207
4.11.29 Air Handling Units - General................................................................................................................... 207
4.11.30 Discharge Plenums ................................................................................................................................. 210
4.11.31 External Louvres .................................................................................................................................... 210
4.11.33 Variable Speed Drive Units for Control of Pumps/Fans .......................................................................... 212
4.11.34 Pumps and Fans ..................................................................................................................................... 214
4.12 WATER SERVICES PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 214
4.12.1 Circulation Pumps - General................................................................................................................... 214
4.12.2 Low and Medium Temperature Hot Water Heating Circulation Pump (up to 120°C and 3.5bar) ............. 215
4.12.3 Chilled Water Circulating Pumps ............................................................................................................ 215
4.12.4 Condensate Pumps and Receiver Sets .................................................................................................... 216
4.12.5 Hot Water Service Circulating Pump ...................................................................................................... 216
4.12.6 Oil Circulating Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT) ..................................................................... 216
4.12.7 Boiler Feed Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT) ......................................................................... 216
4.12.8 Semi-Rotary Hand Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT) .............................................................. 217
4.12.9 Sump Pumps .......................................................................................................................................... 217
4.12.10 Submersible Pumps ............................................................................................................................... 218
4.12.11 Calorifiers General (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT) ......................................................................... 219
4.12.12 Indirect Cylinders ................................................................................................................................... 220
4.12.13 Cold Water Tanks - General.................................................................................................................... 220
4.12.14 Bulk Reinforced Concrete Tank .............................................................................................................. 220
4.12.15 GRP Sectional Roof Tank ........................................................................................................................ 221
4.12.16 Sterilization............................................................................................................................................ 222
4.12.17 Mechanical Fittings for Concrete Water Storage Tanks .......................................................................... 222

4.12.18 Pressurization Units - LTHW and MTHW Systems - General ................................................................... 222
4.12.19 Cold Water Boosting Set ........................................................................................................................ 224
4.13 HEATING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT (NOT APPLICABLE) ........................................................................... 226
4.14 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS............................................................................................................ 226
4.14.1 Scope of Work........................................................................................................................................ 226
4.14.2 General .................................................................................................................................................. 228
4.14.3 Standard Control Panel Specification ..................................................................................................... 228
4.14.4 Peripheral Field Devices ......................................................................................................................... 242
4.14.5 General Control Standards - Supply and Extract Fans ............................................................................. 244
4.14.6 Design Drawings and Documentation - Control System Wiring Diagrams ............................................... 245
4.14.7 Operating and Maintenance Manuals .................................................................................................... 246
4.14.8 Commissioning/Handover/Client Instruction Training ........................................................................... 246
4.14.9 Mechanical Installation .......................................................................................................................... 247
4.14.10 Automatic Control System Connection Cable Specification .................................................................... 248
5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 252
5.1.1 Project Location ..................................................................................................................................... 253
5.1.2 Scope of Electrical Works ....................................................................................................................... 253
5.1.3 Responsibility ........................................................................................................................................ 254
5.1.4 Consultant Responsibilities .................................................................................................................... 255
5.1.5 Contractor Responsibility ....................................................................................................................... 255
5.1.6 Standards of Workmanship .................................................................................................................... 256
5.1.7 Electrical Services Technical Design Drawings ........................................................................................ 256
5.1.8 Standards and Regulations .................................................................................................................... 257
5.1.11 Tender Return Documentation .............................................................................................................. 259
5.2 HV Supply / Public Utility Supply ........................................................................................................... 259
5.3 LV Distribution Scope of Works .............................................................................................................. 260
5.4 General LV Power Scope of Works ......................................................................................................... 268

5.5 General Lighting Scope of Works............................................................................................................ 270
5.6 Emergency Lighting Scope of Works ....................................................................................................... 271
5.7 CCTV, Access Control & SMATV Systems Scope of Works....................................................................... 272
5.8 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems Scope of Works ................................................................................ 276
5.9 Data – Structured Cabling Installation .................................................................................................... 279
5.10 Earthing and Bonding Scope of Works ................................................................................................... 282
5.11 Testing and Commissioning .................................................................................................................... 283
5.11.2 Snagging and Defects ............................................................................................................................. 284
5.11.3 Attendance ............................................................................................................................................ 284
5.11.4 Test Certificates ..................................................................................................................................... 284
5.11.5 Witnessing of Testing and Commissioning ............................................................................................. 284
5.11.6 O&M Manuals and As Fitted Documentation ......................................................................................... 285
5.11.7 Training of Maintenance Staff ................................................................................................................ 285
6.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 288
6.1.1 Standards .............................................................................................................................................. 289
6.1.2 Drawings and Specification .................................................................................................................... 291
6.1.3 Provision of Design Information ............................................................................................................. 291
6.1.4 Design Development Responsibility ....................................................................................................... 292
6.1.5 General Design Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 292
6.1.6 Room design criteria .............................................................................................................................. 296
6.1.7 Occupancy Profiles ................................................................................................................................. 297
6.1.8 Green Building Guides Compliance ........................................................................................................ 298
6.1.9 EU Energy Performance Certificate ........................................................................................................ 298
6.1.10 LEED Assessment ................................................................................................................................... 298
6.1.11 Co-ordination of Services ....................................................................................................................... 298
6.1.12 Builders Work Details ............................................................................................................................ 298
6.1.13 Technical Queries................................................................................................................................... 299

6.1.14 Site Waste Management........................................................................................................................ 299
6.1.15 Asset Registers ....................................................................................................................................... 299
6.1.16 Plant Maintenance and Access............................................................................................................... 300
6.2 General Description of Project ............................................................................................................... 300
6.3 Outline Description of Works ................................................................................................................. 300
6.3.1 Existing Services Strip Out ...................................................................................................................... 302
6.4 Incoming Services .................................................................................................................................. 302
6.5 Ventilation Installation .......................................................................................................................... 303
6.5.2 Supply and Extract Ventilation ............................................................................................................... 303
6.5.3 Ductwork ............................................................................................................................................... 305
6.5.3 Finishes .................................................................................................................................................. 305
6.5.5 Thermal Insulation ................................................................................................................................. 305
6.5.6 Volume Control Dampers ....................................................................................................................... 306
6.5.7 Ductwork Access Doors .......................................................................................................................... 306
6.5.8 Test Holes .............................................................................................................................................. 306
6.5.9 Attenuators ........................................................................................................................................... 306
6.5.10 Grilles and Diffusers ............................................................................................................................... 307
6.5.11 Fire & Smoke Dampers .......................................................................................................................... 307
6.5.12 Electrical ................................................................................................................................................ 307
6.5.13 Design Margins ...................................................................................................................................... 307
6.6 Natural Gas Installation ......................................................................................................................... 308
6.7 Hot and Cold Water Services .................................................................................................................. 308
6.7.1 Design Philosophy ................................................................................................................................. 308
6.7.2 Incoming Metered Mains Cold Water .................................................................................................... 309
6.7.3 Bulk Cold Water Storage Ground Tank ................................................................................................... 310
6.7.4 Water Storage Tanks – Roof GRP tanks .................................................................................................. 310
6.7.5 Boosted Cold Water Service (BCWS) ...................................................................................................... 311

6.7.6 Electric Water Heaters ........................................................................................................................... 313
6.7.7 Pipework and fittings ............................................................................................................................. 313
6.7.8 Valves and Fittings ................................................................................................................................. 314
6.7.9 Thermal Insulation ................................................................................................................................. 316
6.7.10 Thermostatic Mixing valves ................................................................................................................... 316
6.7.11 Shower Thermostatic Mixing valves ....................................................................................................... 317
6.7.12 Bib Taps ................................................................................................................................................. 317
6.7.13 Chlorination and Disinfection................................................................................................................. 317
6.7.14 Cleaning and Disinfection of Potable Water System .............................................................................. 317
6.7.15 Automatic Air Vents ............................................................................................................................... 318
6.7.16 Drain Off Cocks ...................................................................................................................................... 318
6.7.17 Pressure Gauges .................................................................................................................................... 318
6.7.18 Puddle Flanges ....................................................................................................................................... 318
6.7.19 Water Meter .......................................................................................................................................... 319
6.7.20 Float Valve ............................................................................................................................................. 319
6.8 Above & Below Ground Drainage Installations ...................................................................................... 320
6.8.1 Design Philosophy.................................................................................................................................. 320
6.8.2 Sanitary Plumbing Pipework & Fittings .................................................................................................. 322
6.8.3 Overflows .............................................................................................................................................. 322
6.8.4 General Traps ........................................................................................................................................ 322
6.8.5 Sanitary Plumbing Installation Workmanship ........................................................................................ 322
6.8.6 PVC-U Pipework Installation .................................................................................................................. 323
6.8.7 Access to Pipes ...................................................................................................................................... 324
6.8.8 Fire Collars ............................................................................................................................................. 324
6.8.9 Automatic Air Admittance Valves .......................................................................................................... 324
6.8.10 Storm Water Drainage ........................................................................................................................... 324
6.8.11 Drainage Manholes ................................................................................................................................ 325

6.8.12 Floor Drains / Roof & Balcony Drains / Gullies / Cleanouts / Covers ...................................................... 326
6.9 Low Temperature Hot Water Heating .................................................................................................... 327
6.10 Chilled Water Cooling ............................................................................................................................ 327
6.10.2 Packaged Air Cooled Chiller ................................................................................................................... 328
6.10.3 Fan Coil Units ......................................................................................................................................... 328
6.10.4 Chilled Water Primary Pumps ................................................................................................................ 329
6.10.5 Chilled Water Secondary Pumps ............................................................................................................ 330
6.10.6 Chilled Water Buffer Vessel ................................................................................................................... 331
6.10.7 Chilled Water Pressurisation Unit .......................................................................................................... 331
6.10.8 Pipework ............................................................................................................................................... 332
6.10.9 Valves and Fittings ................................................................................................................................. 332
6.10.10 Electrical Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 333
6.10.11 Automatic Air Vents ............................................................................................................................... 333
6.10.12 Drain Off Cocks ...................................................................................................................................... 333
6.10.13 Pressure Gauges .................................................................................................................................... 333
6.10.14 Temperature Gauges ............................................................................................................................. 334
6.10.15 Water Treatment ................................................................................................................................... 334
6.10.16 Energy Meters........................................................................................................................................ 334
6.10.17 Condensate Drains ................................................................................................................................. 334
6.11 Fire Fighting Systems ............................................................................................................................. 335
6.11.2 Fire Protection Systems ......................................................................................................................... 335
6.11.2.1 Hose Reel System ................................................................................................................................... 335
6.11.2.2 Landing Valves ....................................................................................................................................... 335
6.11.2.3 Fire Hose ................................................................................................................................................ 336
6.11.2.4 Breeching Inlet ....................................................................................................................................... 336

6.11.2.5 Fire Extinguishers ................................................................................................................................... 337
6.11.2.6 Sprinkler System .................................................................................................................................... 337
6.11.2.7 Above Ground Pipework and Fittings ..................................................................................................... 338
6.11.2.8 Backflow Preventer ................................................................................................................................ 339
6.11.2.9 Flow Switch............................................................................................................................................ 339
6.11.2.10 Zone Control Valve ............................................................................................................................ 339
6.11.2.12 Test Drain Valves ................................................................................................................................... 340
6.11.2.13 Pressure Reducing Valve ........................................................................................................................ 340
6.11.2.14 Alarm Check Valve ................................................................................................................................. 340
6.11.2.15 Isolation Valve ....................................................................................................................................... 341
6.11.3 Fire Pumps ............................................................................................................................................. 341
6.11.3.1 Accessories ............................................................................................................................................ 342
6.11.3.2 Electric Motor Drive ............................................................................................................................... 343
6.11.3.3 Electric Fire Pump Controller ................................................................................................................. 343
6.11.4 Tank Controllers..................................................................................................................................... 344
6.11.5 Jockey Pumps......................................................................................................................................... 344
6.11.6 Installation............................................................................................................................................. 344
6.11.7 Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 345
6.11.8 Fire Water Storage Tanks ....................................................................................................................... 346
6.11.9 Fire Hydrants ......................................................................................................................................... 346
6.12 Specialist Gas Supplies. .......................................................................................................................... 346
6.13 Building Automatic Controls .................................................................................................................. 347
6.13.2 Related Documents & References .......................................................................................................... 347
6.13.3 Summary Scope of Works ...................................................................................................................... 347
6.13.4 Integration Functionality ....................................................................................................................... 349
6.13.5 System Architecture............................................................................................................................... 350
6.13.6 Cable Specification ................................................................................................................................. 350

6.13.7 Project Specific Configuration ................................................................................................................ 350
6.13.8 Vendor Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 351
6.13.9 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................................. 351
6.13.10 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................. 351
6.13.11 Building Automation System (BAS) ........................................................................................................ 352
6.13.12 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ............................................................................................................. 353
6.13.13 Warranty & Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 353
6.13.14 Manufacturers ....................................................................................................................................... 353
6.13.15 Hardware ............................................................................................................................................... 354
6.13.16 System Software .................................................................................................................................... 355
6.13.17 Application Server Software .................................................................................................................. 355
6.13.18 Operator Interface ................................................................................................................................. 355
6.13.19 Standard System Displays ...................................................................................................................... 358
6.13.20 Custom Displays ..................................................................................................................................... 358
6.13.21 Online Help and Documentation ............................................................................................................ 359
6.13.22 Monitoring and Control ......................................................................................................................... 359
6.13.23 System Database ................................................................................................................................... 360
6.13.24 Event Management................................................................................................................................ 361
6.13.25 Alarm Management ............................................................................................................................... 362
6.13.26 Maintenance Management .................................................................................................................... 364
6.13.27 Building Management ............................................................................................................................ 364
6.13.28 Reporting ............................................................................................................................................... 364
6.13.29 Historical Data Archiving ........................................................................................................................ 365
6.13.30 Time Schedules ...................................................................................................................................... 365
6.13.31 Open Integration ................................................................................................................................... 365
6.13.32 Diagnostic Capabilities ........................................................................................................................... 366
6.13.33 Building Controller ................................................................................................................................. 367

6.13.34 Schedules............................................................................................................................................... 368
6.13.35 Central Plant and Application Controllers .............................................................................................. 369
6.13.36 Terminal Unit Application controllers (fan-coils) .................................................................................... 370
6.13.37 Auxiliary Control Devices ....................................................................................................................... 371
6.13.38 Electronic Actuators and Valves ............................................................................................................. 372
6.13.39 Points Schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 377
6.13.40 Examination ........................................................................................................................................... 377
6.13.41 General Workmanship ........................................................................................................................... 377
6.13.42 Wiring .................................................................................................................................................... 377
6.13.43 Fibre Optic Cable System ....................................................................................................................... 378
6.13.44 Installation of Sensors............................................................................................................................ 378
6.13.45 Flow Switch Installation ......................................................................................................................... 379
6.13.46 Actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 379
6.13.47 Warning Labels ...................................................................................................................................... 379
6.13.48 Identification of Hardware and Wiring ................................................................................................... 379
6.13.49 Controllers ............................................................................................................................................. 380
6.13.50 Programming ......................................................................................................................................... 380
6.13.51 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 381
6.13.52 Protection .............................................................................................................................................. 381
6.13.53 Training ................................................................................................................................................. 381
6.13.54 Field Quality Control .............................................................................................................................. 382
6.13.55 Acceptance ............................................................................................................................................ 382
6.13.56 Control Panels........................................................................................................................................ 382
6.15 Pre-Commissioning, Commissioning and Proving of Mechanical Services .............................................. 382
6.15.2 Pre-commissioning Blow Through Ductwork.......................................................................................... 383
6.15.3 Pre-Commissioning, Flushing and Cleaning of Pipework ........................................................................ 383
6.15.4 General Requirements ........................................................................................................................... 383

6.15.5 Chemical Used ....................................................................................................................................... 384
6.15.6 Method Statement for Flushing ............................................................................................................. 384
6.15.7 Witnessing ............................................................................................................................................. 384
6.15.8 Approvals .............................................................................................................................................. 384
6.15.9 Pre-Flushing Checks ............................................................................................................................... 384
6.15.10 Flushing ................................................................................................................................................. 385
6.15.11 Pre-Commissioning Checks and Checklists ............................................................................................. 386
6.15.12 Commissioning Documents .................................................................................................................... 386
6.15.13 Commissioning Results Documentation ................................................................................................. 387
6.15.14 Commissioning of the System ................................................................................................................ 387
6.15.15 Commissioning of Controls .................................................................................................................... 389
6.15.16 Commissioning Company ....................................................................................................................... 389
6.15.17 Commissioning Manager ....................................................................................................................... 389
6.15.18 Final system Proving and Validation Procedure ..................................................................................... 390
Section 6- Appendices ........................................................................................................................................ 391

3.0 GENERAL
The Services Contractor shall be responsible for the full detailed design, supply, and installation and
commissioning of all electrical services works associated with the project.
This Section of the Specification details the design standards that the Services Contractor will be required to
adhere to in the development of the design, installation and commissioning of the electrical services for the
project.
It should not be taken as being exhaustive but it is indicative of the quality and standards required for the project.
The Services Contractor shall note that the drawings issued with the tender are for information only and should
only be used to convey the Clients requirements and the design intent. The Services Contractor shall carry out
the full detailed design of the scheme to incorporate the requirements of the drawings but shall not be limited
by them.
In the event of there being any discrepancy between the details of the Specification and the drawings, or if there
are any matters which are not fully understood, then these must be notified to the Engineer for clarification
before submission of the Tender. No extra cost will be allowed on this point after the order has been placed.
In the Particular Specification, reference may be made to quotations for systems, plant, equipment, etc. These
quotations were issued to the Engineers during the course of design. It is the responsibility of the contractor to
obtain up-to-date quotations based on the tender drawings and specification from the appropriate
manufacturer/supplier etc. and ensure that they comply with the Conditions of Contract applicable to the tender.
3.0.1 General Electrical Standards
1) The design and installation shall be in full compliance with the Latest Edition of the Institution of
Electrical Engineers Regulations BS 7671 including all current revisions, any amendments, and
guidance notes.
2) The installation shall also be carried out in accordance with standards of workmanship laid down by
the National Inspection Council for the Electrical Contracting Industry. In addition, all good trade
customs and practices shall be adhered to.
3.0.2 General Standards
The following design, installation and general guidance standards are to be incorporated within the
electrical services of the project.
These standards should be read in conjunction with the Contract Documentation.
1) Current Building Regulations

2) IEE Wiring Regulations BS 7671
3) The Factory's Clean Air Act and Insurance Companies Requirements
4) Health and Safety at Work Act and associated Regulations including the Electricity at Work Regulations
and COSH Regulations.
5) The current CIBSE Guides, Codes and Technical Memoranda to Good Design Practice including the
Lighting Design Guides for Interior Lighting, Outdoor Environments and the Schools and College
Environment.
6) Light and Lighting – Lighting of Work Places – BS EN 12464-1: 2002.
7) Light and Lighting – Lighting of Work Places – BS EN 12464-2 2007.
8) The CIBSE Commissioning Codes
9) BSRIA Commissioning Codes

10) Building Bulletins

11) All relevant British Standards
12) All relevant British Codes of Practice
13) Design to fully meet the requirements of the local Environmental Health Officer, Fire Officer and
Building Control Officer, these requirements being incorporated over and above any minimum
standards given in this document.
14) National Joint Utilities Group Publications.
15) The Industry Committee for Emergency Lighting (ICEL) Guides.
16) Disability Discrimination Acts.
17) DFES Constructional Standards and Guides.
18) The British Council of office BCO Guide 2005.
The above standards are continually being updated, with new standards also becoming applicable. The
Services Contractor shall ensure that the specialists / personnel completing the manufacturing /
installation works are familiar with the latest standards applicable at Tender and completes all works in
accordance with these standards.
Where discrepancy is found between this specification and the relevant standards the Services Contractor
shall obtain written clarification from the Engineer prior to submission of tender.
Where a discrepancy has not been clarified prior to tender submission the Services Contractor shall include
the most onerous requirements
3.0.3 Definitions
The Technical Definitions are as given in BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations", and other
terms used are as defined in the Various Parts of BS 4727.
In the specification when the word Installer is used, this shall mean the Electrical Contractor appointed
under the contract to carry out the Electrical Service Works.
In the specification, where the word Engineer is used, this shall mean the author of the standard, particular
electrical specification and associated drawings.
3.0.4 Electricity Supply
Ensure the electricity supply provided is at 400/230 volts 50 Hz 3-phase, 4-wire unless detailed otherwise
in the Particular Specification. The fault level at the origin, the earth-loop impedance external to the
installation, the size and rating of the overcurrent device at the origin, and the method of earthing to be
used in the installation, is as given in the Particular Specification items and/or as indicated on the drawings
for reference only.
For electrical works to an existing electrical installation, refer to the requirement of 3.1.9.
3.0.5 Facilities for other trades
Afford facilities for others, eg. conduit work and trunking for telephone systems, the provision of cables
for other systems, make available power supplies at completion times, etc. Liaise with the other Installers,
to ensure that the work is suitably co-ordinated and in conformity with the building programme.
3.0.6 Position of all Points, switches, etc
Although every endeavour has been made to show details of design, check all measurements and work to
the larger scale detail plans in the possession of the Clerk of works or Building Contractor to verify

dimensions, positions, etc. Do this before work is commenced. In the absence of large scale drawings being
available, agree all positions with the Architect.
The symbols representing electrical points, accessories, etc., are not drawn to scale, so do not scale down
dimensions from the drawings. Make allowance for varying the position of all electrical points, accessories,
etc., within a 600mm radius.
3.0.7 Mounting Heights
The following heights, are measured from finished floor level (f.f.l.) and are for general purposes, but shall
apply unless otherwise detailed in Particular Specification items or on the drawing.
The heights given apply to the centre of the box, unless otherwise stated, but make due allowance for any
building feature, e.g. wall tiling.
All mounting heights shall be checked for compliance with Building Regulations Part M and agreed in
writing with the engineer prior to installation.
Lighting switches 1050mm

Appliance Control switches 1050mm
Push Buttons and Starters 1050mm
Fire Alarm Break Glass Units 1350mm
Socket Outlets (check drawings)
Socket Outlets in Kitchen 1300mm (200mm above worktop)
Laboratories etc (check drawings)
Fuse Connection Units 1050mm
Clocks (check drawings)
Indicator Lamps and Alarm Bells (check drawings)
Distribution Boards 1500mm (to underside)
Check all heights with the Engineer before actual installation commences. Heights given on drawings take
precedence.
3.0.8 Segregation of wiring systems
Ensure wiring systems are independent and segregated in accordance with those bands set out in BS7671
- "Requirements for Electrical Installations".
3.0.9 Fire and smoke barriers
Include provision for the integrity of the fire barriers through which cables, conduits, trunking, busbar
systems etc, are being installed by making good around the installations with appropriate fire stopping
materials. Carry out this work to the requirements of Building Regulations and those of BS7671 -
"Requirements for Electrical Installations".
3.0.10 Design Criteria
The main distribution schematic diagram indicates the design criteria applicable at the time of tender.

Do not make change to the installation which invalidates the design values without written agreement
from the Engineer.
Cable lengths indicated on the drawings are for design purposes only; do not use for preparation of the
tender price or ordering purposes. Measure all cables, trunking and trays, routes etc. on site prior to
ordering.
The design documentation will form the basis for comparison with measured results obtained during the
testing and commissioning phase of the installation. Bear in mind at the outset of the Contract that all
values indicated on the tender drawings shall have actual measured results inserted in the spaces adjacent.
This is stressed so that measurements are taken before installation proceeds to a point beyond which
insufficient access and, in the case of partially handed over areas, safe working practice and disruption to
the Employer preclude such actions.
Any cost incurred in overcoming the aforementioned obstructions in order to obtain measured values,
shall be borne by the Installer if the above clauses are not heeded.
3.0.11 Supports and fixings
Supply and install complete all necessary support steelwork, brackets and suspension threaded rod etc. to
support the electrical installation defined in this Specification and shown on the drawings.
Paint all support steelwork erected to suit the class of installation i.e. standard paint finish (Class 2) for
non- surface/interior areas and galvanized finish (Class 4) for surface and exterior areas unless otherwise
defined in Particular Specification items.
Do not fix electrical Services to the Mechanical Services support steelwork where it is subjected to
vibration or heat transfer.
Implement co-ordination of the services from the outset of the Contract with all other Installers and if
necessary, identify as an item on the contract programme of work.
Do not support Electrical Services from any suspended ceiling system, but provide with independent
support fixings, unless otherwise stated on drawing.
3.0.12 Expansion Joints
Supply and install complete, all necessary expansion joint units for services such as conduit, tray, trunking
etc. where these cross vertical and horizontal building expansion joints.
Ensure each unit is of a recognized pattern supplied by the appropriate service manufacturer.
Where cables cross expansion joints clamp loosely within the respective fixing saddles/cleat to allow
movement and in extreme cases install formed loops. Refer to Particular Specification items or the
drawings for further details.
3.0.13 Quality of Materials
The works are to be executed with the materials indicated in the specification. The tender must include
for all makes of materials and components specified but alternative makes of equal quality may
subsequently be offered for consideration by the Engineer. Only use alternatives upon receipt of written
instructions from the Engineer. Where materials and components are not specifically described, submit
samples or drawings of such materials or components to the Engineer for comment.
Notify the Engineer of any revisions or additions to the foregoing as they are published during the
installation of the works. The Engineer will give appropriate instruction in each case.

3.0.14 Faulty materials and Workmanship
The Engineer has the right of inspection of all works on site, and will reject any materials which are
unsatisfactory due to poor workmanship, damage, or failure to meet the specified requirement.
Replace any material or service so rejected at no cost to the contract including any costs arising from any
associated building works or the works of other trades, together with any costs arising from the delay in
the replacement of rejected terms.
3.0.15 Specialized Tools
Ensure that any tools which are required of a special nature for any equipment, etc., installed, are handed
to the Client at the Handover Meeting in a purpose designed box or receptacle.
3.1 EARTHING
3.1.1 Reference Documents
Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS) a British Standard Institution recognized equivalent
European Standard would also comply. Each type of equipment/material selected shall comply fully with
either the BS or the European Standard.
BS 951 Specification for clamps for earthing and bonding purposes.
BS 13601 Copper and copper alloys. Copper rod, bar and wire for general electrical purposes BS 4444
Guide to electrical earth monitoring and protective conductor proving.
BS 13599 Copper and copper alloys. Copper plate, sheet and strip for electrical purposes
BS7430 Code of Practice for Earthing
BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition + A1
Reference shall also be made to the Particular Specification and/or drawings for which this Standard
Specification refers to. In all cases where discrepancies existing between the documents. The Particular
Specification and Drawings shall take precedence.
3.1.2 General
Earth is normally the earth terminals or earthed cable sheath of the Electricity Supply installation, provided
the Regional Electricity Company (REC) has given written approval for the use of their earthing system for
this purpose. Forward duplicate copies of the written approval to the Engineer prior to making the earth
connection.
Install the whole of the earthing and bonding installations in accordance with the requirements of BS7671
- "Requirements for Electrical Installations", BS 7430, and other relevant British Standards and Codes of
Practice.
Ensure all enclosures, equipment, exposed conductive parts, extraneous conductive parts, metallic
trunking, metallic conduits, metallic cable trays and any other metalwork, other than any live part, forming
protection or part of the electrical installation, including apparatus and appliances, are effectively bonded
to earth.

Provide green/yellow PVC insulated 2.5mm2 stranded copper supplementary bonding conductor for
electrical enclosure, to include socket outlet, lighting grid switches and for all hinged panels of switches,
switchgear, control cubicles, distribution boards, etc. Protected to obviate damage to the cables when
enclosures are opened and closed.
Provide protective conductors in the form of tinned copper tape for the full length of all busbar trunking
systems where no designated integral manufacturer protective conductor is provided. Ensure the size of
this tape shall be in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations" and fix externally
to the side of the trunking using brass bolts and double locking nuts. Ensure maximum fixing centres are
900mm and each section of rising busbar trunking is effectively bonded to the tape.
Ensure all main water pipes, main gas pipes other service pipes and ventilation ducting, ductwork flexible
connections, riser of central heating, air conditioning systems, oil pipe services, storage tank, piped gas
systems, etc, and the exposed metallic parts of the building structure are effectively connected to the main
earthing terminal points using, where applicable, earthing clamps which conform to relevant British
Standards.
Ensure the installation has all incoming services bonded to earth at the point of entry. For the purposes of
this clause structures linked by a corridor, subway or bridge are considered to be separate structures.
Bond together services entering/leaving plant rooms, boiler houses, calorifier rooms, bathrooms, kitchens
and other wet-process areas, and bond to the electrical installation protective conductor system.
Extraneous metalwork to be bonded includes:-
In addition ensure that all exposed or extraneous conductive parts, having a resistance to earth of less
than one megohm are bonded to the electrical services earth.
Prove each circuit protective conductor prior to making any supplementary bonding connection.
3.1.3 Earth Electrodes
Earth electrode connections shall originate at the earthed star point of the low voltage supply transformer
when practical, or alternatively at the main incoming earth point of the premises. The connection shall be
direct using copper stranded cables for interconnections. No additional earthed connections shall be made
along the length of any such connections.
Earth rods shall be 15mm nominal diameter extensible copper-clad high-tensile steel rods connected
together. Driving heads shall be of high-tensile steel. Rods shall be connected by screwed joints by one of
the following methods:
Threads shall be roll-formed with a minimum thickness of 0.05mm copper in the roots of the threads;
couplers shall be of high strength silicon-aluminum bronze alloy and the threads shall be counter bored at
the ends so that the couplers completely enclosed the threads on the rods;
The ends of the rods shall be internally threaded; couplers shall comprise a copper ferrule with the
phosphor- bronze coupler screw; a corrosion inhibiting paste shall be applied to the threads on rods and
couplers.
Fit sections with hardened steel tips and driving caps. Ensure depth of the driven rods are a minimum of
2400mm and the spacing is at least equal to their length. Ensure no electrode is within 3000mm of the
building foundations.
Earth plates shall be 600mm x 600mm minimum, of solid or lattice copper not less than 3mm thick.

Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape, the tape shall be the relevant British Standard, of the
size, length, depth below ground level and layout as specified.
Make connections by using proprietary clamps and provide with a concrete inspection pit with removable
covers inscribed "EARTH".
Interconnect earth rods using minimum 25mm x 3mm copper tape.
Connect each part of the system to proprietary testing links using insulated conductors, terminating at the
main earth bar.
3.1.4 Conductors
Earthing conductors, main earthing bars and main equipotential bonding conductors shall be of the type,
size and conductor material as specified.
Where tapes are used to interconnect copper electrodes the tape may be bare, but for interconnecting
pipe electrodes and for all other purposes the tape shall have an extruded LZOH sheath and comply with
the relevant British Standard.
Main earthing bars shall be constructed of low resistivity copper of adequate sectional area to conduct the
maximum earth fault current available from the supply system and comply with the relevant British
Standard.
The main earth bar shall be constructed to incorporate a removable test link of identical cross section area
to the earth bar and which shall isolation of the earthing conductor from the main equipotential bonding
conductors. The test link shall be secured by suitable rust proof non-ferrous bolts, shake proof washers and
nuts.
The earth bar shall be of sufficient length to accommodate all connections with a spacing of 20mm
between each cable lug and in addition spare capacity equivalent to 20% of the used bar length subject
to a minimum spare length of 100mm long.
All other earth bars shall be identical to the main earth bar with the exception that a test link is not
generally required unless specified to the contrary on the drawings.
Cables shall be sheathed and comply with the relevant British Standard. Provide circuit protective
conductor by:-
 Copper Circuit Protective Conductors with yellow/green insulation.
 Armouring and/or metal sheaths of armoured cable.
 An integral protective conductor of any multi-core cable.
Size of protective conductors to be in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations"
but not less than 1.5 mm2 copper conductor.
Terminate all protective conductors, when fixed to bolted connections, using compression type lugs made
with an automatic purpose made compression tool. All compressions of connections shall be as
recommended by the compression tool manufacturer.
Bond the metal sheaths and/or armouring of XLPE insulated cables to the metal parts of the equipment to
which they are connected, utilizing a proprietary brass earthing tag and brass nut and bolt where metallic
threaded entry is not provided.

When flexible conduit is used, ensure the protective conductor at the equipment end is connected to the
equipment earth terminal. Install the protective conductor within the conduit and suitably sized for the
circuit(s) passing through.
Bond sheath and/or armour at one end only where single core, lead covered or aluminium live armoured
cables are installed. Mount glands on insulated gland plate at the un-bonded end. Bond the secondary
connection of transformers/generators at the switchboard end.
3.1.5 Joints and Connections
Ensure the minimum earthing requirements for substation earthing and associated connections to
switchgear conform to BS 7430.
Ensure the position and connection of the LV neutral earth link affords correct operation of the specified
earth fault protection
Provide earthing terminals at all main incoming supply positions and connect to Earth. Ensure main and/or
sub- main panels have an earthing terminal and are effectively connected to Earth.
Ensure that where holes are drilled in the copper tape for connection to items of plant the effective cross-
sectional area of the connection is not less than that required to comply with BS7671 - "Requirements for
Electrical Installations". Tin the connected surface area.
Ensure bolts, nuts and washers for any fixing of the earth tape are bronze. Joints in conductors shall be
kept to a minimum.
All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with an anti-corrosive electrical jointing
compound suitable for the conductor materials. For bi-metallic joints a separate abrasive shall be used to
clean each metal.
Connections shall be made as follows:
 To main earth bars by phosphor-bronze set-screws and nuts;
 To earth rods by bronze, gun mental or copper clamps with phosphor-bronze bolts; edges of clamps
shall be rounded;
 To earth pipes by phosphor-bronze bolts and nuts, direct to the flange of the pipe;
 To earth plates by bolting, riveting or welding.
Termination of cables shall be by connectors jointed to the cable conductor by the thermal welding process
or by compression joints complying with the relevant British Standard.
Joints which are indicated as test points shall be bolted or clamped. Joints in tape, other than at test points,
shall be made by the thermal welding process or by riveting and sweating. Conductors shall be overlapped
to ensure that there effective cross sectional area is not reduced.
Joints and connections shall be protected by a coating which will form a seal and exclude moisture in all
weather conditions. At connections to earth exposed conductors and. Protective coatings shall be of a
waterproof, inert, tenacious material and of one of the following forms:
 solvent cutback thixotropic corrosion preventative forming a film of resilient matt petroleum wax;
 a fast drying durable rubberized sprayed coating;

 a heat-shrink clear sheathing.
At connections to earth rods the coatings shall cover all exposed conductors. Bolts, screws, nuts, washers
and rivets for copper conductors shall be of phosphor-bronze, naval brass or copper silicon; for aluminium
conductors they shall be of stainless steel.
Joints in earthing conductors shall be made by only the following methods.
 Tin jointed area of conductor, install minimum of four rivets, then sweat joint solid. Wrap joint in
Denso tape below ground.
 Proprietary crimps, by purpose made automatic compression tool. All compressions of connections
shall be as recommended by the compression tool manufacturer. Wrap joint in Denso tape
belowground.
 Proprietary fusion welding system. Installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Wrap joints in Denso tape below ground.
3.1.6 Inspection Pits
Connection between an earth conductor and its associated earth electrode system shall be via a
proprietary concrete inspection pit.
The inspection pit shall have a removable top cover inscribed “EARTH” which shall be flush with finished
ground level. The earth electrode connection shall be just below the lid of the inspection pit with adequate
access for testing purposes.
Ensure connections to the earth electrodes are readily accessible for periodic inspection, and protected
against mechanical damage and corrosion. Make the connection to the rod by means of a purpose made
clamp and lay below ground level in a concrete inspection pit.
3.1.7 Supports and Fixings
Tapes and bars shall be fixed by spacer bar saddles which shall be of non-metallic material or corrosion
resistant alloy compatible with the conductors. The maximum spacing of fixings shall not exceed 600mm
unless otherwise indicated.
Main earthing bars shall be supported on insulators; they shall be not less than 25mm clear of the building
fabric.
For general areas inside buildings, screws and nuts shall be of cadmium electroplated steel or stainless
steel; outside buildings, in plant rooms or other locations as indicated they shall be of stainless steel.
No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shall be done without the
approval of the Engineer.
3.1.8 Installation
Rods shall be installed in undisturbed ground. Ensure depth of the driver rods are a minimum of 2400mm
and the spacing is at least equal to their length. Ensure no electrode is within 3000mm of the building
foundations.

Carry out soil resistivity and other tests, as detailed in the relevant British Standard. To confirm suitability
of number and type of earth electrode proposed
Backfill immediately, surrounding electrodes with low specific resistivity and good water retention
properties; it shall be well compacted and watered.
Where earth rods are to be installed through the base slab of a building, electrode seals shall be provided.
As indicated, either the rods shall be driven and the seals fitted before the concrete is poured or the seals
handed to the building contractor for him to incorporate them in the slab and the rods driven at a later
date. Harmful ingress of water shall be avoided when driving the rods.
Earth plates shall be installed vertically in an excavated hole, with the top of the plate at a minimum depth
of 1000mm below finished ground level; where difficulty in achieving this depth is met the Engineer shall
be informed.
3.1.9 Extension and alteration to existing installation
Check existing installations which are being extended to ensure that the existing earth continuity
conductors and earthing leads comply with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations".
Where alteration to existing and/or extensions to existing are being undertaken. Prior to commencement
to any works to the existing earthing system. Undertake electrical test to ascertain the following:
 Continuity of protective conductor
 Earth Electrode Resistance
 Earth Fault Loop Impedance
 External Impedance at the point of Supply (Ze)
These results shall be forwarded to the Engineer for verification.
Where a connection is made to another earth continuity conductor or earthing lead, supply and fix a
permanent label indelibly marked with the words "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH - DO NOT REMOVE".
3.1.10 Generator
Install an independent earth electrode system conforming to BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations".
Connect an earth lead between the earth electrode/electrodes and the star point on the generator.
Bond the star point and metal framework of the generator to the local Regional Electricity Company's earth
point (after obtaining their permission in writing) and/or the 'main' incoming Earth point.
Ensure the size of the earthing lead and earth bonding leads are at least the same as the earthing lead of
the installation, ie. do not size according to the rating of the generator.
3.1.11 TN-C-S Systems
Ensure that earthing, bonding and neutral switching isolation comply with requirements of BS7671 -
"Requirements for Electrical Installations" and the requirements of the Regional Electricity Company.

3.1.12 External Socket Outlets and Equipment
Note that the term "External Socket Outlet and Equipment" applies to any socket outlet or equipment
which itself is located outside the equipotential bonding zone of the main electrical installation or provided
for the specific purpose of enabling mobile or portable equipment to be used outside this zone.
Protect all external socket outlets by a residual current device (RCD) having an operating current not
greater than 30 mA.
Section 3.2 LV POWER DISTRIBUTION
BS EN 88 (all parts) Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000v and 1500v dc.
BS 89 Specification for direct acting indicating electrical measuring instruments and their
accessories.
BS 159 Specification for high voltage busbars and busbar connections.
BS EN 60076 Power transformers, Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances in air .
BS 842 Specification for ac voltage operated earth leakage circuit breakers.
BS EN 13601 Copper and copper alloys. Copper rod, bar and wire for general electrical purposes
BS EN 13602 Copper and copper alloys. Drawn, round copper wire for the manufacture of electrical
conductors
BS EN 2569 Control cable fittings and turn barrels. Technical specification
BS 3036 Semi-enclosed electric fuses. (Ratings up to 100A and 240v to earth).
BS EN 60898 Electrical accessories ± Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for household and
similar installations Circuit-breakers for a.c. operation
BS EN 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear, Contactors and motor-starters.
BS EN 61869 Instrument transformers; Additional requirements for current transformers / voltage
transformers
BS EN 61008 Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent protection for
household and similar uses (RCCBs) General rules
BS EN 60079 Explosive atmospheres; Equipment. General requirements
BS 5472 Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear for industrial use. Terminal
marking and distinctive number general rules.
BS EN 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Power switchgear and control gear
assemblies
BS EN 62053 Electricity metering equipment (All parts)
BS 6423 Code of Practice for maintenance of electrical switchgear and control gear for voltages up
to and including 1kV.
BS 7194 Specification for direct current and low frequency electronic measuring instruments with
digital display.
BS EN 60871 Shut capacitors for ac power systems having a rated voltage above 1000v.
BS 7288 Specification for socket outlets incorporating residual current devices (srcd's).
BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition inc A1+A2
BS EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
Reference shall also be made to the Particular Specification and/or Drawings for which this Standard
Specification refers to. In all cases where discrepancies exist between the documents. The Particular

3.2.2 General
Supply, deliver, offload, erect, connect, test and commission complete all loose switchgear, manufactured
panels and 'on-site' constructed panels in the locations defined.
Ensure switchgear and associated materials comply with all relevant British Standards.
Ensure short circuit ratings, current ratings, number of poles and fusing arrangements are as specified.
The neutral connection/link of each fuse switch, switch fuse and isolator shall be contained within its
respective enclosure/moulding.
Fuse links complying with BS 88, are of high breaking capacity and afford Class G protection, and are of the
suitable make and ratings. Provide spare fuses of the number and sizes specified.
Ensure that all isolators and fused switches, are suitable for padlocking in the 'OFF' position. Ensure that
all protective devices are of the same manufacture for that particular type.
Provide the selected manufacturers of panels etc., with details of all cable sizes, types and switchgear and
panel locations, both during tender enquiry and post tender periods, so that if necessary, panels, switch
unit sizes and termination etc. can be adjusted to suit the particular project requirements. Include all costs
associated with the above in the tender.
3.2.3 Factory Built Assemblies
The electrical characteristics of component parts of factory built assemblies shall apply when the
components are mounted in their enclosures, appropriate derating factors having been allowed for.
Enclosures shall provide a minimum degree of protection of IP51 when located within buildings and IP54
when located outside buildings. The enclosure shall be Form 4 type 2 unless specified otherwise within
the particular specification.
Doors shall have adequate fastenings with provision for locking in the closed position.
Fixing holes for equipment inside buildings may be mounted either internally or externally to the
enclosure. Equipment to be located outside buildings shall have fixing lugs mounted external to the
enclosure.
Earth terminals shall be fitted to each enclosure, suitable for internal and external connection, to enable
the exposed conductive parts to be connected to a protective conductor. Where the enclosure has a
painted finish provision shall be made for the earth terminal to be electrically connected to the enclosure
without the need to remove any paint.
Provide an earth terminal consisting of a brass threaded stud or copper/brass bar, fixed adjacent to the
incoming cable.
Have all incoming and outgoing cables connected to the earth terminal by copper circuit protective
conductors. Have protective conductors of flat soft copper strip or Green /Yellow LSF sheathed cables.
Have all connecting faces and/or lugs tinned and secured by brass bolts, nuts, washers and locking
arrangements.
Have any moveable panels carrying items of equipment e.g. push buttons, meters etc. connected by a
flexible protective conductor.

Cable terminals shall be suitable for the number, size and type of cables. Adequate spacing shall be allowed
for spreading of cable tails to avoid stress on the insulation or terminals; if necessary, extension boxes shall
be fitted to standard enclosures. Terminals for neutral conductors for three phase and neutral circuits shall
be the same size as for the phase conductor.
Removable gland plates shall be provided for all multi-core cables of 35mm2 cross section and larger. For
all sizes of single-core cables non-ferrous gland plates shall be provided, and there shall be a clearance of
not less than 25mm between cable glands and ferrous metal.
Metallic enclosures for location within buildings shall have a stove dried painted finish, of the
manufacturer's standard colour. Ferrous parts shall be degreased and adequately rust protected
immediately prior to painting.
Ferrous parts of enclosures located outside buildings or at other locations shall be protected against
corrosion by a hot-dip galvanized coating or by zinc sprayed coating to the relevant British Standards, with
the manufacturer's standard finish.
Enclosures shall be adequately ventilated or cooled.
Enclosures shall be of modular construction to facilitate interchangeable units. Enclosures shall not exceed
2250mm in height.
Enclosures shall be arranged to facilitate storage of spare fuses, notices etc within the cubical. Enclosures
shall be constructed to facilitate delivery and installation.
Floor mounted front access enclosures shall be used unless specified otherwise within the particular
specification.
The enclosure shall allow expansion of up to 20% over and above the identified requirements.
3.2.4 Switchboards
Ensure cubicle type switchboards are manufactured in accordance with the relevant British Standards to
accommodate the switchgear.
Ensure panels are manufactured with a minimum thickness of 16 gauge zintex-coated braced sheet steel
finished with epoxy-based paint on all surfaces and support frames.
Ensure that panels be fully fault rated to a minimum level of 50kVA for one second duration unless specified
otherwise within the particular specification.
Ensure that all cubicle panels are of the front access type.
Ensure that all cubicle panels are complete with a 100mm high metal plinth.
Ensure connections between busbars and all switchgear are adequately rated for load and fault current.
Segregate the panel so that the maintenance on one item will not entail a shut-down on others.
Ensure all penetrations of live busbars into outgoing circuit compartments or cable chambers are fully
shrouded.
Ensure all busbars have a minimum current rating of that of the switchgear controlling the incoming supply
to the panel. Reduced size rising busbars are not acceptable.

Supply each panel with a suitably sized earth bar installed throughout the full length of the panel. Provide
bonding connections to each item of switchgear, and cable gland plates.
Where a panel is to be delivered to site in sectionalized form, ensure the manufacturer retests the panel
on site and provide certification for the O&M Manuals.
Control all outgoing circuits by means either of fuse switches, MCCB's or ACB's as specified. To permit the
renewal of fuses, fully isolate the fuse carrier assemblies of fuse switches in the OFF position. Ensure all
fuse switches have double break, silver or electro-tinned contacts, safety interlocks, ON/OFF indication.
Ensure all ACB's are of the withdrawable pattern complete with control/switching devices, interlocks, locks
etc., and safety shutters which completely shroud the main fixed isolating contacts automatically when
the breaker section is withdrawn.
Ensure operating handles for switchgear are of the rotary, toggle or retractable types and is manufactured
such that the cover cannot be removed while the switch is in the ON position.
Where switchboards are sited over formed floor trenches include for all necessary support steelwork to
span trenches.
Provide all floor/wall rawlbolt fixings required.
Ensure the busbar chamber spans the whole length of the switchboard and is readily extendible. Ensure
copper busbars are of the minimum rating of the main incoming switch, suitably colour coded both on the
bars and on the chamber cover. Reduced size rising busbars are not acceptable.
Ensure connections between busbars and respective switchgear and distribution gear are by copper bars,
rods or copper cables suitably fixed with clamps and bolts.
3.2.5 Drawings
Submit drawings showing the proposed switchboards, including dimensions, proposed construction,
layout, internal connections identification markings etc., to the Engineer for comment before manufacture
commences.
3.2.6 Terminations & Switchboard Connections
Provide all switchgear with suitable means of accepting the types and sizes of connected cables. Provide
connection rail enclosures and cable gland plates for cubicle boards.
Ensure small wiring within the panel is to relevant British Standards using type 'B', LSOH insulated 600V
grade stranded copper conductors and has a cross section of not less than 1.5 sq mm.
Terminate wiring on readily accessible fully shrouded terminal rails adjacent to the instruments. Ensure
that terminations of voltages in close proximity, are segregated with insulated barrier plates.
Ensure terminal rails are of the appropriate current rating of sufficient size to suit the cable conductors
being installed, are fitted with purpose-made supports, are of robust construction and further comply with
the following:-
1. The voltage rating is 500V.

2. Din rail mounted.
3. The terminal fixing to rails has spring loaded fronts, i.e. retention is not dependent only on the
terminal mouldings.
4. Terminals are locked to the terminal rail.

5. Clamping screws are captive of high tensile steel and operate against a plate to prevent damage to the
conductor. Do not use pinch screws or push-on terminals.
6. Insulation materials are carbon-free non-hydroscopic and suitable for continuous operation at
temperatures of -5oC to 130oC.
7. Contain safety features to eliminate accidental contact by operator.
Do not route outgoing cables through the busbar chamber.
Ensure that suitable cable gland plates are fitted to receive the respective cables where vertical cable
chambers form part of the panel construction.
Wire relays, multi-pole contactors, instruments and other components accommodated within panel
compartments to terminal rails.
3.2.7 Safety and Maintenance Aspects
Ensure all remote switch devices used for local isolation have facilities for padlocking the device in the
"Off" position. Ensure switches conform to the relevant British Standards.
3.2.8 Identification and Notices
Ensure all identifications and notices and circuit charts are carried out in accordance with BS7671 -
Provide labels to all switchgear, cable chamber covers and busbar covers with the appropriate designations
or warning notices as necessary.
Fix Ivorine identification and warning labels of minimum size 75mm x 25mm to each item of equipment.
Fix all labels with plated screws.
Ensure all identification labels are white with in-filled "black" letters 6mm high and 0.5mm thickness.
Ensure warning labels are white with in-filled red letters 20mm minimum high and 1.5mm thickness.
All diagrams, charts, tables and the wording for labels and notices shall be submitted for the approval of
the Engineer before they are installed.
Labels on the outside of equipment enclosures shall be of laminated plastics material with black characters
on white, unless otherwise indicated. Labels shall be securely fixed by non-ferrous screws or rivets; no
adhesive shall be used for fixing.
Where there are two or more incoming supplies this shall be clearly indicated at each point of isolation. In
installations having a three phase supply, labels on single phase equipment shall indicate the phase to
which they are connected.
3.2.9 Phase Colouring
Clearly mark all busbars with a band of appropriately coloured insulation tape, at 600mm intervals along
the busbar length.
Where access to the busbars can be gained via the removal of either enclosure, panels or protective
devices. Each busbar viewed shall be appropriately identified.

Phase colouring shall be to the European Harmonized Standards.
3.2.10 Current Transformers and Instruments
Ensure current transformers comply with the current British Standard and have a 5 Amp secondary. Ensure
the rated VA output is suitable for the type and magnitude of the connected burden.
Ensure current transformers for metering and control purposes are of accuracy Class 3 minimum.
Ensure the accuracy limit factor for P5 and P10 CT's is appropriate for the protection scheme and greater
than the highest available setting of any instantaneous element. Ensure the 'knee' point voltage of Class X
CT's is sufficient for correct operation of the protection scheme and can maintain stability for 'through fault'
conditions.
Use current transformers of the 'bar' primary type unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Match sets
of C/Ts.
Terminate all connections from secondary windings at terminals integral with or adjacent to the CT's. Lace
secondary windings and arrange to prevent contact with the 'main' circuit. Earth one terminal of the CT
secondary circuit.
Do not insert isolating contacts in circuits between CTs and protective devices.
Ensure the removal of protection relay from its case will 'short circuit' the connected CTs. Provide all
protection relays with facilities for testing.
Preferred method - Direct secondary injection at the relay
Alternative method - A CT. with a test winding, and terminals brought out to convenient locations arrange
test winding such that injection of 10 Amp represents the full load current in the main circuit.
3.2.11 Metering
Ensure all indicating instruments are of an approved manufacture and size to conform to relevant British
Standards. Ensure the markings on the dials include the scale markings the instrument transformer ratio
and British Standard grading.
Provide circuit protection to each meter. Provide double insulated cables between the busbars and the
meter fuses. Provide single insulated cables between the meter fuses and the meter.
Submit the location and general arrangement of meters to the Engineer for comment before manufacture
commences.
Fit all incoming supply compartments with multi-function meters.
Fit all outgoing circuits with multi-function meters as detailed on the drawings.
3.2.12 Testing
Provide Type Test Certificates, for the class of switchgear to be supplied.
Make allowance for inspection visits to the works by the Engineer.

3.2.13 Rubber Matting
Install rubber mats of 11kV tested pattern as necessary in each switch room.
Ensure the mat(s) are at least 600mm wide and the length not less than that of each switchboard and laid
on the floors in front of all switchboards.
3.2.14 Distribution Boards
Fuse boards and miniature circuit-breaker boards shall comply with relevant British Standards. They shall
have lockable hinged doors and be provided complete with mcbs, fuses or blanking pieces as specified.
They shall have a fault withstand capability fit for the characteristics of the supply indicated.
Fuse boards shall be fully shrouded.
Busbars shall be in the same position relative to their fuse carriers or mcbs for each pole.
In T P & N distribution boards neutral busbars shall have one outgoing terminal for each out-going circuit.
A multi-terminal bar for the circuit protective conductors shall be provided for both insulated and metal
cased board, with one terminal for each outgoing circuit. It shall be directly connected to the earth
terminal without dependence on the exposed conductive parts of the enclosure.
Identification of each fuseway and mcb way shall be by numbering. Identification on the neutral busbar
and protective conductor bar shall clearly relate each terminal to it respective fuseway or mcb way.
Twenty percent spare capacity fuseways or mcb ways shall be provided. Spare ways shall have the
manufacturers blanking plates fitted unless specified to be populated with fuses or mcbs.
3.2.15 MCB Distribution Boards
Distribution Boards shall comply with BS EN 60439 and the minimum degree of protection shall be IP31.
Ensure consumer units are 250 volts rating and conform to the relevant British Standards.
Ensure outgoing circuit protection is afforded by MCB protective devices appropriate to the circuit rating
unless Cartridge Fuse Links are specified.
Securely clamp the miniature circuit breakers to busbars.
Ensure distribution boards are complete with a suitably sized integral double pole isolator. Ensure the unit
is complete with multi-connection earth and neutral terminal bars with a separate connection for each
conductor.
Carry out neutral and earthing connections to the termination bars so that the respective circuit neutral
and earth wires follow the same pattern and direction as those of the phase conductors.
3.2.16 Consumer Units
Consumer units shall comply with BS EN 61639 and the minimum degree of protection shall be IP31. Ensure
consumer units are 250 volts rating and conform to the relevant British Standards.
Ensure outgoing circuit protection is afforded by MCB protective devices appropriate to the circuit rating
unless Cartridge Fuse Links are specified.

Ensure consumer units are complete with a suitably sized integral double pole isolator. Ensure the unit is
complete with multi-connection earth and neutral terminal bars with a separate connection for each
conductor.
Carry out neutral and earthing connections to the termination bars so that the respective circuit neutral
and earth wires follow the same pattern and direction as those of the phase conductors.
3.2.17 Residual Current Device
Residual current devices shall comply with relevant British Standards. The rated voltage, rated current,
rated tripping current and rated breaking capacity shall be as specified.
Where indicated RCDs shall have electronically amplified sensors. They shall be of the instantaneous, IDMT
or fixed time delay type as required.
Where required RCDs shall be fitted with integral overcurrent protection.
Ensure all RCBO units comply fully with the requirements of the relevant British Standard and are of the
sensitivities, load ratings and pole configurations detailed in the particular clauses or as defined on the
drawings. Note that unless otherwise specified, the sensitivity of RCBO units shall be 30mA.
3.2.18 Air-Break Switches
Air-break switches shall comply with relevant British Standards. They shall have an uninterrupted rated
duty, a mechanical endurance not less than those set out in BS60947 and an electrical endurance not less
than 1/20 of the number of no-load operating cycles corresponding to the mechanical endurance, unless
otherwise indicated, and a utilization category of AC-22 or AC-23 (inductive load) as required.
All switches shall meet the requirements of switch-disconnectors.
Where indicated auxiliary contacts shall be incorporated in switches. For switches installed in a motor
circuit between the motor and its starter a minimum of one auxiliary contact shall be incorporated and
connected so that the starter opens when the switch is opened.
Each switch shall have a facility for padlocking in of 'OFF' position.
3.2.19 Moulded-Case Circuit-Breakers
Moulded-case circuit-breakers shall comply with BS EN 60947. They shall have the voltage and current
ratings, rated duty, rated short-circuit breaking capacity and rated short-time withstand current as
required.
MCCBs shall be of the independent manual closing air-break type, rated for an uninterrupted duty.
Auxiliary facilities, including power closing and under voltage releases, shall be provided only as indicated.
Each MCCB shall have a facility for pad-locking in the 'OFF' position.
3.2.20 Fuses
The type and current rating of fuses shall be as required.
Cartridge fuse links complying with BS EN 88 shall be Type 1. Fuse carriers, bases and associated parts shall
also comply with BS EN 88.

Cartridge fuse links complying with BS EN 88 shall have a fusing factor of Clause Q1 unless otherwise
indicated. Motor circuit fuse links shall be used only as required. Fuse carriers, bases and associated parts
shall also comply with BS EN 88.
3.2.21 Miniature Circuit-Breakers
Miniature circuit-breakers shall comply with BS EN 60898. They shall have the voltage and current ratings
and category of duty and be of the type as required.
Adhere to the selected manufacturer's installation requirements. Ensure that the respective breaker trips
lie within the time limits recommended for the category of breaker.
3.2.22 Power Factor Correction
Ensure automatic power factor correction equipment, is contained within appropriate enclosures and are
the ratings as specified.
Ensure that unit capacitors are of suitable rating and contained in a sheet steel enclosure complete with
appropriate fixings.
Ensure that capacitors are suitable for operation on a 415V, 3-phase, 50Hz supply unless otherwise
specified.
Provide capacitors consisting of elements wound from a metalized plastic film dielectric, vacuum
processed and encapsulated in epoxy resin container, mounted in a sheet steel tank. Alternate forms of
construction may be offered for consideration.
Ensure dielectric losses of the selected capacitors are less than 25 watts/per kVAr.
Fit capacitors with an automatic discharge device to achieve full discharge within one minute after
disconnection.
Provide a Power Factor Control Relay, complete with associated control equipment to maintain the
specified corrected power factor.
Ensure that the control equipment provides the following facilities.
Automatic disconnection of all capacitors in the event of mains failure, with a two minute delay before re-
connection.
Target Power Factor setting adjustable from 0.8 inductive to unity.
Time delay between switching of stages to ensure capacitors are sufficiently discharged before re-
energization. Push button operated manual override incorporating time delay as above.
Adjustable switching programmes. Visible indication of capacitor stages.
Protect each capacitor stage with HRC fuses of current rating no less than 1.5 times rated capacity current.
Ensure all capacitor control contactors are rated for its switching duty.
Ensure power factor equipment is automatically disconnected prior to the operation of standby
generator(s).

3.2.23 Surge Protection Device
To be provide at LVP
3.3 HV / LV CABLES AND WIRING
BS 3858 Specification for binding and identification sleeves for use on electrical cables and wires.
BS 3988 Specification for wrought aluminium for electrical purposes - solid conductors for insulated
cables.
BS 4553 Specification for 600/1000 V single-phase split concentric electric cables. Cables having PVC
insulation
BS 4808 Specification for LF cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath for
telecommunication.
BS 5099 Electric cables. Voltage levels for spark testing
BS 5372 Specification for Dimensions of cable terminations for multi-core extruded solid
dielectric insulated distribution cables of rated voltages 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V
having copper or aluminium conductors
BS 5345 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of electrical apparatus for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres (other than mining applications or explosive
processing and manufacture)
BS 5467 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and
1900/3300 V
BS 6004 Electric cables. PVC insulated and PVC sheathed cables for voltages up to and including
300/500 V, for electric power and lighting
BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands. Code of Practice
BS 6231 Electric cables. Single core PVC insulated flexible cables of rated voltage 600/1000 V for
switchgear and control gear wiring
BS 6387 Specification for performance requirements for cables required to maintain circuit integrity
under fire conditions.
BS 6622 Electric cables. Armoured cables with thermosetting insulation for rated voltages from
3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV. Requirements and test methods
BS 6724 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and
1900/3300 V, having low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
BS 7197 Specification for performance of bonds for electric power cable terminations and joints for
system voltages up to 36kV.
BS 7211 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated and thermoplastic sheathed cables for voltages up
to and including 450/750 V for electric power and lighting and having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
BS 7540 Electric cables. Guide to use for cables with a rated voltage not exceeding 450/750V
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations - IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition.
BS EN 13601 Copper and copper alloys. Copper rod, bar and wire for general electrical purposes
BS EN 13602 Copper and copper alloys. Drawn, round copper wire for the manufacture of electrical
conductors
BS EN 50525 Electric cables. Low voltage energy cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V
(U0/U) General requirements
BS EN 50173 Information Technology. Generic Cabling Systems

BS EN 50288 Multi-element metallic cables used in analogue and digital communication and control.
Sectional specification for instrumentation and control cables
BS EN 60702 Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated voltage not exceeding 750V
Cables
BS EN 60332-2-2 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions. Tests for vertical
flame propagation for a single small insulated wire or cable.
BS EN 60794 Optical Fibre Cables
Specification refers to. In all cases where discrepancies exist between the documents, the Particular
3.3.1 General
Ensure spacings for support for all cables are as required by BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations", using PVC clips, saddles and/or cleats.
Ensure that accessory boxes are securely fixed using a minimum of 2 No. fixings.
Fully enter all cable sheaths into enclosure box via suitable bushed insert/grommet. Ensure the protective
conductor has green/yellow sleeving where connecting to the earthing terminal. Install a separate
green/yellow sleeved protective conductor from the box earthing terminal to the earthing terminal of the
accessory or appliance.
Use packed glands with neoprene washers in lieu of the rubber insert bushes, in class 4 areas.
Wire lighting circuits on the three plate rose system and socket outlets/fuse connection units on ring final
circuit systems unless otherwise specified.
Fit connection lugs by compression using an automatic tool which cannot be released until the correct
pressure and crimp depth is obtained, where bolted connections are required.
No neutral conductors shall be located within light switch accessories. Never allow cables to come in
contact with any form of polystyrene. The following circuit principles shall be used:
Type Minimum Phase and Neutral Minimum Circuit Protective

Conductor Size (mm2) Conductor Size (mm2)
32A Ring Main 4 x 2.5mm2 2 x 2.5 mm2
32A Radial 2 x 4 mm2 1 x 2.5 mm2
20A Radial 2 x 2.5 mm2 1 x 2.5 mm2
10A Lighting 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 mm2
6A Lighting 2 x 1.5 mm2 1 x 1.5 mm2
The maximum number of connection points onto any given circuit shall not be in excess of the following:
Type of points Maximum
Luminaires 5A connected load
BS 1363 twin socket outlets (Ring circuits) 8 No
BS 1363 twin socket outlets (Radial circuits) 4 No
Fused connection units with 3kw load connected. 1 No
Fused connection unit with between1 to 3kw load connected.
Fused connection unit with 1kw or less load connected.

3.3.2 Cables in Conduit and Trunking
Install single core cables LSZH insulated, copper conductors 450/750 volt grade complying with relevant
British Standards.
Use colours identification as given in BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations". Use coloured
sleeves only if permitted and at the discretion of the Engineer.
Where heat resistant cables are specified use silicon rubber and comply with relevant British Standards,
or other heat resistant cable of similar temperature group conforming to the relevant British Standard.
Do not use cables smaller than 1.5 mm2 and use all cables of the multi-strand type.
Ensure all cables are new with each coil having its seal intact giving the manufacturer's size, classification
etc. Ensure the cable manufacturer's name is stated in the Materials Schedule, and do not change this
manufacturer except on written instructions from the Engineer.
3.3.3 Installation
Carry out all wiring of multi-point circuits in a "loop-in' system, and do not use joints or connections, other
than those required for the connection of switches, fuses, socket outlets, motors etc.
Ensure cables are not in direct contact with any form of polystyrene used in the building.
In the case of recessed luminaires and heat producing/emitting equipment having final connections
effected using flexible cables, make the final connections using either heat resistant flexible cables or heat
resistant over sleeving.
Where cables are permitted to traverse channel-ways or similar on continuously mounted fluorescent
luminaires, use heat resistant cables throughout.
Do not use soldered connections or lugs. Terminate all conductors requiring bolted connections with
compression lugs using an automatic compression crimp tool which will only release after the correct
crimp depth has been obtained. Use spring washers on all bolted connections.
Double all cables back on themselves when terminations are made. When cable insulation is stripped for
connections, take care to ensure that the conductor is not damaged by the stripping tool.
Do not use LSZH cables for final connections to any appliances containing a heating element or any
appliance emitting heat. Where flexible conduit is used as a final connection wiring medium, use heat
resistant cables and these shall commence at the solid conduit end of the flexible conduit provided it is
not in a heated area. If this is not possible, install heat resistant cables back to the first switch or distribution
board not in a hot area.
Do not exceed the cable carrying capacity of the conduit and/or trunking, including the specified spare
capacity.
Prior to the installation of any cables within conduit or trunking, ensure debris is removed and burrs and
swarf has been removed from containment surfaces.
In the event of any insulation being damaged, e.g. whilst cables are being drawn in, remove and replace
the whole of the cable length.
Do not bend cables during installation to a smaller radius than those specified in BS7671 - "Requirements
for Electrical Installations".

Install cable sizes as shown on the drawings and wiring diagrams.
Ensure sizing of all cables is in accordance with the ratings for LSZH cables as given in the relevant tables
of BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations".
Do not use cables less than 1.5mm2.
3.3.4 Circuit Protective Conductor (refer to Section 3.1 also)
Conduits and trunking shall not be used as a circuit protective conductor. Install separate Circuit Protective
Conductors and ensure these cables are of the same grade and temperature rating as those of live
conductors of that part of the circuit. Circuit Protective Conductors insulation shall be of green and yellow
colour.
Ensure that each circuit has its own protective conductor emanating from the distribution position and
installed in the same trunking/conduit as the live conductors of that circuit.
Ensure that the protective conductor is sized in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations".
3.3.5 Materials
Ensure no current carrying conductor less than 1.5mm2 is used. Ensure cables have copper conductors,
twin core and combined circuit protective conductor (CPC) use multi-stranded for cable of 4mm size and
above.
Exercise care in selecting cable sizes to ensure that the cross sectional area of the combined circuit
protective conductor complies with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations".
Provide accessory boxes for all accessories. Ensure that where used in concealed installations, boxes are
rustproof, metallic boxes with bushed cable entry and adjustable alignment lugs.
Ensure boxes are of white coloured plastic to match the accessory, where used in surface installations.
Ensure all boxes have fitted earth terminals and are minimum 25mm deep for lighting accessories and
35mm deep socket outlets/fused connection units. Ensure boxes comply with the relevant BS.
3.3.6 LSOH Insulated and Sheathed Cables – Surface Installation
Install cables as inconspicuously as possible, taking advantage of the features of the building by fixing in
corners, behind or along skirting boards, mouldings etc., and behind fitments etc.
Protect the cables by metal conduit or channel to 300mm height where rising from the floor. Increase the
protection height to 2m where there is a possibility of heavy traffic.
Sleeve all cores with heat resistant sleeving from the point of entry into the luminaire and up to the
terminals, where wiring terminations at a luminaire other than a ceiling rose.
3.3.7 Mineral Insulated Cables
Ensure mineral insulated cables have copper conductors, mineral insulation (inorganic type), copper
sheathed, LSZH oversheath, and comply with the relevant BS and Codes of Practice.
600 Volt Grade for:

 Socket outlet circuits
 Lighting Point circuits
 Fire Alarm Systems
 Call Systems
 Reduced Low Voltage Systems
 Unless otherwise specified in the following Section.
1000 Volt Grade for:
 Motor Wiring
 400/415 volt 3 or 4 wire circuits
 Do not use cables less than 1.5 sq mm in either voltage grade.
3.3.8 Terminations
Ensure the equipment for terminating MICC cables complies fully with relevant BS and is of the same
manufacture as that of the cable.
Ensure seals comply with the following:-
Installations up to 1050C - Cold screw-on pot seal with plastic compound, or alternatively shrink-on type
using heat application.
Installations between 1050C and 1850C - Cold screw-on pot seal with suitable plastic compound and
bonded glass-fibre caps, or alternatively, shrink-on type seal using heat application.
Ensure all terminations on surface installations have brass compression glands conforming to current BS.
In areas where installations are concealed within the fabric of walls etc., use proprietary MICC clamps to
the conduits/adaptable boxes.
Use of proprietary male/female cable gland arrangements where cables are terminated in plain hole boxes.
Insulate cable tails with sleeving to suit the prevailing temperature conditions.
Ensure sleeving for tungsten luminaires is of the medium temperature range for use up to 185 0C. Ensure
live conductors have black sleeving and protective conductor tails green/yellow sleeving. Ensure phase
conductors have a red marker on the sleeve. Ensure sleeving is anchored and sealed to the pot.
Provide patent circuit protective conductor tails where glands are omitted with protective conductors
brazed by the manufacturer to each pot and suitably sleeved.
Use the colour coding of conductor sleeving in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations".
Fit shrouds to terminations on all surface mounted LSZH sheathed cables.

Bend cable conductors of 2.5 sq mm or less back upon themselves for termination in screw or clamp
terminals. Use cone grip type cable sockets or approved compression type cable sockets for all bolted
connections.
Terminate all conductors requiring bolted connections with compression lugs using an automatic
compression tool which will only release after the correct crimp depth has been obtained. Do not use
soldered connections or lugs.
3.3.9 Boxes
Ensure all boxes used for terminating or jointing MICC cables are conduit boxes or Class 4, complying with
relevant BS
Install boxes of the 'terminal', 'through', 'tee', or 'crossing' circular patterns for all lighting points.
In other cases use metal boxes of malleable iron or heavy duty steel with welded joints. Ensure steel boxes
have lugs suitably tapped to receive brass cover fixing screws (not self- tapping). Provide covers for each
box unless an accessory or fitting is mounted over.
Ensure boxes are stove enamel or air drying paint inside and outside, and this applies to general installation
work requiring Class 2 protection.
Where Class 4 protection is required, i.e. kitchens, plant rooms, tank rooms, boiler rooms, or in other areas
subject to dampness, ensure all boxes are hot dip zinc coated or galvanized with suitable machine surfaced
or weatherproof sealed covers.
Ensure boxes in exterior locations, or subject to continual dampness, have external fixing lugs.
Ensure conduit boxes have terminal blocks supplied and fixed where used as junction boxes with
permissible cable joints. Ensure terminal blocks have brass connectors shrouded in porcelain or heat
resisting material capable of withstanding, without deterioration, the same temperatures as the pots,
insulation and sleeving. Ensure the box is of a size to allow for the terminal block and to facilitate neat
connections.
Ensure all conduits, accessories, or adaptable boxes, to which flexible cables, or flexible conduits are fitted,
or upon which accessories or equipment are mounted, have earthing terminals provided and are securely
fixed to the box.
3.3.10 Installation of Mineral Insulated Cable
Ensure the tradesmen are also fully instructed in the use of the specialist tools recommended by the
manufacturer, which are to be used on the installation.
Secure cables by means of PVC served copper saddles using 30mm x No.8 roundhead brass fixing screws.
Use multiple saddles where several cables are installed together.
Ensure where unsheathed cables are specified the saddles are made of copper.
Protect MICC cable to a height of 300mm by a metallic cover when rising on the surface from the floor.
Increase this protected height to 2m, where there is a possibility of heavy traffic.
Protect MICC cables by means of galvanized metal capping where concealed in walls.

Ensure that where surface mounted equipment is installed on a concealed MICC installation the cables
terminate in a flush mounted circular box, and the back of the equipment is drilled and bushed for back
entry. Then install the equipment over to conceal the box.
Ensure cables are installed neatly on the surface and routes are truly horizontal, vertical or parallel with
the features of the building.
Ensure that the routes of cables laid in floor screeds are carefully planned to avoid areas where there is a
possibility of floor fixings. Avoid centres and edges of doorways to allow for fixing closure bolts etc.
Ensure that cable crossings in floor screeds are kept to a minimum and maintain a screed cover of 25 mm
above cables.
Ensure that MICC cables fixed to galvanized cable tray are LSZH sheathed. Fix saddles using brass
roundhead screws, washers and nuts.
Make connections to items of equipment subject to vibration, adjustment, or withdrawal by terminating

the cables in an appropriate adaptable box, sited adjacent to the item being connected, and enclose the
final connection from the box in metallic flexible conduit or install a 360o loop not less than 150 mm
diameter immediately adjacent to the cable entry to the equipment. Allow a clear space of not less than
10 mm at the point where the cable crosses itself.
Test all MICC cable seals for insulation resistance on completion of the seals at both ends of the cable
within 24 hours after completion and ensure the test proves an infinity reading using a 500 volt d.c. test.
Ensure all cables are neatly installed, straightened and suitably dressed with rollers etc., to give a neat and
workmanlike installation.
At termination positions, arrange cable conductors to minimize crossing.
Fit surge suppressors to all cable ends connected to motors with star connection up to and including 2kW
size.

3.3.11 Low Voltage Armoured Cables
Include copper conductors, unless specified otherwise in the particular clauses.
Abbreviation PVC/SWA/PVC indicates copper conductors, PVC compound insulated, PVC bedding, single
steel wire armoured and black PVC sheathed overall, 600/1000 volt grade.
Abbreviation PVC/AWA/PVC indicates copper conductors, PVC compound insulated, PVC bedding,
armoured with a single layer of aluminium wire and black PVC sheathed overall, 600/1000 volt grade.
Abbreviation XLPE/SWA/LSF indicates copper conductors, XLPE compound insulated, PVC bedding, single
steel wire armoured and black LSF sheath 600/1000V grade.
Abbreviation XLPE/AWA/LSF indicate copper conductors, XLPE compound insulated, PVC bedding,
armoured with single layer of aluminium wire, and black LSF sheath overall 600/1000V grade.
Abbreviation L.S.F. in lieu of PVC sheath indicates low smoke and fume.
Where cable sizes are not detailed then size these in accordance with the appropriate current ratings in
the relevant tables of BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations".
Ensure all cables are of the same manufacture and delivered to site in continuous lengths complete with
end caps.
Subject cables at manufacturer’s works to routine tests detailed in the relevant British Standards. Submit
duplicate copies of Test Certificates to the Engineer for perusal and comment.
Ensure single core cables operating on a.c. systems do not have steel wire armouring.
3.3.12 Straight Joints, Tees and Breeches
Make all cable joints using a proprietary cast resin kit system supplied by one manufacturer and install
strictly in accordance with their instructions.
Provide copper bonds within the joint to maintain full earth continuity. Ensure the resistance is no greater
than that of the live conductors and the insulation resistance between cores, and between cores and earth,
is no less than that of the original cable.
3.3.13 Cables Terminations
Supply cable glands for all terminations.
Steel wire armoured cable glands shall be brass to the relevant British Standard with ISO metric entry
threads. Glands shall be selected in consideration of the specified cable type and the environment. Gland
shrouds shall be provided which shall be fitted prior to the gland being fitted. Earth tags shall also be
provided and which shall be bolted to the termination plate or gland plate.
Use brass compression glands for steel wire armoured cables.
Use aluminium alloy glands for aluminium armoured cables suitable for accepting insulated insert when
used on single core cables.
Terminate cable cores direct to the terminals of the equipment. Use non-ferrous gland plates for single
core cables.

Install suitable seals to provide a moisture-proof seal between the bush and the outer serving, and the
bush and the inner sheath. Ensure glands have core grip armour clamps with suitable provision for cross-
joint bonding.
Ensure all cable joints and connections are electrically and mechanically sound.
3.3.14 Core Terminations and Jointing
Ensure all conductor terminations are made by compression joints by a competent person.
Make the compression crimp connections by a purpose- made automatic machine ensuring that a crimp,
once started, cannot be released until full pressure and the correct crimp depth has been obtained.
Ensure the environmental conditions for jointing are such that the work can be carried out without
detriment to the completed joint.
Wrap in the correct colour coded PVC insulation tape bound to the thickness of the original conductor
insulation. Heat shrink-on sleeves are acceptable.
Ensure correct phasing of all core prior to the commencement of connections.
Ensure all bolted terminations have suitable bolts, nuts and shakeproof washers, adjusted to the correct
torque. Ensure conductors where received by tunnel type connections of the pinch screw type have pin
lugs.
3.3.15 Installation of XLPE Armoured Cables
Install cables as indicated on the drawings and detailed in the following Clauses.
Arrange cable routes so that cables, hangers, cleats, etc., do not come into contact with, or in close
proximity to, pipe services. Space to the requirements of BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations". Check all routes on site for correct measurements and practicability. Co-operate with other
trades and ensure close liaison to avoid conflict of services.
Ensure cable routes, where fixed on walls or installed in accessible ducts, are fixed at intervals to prevent
sag, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations".
Ensure cable sweeps and bends are within the permitted radius requirements of the manufacturer, and
BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations", and are fully supported. Ensure minimum cable radii
are not reduced during installation.
Cables of 35mm2 and above, provide cable cleat fixings or suitable agreed metal fixing alternative to
prevent movement during fault conditions.
Fix cable installations in air, including engineering service ducts, with aluminium alloy or approved claw
cleats with galvanized back strap using galvanized bolts conforming to current requirements/regulations,
with maximum spacing between supports as detailed in BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations". Fix cleats for cables up to and including 50mm diameter by a single bolt, and above 50mm
diameter by 2 bolts. Avoid excess pressure of cleats on cables to prevent deformation of the plastic
sheathing. Provide suitable supporting steelwork and/or galvanized cable tray where cables cross open
spaces. Protect such steelwork by a rust inhibiting paint.
Fix cable cleats to brickwork using expanding masonry bolts, or approved fixing device agreed by the
Engineer. Drill all holes necessary and allow for making good around cable fixings.

Fix cables laid in racks, hangers or on steelwork at intervals to prevent sag, in accordance with BS7671 -
Obtain approval from the Engineer before installing racks and hangers and for any non-standard
equipment.
Ensure all joints have the armouring bonded across, and at termination points are bonded to the
switchgear. Use copper conductors of the correct size in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for
Electrical Installations".
Ensure cables passing through walls and floors have oversized sleeves permanently fixed, packed with fire
resisting infill. Ensure where cables rise or fall on walls they are protected to a height of 2m with a sheet
steel guard.
Ensure all cables are neatly installed, straightened and dressed to give a neat and workmanlike installation
The internal bend radii shall be large as practicable; however the manufacturer’s minimum radii shall be
complied with.
3.3.16 Installation of XLPE Armoured Cables Underground.
Unarmoured cables shall not be buried directly in the ground. Cables laid directly in the ground or in
sustained wet conditions shall be armoured and have extruded bedding.
Minimum cover in cable trenches:
 HV cables 800mm
 LV cables 500mm
 Communications cables 500mm
 All cables 800mm under roadways
Rest cables on a 50mm deep bed of sifted sand or riddled earth and then cover by a further 50mm depth
of the same material.
Install two layers of permanently coloured yellow PVC tape marked "ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW - CAUTION"
150mm wide along the entire length of the cable. Place the lower layer 50mm above the cable and the
higher layer 100mm below the finished surface.
Ensure backfilling does not contain stone, brick, or sharp material and is fully consolidated with a rammer
to the level before laying the second tape. Carry out the final backfill to ground level and suitably
consolidate.
Install earthenware type or proprietary plastic cable conduits under roadways, crossing roadways, and for
building access or wherever specified in the following Section.
Ensure the depths specified above are to the top of the conduit.
Seal all ends of conduit around the cable with waterproof and gas proof seal of self-extinguishing plastic
foam of the type approved by the Electricity Council. Ensure any spare cable conduit have suitable end
caps.

Separation between cables and other services shall be as detailed in the table below:
Service HV LV ELV Piped Services
HV 300mm 1000mm 1000mm 1000mm
LV 1000mm 300mm 300mm 300mm
ELV 1000mm 300mm 50mm 300mm
Install cable route markers at 45m intervals on straight routes, over tee joints, changes of direction, road
crossways and building entries.
Ensure markers are of a proprietary type 200mm square x 50mm deep, concrete, with plastic inserts
indicating the depth and voltage of the cable(s).
Install cable markers level with the finished surface.
3.3.17 Straight Joints, Tees and Breeches
Make all cable joints using a proprietary cast resin kit system supplied by one manufacturer and install
strictly in accordance with their instructions. Ensure the whole joint is moisture-proofed.
Provide copper bonds within the joint to maintain full earth continuity, and ensure the resistance is no
greater than twice that of the live conductors and the insulation resistance between cores and between
cores and earth, is no less than that of the original cables.
3.3.18 Sealing Boxes
Provide sealing boxes at all cable ends where termination in switch or fuse gear and firmly fix on to the
panel.
Joint the conductors to XLPE insulated copper cables of the same size, using compression type ferrules,
with tight fitting, shrink-on sleeves.
Install a protective conductor of the same size as the cores between lead sheath core gland and switchgear
earth terminal.
3.3.19 Core Terminations and Jointing
Ensure all conductor terminations are made using compression joints, by a competent person.
Make the compression crimp by a purpose-made automatic machine ensuring that a crimp, once started,
cannot be released until full pressure and the correct crimp depth has been attained.
In cases where there are long, vertical or incline routes, weep barriers may be needed. Such cases require
a sweated ferrule.
Ensure the environmental conditions for jointing are such that the work can be carried out without
detriment to the completed joint.
Ensure jointing is made by compression type ferrules and wrapped in "Empire" or "Kaleoris" tape to the
original thickness of the original conductor insulation.

Use tight fitting, heat shrink-on sleeves provided the moisture resistance and the insulating properties are
that of the original cables.
Ensure the correct phasing out prior to the commencement of jointing.
Ensure all bolted terminations have suitable compression lugs of the correct size with bolts and shake
proof washers.
Ensure conductors over 10 sq mm, where received by terminal type connections of the pinch screw type,
have pin lugs.
Wrap the collars of all lugs and the non-conducting parts in PVC colour coded tape to the original insulation
thickness.
Ensure all insulating tape complies with the relevant BS.
Joint the core of low voltage cables colour-to- colour or number-to-number, as appropriate. Ensure cores
which are identified by numbers are connected so that:-
'O' is neutral in any multicore cable.
'1' is L1 phase in any 3 or 4 core or the phase conductor in a 2-core cable. '2' is L2 phase in a 3 or 4 core
cable.
'3' is L3 phase in a 3 or 4 core cable.
3.4 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
BS 67 Specification for ceiling roses

BS 546 Specification. Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-outlets and socket outlet adaptors
(including Supplement No. 1 Specification for plugs made of resilient material)
BS 1362 Specification for general purpose fuse links for domestic and similar purposes (primarily for
use in plugs)
BS 1363 Specification for 13 A fused plugs and switched and unswitched socket outlets
BS 1363 Part 4 13 A plugs, socket-outlets and adaptors. Specification for 13A fused connection
units switched and unswitched
BS 4177 Specification for cooker control units
BS 4662 Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories. Requirements, test methods and
dimensions
BS 5733 Specification for general requirements for electrical accessories
BS 6312 Connectors for analogue telecommunication interfaces
BS 7001 Specification for interchangeability and safety of a standardized luminaire supporting
coupler
BS 7288 Specification for socket outlets incorporating residual current devices (S.R.C.D.s)
BS 7895 Specification for bayonet lamp holders with enhanced safety
BS EN 60073 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification. Coding
principles for indicators and actuators
BS EN 60238 Edison screw lamp holders

BS EN 60309 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes.

BS EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
BS EN 60669 Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations. General requirements
BS EN 60730 Specification for automatic electrical controls for household and similar use.
BS EN 60742 Isolating transformers and safety isolating transformers. Requirements
BS EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Switches, disconnectors, switch-
disconnectors and fuse-combination units
BS EN 61058 Switches for appliances.
BS EN 61184 Bayonet lamp holders
BS EN 61558 Safety of power transformers, power supply units and similar devices.
3.4.2 Light Switches
Ensure local light switches comply with the manufacture, rating and type as indicated in Particular
Specification items or on the drawings.
Ensure lighting switches comply with the relevant BS. Outlet finish shall be agreed with the project
engineer and project architect, to provide compliance with Building Regulations Part M for contrast with
wall and size / position of rocker switches.
Ensure switches are capable of switching the full rated inductive or resistive load, and where connected
to fluorescent loads in excess of 600 Watts, use 15 amp rating.
Install all switches with boxes of 37mm minimum depth with adjustable lugs to ensure switch plates are
true and square where required. Fit boxes flush with wall finish and make any adjustment to depth with
extension rings.
Ensure all switch boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC terminal.
Where several switches of the same phase are required in the same position, use a multi-ganged switch
box to accommodate all switches on a common faceplate.
Where switches are specified for Class 4 installation in situations exposed to weather, or continual
dampness, ensure they are of the weatherproof pattern in accordance with the relevant BS and minimum
IP65 rating.
Where different phases are present at one switch location, segregate each phase in a separate
compartment and cover each compartment by its own internal warning plate suitably engraved.
"WARNING 415 VOLTS PRESENT".
Mount switches adjacent the closing side of doors where possible.
3.4.3 Socket Outlets
Ensure socket outlets comply with the relevant BS switched and shuttered and mounted in single or multi-
gang assemblies, and are of the type and rating as specified.
Fit plug tops to appliances with fuses of the correct rating.

Install all socket outlets with boxes not less than 35 mm deep with adjustable lugs to ensure socket plates
are true and square. Where required fit boxes flush with finished surface (e.g. floors, skirtings or walls)
and make any adjustments to depth using extension rings.
Ensure all socket outlet boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC
terminal.
Ensure cover plate finish match the lighting switches, flush or surface to suit the mounting box. Outlet
finish shall be agreed with the project engineer and project architect, to provide compliance with Building
Regulations Part M for contrast with wall and size / position of rocker switches.
Ensure the earth pin of each socket is connected to the box earth terminal with a green/yellow insulated
supplementary bonding conductor. Do not use cover screws for earth continuity.
Use neon indicating pattern outlets for appliances with a heating element.
Where socket outlets are specified for Class 4 installation in situation exposed to weather or continual
dampness, ensure that they are of the weatherproof pattern in accordance with the relevant BS and
minimum IP65 rating.
3.4.4 Fused Connection Units
Ensure these are to the relevant BS double-pole switched or un-switched insulated patterns with plates to
match the socket outlets. Outlet finish shall be agreed with the project engineer and project architect, to
provide compliance with Building Regulations Part M for contrast with wall and size / position of rocker
switches.
Where used as a flex outlet for an appliance, ensure they are of the flex outlet pattern with cable anchoring
clamp.
Fit fuses of the correct rating.
Install fused connection units with boxes not less than 35 mm deep with adjustable lugs to ensure the
connection unit are true and square. Fit boxes flush with the wall finish and make any adjustment to depth
using extension rings.
Ensure all boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC terminal.
Ensure the earth connection of the connection unit is connected to the box earth terminal with a
green/yellow insulated supplementary bonding conductor. Do not use cover screws for earth continuity.
3.4.5 Lamp holders
Where lamp holders are required ensure these are heat resisting and comply with the relevant BS. Provide
ceramic interiors for screw type lamps and when used in Class 4 areas.
Provide brass lamp holder with ceramic interiors when integral with luminaires.
Provide white plastic with compression cord grip with flexible pendants, skirted or shrouded. Ensure
batten lamp holders are heat resistant and skirted.
Ensure metal lamp holders are effectively earthed using an earth terminal fixed to the lamp holder by the
manufacturer.

3.4.6 Ceiling Roses
Provide these for all lighting points with a luminaire suspended by a flexible cable without an integral
mounting.
Ensure ceiling roses conform to the relevant BS of the white insulated pattern incorporating 2, 3, or 4
terminals, as necessary. Complete with cord grips.
3.4.7 Lamps
Ensure all lamps are new at handover, allowing reasonable time for testing etc. "Break-in" fluorescent
lamps used on dimming circuits for at least forty hours Ensure lamps shall comply with the relevant BS.
3.4.8 Flexible Cables
Use flexible cables for pendant luminaires and for final connections to equipment (fixed, or portable).
Ensure these are 300/500 volt grade to the relevant British Standard. PVC insulated white circular with HC
tinned copper conductors of minimum size 1.0 sq mm.
Ensure the maximum mass of any suspended luminaire is 3kg unless additional support is provided. Use
heat resistant flexible cables for all non pendant type luminaires.
Use heat resistant flexible cables for making final connections to equipment (fixed or portable) with a
heating element or equipment fixed to pipework or appliance forming part of a heat distribution system;
ensure the flexible cables are 300/500 volt grade complying with the relevant BS.
3.4.9 Control Switches
Ensure double pole and triple pole and neutral control switches are in accordance with relevant B.S.
(Category AC22) respectively and are suited as other accessories defined in Particular Specification items.
Ensure each switch is of the surface or flush pattern as appropriate and install with suitable box and
supplementary bonding conductor.
Ensure switch plates are complete with pilot lamp and where defined in Particular Specification items,
engraved with coloured lettering identifying the equipment being controlled.
If cable outlet plates are required for final connections to equipment, suite these to other accessories.
3.4.10 Shaver Sockets
Install shaver sockets in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations" fed from a
local lighting circuit, and ensure they are manufactured in accordance with the relevant British Standard.
Ensure mounting boxes are installed flush with the wall surface in concealed installations.
3.4.11 Cooker Control Units
Ensure cooker control units are manufactured to the relevant BS, and are complete with a 45amp D.P.
switch and a 13amp switched socket outlet, both with neon indicating lamps.
Mount the cooker control unit alongside the cooker, not directly behind or above.

Make final connections via a fixed cable outlet unit and mount directly behind the cooker. Where split level
hobs and ovens are to be provided, see Particular Specification items for exact final connection details.
3.5 CONDUIT AND CABLE TRUNKING
BS 1710 Specification for identification of pipelines and services

BS 2994 Specification for cold rolled steel sections
BS 4345 Specification for slotted angles
BS 4678 Cable trunking
BS 4800 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations. 17th edition
BS EN 10210 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural steels
BS EN 10142 Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steels strip and sheet for cold forming.
Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on dimensions and
shape
BS EN 10147 Continuously hot-dip zinc coated structural steels strip and sheet
BS EN 10210 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural steels
BS EN 50086 Specification for conduit systems for cable management / electrical installations
BS EN 50086 Specification for conduit systems for cable management.
3.5.2 Protection against Corrosion
Ensure conduit systems comply with relevant British Standards and are of the heavy gauge welded and
screw pattern. Ensure conduit systems are mechanically and electrically continuous throughout.
Ensure the class of protective finish is as follows:-
Class 2 - Medium protection, stoved enamel or air drying paint both inside and outside apply to the general
installation work in locations where Class 4 protection is not required.
Class 4 - Heavy protection, and hot dip zinc coated or sheradised both inside and outside.
Areas deemed to be included as Class 4 areas, unless modified in Particular Specification items are:-
Kitchens; Plant Rooms; Tank Rooms; in Ducts buried in ground; external and internal areas subject to
dampness.
Ensure the protective coatings on conduits and fittings are the same class.

3.5.3 Metallic Conduit
Do not use conduit less than 20mm diameter. Use only galvanized conduit unless specified otherwise.
Thread conduits to the correct length and remove burrs at both ends. Clean off all lubricants and swarf.
Clean existing threads using appropriate running dies before installation.
Ensure all conduits and fittings are free from defects and rust on delivery to site. Store in covered racking
properly protected from any damage or weather.
3.5.4 Metallic Conduit Fittings
Ensure all fittings are malleable iron conforming to relevant British Standards Saddles:
Ensure Class 2 protective areas have spacer bar type saddles with 3mm clearance between the conduit
and fixing surface.
Ensure Class 4 protection areas have distance spacing type saddles with 12mm clearance between the
conduit and fixing surface. Ensure brass fixing screws are used in Class 4 areas.
Plastic saddles / clips shall not be utilized for metallic conduit without the express permission of the project
engineer.
Conduit Boxes:
Ensure circular malleable iron for all draw-in boxes, lighting points, angle boxes, tee boxes, and any
junction up to four conduits. In all other cases use adaptable boxes of the appropriate protective finish.
Ensure all boxes, have heavy steel covers fixed with brass screws, except where covered with a direct
mounting accessory or fitting.
Ensure covers are oversized where used as flush inspection points and with break joint rings at luminaire
and ceiling switch positions. Ensure conduit boxes, with the exception of loop-in boxes, are spout entry,
standard or deep pattern
Ensure loop-in boxes are of the non-screwed entry type.
Ensure conduit boxes in Class 4 protection areas are hot dip galvanized finish.
In instances where the installation is mounted outside a building, or in situations of continual dampness,
ensure hot dip galvanized finish conduit boxes have external fixing lugs with malleable iron covers and
mating machined surfaces and neoprene gaskets.
Adaptable Boxes:
Ensure fitting to relevant British Standard and made of malleable iron or heavy duty steel with welded
joints and tapped lugs to receive the cover screws. Ensure boxes have the same protective coating as the
conduit installation.
Where used in a Class 4 installation, in exterior locations, or in areas of continual dampness, ensure that
adaptable boxes have external lugs and a waterproofing seal between the box and the cover. In other Class
4 areas external lugs are not required.

Ensure that where provided as junction boxes with permissible cable joints, the adaptable boxes are of
adequate size to receive a fixed porcelain or heat resisting terminal block capable of withstanding the
same temperatures as the cable insulation.
Allow for cable sweeps and neat connections.
Install the terminal blocks securely fixed to the box, using sealing washers in exterior locations or in areas
of continual dampness.
Where necessary, provide adaptable boxes with earthed barriers to segregate services. Provide overlap
lids on flush installations.
Bushes:
Use only brass, male type, long threaded bushes where loop-in and non-screwed entries are provided Do
not use lock nuts and ring bushes.
Couplings:
Ensure couplings are to relevant British Standard, with protection against corrosion, as applicable. Earthing.
Terminals:
Provide earthing terminals securely fixed to the box on all equipment boxes, conduit accessories and
adaptable boxes to which cables or flexible conduits are fitted, or to boxes upon which accessories or
equipment are mounted.
Serrated Washers:
Use spring metal, female type.
3.5.5 Metallic Conduit and fittings installation
Carry out all conduit work, whether surface or concealed, in accordance with sound practice and in a
workman like manner using skilled Tradesmen.
Ensure conduits be surface or concealed as detailed in Particular Specification.
Size all conduits so as to comply with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations". Note that the
grouping correction factor used in determining the size of cables within conduits is 0.65, equivalent to 4
circuits.
Take care with the appearance of the installations. Install all accessories, adaptable boxes, draw-in boxes,
etc., "square".
Install inspection boxes in accessible positions giving due regard to switch and socket positions and any
aesthetic requirements.
Cut all conduit threads "square" to the correct length and properly butt. Do not allow exposed threads,
except on running couplings. Ream all ends smooth.
Where conduits are connected to trunking, metallic boxes, panels, switchgear, or any item not having a
tapped entry (or a tapped entry of 6mm or less), make the connections by long threaded male brass bushes
with a coupling and serrated spring washer after removing the paint with a purpose made tool.

Tighten bushes with a tool specifically designed for that purpose - do not use pliers or toothed wrenches.
Use locknuts with running couplings in Class 2 areas.
Take special care to prevent dirt and moisture entering conduit installations. Do not leave ends of conduits
open during building operations; effectively plug and coat ends with petroleum jelly. Use only screwed
caps or shaped plugs.
Similarly protect conduit entries to all boxes by shaped plugs.
Form all easy sweep bends on a proprietary bending machine. Using correct forming tool for conduit size.
Do not use 'site' manufactured bends, elbow or tee components or U-bends the radii of 'pulled' bends
shall be as defined in the relevant British Standard.
Space conduits at least 150mm from other services, i.e. gas, water, steam, etc., and where this minimum
spacing cannot be achieved, then cross bond at least once per room.
Allow for sufficient draw-in boxes to permit ease of wiring/rewiring. Ensure the following also applies:-
No of right- angled bends Maximum distance between draw-in boxes
NIL 10m
1 10m
2 6m
For the purposes of this Specification, a double-set constitutes the equivalent of 1 no. right-angled bend.
Ensure not more than 2-No. right-angled bends or a 10m length of conduit between draw-in boxes.
Support each bend, set, adaptable box, conduit box, etc., at 150mm each side equally placed. Secure
saddles and boxes by screws of a minimum size of 30mm x No.8.
Use approved masonry fixing devices. Do not use wood or fibre plugs. Make holes neatly in masonry with
a masonry drill of the correct size for the device being used.
Drill and tap holes in metalwork using 6 mm diameter metal thread screws.
Where the items to be fixed have countersunk holes, use countersunk screws; use roundhead screws in all
other cases.
Ensure that accessory boxes are surely fixed using a minimum of 2-No. fixings. Use shot-fired fixings only
with the prior approval of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise defined in Particular Specification items, or on the drawings, avoid the drilling of
structural steelwork for fixing methods and use only proprietary fixings such as 'clamps', 'rod clips' etc.
Provide all lighting points, socket outlets, equipment points, etc., with a suitable box securely fixed to the
building fabric, which is able to support the weight of the fittings etc. The box can be the housing of the
accessory or equipment provided it is metal with conduit entry.
Use graphite paste for lubrication.
Immediately after installation make good all conduits and boxes with any damage to finish; remove all
rust, brush to bright metal, and prime and paint to match the existing finish. Similarly treat all exposed
threads (only permissible at running joints) and all bush and coupling joints. In Class 4 areas, effect the
foregoing by using two coats of zinc enriched paint.

In areas where there is danger of condensation, fill boxes with moisture repelling compound. Adequately
drain/clear and swab all conduit work before wiring is carried out.
Do not draw in cables until the section of the conduit is complete.
Draw in cables in a careful and workmanlike manner. "Comb" cables as drawing-in proceeds and lay the
neutral and protective conductors of each circuit with each phase cable of that circuit.
Ensure that the entire conduit system is electrically continuous throughout, forming a fully bonded system,
the whole system being effectively earthed. Carry out earth continuity tests before any conduits are
concealed.
3.5.6 Conduit installation concealed
Do not bury galvanized conduits in concrete or floor screeds.
Bury conduit in floor and/or roof screeds at least 25mm depth over its entire length. Plan and install routes
so that the crossing of conduits is avoided. Ensure conduits laid parallel are at least 150mm apart. Fix
conduits laid in "in-situ" concrete securely to the reinforcement steelwork. Fix conduit boxes to the
shuttering.
Where concealed in plastered walls, ensure conduit shall have 12mm cover along its whole length and do
not permit horizontal routes.
Fix by crampets or saddles, or other propriety fixing, at sufficient intervals to prevent displacement and in
accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations"
Where conduits are laid fixed across constructional expansion joints, use expansion couplings with suitable
earth bonding conductors proving equipotential bonding.
Where conduits are specified to be installed above suspended ceilings, fix to the building fabric at distances
to comply with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations", by saddles or suspended on steel
strapping or on circular steel suspension sets using saddles or patent suspension clips. Do not use
suspensions which allow the sideways movement of conduit.
Ensure all lighting points or cord switch points have fixings independent from the ceiling structure and
similar to the conduit fixings above.
Where conduit is concealed above ceilings of plaster, or rigid construction, bring ceiling boxes flush to the
finished ceiling level; use extension rings to ensure compliance with this clause.
With ceilings and walls of the demountable type, fit conduit boxes above the ceiling or flush in walls with
an extension ring to close the gap to the ceiling face or wall finish.
Ensure all adaptable boxes, draw-in boxes, conduit boxes, etc., have overlapping covers flush with the
finished walls or ceilings.
Where partitions and walls are of such a construction that it is not possible to make a normal conduit entry
to the flush accessory box. Install an extension box fitted to the back of the accessory box.
Where necessary, include break joint rings at all luminaire or ceiling switch points.
Where surface mounting equipment is mounted on a concealed conduit installation, drill, bush and mount
the equipment over a recessed adaptable box so as to conceal the flush installation.

3.5.7 Metallic conduit installation surface
Ensure conduits are installed neatly on the surface and routes are truly horizontal, vertical, or parallel with
the features of the building. Lay all double sets parallel.
Wherever possible, locate conduits in unimportant areas and pass through walls using back-entry type
boxes.
Support conduits by spacer bar saddles fixed at regular intervals not exceeding that set out in BS7671 -
Use fixing screws sized 30mm x No.8, steel for Class 2 work and sheradised for Class 4 work.
Where two or more conduits are installed parallel, increase and decrease bending radii to ensure a
continuous parallel installation.
Do not use running couplers with locknuts for Class 4 work; use only manufactured conduit unions.
Where conduits are specified for installation in the ground use those of the Class 4 pattern and wrap in
mastic damp-proof bond tape, half-lap and extend for at least 300mm beyond the ground emergence
point.
Arrange conduits so as to minimize the collection of water from condensation or other sources. Where
necessary drill drain holes (3mm diameter) at the lowest points or at any other points required by the
Engineer.
In multiple conduit installations, do not cross conduits.
Where a surface conduit turns through a wall install a back outlet box.
3.5.8 Metallic flexible conduit
Ensure metallic flexible conduit complies with relevant British Standards and is of helical coiled steel with
a waterproof sheath overall. Use such conduit generally for final connections to equipment in the following
locations:-
All equipment subject to vibration, including all electric motors.
All equipment which is subject to adjustment or which can be withdrawn for maintenance.
Motorized valves, thermostats, controls, sensors, forming part of a piped or ductwork system, storage
tanks, oil burners, etc.
Ensure metal flexible conduit is not less than 300mm, and generally not longer than 1000mm, unless agreed
with the Engineer.
Terminate flexible conduits in factory made couplings forming a waterproof and damp-proof connection.
Terminate the rigid conduit with an appropriate box to receive the flexible conduit.
3.5.9 Non Metallic Conduit
Ensure conduits comply with relevant British Standards and be heavy gauge, high impact, self-fire-
extinguishing PVC, free from imperfections, smooth inside and outside; of minimum diameter 20mm.
Ensure conduits are of the same colour throughout the entire installation.

3.5.10 Non Metallic Conduit Fittings
Ensure all fittings are of the same specification and colour, and comply with relevant British Standards,
and as follows:-
Ensure standard boxes are circular pattern with push fit spouts to relevant British Standards, with a PVC lid
held in place with brass or nylon screws.
Provide circular boxes for all outlet points for luminaires and ceiling switches. Ensure boxes have fitted
brass earth terminals and be heat resistant and reinforced with tapped metal inserts for fitting and fixing
screws
Ensure adaptable boxes are to the same specification as the conduit, PVC lids fixed by brass or nylon
screws. Do not use adaptable boxes smaller than 75mm x 50mm or larger than 300mm x 300mm. Where
cable joints are permitted or specified, ensure boxes are of adequate size to contain the terminal block
and space for making neat connections.
Fix the terminal block to the adaptable box using brass or nylon screws.
For surface mounted PVC conduits fit saddles of the spacer bar type to provide 3mm clearance fix saddles
with brass screws.
For concealed PVC conduits fix saddles of the single hole, half clip, and type.
3.5.11 Non Metallic Conduit Installation
Ensure all non-metallic conduit work is carried out by tradesmen skilled in this work.
Ensure all non-metallic conduits are sized to comply with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical
Installations". Note that the grouping correction factor used in determining the size of cables within
conduits is 0.65, equivalent to 4 circuits.
Use PVC adhesive for jointing conduit to couplers, adaptable boxes etc. Use proprietary adhesive for the
jointing; "fixed" type for rigid connection and "flexible" type for expansion joints. Insert square cut
conduits to the full depth of the spout.
Where conduits terminate in trunking or accessories without a smooth bored spout, make the connections
by female plain to threaded adaptors, secured by a male bush.
Where conduits terminate at tapped conduit entry boxes, use male plain to threaded adaptors.
Install separate protective conductors with green and yellow coloured insulation for all circuits and
services. Ensure the rating of protective conductors is in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for
Electrical Installations"
Make all bends, with the exception of solid normal bends, on site by using the appropriate bending springs.
Make the radius of the bends not less than 2.5 times the diameter of the conduit. Make bends only at
ambient temperatures of + 10`C and above. Do not use elbows or tees.
Take special care to prevent dirt and moisture entering conduit/installations. Use screwed caps or shaped
plugs only.
Space expansion joints at a maximum of 6m with a joint made using flexible type adhesive at the spout
and end of a coupler.

Secure saddles and boxes by screws of a minimum size of 30mm x No.8.
Use approved masonry fixing devices. Do not use wood or fibre plugs. Make holes neatly in masonry using
a masonry drill of the correct size for the device being used.
Drill and tap holes in metalwork using 6 mm diameter metal thread screws.
Where the items to be fixed have countersunk holes, use countersunk screws, use roundhead screws in
all other cases.
Unless otherwise defined in Particular Specification items or on the drawings, the drilling of structural
steelwork for fixing methods will not be permitted. Use proprietary fixings such as 'clamps, 'rod clips' etc.
Ensure that accessories are securely fixed using a minimum of 2 No fixings.
Use 2 No fixings with large washers for conduit boxes supporting luminaires or ceiling pull switches.
Take care in the appearance of the installation. Ensure all accessories, adaptable boxes, draw-in boxes,
etc., are truly square.
Install inspection boxes in accessible positions giving due regard to switch and socket position and any
aesthetic requirements.
Do not use non-metallic conduits in situations where ambient temperatures are likely to be lower than -
5oC or higher than 60oC. If temperatures are likely to be lower than -5oC, but not lower than -25oC
then use type 'B' PVC conduit, as described in BS 4607 and BS 6099,
Ensure conduits are spaced as far as practicable from gas, water, steam and other services, paying due
regard to the temperature limitations of non- metallic conduits.
Allow for sufficient draw-in boxes to permit ease of wiring/rewiring and minimize the use of draw wires.
The following shall also apply:-
No of right- angled bends Maximum distance between draw-in boxes
NIL 10m
1 10m
2 6m
For the purpose of this specification, a double set constitutes the equivalent of 1-No. right-angled bend.
Do not use more than two right-angled bends, or a 10m length of conduit between draw-in boxes.
Support each bend set, adaptable box, and conduit box, at 150mm (maximum) on each side, equally
spaced. In areas where there is danger of condensation, fill boxes with a moisture repelling compound.
Ensure all conduit work is drained, cleared, and swabbed before wiring is carried out. Do not draw in cables
until the section of conduit is complete.
Draw-in cables in a careful and workmanlike manner. "Comb" cables as drawing-in proceeds and install
the neutral and circuit protective conductor of each circuit with the phase cable(s) of that circuit.

3.5.12 Non Metallic Conduit Concealed Installation
Cover conduit buried in floor and/or roof screeds with at least 25mm depth over the entire length. Plan
and install conduit routes so that crossings are avoided, and lay parallel conduit 150mm apart.
Where concealed in plastered walls, cover conduits with 12mm cover along the entire length. Avoid
horizontal routes.
Ensure conduits laid in in-situ concrete are securely fixed to the reinforcement steelwork. Fix conduit boxes
to the shuttering.
Make fixings by means of single hole plastic half- clips. Place these at intervals to comply with BS7671 -
"Requirements for Electrical Installations" and at all changes of direction to prevent displacement.
Ensure conduits specified to be installed above suspended ceilings are fixed to the building fabric at
distances to comply with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations", by saddles or suspended on
steel strapping or on circular steel suspension sets using saddles or patent suspension clips. Do not use
suspensions which allow the sideways movement of conduits.
Where conduit is concealed above ceilings of plaster, or rigid construction, bring the ceiling boxes flush to
the finished ceiling level. Use extension rings, to ensure compliance with this clause.
With ceilings and walls of the demountable type, fit conduit boxes above the ceiling or recessed in the wall,
with extension rings to close the gap to the face of the ceiling or wall finish.
On boxes of all types, install overlapping covers flush with the finished walls and ceilings.
Where partitions and walls are of such a construction that it is not possible to make normal conduit entry
to the flush accessory box, terminate the conduit in a box deep into the wall and use deep extension boxes
so as to finish flush.
Include break joint rings at all luminaire or ceiling switch points.
Where surface mounting equipment is mounted on a concealed installation, install a recessed adaptable
box with the back of equipment drilled and bushed. Then install the surface mounted equipment entirely
concealing the adaptable box.
3.5.13 Non Metallic Conduit Surface Installation
Ensure conduits are installed neatly on the surface horizontal, vertical and parallel with the features of the
building. Lay all double sets parallel.
Wherever possible, locate conduits in unimportant areas and pass through walls using back-entry type
boxes.
Support conduits by spacer bar saddles at distances not greater than those set out in BS7671 -
"Requirements for Electrical Installations"
Where two or more conduits are installed parallel, increase bending radii to ensure a continuous parallel
installation.
In multiple conduit routes, do not cross conduits. Where a surface conduit turns through a wall provide a
back outlet box.

3.5.14 Non Metallic Flexible Conduit
Ensure non-metallic flexible conduits comply with relevant British Standards. Use such conduits generally
for final connections to equipment in the following locations
All equipment subject to vibration, including all electric motors.
All equipment subject to adjustment or maintenance which can be withdrawn. Thermostats, control
sensors etc. not forming part of a piped or ductwork system.
Do not use non-metallic flexible conduit for final connection to heat producing equipment.
Ensure the minimum length of non-metallic flexible conduit for the above is 300mm and the maximum
length is 1000mm unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer.
Use non-metallic flexible conduits of the heavy duty reinforced pattern, of the same manufacturer, colour
and composition as the remainder of the PVC conduit installation.
Terminate non-metallic flexible conduits with the coupling connection produced by, or recommended by,
the manufacturer.
Terminate the rigid conduit in a box to receive the flexible conduit.

.
.Use only weatherproof flexible conduit in external or continually damp locations.
3.5.15 Metallic Cable Trunking
Manufacture all metal cable trunking from sheet steel in accordance with relevant British Standards.
Supply the trunking in standard lengths, free from all sharp edges and projections with each length
including a coupling sleeve
To protect against corrosion use stove enamel or "Zintec" inside and outside in Class 2 conduit areas, and
hot dip zinc coating in Class 4 conduit areas.
Install trunking routes neatly on the surface truly vertical, horizontal, or parallel with the features of the
building.
Size the trunking in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements of Electrical Installations". Minimum size
shall be 50x50mm trunking, with larger sizes selected from standard increments of 50mm (i.e. 100x50mm,
150x100mm etc).
Install additional spring straps to separate cables in trunking of 100 mm or larger. Avoid bunching of cables
in the bottom of the trunking.
Ensure trunking routes are mechanically and electrically continuous throughout their length. Fit brass
continuity links to all trunking joints exterior to the trunking, use brass bolts and shake-proof washers.
Use multi-compartment trunking where segregation of cables is required.
Do not pass conduits through the trunking body to serve a particular compartment. Connect conduits to
the respective compartments externally use appropriate boxes.
In concealed conduit installations terminate the recessed conduit boxes immediately behind the
appropriate compartment, and feed cables through a bushed hole.

The situations where tees and junctions are to be installed use multi-compartment fittings of such depth
as to ensure suitable passover connections.
Install all underfloor/flush floor trunking systems where required complete with segregated
compartments, fixed straight and level and in accordance with the selected manufacturer's installation
instructions.
1. Install complete appropriate floor service outlet boxes, junction and change of direction boxes,
vertical intersection boxes to form a complete installation.
2. Install all floor boxes of the fully adjustable pattern fitted with the required segregated compartments,
with appropriate lids.
3. Install, power data and telephone outlets as required.
4. Where trunking is to be laid in floor screeds ensure that no void occurs below trunking lengths and
that the routes/boxes are correctly packed. Take precautions to prevent the ingress of screed or debris
into the trunking system.
5. Ensure that all floor trunking level alignment is correct and the desired level is maintained throughout
the screed laying process.
6. Ensure that the underfloor trunking systems are fully rewireable to all final service outlets. Where
wireways only are required then include draw-in wires to suit the particular system(s).
Install heat barriers in vertical routes of trunking of 5m or more internal fire barriers when passing through
floors or fire compartment walls.
Install insulated pin racks supporting cables in vertical lengths exceeding 3m pin rack maximum centres 2m.
"Install" removable cable restraining straps into trunking at 600mm (maximum) intervals where trunking
covers are fixed on the bottom or side of trunking.
Install drip proof, close fitting trunking covers along the complete trunking length. Ensure trunking covers
are of the same material and protective finish as the trunking.
Do not use self-tapping screws or fixed bridge pieces to hold the cover in position.
Fix trunking securely at intervals not exceeding that set out in BS7671 - "Requirements of Electrical
Installations".
Use manufacturer's standard fittings only. Non Standard fittings, where necessary will be accepted only
with the Engineers agreement.
Ensure all fittings are of the same material and protective finish as the trunking.
Make connections to distribution boards, equipment, panels etc., by using manufactured flanges giving
the full trunking capacity, making due allowance for the future installation of cables from spare ways. Fit
appropriate gaskets between the flange and board etc. to maintain I.P. rating.
Make connections between trunking and equipment by means of a brass male bush, coupling and
internally serrated washer, or a standard flanged coupling.

Where trunking is cut to receive flanges etc. protect the cut edges of the trunking with a suitable material
to prevent damage to wiring.
Ensure the cover is removable over the whole length of the trunking. Where trunking passes through walls
and ceilings, provide a short length of fixed cover to form a sleeve for 25mm on each side.
Where flush trunking is used, install flush-type covers and ensure the finished edge of the trunking is flush
with the fabric of the building.
Suspensions or fixings must not intrude into the internal space. Use roundhead screws for joining to
suspension or fixings. Remove any burrs to the head of the screw.
At construction expansion joints provide the trunking with a sliding coupling complete with a flexible
protective conductor ensuring equipotential bonding.
Do not use trunking in exterior locations.
Prior to installing cables in trunking remove all debris and take precautions to prevent further ingress of
debris.
3.5.16 Non Metallic Cable Trunking
Ensure that non-metallic cable trunking complies with relevant British Standards and is of heavy gauge
high impact quality, self-extinguishing extruded PVC compound. Ensure the trunking is smooth inside and
outside and fitted with drip-proof lids.
Size the trunking in accordance with BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations".
Install additional spring straps to separate cables in trunking of 100 mm or larger. Avoid bunching of cables
in the bottom of the trunking.
Install trunking routes neatly on the surface truly horizontal, vertical and parallel with the building
features. Use multi-compartment trunking where segregation of cables is required.
Do not pass conduits through the trunking body to serve a particular compartment; connect conduits to
the respective compartment externally using appropriate boxes.
In concealed conduit installations, terminate the sunken boxes immediately behind the compartment
served with cables fed back-entry into the trunking.
In situations where tees and junctions are to be installed, use multi-compartment fittings of such depth to
ensure suitable passover connections.
Do not use non-metallic trunking for vertical routes of 5m or more where heat barriers are required in a
manner to prevent high temperature rise; use appropriate metallic trunking.
Do not insert non-metallic trunking in fire compartment walls, or pass through floors. Use metal trunking
of the correct classification in these instances with a short length of cover to form a sleeve. Ensure the
cover of non- metallic trunking is removable throughout.
For all changes of direction, terminations, tees, use the manufacturer's fittings and suitably gusset bends
and tees for the largest cables. Do not use site fabricated fittings unless the situations encountered make
the use of manufactured fittings impracticable. In such cases seek the agreement of the Engineer and
submit sample site- fabricated trunking for consideration.

Make connections to distribution boards by flanges giving the full trunking capacity. Cement the flange to
the trunking. Install an appropriate gasket between flange and board to maintain I.P. rating of Board etc.
Install insulated pin racks supporting cables in vertical runs exceeding 3m pin rack maximum centres are
2m.
Install removable cable retaining straps into trunking at 600mm (maximum) intervals where trunking
covers are fixed to the bottom or side of trunking.
Fix trunking securely to the building at intervals not exceeding that set out in BS7671 - "Requirements for
Electrical Installations".
Give due allowance for expansion to all fixings and connections as recommended by the manufacturer.
Provide trunking sliding coupling or other approved method of flexible coupling at structural expansion
joints.
Do not allow suspensions or fixings to intrude into the internal space. Use roundhead screws for joining of
suspensions or fixings. Remove any burrs to the head of the screw.
Remove all debris prior to installing cables and take precautions to prevent further ingress of debris.
3.6 CABLE TRAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS
BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip.

BS 6946 Specification for metal channel cable support systems for electrical installations.
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations - IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition.
3.6.2 General
Ensure cable trays are perforated sheet steel to relevant British Standards and formed with returned
flange. Use medium duty tray internally.
Use heavy duty tray externally.
Allow 30% spare capacity for future cables in the sizing of all trays.
Take care to avoid any electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Never allow any copper cable or
fitting to be in contact with the galvanising. Generally ensure cables are PVC and/or LSF sheath. Where
cables have no sheathing then lay these on a layer of PVC material securely fixed to the tray.
Use standard manufacturer’s fittings, if local situations make it impracticable fabricated fittings will be
accepted provided they are of the same quality and protective finish.

Ensure sets and bends are sized to allow for the minimum permissible radius of the largest cable on the
tray. Ensure cables shall retain their relative positions on all bends and sweeps.
Maintain earth continuity at all joints with suitable earth links. Ensure joints have all burrs removed and
are made by fishplates and screws.
Provide protective grommets through all cut holes in the body of the tray.
3.6.3 Installation of Cable Tray
Allow space between the tray and structure to give ease for securing the cable fixings and general
maintenance, 75mm minimum.
Install cable trays on mild steel supports with suitable protective coating, fixed to the structure at not more
than 1 metre intervals, or at such spacing to ensure a maximum deflection of 5 mm when loaded. Use
fixings of expanding masonry bolts or equal. Alternatively, use proprietary steel channel permitting easy
adjustment and modification. Proprietary clamp fixings on to the flanges of structural beams are also
permitted.
Prime and paint all metalwork, fixing bolts etc., with two coats of zinc enriched paint.
Avoid any obstruction or other services to ensure the installation can be adequately installed and
maintained.
Achieve joints in sections of cable tray and fixing of tray to support brackets by means of sheradised
mushroom headed bolts and nuts with the threaded portion on the reverse side to the cables.
Use ladder rack only when specified and conform to the British Standard previously outlined under this
heading and using manufactured bends, tees etc.
Where cable trays are installed across expansion joints fit a proprietary slip connector fixed at one end
only.
3.6.4 Installation of Cables
Fix cables to tray at minimum spacing set out in BS7671 - "Requirements for Electrical Installations", using
plastic coated metal straps or proprietary cleats of a pattern recommended by the cable manufacturer.
Ensure all fixing bolts/studs are sheradised and where necessary of sufficient length to allow stacking of
cables.
3.7 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS

CIBSE SLL Code for Lighting.

CIBSE LG1 – The Industrial Environment
CIBSE LG2 – Hospitals and Health Care Buildings
CIBSE LG4 – Sports
CIBSE LG5 – Lighting for Education.
CIBSE LG6 The Outdoor Environment

CIBSE LG7 Office Lighting

CIBSE LG9 Lighting for Communal Residential Buildings
CIBSE LG10 Daylighting and Window Design
CIBSE LG11 Surface Reflectance and Colour
CIBSE LG12 Emergency Lighting Design Guide
BS67 Specification for ceiling roses.
BS 559 Specification for design, construction and installation of signs
BS 1853 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service. Specification for lamps used
in the United Kingdom not included in BS EN 60081, BS EN 60901, BS EN 61195
and BS EN61199
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations. 17th edition
BS 7895 Specification for bayonet lamp holders with enhanced safety
BS EN 40 Lighting Columns
BS EN 13032 Measurement and presentation of photometric data of lamps and luminaires;
Presentation of data for emergency lighting of work places
BS EN 50014 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres. General requirements
BS EN 50018 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres. Flameproof enclosures
'd'
BS EN 50020 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres. Intrinsic safety 'i'
BS EN 50102 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against
external mechanical impacts (IP code)
BS EN 50107 Signs and luminous-discharge-tube installations operating from a no-load rated
output voltage exceeding 1 kV but not exceeding 10 kV
BS EN 55015 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of
electrical lighting and similar equipment
BS EN 60061-1 Specification for lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of
inter-changeability and safety. Lamps caps
BS EN 60061-2 Specification for lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of
inter-changeability and safety. Lamp holders
BS EN 60064 Tungsten filament lamps for domestic and similar general lighting purposes.
Performance requirements
BS EN 60079 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
BS EN 60081 Double-capped fluorescent lamps. Performance specifications
BS EN 60188 High-pressure mercury vapour lamps. Performance specifications
BS EN 60192 Low pressure sodium vapour lamps. Performance specification
BS EN 60238 Edison screw lamp holders
BS EN 60357 Tungsten halogen lamps (non-vehicle). Performance specifications
BS EN 60400 Lamp holders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starter holders
BS EN 60432-1 Safety specification for incandescent lamps. Tungsten filament lamps for domestic
and similar general lighting purposes
BS EN 60432-2 Safety specification for incandescent lamps. Tungsten halogen lamps for domestic
and similar general lighting purposes
BS EN 60570 Electrical supply track systems for luminaires
BS EN 60598 Luminaires
BS EN 60598-1 Luminaires. General requirements and tests
BS EN 60598-2-22 Luminaires. Particular requirements. Luminaires for emergency lighting
BS EN 60630 Maximum lamp outlines for incandescent lamps
BS EN 60662 Maximum lamp outlines for incandescent lamps
BS EN 60730-2-3 Specification for automatic electrical controls for household and similar use.
Particular requirements. Thermal protectors for ballasts for tubular fluorescent
lamps
BS EN 60901 Specification for single-capped fluorescent lamps. Performance specifications

BS EN 60921 Specification for ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps. Performance

requirements
BS EN 60923 Auxiliaries for lamps. Ballasts for discharge lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent
lamps). Performance requirements
BS EN 60925 Specification for performance requirements for d.c. supplied electronic ballasts
for tubular fluorescent lamps
BS EN 60927 Specification for auxiliaries for lamps. Starting devices (other than glow starters).
BS EN 60929 Specification for a.c. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
BS EN 60968 Specification for self-ballasted lamps for general lighting services. Safety
requirements
BS EN 60969 Self-ballasted lamps for general lighting services. Performance requirements
BS EN 61047 Specification for d.c. or a.c. supplied electronic step-down convertors for filament
lamps. Performance requirements Y73 Luminaires and Lamps Revision 00 NAMRC
June 2010 Building Services Specification Page 622 of 674 Copyright c Buro
Happold Limited Buro Happold
BS EN 61048 Specification for capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge
lamp circuits. General and safety requirements
BS EN 61049 Specification for capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge
lamp circuits. Performance requirements
BS EN 61050 Specification for transformers for tubular discharge lamps having a noload output
voltage exceeding 1000 V (generally called neon-transformers). General and
safety requirements
BS EN 61184 Bayonet lamp holders
BS EN 61195 Double-capped fluorescent lamps. Safety specifications
BS EN 61199 Single-capped fluorescent lamps. Safety specifications
BS EN 61347-2-1 Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for starting devices (other than glow
starters)
BS EN 61347-2-2 Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for d.c. or a.c. supplied electronic
step-down convertors for filament lamps
BS EN 61347-2-3 Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for a.c. supplied electronic ballasts for
fluorescent lamps
BS EN 61347-2-4 Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for d.c. supplied electronic ballasts for
general lighting
public transport lighting
aircraft lighting
emergency lighting
BS EN 61347-2-8 Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps
BS EN 61347-2-9 Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for ballasts for discharge lamps
(excluding fluorescent lamps)
BS EN 61547 Specification for equipment for general lighting purposes. EMC immunity
requirements
BS EN 61549 Specification for miscellaneous lamps
BS EN 62035 Discharge lamps (excluding fluorescent lamps). Safety specifications
ICEL1001

3.7.2 Luminaires
Supply, erect, and connect all luminaires complete with all glass ware, diffusers, lamps, appropriate control
gear and where necessary gasket seals, in the positions shown on the drawings and/or described in the
particular specification. Ensure that Luminaires/lighting installations comply with the requirements of all
relevant British Standards and Code of Practice.
Regardless of project procurement method, the luminaire type and specification shall be as stated within
the particular specification or as shown on the drawings. Where an equal and approved luminaire choice
is given, the alternative luminaire specification and photometric data shall be forwarded to the engineer
for approval.
There is no obligation for the Engineer to accept an equal and approved alternative.
No alternative luminaire or lamp shall be accepted, unless stated in writing by the Engineer.
Unless stated to the contrary within the particular specification, all luminaires shall incorporate high
frequency control gear.
The contractor shall allow for all luminaires to be completed with the appropriate lamp type and wattage.
Provide all pendant luminaires with suspension system and associated flexible cable to a minimum length
of 600 mm unless otherwise stated.
Connect all metalwork on luminaires to the circuit protective conductor with proprietary approved
earthing arrangements.
Do not permit luminaires which are fixed on to, or recessed into suspended ceilings to have their weight
borne by the ceiling unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer. Suspend luminaires from the
structure or ceiling beams over. Use steel strapping or circular steel suspension or proprietary fixing
methods. Two fixings at least are required for luminaires up to 300mm wide and four fixings for sizes over
300mm wide.
Provide plug in ceiling rose outlets complete with plug for each recessed luminaire installed in a suspended
ceiling. Install in a convenient accessible position to facilitate the removal of the luminaire.
Ensure ceiling rose lids are installed and fitted. Supply and fix all fixing and suspension materials.
Ensure the luminaire back plate fully covers the conduit box in concealed installations. Use white break
joint rings where the conduit boxes cannot be concealed by the luminaire back plate
Do not use fluorescent luminaires for through- wiring unless the luminaire is specifically designed for that
purpose and incorporates a segregated wiring channel.
Ensure the noise level emitted by the control gear of fluorescent luminaires is in accordance with the
following:- 36W/40W - 25dB; 58W/65W - 28dB; 70W/75W - 30dB and 100W/125W - 35dB. All at 250Hz.
Ensure fluorescent luminaires are individually power factor corrected - use shunt connected capacitors to
achieve a minimum 0.85 p.f.
Thoroughly clean luminaires after installation, leaving the installation in a new, clean condition at
handover. Do not use the permanent lighting installation for temporary lighting purposes during the
contract period unless prior written approval is obtained from the Engineer. In such cases provide new
lamps at the handover for the Employer's use.

Contractor's responsibility to ensure correctness of luminaires for the type of installation, location lamp
voltage, ceiling void size (including tee section size etc).
3.8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMS
BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations

BS 5445 Components of Automatic Fire Detection Systems
BS 5446 Components of Automatic Fire Detection Systems for Residential Premises.
BS 5839 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems for Buildings
3.8.2 General
Fire detection and alarm equipment shall comply with BS 5445 and BS 5839.
The requirements related to zoning of detectors and call points, circuiting and grouping of fire alarm
devices, circuit arrangements (open or closed), circuit monitoring, two stage alarms, repeater indicator
panels, operation of ancillary services and connections to a central fire alarm station shall be as indicated.
Each system shall operate at 24 volts dc, unless otherwise stated. All components in a system shall be
compatible with each other.
Systems involving detectors shall be so designed that removal of one detector indicates a fault but does
not render other detectors inoperative. Provision shall be included so that testing of individual detectors
can be made without sounding an alarm nor necessitating the complete system to be disabled to prevent
an alarm.
Mounting heights shall be in accordance with section 3.4.8, but indicating equipment and fire detectors
shall be at the height indicated.
3.8.3 Control and Indication
The fire alarm control and indicating equipment shall incorporate a switch to enable the audible alarm to
be silenced. The switch shall be key operated unless otherwise indicated.
Zone alarm indicators shall each comprise two lamps connected in parallel and arranged so that the failure
of either of the lamps is apparent during the course of a routine test.
Where MI cables are used the control and indication equipment shall be fitted with surge suppressers as
necessary.
The control and indicating equipment shall be contained in an enclosure suitable for surface or flush
mounting as indicated. The manufacturer’s standard finish shall be provided unless otherwise indicated.

A correctly orientated plan of the premises showing the locations of fire zones and the various entrances,
and operating instructions for the correct action in the event of a fire or fault indication, shall be positioned
adjacent to each control and indicating equipment. They shall be in a durable form.
A log book shall be provided to enable records to be kept of inspections and tests of the system and of
incidents, together with their cause an the action taken
3.8.4 Standby Power Supplies
The standby power supply shall comprise a secondary battery with automatic charger. Batteries shall be
lead acid or nickel cadium with sealed cells as indicated. The standby power supply shall have a duration
as indicated.
Suitable links shall be included so that the battery may be disconnected without interrupting the supply
from the charger to the fire detection and alarm system.
The battery charger shall be fitted with a milli-ammeter to indicate the rate of charge.
3.8.5 Sounders
Fire alarm bells shall have the operating mechanism contained within the dome; the dome shall be 200mm
diameter unless otherwise indicated. They shall be suitable for fixing direct to circular conduit boxes.
Other types of sounders shall be as indicated. They shall be suitable for fixing direct to circular conduit
boxes.
3.8.6 Manual Call Points
Manual call points shall be of the frangible cover type, with a protective cover of plastic.
3.8.7 Fire Detectors
Fire detectors shall be of the type as indicated. They shall be of the locally resettable and detachable type
unless otherwise indicated.
All fire detectors shall include visual indication of operation; where detectors are located out of normal
view. The indicator shall be mounted separately in the location as indicated. The visual indication shall be
an LED.
Fire detectors shall be suitable for fixing direct to circular boxes.
3.8.8 Wiring
The installation shall comply with the relevant selections of this Specification. The type and size of cables
shall be as indicated.
All the fire alarm system, including wiring to manual call points, detectors shall be the same type as the
sounder circuit wiring.
Cables shall be looped between equipment and junction boxes kept to a minimum as far as practicable.
Junction boxes shall be identified by a label inscribed “FIRE ALARM”.

3.8.9 Future Extensions
Where future extensions are indicated the control and indicator equipment and the standby power supply
shall have adequate capacity for their operation; zone identification shall be left blank unless otherwise
indicated. The plan of the premises shall not show the future extensions.
3.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
BS 5266 Emergency Lighting
3.9.2 General
Emergency lighting systems shall comply with BS5266, Local Fire Officer and Building Control
Requirements. Emergency lighting equipment shall comply with Industry Standard ICEL: 1001.
3.9.3 Batteries
Batteries shall be lead acid or nickel cadmium with sealed or open cells as indicated.
Batteries shall be contained in an enclosure or rack mounted as indicated. Where batteries are not in an
enclosure, insulating covers shall be provided over all cell terminals and inter-connections. All leads shall
be insulated.
Batteries shall be maintained in good condition on site with all necessary precautions being taken to
prevent deterioration; they shall be handed over, at the completion of the works, fully charged.
With each group of batteries a syringe type hydrometer, a container of distilled water and a plastic jug
shall be provided as appropriate.
3.9.4 Control Equipment
All the control equipment including mains failure relays, contactors, battery charger, invertor, protection
fuses, control switches, instruments and indicators shall be contained in enclosures.
Battery chargers shall be capable of recharging the batteries after they have been discharged for the
specified duration of the system so that within 14h, or other period where indicated, the batteries can
again support the load for the specified duration period: this requirement shall be achieved without
exceeding the maximum design charging characteristics of the batteries.
Instruments shall provide indication of battery voltage, trickle charge and boost charge currents, indication
shall be provided of battery charger functioning and battery charger failure. Other instruments and alarms
and provision for remote display of alarms shall be provided as indicated.

Simulation of mains failure shall be by means of a tamper-proof switch operated by a removable key.
3.9.5 Wiring
The wiring installation shall comply with the relevant sections of this specification. The type of cables shall
be as indicated suitable for the specified duty and application.
Wiring shall not be drawn into the same conduit, trunking compartment or ducting compartment as cables
of other Band 1 circuits. The cores of emergency lighting circuits shall not be contained within the same
multicore cable, flexible cable or flexible cord as cores of any other circuits.
3.10 Lightning Protection
Proposed Early Streamer emission (Active Lightning Protection)
Earth electrodes shall comply with section 3.1.3.
Inspection pits shall be provided, in accordance with clause 3.1.6.
The Engineer's approval of the type of clips, saddles and holdfasts to be used shall be obtained before
work is started. The maximum spacings of fixings shall not exceed 900mm. No fixings shall be made into
joints in masonry.
Saddles and holdfasts shall be of the following materials:
For copper conductors, gunmetal, aluminium-silicon bronze or naval brass;
For aluminium conductors, aluminium, aluminium alloy or stainless steel.
Clips shall be either of metal as above or of outdoor grade polycarbonate or polypropylene with snap-on
lids which cannot be inadvertently removed. Clips and saddles shall have rounded edges and countersunk
screws. Brass components shall not be used.
For general areas inside buildings screws and nuts shall be of cadmium electroplated steel or stainless
steel; outside buildings, in plant rooms or other locations as they shall be of stainless steel.
No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shall be done without the
approval of the Engineer. Drilling and cutting of the outside fabric of the building shall be carried out only
after approval has been given by the Engineer.
Bonding to incoming services shall be as required by the relevant local authority.
Where a service belongs to a Public Statutory Undertaker the permission of the Engineer shall be obtained
before connection is made.
3.11 ELECTRICITY GENERATING PLANT
3.11.1. Reference Document
Whenever reference is made to a British Standard the particular clauses of that British Standard are
included either in this standard specification, or in the particular specification for the works, as
appropriate. The British and other standards to be applied to the works are as follow:

BS 159: High voltage bus-bars. BS 799: Part 5: Oil storage tanks.

BS 2594: Carbon steel welded horizontal cylindrical storage tanks.
BS 2757: Thermal classification of insulating materials
BS 2869: Part 2: Fuel oil specification.
BS 4959: Corrosion and scale prevention in engine cooling water systems.
BS 4999: Rotating electrical machines - general.
BS 4999: Part 0: Index
BS 4999: Part 101: Rating and performance.
BS 4999: Part 105: Classification of degrees of protection.
BS 4999: Part 106: Classification of methods of cooling.
BS 4999: Part 140: Voltage regulation and parallel operation.
BS 5000: Part 3: Generators to be driven by reciprocating engines.
BS 5000: Part 99: Machines for miscellaneous applications.
BS 5227: A.C. switchgear over 1 kV.
BS 5304: Safety of machinery.
BS 5514: Reciprocating engine performance.
BS 5514: Part 1: Standard reference conditions.
BS 5514: Part 4: Speed governing.
BS 5514: Part 5: Torsional vibrations.
BS 5514: Part 6: Overs peed protection.
BS 6327: Fire protection of reciprocating internal combustion engines.
BS 6580: Corrosion inhibiting engine coolants (antifreeze).
BS 6472: Vibration in Buildings (1Hz to 80Hz)
BS 7626: Current transformers.
BS 7671: IEE wiring regulations.
BS 7698: Reciprocating Engine driven AC Generating Sets.
BS 7698: Part 1: Generating set applications, rating and performance.
BS 7698: Part 2: Specification for engines.
BS 7698: Part 3: Specification for AC generators.
BS 7698: Part 4: Specification for control gear and switchgear.
BS 7698: Part 5: Specification for generating sets.
BS 7698: Part 6: Test methods.
BS EN 60439-1: Specification for type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies.
`Code of Practice for Designers, Installers and Users of Generating Sets - Technical Memorandum No 3'
from the Association of British Generating Set Manufacturers.
`Guide to ISO 8528 (BS 7698)' from the Association of Manufacturers of Power Generating Systems
(AMPS).
Electricity Association Engineering Recommendations G5/3 and G59/1. Electricity (Factories Act) Special
Regulations (1908) & (1944).
The Electricity Supply Regulations (1988).
The Health and Safety at Work etc Act (1974). The Electricity at Work Regulations (1989).

GUIDANCE NOTES
1. Consider the various alternative specification clauses with care. Many of the features specified involve
considerable expense and complication and not all such features would be appropriate for a simple
lighting and mechanical plant installation. However a large computer facility, with a substantial
battery supported UPS system, and perhaps with extensive mechanical engineering systems, may
require high grade generating plant, carefully specified in all necessary detail.
2. Include in the Tender Drawings and Particular Specification details of the following, taking account of
the standard specification clauses below:
1. System description
2. Control requirements (including testing requirements)
3. Particular design parameters (if required)
4. Details of the loads to be supplied in emergency
3. The following matters need to be considered with regard to large and important installations:
1. The size of the load in kW and kVA which is to be supplied by the generators immediately following
connection. Note that the output of the generating set must be specified primarily in kW, which
defines the maximum engine power.
2. The generators will generally be somewhat oversized, possibly with one generating set as an
operational spare. The generating plant overall must be capable of delivering the specified
electrical output at power factors typically down to 0.8. Each alternator may also be oversized
with respect to the engine driving it, and may incorporate special design features to enable it to
supply non-linear electrical loads without serious instability. For further information on alternator
design for non-linear loads see for example "Impact of non-linear loads on Stamford A.C.
Generators" by Newage International.
3. UPS systems are available in different forms. Some, such as those by Anton Piller, are based on
rotary machines. Others, such as those by Emerson, are based on static electronic inverters. UPS
systems by reputable makers will generally perform satisfactorily when supplied from the public
electricity mains, but may give trouble when supplied from diesel generators. Interaction between
the diesel generator, the UPS system and other loads can in extreme cases destabilise the diesel
generator's voltage control system. Diesel generator features which need to be considered with
special care when it is required to supply a UPS system are as follows:
A. The total load to be supplied on starting, including UPS battery charging - As a rule of thumb
the UPS and UPS battery charging load should not exceed 50% of the Diesel Generator
capacity.
B. The engine governor and engine inertia in combination need to provide a sufficiently accurate
and stable frequency output, particularly for rotary UPS systems.
C. The alternator and its automatic voltage regulator need to be capable of supplying all non-
linear loads connected without serious instability or deterioration of its output voltage
waveform.

1. Take account of the need to charge the UPS battery as soon as power is available in case a
further power failure should occur. It is possible to arrange for the battery charge rate to be
reduced for a period to allow all motors to be started. When dimensioning the emergency
diesel plant take account of the loads to be supplied in the first half hour of operation.
2. Ensure that all motor drives are started in sequence. Remember that large soft-start motor
drives may be very difficult loads for an emergency generator system because typically they
are severelynon-linear.
3. Where appropriate require the generating set, switchboard and other major equipment
vendors to meet and to confirm that all equipment to be supplied will be mutually compatible
and capable of operating as a complete system.
4. Whilst Diesel engines should not normally be run at loads less than 30-40%, nevertheless, in
multiple engine installations, consider carefully the load sensing criteria and timing for
shutting down an engine or engines to bring the load on each remaining engine above 30-
40%
5. Emergency Generators are often fitted to supply services which operate only when there is a
fire. This means that an Emergency Generator may be very lightly loaded in the event of a
simple power failure.
6. The periodical testing of emergency generators on load may require the switching in of
building loads which are not normally supplied in emergency to provide sufficient engine
loading for realistic testing. In some cases the permanent fitting of artificial loads may be
justified.
7. Some buildings may require no break in supplies when changing back from generator to
mains supplies. In this case the running emergency generators will need to be paralleled with
the mains supply when it is securely re-established before changing over. Suitable changeover
contactors must be specified.
4. As well as the documents listed in the specification below the following further publications may be
found helpful:
1. `Diesel Generator Handbook' by L H Mahon Butterworth
2. Ìnstallation manual for Generating Sets Petbow
3.11.2. Performance Objectives
The generating plant is required to supply power in emergency on failure of the mains. Automatic start-
up and operation is required without manual intervention.
On detection of mains failure all generators shall start automatically. The first generator to reach the
specified running speed and output voltage shall be connected automatically to the switchboard generator
busbars. Subsequently, the remaining emergency generators shall be synchronized automatically with the
first generator and connected to the switchboard generator busbars.
The lead generator's neutral earth connection shall be used as the emergency system earth. All the
remaining generator neutral earth connections shall be broken before the remaining generators are
connected to the generator switchboard.

When all generators are connected to the switchboard generator busbars the appropriate mains circuit
breaker shall open and the generating plant circuit breaker shall close. The mains and generating plant
circuit breakers shall be interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closure of both.
The switching of the motor and other loads to be supplied in emergency is to be controlled by automatic
means so that the generating plant operates without overload, without voltage instability, and within its
load acceptance capability.
After all load to be supplied in emergency is connected, and as determined by an adjustable time delay of
0-30 minutes, the total load on the generating plant shall be sensed and one or more generators shut
down until the running generators are loaded to greater than 70% of their rated output.
The running generators shall share the load in proportion to their rated outputs.
If subsequently the load rises so that the running generators are loaded to 85% of their rated outputs one
or more further generators shall start and be connected automatically until the average load is reduced to
no less than 70% of rated output.
When the mains are restored, as determined by sensing of the mains voltage being present without
interruption for an adjustable period up to 10 minutes, the generator plant circuit breaker shall open and
the mains circuit breaker shall close.
After mains restoration the generators shall continue to run for an adjustable period up to 30 minutes on
no load before shutting down automatically.
3.11.3. Electricity Generating Plant – General
Supply, install, commission, test and demonstrate a complete and working diesel generating set and
ancillary equipment comprising:
1. Diesel engine powered generating set, with cooling and exhaust systems, complete and working in all
respects.
2. Generator Control Panels.
3. Earth electrode system.
4. Power and control electrical connections.
5. Onboard generating set monitoring system.
6. First fills of fuel oil, antifreeze and lubricating oil.
7. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
8. Recommended site spares and special tools.
9. On-site maintenance for one year from Practical Completion.
This specification covers a complete generating plant installation, which may comprise one or more
generating sets and all auxiliary equipment.
Determine from the drawings and specification and from the schedule of equipment to be fitted and
served by the generating set the load profile to be supplied by the generating set. Prepare detailed
calculations from the information in the particular specification and drawings demonstrating the suitability
of the generating set offered. Take account of:
1. The size and type of any Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and other non-linear loads to be installed
by others.
2. The requirements for recharging the UPS storage battery.
3. The size and nature of load required to be supplied immediately the generator is connected to the
electrical distribution system.

4. The large motors to be started, including the characteristics of the motor drives and starters actually
ordered.
Ensure that the generating plant and all associated current transformers, switchgear, controls and wiring
by others are in all respects compatible and function correctly as a complete system.
Prepare installation guidance drawings, including foundations, builder's work and acoustic treatment.
Show the generating plant, flues, fuel storage and all associated equipment.
Deliver, off-load, position and fix the generating set and all associated equipment in their final positions.
Commission and test the complete generating set, by itself, and in conjunction with other generating sets
and associated switchgear.
Unless varied by the particular specification the following general conditions shall be assumed to apply to
the generating plant installation overall:
1. Barometric pressure 100 kPa (1 Bar).

2. Maximum and minimum plant room air temperatures of 45 and -10 deg C.
3. Relative humidity 60%.
3.11.4. Engine – General
Each generating set shall be powered by a four stroke Diesel engine, running at not more than 1500 rpm,
and shall provide the rated electrical output in kW at a power factor of 0.8 lagging, with an additional
overload capacity of 10% for one hour in any consecutive twelve hours of running.
Each generating set shall be powered by a four stroke Diesel engine, running at not more than 1500 rpm,
and shall provide the rated net electrical output in kW continuously, with an additional overload capacity
of 10% for one hour in any consecutive twelve hours of running, where the mean value of the load in any
twelve hours running shall not exceed the continuous rating.
The engine design reference ambient conditions are as follows:
1. Ambient and charge air coolant: 25 deg C
2. Barometric pressure: 100kPa
3. Relative Humidity: 30%
Specify and declare:
1. Net electrical output power at the engine design reference conditions (clause 3000) and under the
specified service conditions (clause 2000)
2. The specification of the fuel to be used and fuel consumption at maximum continuous output.
3. The specification of the lubricating oil to be used and lubricating oil consumption at maximum
continuous output.
4. Brake mean effective pressure.

Unless varied by the Particular Specification each generating set shall be capable of accepting the following
loads on starting from cold:
1. Less than 100 kW maximum output: 80% of full load immediately, and a further 20% 5 seconds later.
2. 100 - 500 kW maximum output: 60% of full load 15 seconds after starting and a further 40% 5 seconds
later.
3. 500 - 800 kW maximum output: 50% of full load 15 seconds after starting and a further 50% 5 seconds
later.
4. Greater than 800 kW maximum output: 45% of full load 15 seconds after starting, a further 45% after
another 5 seconds, and a further 10% 5 seconds later.
3.11.5. Engine Speed Governing
The engine governor in combination with the total generating set inertia shall comply with the following
speed governing performance specification:
1A. BS 7698: Part 2 - Class G2
1B. BS 7698: Part 2 - Class G3
1C. BS 7698: Part 2 - Class G4 of which all details are to be as required by the particular specification, and
as agreed between the manufacturer and the engineer.
Install an electronic, isochronous, automatic load sharing governor system by Heinzmann, or equal and
approved by the engineer.
3.11.6. Engine Cooling System
Fit a pressurized engine cooling system comprising:
1. Unit mounted radiator and engine driven fan.
2. Thermostatic valve to bypass the radiator until the engine has reached the normal operating
temperature.
3. Engine driven cooling water circulation pump.
4. Electrically operated thermostatically controlled immersion heater in the engine cooling circuit to
maintain a water temperature of 10 deg C with an external ambient temperature of minus 10 deg C.
5. 50% ethylene glycol and water coolant solution for -20 deg C ambient.
6. An automatic water make-up system, including a piped water supply in the generator plant
room.
7. A manual water make-up system, including a piped water supply in the generator plant room.
8. A cooling system connection to a suitable drain.

3.11.7. Engine Lubricating System
Provide an efficient lubricating system with an engine driven lubricating oil pump, replaceable filters and
oil cooler.
Provide a total usable oil volume which between normal and minimum levels is sufficient to enable the
engine to run at full load for at least 100 hours unattended, allowing for an oil consumption of 150% of
the manufacturer's estimated consumption for a new engine.
Provide a separate electrically driven oil pump to pre-prime the engine lubrication system during the
starting sequence, and to circulate oil through the engine from time to time between engine running
periods in readiness for an automatic start.
Provide dipsticks or other suitable means of checking the oil level in the engine and in any reserve
lubricating oil tanks fitted.
Provide drain cocks capable of completely draining the engine lubricating oil and that in any reserve tanks
fitted into a suitable container.
3.11.8. Engine Starting System
Provide battery operated electric starting.
Provide lead acid starter batteries, with an 8-year guaranteed life, and starter motors capable of providing
six consecutive 20 second cranking periods, with 5 seconds rest between successive periods, in an ambient
temperature of -7 deg C.
Provide an electric battery charger, with automatic voltage control, capable of recharging a flat battery
within 5 hours, and maintaining the battery floating when fully charged.
3.11.9. Engine Fuel System
Daily Service Fuel tank.
3.11.10. Engine Exhaust System
Install an engine exhaust system to comply with HM Inspector of Pollution's requirements and takes the
engine exhaust gases clear of the building and all ventilation air intakes. Include the following features:
1. Install the exhaust system via the most direct practicable route, with minimum length and bends.
Protect the exhaust system from rain and snow ingress.
2. Make the exhaust system of a suitable grade of stainless steel, including necessary flanged sleeved
bellows pieces and flexible sections to take up expansion and vibration.
3. Fit efficient exhaust condensate and rain water drains.
4. Fit industrial exhaust silencers close to the engine to provide noise attenuation of 20 dB atleast.
5. Fit residential exhaust silencers close to the engine to provide noise attenuation of 30 dB atleast.
6. Fit an absorption terminal silencer at the end of long exhaust runs.
7. Suitably insulate the exhaust system to reduce heat released into the plant room and to protect
personnel from accidental contact with hot surfaces.

3.11.11. Alternator
Provide an alternator designed and constructed to meet the appropriate sections of BS 4999 and BS
5000:Part3 and manufactured by New age International or equal to match the selected engine.
Incorporate the following features:
1. Capable of withstanding an engine over speed of plus 20%.
2. Nominal voltage output plus or minus 6%.
3. Duty Type S1.
4. Enclosure to IP22.
5. Enclosure to IP23.
6. Insulation system to Class H.
7. Maximum temperature rise at maximum continuous rating limited to that applying to Class B
insulation (90 K).
8. Maximum plant room ambient temperature 40 deg C.
9. Output voltage waveform irregularities at maximum continuous rating shall conform to BS 4999: Part
101.
10. Stator windings to 2/3 pitch.
11. Fully linked damper winding to limit the sub transient reactance at full load to less than 12%.
12. Separate excitation by permanent magnet generator and integral exciter.
13. Rotor mechanical dynamic balance better than BS 6861: Part 1 Grade 2.5.
3.11.12. Automatic Voltage Regulator
Install an automatic voltage regulator incorporating the following features:
1. Three phase rms output voltage sensing.
2. Minimum voltage waveform disturbance when supplying non-linear loads.
3. Voltage regulation within plus or minus 0.5 %.
4. Protection against sustained over excitation caused by internal or external faults.
5. Adjustable protection against over-voltage.
6. Adjustable short circuit current limitation.
7. Environmental protection to IP 54.

3.11.13. Generator Control Panel
Provide a fully automatic mains failure/synchronizing generator control panel, protected to IP54, and
constructed to Standard Specification W64 - Control Panels. Mount the panel on or near the engines as
appropriate.
Incorporate all necessary controls to provide the functions specified in clause 2000 above, and including
the requirements of the Particular Specification.
Unless varied by the Particular Specification incorporate the following minimum of panel mounted
indicators and controls:
1. Frequency indicator: 45 - 55 Hz.
2. Voltmeter at least 100 mm square of industrial grade accuracy to BS 89. Scale to nominal output volts
plus 15%.
3. Voltmeter selector switch: phase to phase, phase to neutral and off.
4. Ammeter at least 100 mm square of industrial grade accuracy to BS 89. Scale to full load Amps plus
15%.
5. Ammeter selector switch: each phase and off.
6. Engine hours run indicator (without reset).
7. Auto/Manual/Off/Reset selector switch.
8. Engine start push button (operative in Manual Control).
9. Engine stop push button (cancelled by Reset).
10. Generator Start Initiated indicator lamp.
11. Generator Fail to Start alarm indicator lamp.
12. Battery Charger Failed alarm indicator lamp.
13. Battery volts low.
14. Generator voltage out of limits alarm indicator lamp.
15. Engine Over speed alarm indicator lamp.
16. Engine Low Oil Pressure alarm indicator lamp.
17. Engine Low Coolant/Loss of Coolant Pressure alarm indicator lamp.
18. Engine Low Fuel Level alarm indicator lamp.
19. Mimic diagram with status indicating lamps for all switchgear up to and including mains/generator
changeover switching.
20. Generator emergency stop push, operative when the generators are in Auto or in Hand control. The
generator stop command to remain operative until the stop push is deliberately reset.

3.11.14. Generator Set Monitoring
Provide relays with volt free contacts wired to a terminal block for connection to the Building Management
System via external wiring by others to indicate the following conditions:
1. Generator connected to the LV switchboard. One relay for each generator.
2. Generator tripped. One relay for each generator.
3. Generator common alarm. Link all alarm signals to the common alarm relay.
3.11.15. Ventilation and Cooling
Ensure that the generating plant ventilation system, including air intakes and air outlets, will provide
enough outside fresh air for combustion and to maintain all parts of the generating plant and associated
equipment within allowable operating limits whilst operating at 110% of its maximum continuous rating,
with the building complete and operational, and at maximum specified outside ambient conditions.
Protect the generating plant against frost with the specified minimum ambient air temperatures.
Protect the generating plant from the ingress of rain, snow and hail, and of birds and small mammals. Fit
gravity dampers to ventilation air outlets and motorized dampers to air inlets.
3.11.16. Noise Control
Provide an acoustic enclosure and exhaust silencers for the emergency generating plant capable of limiting
the noise external to the generating plant to no more than 75 dBA at 1 metre from the acoustic enclosure
and exhaust flues.
The noise level at the boundary of premises served by a generating set shall not exceed 55 dBA, or as
required by the particular specification.
Mount the generators on efficient anti-vibration mounts.
3.11.17. Installation
Provide, deliver, install and test the generating plant complete as specified above and including all items
and equipment needed to make a complete and working system. Include for:
1. Generating plant complete, with anti-vibration mounts and all fixings.
2. All necessary lifting beams, reinforced floor plates, rollers and winches, etc required to install the sets
and to carry out future maintenance.
3. All fuel and lubricating oil pipework and valves, etc.
4. All local and remote power and control cabling associated with the generating plant.
5. Generator earthing system.

6. All standard spares and special tools required.
3.11.18. Commissioning and Testing
Commission and test the complete emergency generator installation as follows:
3.11.19. Works to be test prior dispatch
Factory Test to be provided.
3.11.20. Commissioning Following Installation
Check the complete generating set is installed as designed and specified, including all wiring connections.
Test the power and control wiring installation, including the earthing system.
Check the functioning of all switchgear, interlocks and controls.
Check the functioning of all auxiliary equipment. Set fuel pump overloads, measure running currents and
fuel flow rates.
Calibrate all sensors and relays in co-operation with others where appropriate. Provide the first fill of fuel
oil, lubricating oil and anti-freeze.
Commission, test and demonstrate the complete fuel system. Install equipment for site tests and
demonstrations.
3.11.21. Site Tests and Demonstration
With the generators running off load, demonstrate automatic starting on loss of mains, manual and
automatic synchronizing, and automatic operation of the earthing system.
With a load bank connected demonstrate that the generators will deliver their full load output for 4 hours
followed immediately by 1 hour at 110% of full load.
Following the test at 110% of full load demonstrate that load sharing is satisfactory between 40% and
110% of full load.
With the building sufficiently complete to provide at least 50% of the final loads to be connected in
emergency, and including major motor drives and any UPS system fitted, demonstrate the complete
generator starting sequence and mains restoration sequence, including one or more generators
disconnecting as the load is reduced below 45% of full load.
3.11.22. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Supply two copies of the Operation & Maintenance Manual.
Include all necessary operating instructions, warnings and advice with regard to the engine, generator,
controls, switchgear and all ancillary equipment.
Provide the following details:
1. Generating set description and specification.

2. Operating instructions.
3. Component data sheets.
4. Commissioning method statement.
5. Maintenance instructions.
6. Fault finding guidance.
7. Circuit diagrams and General Arrangement Drawings.
8. Spares ordering information.
9. Personnel and equipment safety warnings.
3.11.23. Schedule of Contractors Submittals
Within six weeks of acceptance of the generator supplier's quotation submit the following to the engineer
for comment:
1. The full specification of the generator and all auxiliary plant and equipment to be supplied, including.
2. Generator sizing calculation.
3. Net electrical output power at the engine design reference conditions (clause 3011) and under the
specified service conditions (clause 2008)
4. The specification of the fuel to be used and fuel consumption at maximum continuous output.
5. The specification of the lubricating oil to be used and lubricating oil consumption at maximum
continuous output.
6. Exhaust emissions.
7. Brake mean effective pressure.
8. Detailed general arrangement drawings of all plant and equipment.
9. Builders' work drawings taking account of all site details known at the time.
10. List of recommended spares and special tools.
Two weeks before the works acceptance tests are scheduled submit a method statement for the following
tests and demonstrations:
1. Works acceptance tests.

2. Site installation inspection.
3. Pre-running functional checks of the complete generator system, including checks and calibration of
all load sensing instruments and interlocks by others.
4. Load bank testing, including a demonstration of synchronizing paralleling and load sharing.
5. Mains failure tests.
6. Instruction of the owner's personnel in the operation of the complete generating plant.
Four weeks before handing over the completed installation submit the following documents to the
engineer for comment:

1. Makers' works Test Certificates.

2. Site Commissioning and Load Test Certificates.
3. As-fitted drawings.
4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3.12 MOTORS, DRIVES AND CONTROLS
3.12.1. Reference Documents
Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS) the particular clauses of the Standard are included
either in Section Y92 or in the Particular Specification for the works.
BS 3790 Belt drives

BS 4999 Part 0 General requirements for rotating electrical machines.
BS 4999 Part 101 Specification for rating and performance.
BS 4999 Part 105 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures for
rotating machines.
BS 4999 Part 108 Specification for terminal markings and direction of rotation.
BS 4999 Part 109 Specification for noise levels.
BS 4999 Part 111 Specification for built-in thermal protection for electric motors rated at
660V and below.
BS 4999 Part 112 Specification for starting performance of single-speed three-phase
induction motors.
BS 4999 Part 141 Motor standard dimensions.
BS 4999 Part 142 Specification for vibration.
BS 5304 Machinery safety code of practice.
3.12.2. General
The electrical supply will be 4-wire 415V (±6%), 3-phase, 50Hz or 2-wire, 240V (±6%), 1-phase, 50Hz. All
electrical equipment and wiring required in connection with the works specified in this document and
associated drawings shall be suitable for these supplies and the type and location in which the equipment
is to be installed.
Unless otherwise indicated, all electrical equipment shall be suitable for use in ambient temperatures up
to 40°C and relative humidities up to 90%. Equipment shall be proofed against atmospheric corrosion,
including that of saline air where indicated, and materials shall not be susceptible to mould growth or
attack by vermin.
The Installer shall take care to ensure that all motors and drives are adequate for the driven machines
characteristics, including the starting requirements, together with the design margins specified elsewhere.
3.12.3. Three Phase Motors
All motors are to be 3-phase except where specified otherwise, and are to comply with the appropriate
parts of
B.S. 4999 and B.S. 5000.

All motors are to be selected from the energy efficient range by Brook Crompton Parkinson or equal except
where specified otherwise.
All motors shall be totally enclosed fan ventilated (TEFV) and shall be protected against dust and water
ingress to IP54 (within buildings) or IP55 (installed externally).
Motor insulation shall be Class 'F' and motor designed temperature rise shall be within Class 'B'. Motors
shall be designed for safe operation at maximum continuous rating.
All motors shall be designed for safe operation within the electrical supply parameters defined in clause
2001 above.
All motors shall be designed for continuous running duty (S1).
Single speed motors shall be 4-pole 1500 rpm type, except where specified otherwise. Motors shall be
Design N for direct-on-line (DOL) starting up to and including 5.5kW and Design NY for assisted starting
7.5kW and above.
Dual speed motors shall have separate windings for each speed.
Thermal protection is required for all motors of 11kW and above, for all motors enclosed in ductwork and
for other motors where specified. Thermal protection shall be by thermistors mounted in the motor stator
end windings, one in each phase, and shall be designed to trip at 160°C.
Motors shall be of all metal construction, except that in motors of frame sizes up to and including D180
the internal fan may be of polypropylene or equal unless all metal construction is specified elsewhere. A
corrosion resistant paint finish is required.
Motors shall be dynamically balanced to 'normal' balance standards defined by B.S.4999: Part 142.
Motor frame sizes up to, and including, D200, shall have ball bearings at either end. Motor frame sizes
D225 and above, shall have ball and roller bearings, the roller bearings being fitted at the driving end.
Bearing housings shall be fitted with means to allow re-lubrication and to release any surplus grease so
that is causes no harm.
Final selection of the motor sizes shall be by the motor manufacturer, who will require the following data
in addition to that specified above:
1. Mechanical mounting details.

2. Direction of rotation
3. Details of driven load, including speed of rotation and moment of inertia (kg m²)
4. Transmission method
5. Details of duty for which required, including use of inverter to control the speed.
Details of all motors ordered shall be submitted to the Engineer for comment before manufacture begins.
3.12.4. Single Phase Motors
Some packaged units, e.g. small ventilation fans, will be fitted with single phase motors, specified and
supplied by the packaged unit manufacturers who shall specify the starting and protection requirements
to be provided by others.
Single phase motors up to 3kW output may be specified for other services and are to comply with the

appropriate parts of Clause 3 above.
Motors shall be designed for safe operation with an electrical supply of 50 Hz, single phase, 240V (± 6%).
Motors shall be of the capacitor-start, capacitor-run type, unless specified separately elsewhere.
3.12.5. Installed Motor and Drive Capacity
The motor and drive provided for each fan and pump shall be adequately sized to be able to achieve a 15%
increase over the specified design flow rate against the corresponding increase in system resistance
generated by the increased flow rate.
The motor installed power shall be as shown below:
1. Fans and pumps: absorbed power plus 50%.

2. Other drives not part of packaged unit: absorbed power plus 30%.
3. Where variable frequency inverter drives are specified the motor rating shall be increased by a further
10% and the motor shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for this duty.
Absorbed power is the power absorbed by the fan or pump under maximum scheduled load conditions
plus drive losses.
All mechanical equipment shall be capable of being driven by the motors specified, without danger to its
mechanical integrity, including impellers, bearings and mechanical supports. All mechanical resonances
shall be well outside normal operating speeds.
3.12.6. Belt Drives
All belt-driven machinery shall be provided with endless wedge or vee belts to B.S. 3790. The belts shall
be selected by the equipment manufacturers and be approved by the belt manufacturer. Selection is to
be strictly in accordance with the belt manufacturer's published rules.
Belts are to be selected for Class 1 light duty, or Class 2 medium duty as appropriate, or be selected for
continuous operation at motor full output or the specific equipment intended mode of operation if that
be more arduous. Use cogged raw edge (CRE) wedge belts where recommended by the belt manufacturer
for devices utilizing small pulleys.
Pulleys shall be constructed from close-grained cast iron and statically and dynamically balanced. Drives
up to 30 kW rating shall be of the taper lock type; drives over 30 kW shall have key secured pulleys.
Belt and pulley selections shall be submitted to the Engineer for comment before manufacture begins.
The motor and driven member shall be mounted the correct distance apart as required by the belt
selection. Means shall be provided to adjust the distance apart by ± 75mm.
3.12.7. Guards
All exposed drives, belts, shafts, couplings etc. shall be provided with suitable guards complying with B.S.
5304. Guards shall be rigid and firmly fixed.
Access to the ends of all shafts shall be provided for the use of a tachometer.
Cooling of the motors and drives shall not be impaired by the guards, and it shall be possible to inspect
the condition of the belts without removing the guards.

Guards shall be zinc coated to protect against corrosion.
3.12.8. Commissioning
Motor drives shall be accurately aligned and tensioned as required by the belt drive manufacturer's
instructions. Starter overloads shall be set to the motor nameplate full load current.
Thermistor relay operation shall be checked (where fitted).
With the motor delivering its maximum required duty the following shall be measured and recorded.
1. For 3-phase motors each phase-to-phase voltage (415V nominal). For 1-phase motors measure phase-
to-neutral voltage (240V nominal).
2. For 3-phase motors each phase current. (Differences between any two phase currents of more than
5% indicates a possible fault which should be investigated). For 1-phase motors measure line current.
3. Shaft speed.
3.13 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS
Whenever reference is made to a British Standard the particular clauses of that British Standard are
included either in this standard specification, or in the particular specification for the works, as
appropriate. The British and other Standards to be applied to the works are as follows:
BS 88 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to 1000V AC

BS 89 Electrical measuring instruments
BS 4424 LV control gear: semiconductor contactors
BS 2771 Electrical equipment of industrial machines
BS EN 60439-1 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assembles
BS EN 50081 Electromagnetic emissions
BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear
BS EN 60947-3 Switches, disconnectors, etc.
BS EN 60947-4-1 Contactors and motor starters
BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility - test methods
BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations
Electricity Association Engineering Recommendation G5/3
3.13.2 Motor Starters and Controllers – General
Design, construct and install all motor starters, controllers and associated switchgear so that its operation
and maintenance can comply with the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations 1908 and 1944; the
Health and Safety etc. Act 1974, the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 and subsequent safety legislation
and regulations current on the date the equipment is ordered. Submit type test certificates in accordance
with BS EN 60439-1 for all switchgear and control gear assemblies to the engineer when the panel and
assembly drawings are submitted for comment.

Install the motor starters and controls, Building Management System, packaged plant and all other
interconnected equipment to form a complete and working system. Co-ordinate the designs of all
interconnected units, their wiring and terminal connections so that they are mutually compatible and
function as a whole in accordance with the design intent. Ensure that the cable access systems required
are adequately sized, supported and spatially coordinated with other equipment and the building
structure.
Ensure that all cable terminals are big enough to take the sizes of cables specified. Ensure there is ample
space within panels, isolators, etc. to accept the tails of the cables specified.
Prepare schematic, wiring and general arrangement drawings of the Motor Starters, Controllers and all
equipment connected and shall submit the drawings to the engineer for comment at least four weeks
before manufacture is required to begin. The drawings shall be A3 size at least and shall include final details
of all the motors ordered.
Schedule the details of all motors and packaged plant ordered and ensure that the wiring, fuse protection,
starter contactors, overload relays and all other circuit elements are correctly selected according to the
rules in this specification, the documents referred to above and the component manufacturer's published
application data.
Design and manufacture all purpose-built assemblies incorporating motor control gear and associated
equipment and components to comply with the standards referred to in this specification and with the
component manufacturers' recommendations.
Protect equipment against physical damage and from ingress of water, dust and other contaminants
during delivery, storage and installation.
3.13.3 Motor Starters – General
Motor Starter means the contactor and controls package required to start and protect a motor drive from
the specified forms of overload and abuse.
Motor drives below 5.5kW output may have Direct-on-Line starting. Fit all motor drives of 5.5 kW output
and above with Star/Delta starters, or with such other form of assisted starting as is scheduled in the
particular specification. Fit motor drives with outputs above 25 kW, if suitable for Star/Delta starting, with
Closed- Transition Star/Delta starting.
If the power supplies to motor drives are interrupted, arrange for all motor starters to open and to remain
open until restarted deliberately by one of the following methods. Motor drives with hand controls only
shall require to be restarted by hand. Fit motor drives subject to automatic control with automatic
sequencing arranged to ensure that the drives are restarted in correct sequence and without overloading
the main supply system.
Design automatic controls so as not to allow motor drives to be started more frequently than once every
ten minutes unless a lesser interval between motor starts is allowed by the Particular Specification.
Where Duty 1 and Duty 2 motors are provided for the same item of plant, hard-wire interlock the
associated starters to prevent simultaneous operation.
Where two-speed motors are fitted with separate windings for each speed provide a separate starter for
each speed. Hard-wire interlock the starters to prevent simultaneous operation, with a time delay relay
fitted to provide a delay of up to 10 seconds when switching from High to Low speed.
3.13.4 Motor Starter Contactors and Overload Protection
Install motor starters which comply with appropriate parts of BS EN 60947 and include the following

features:
1. Contactors rated for continuous duty, Category AC-3 and sized to carry at least the maximum
continuous current they are required to carry with the motor or other equipment served at full load
plus 10%.
2. Thermal-magnetic overloads chosen to suit the motors and starter connections finally selected,
compensated for ambient temperature and with loss-of-phase protection. The units shall incorporate
manual reset, local visual fault indication and auxiliary contacts for remote fault indication.
3.
4. Individually protection against short circuits by fuses to BS 88. Select the contactor and fuse
combination to provide Type 'C' protection co-ordination to BS EN 60947 - 1. A short circuit fault
downstream of the motor starter shall cause no damage to starter.
5.
6. Thermistor protection units for those motors for which thermistor protection is specified. The units
shall incorporate manual reset, LED fault signaling and a test button to check correct operation.
7.
8. Auxiliary contacts for the control and signaling functions specified elsewhere.
3.13.5 D.O.L. Motor Starters
Install Direct-on-Line motor starters embodying the following features:
1. A single contactor.
2. Thermal-magnetic overload set for the motor rated full load current.
(Note that for Direct-on-Line starting the motor is normally connected in Delta or Mesh, with three
conductors plus a protective earth conductor required between motor and starter)
3.13.6 Star/Delta Motor Starters
Install Star/Delta Motor Starters embodying the following features:
1. Three contactors: Line, Delta and Star.
2. Mechanical interlock between the Delta and Star contactors to prevent simultaneous operation.
3. Variable time delay for change from Star to Delta of 5 - 20 seconds. The delay time shall be set so that
the change from Star to Delta takes place after the motor current has fallen to a value less than rated
full load.
4. Time delay to making of the Delta contactor to allow sufficient time for the Star contactor to break.
(Note that a motor for Star/Delta starting has its three windings brought out to separate pairs
of terminals. Six conductors plus an earth protective earth conductor are required between the motor
and its starter).
3.13.7 Closed Transition Star/Delta Motor Starters
Install Closed-transition Star/Delta motor starters embodying the following features:
1. Four contactors: Line, Delta, Star and Resistance, all sized for the load current carried plus 10%.
2. A resistor in series with each winding, rated for up to 5 seconds on load.

3. Mechanical interlock between the Delta and Star conductors to prevent simultaneous operation.
4. Variable time delay for the time in Star connection of 5 - 20 seconds. The delay time shall be set so
that the change from Star to Resistance takes place after the motor current has fallen to a value less
than rated full load.
5. Variable time delay for the time with the resistors in series with the windings of 0.5-1.5 seconds. The
delay time shall be set so that the resistors remain in series with the motor windings until the motor
current has fallen to a value less than rated full load.
6. At the expiration of the 0.5-1.5 seconds time delay the resistors shall first be shorted out and then
disconnected.
(Note that a motor requiring starting by the closed-transition Star/Delta method has its three windings
brought out to separate pairs of terminals. Six conductors plus an earth protective earth conductor are
required between the motor and its starter).
3.13.8 Part Winding Motor Starters
Install Starters for motors with part-windings embodying the following features:
1. Two contactors, each sized for half the motor rated full load current plus 10%.
2. Each contactor to be fitted with a thermal-magnetic overload set to half the total motor nameplate
full load current.
3. A variable time delay before making the second contactor of 5-25 seconds. The delay time shall be set
so that the total motor current has fallen to less than 1.5 times full load before the second contactor
makes.
(Note that a motor with part-windings has two separate windings each connected in Delta or Star and each
with three terminals. Six conductors plus an earth protective conductor are required between the motor
and its starter).
3.13.9 Electronic Soft Start
Electronic soft-starters shall be sized by their manufacturer to suit the motors finally ordered. Allow for
the motors to operate continuously at their maximum continuous rating (Duty S1).
Fit input/output filters if required to reduce mains harmonic distortion or to keep electro-magnetic
radiation within acceptable limits. Fit varistors or equivalent input device to prevent damage to the unit
by mains over- voltage spikes.
Mount soft-starters in their own IP54 protected and type tested enclosures designed to allow for a plant
room ambient temperature of up to 40°C.
Mount soft-starters in type tested motor control panels designed for continuous operation in plant room
ambient temperatures up to 40°C. The heat rejected by the soft starter shall be safely dissipated without
overheating, and without affecting other equipment in the panel. Where available mount the soft starter
through the back of the motor control panel.

Mount soft-starters as close to their associated motors as practicable. Connect inverters to their
associated motors them via unbroken lengths of armoured cable, except for the steel clad isolating
switches where the soft- starters are necessarily mounted remotely from the motors. Earthing
arrangements shall be as specified by the soft-starter manufacturer and shall comply with BS 7671.
Provide the following facilities:
1. Adjustable acceleration ramp up to 30 seconds.

2. Adjustable current limit from 2 to 5 times full load current.
3. Combined acceleration ramp and current limit to control starting torque.
4. Motor thermal overload protection and early warning indication.
5. Fault detection, diagnostic facilities and alarm signaling to the BMS.
6. Shorting contactor for use with motor drives where energy saving is ineffective.
7. Starter trip and reset to OFF on loss of power supplies.
Submit the following details of the proposed soft-starter to the engineer for comment before ordering:
1. Maker's specification and literature.

2. Proposed starter mounting details.
3. Proposed wiring and connection details, including control connections.
4. Proposed commissioning and adjustment procedure.
3.13.10 Eddy Current Coupling Drives
Fit the eddy-current drive with a 4-pole energy efficient motor and belt drive system complying with
Specification Y92.
The drive size required shall be advised by the manufacturer to deliver the output power specified. Mount
the motor outside the air-handling or similar plant.
Mount the drive controller and motor starter in an IP54 protected type tested motor control panel. Provide
the following control facilities:
1. Motor isolator with early break contact to trip the starter and drive controller when the motor is
isolated.
2. Starter AUTO/OFF/HAND control switch.
3. Run (Green) and Trip (Red) panel mounted signal lamps.
4. Start/Stop control by the BMS when the starter control switch is to AUTO.
5. Starter Fault/Trip signal to the BMS.
6. 240V 1ph 5A power supply to the drive controller via starter auxiliary contacts and fuse to be specified
by the controller manufacturer.
7. Speed control HAND/AUTO switch.
8. Speed control from the BMS or local drive controller.
9. Drive mounted tach generator for speed feedback control.
10. Local drive speed indicator.
11. Adjustable drive acceleration ramp.
12. Drive torque limited to 100% motor full load torque.
Submit the following details of the proposed eddy-current drive to the engineer for comment before
ordering:
1. Maker's specification and literature.
2. Proposed drive, starter and controller mounting details.
3. Proposed wiring and connection details, including control connections.
4. Proposed commissioning and adjustment procedure.
3.13.11 Variable Frequency Invertor Drives
Inverter drives shall be sized by the inverter manufacturer to match the motors finally ordered.
Inverter drives for fans and pumps shall normally deliver a voltage output proportional to their frequency
output at frequencies below 50Hz. Provide confirmation that the motors and inverter units finally selected
are suitable for the required duty, including any allowance for motor de-rating specified by the motor
manufacturer.
Select the motor drive pulley sizes so that the motors deliver their selected maximum output with the
inverter output at 50 Hz. The minimum inverter frequency shall be 10 Hz and the maximum 57.5 Hz, or the
frequency at which the motor is delivering full power, whichever is the lesser.
Provide the following inverter control features:
1. Power supply via BS 88 fuses of a size specified by the inverter manufacturer and a local isolating switch
to disconnect all power from the inverter and motor when required.
2. Inverter power input circuits protected against mains voltage short duration spikes of up to 2kilovolts.
3. Drive start by signal from the Building Management System or locally by a panel mounted
Hand/Off/Auto switch or otherwise.
4. The drive frequency shall be controlled by a 0-10 Volt signal from the Building Management System,
or by local panel mounted inverter frequency control.
5. A frequency display, either digital or analogue scaled 0-60 Hz.
6. Protection against inverter overheating, motor over current, external short circuits, motor single
phasing and earth faults.
7. Simple fault diagnosis facilities and a common fault signal to the Building Management System.
8. Where the inverter is mounted remotely from the motor drive provide a local steel cased isolator with
early break contact to shut down the inverter, for motor maintenance.
Mount inverters as close to their associated motors as practicable. Connect inverters to their associated
motors them via unbroken lengths of armored cable, except for the steel clad isolating switches where the
inverters are necessarily mounted remotely from the motors. Earthing arrangements shall be as specified
by the inverter manufacturer and shall comply with BS 7671.
Mount inverters in their own IP54 protected and type tested enclosures designed to allow for a plant room
ambient temperature of up to 40°C.
Fit input and output electrical filters to the inverter if required to reduce harmonic distortion of the mains
and electro-magnetic radiation to within acceptable limits.
3.13.12 Motor Control Panels – Construction
Construct the Motor Control Panels with rigid framed enclosures and with panels in zinc coated mild steel
at least 1.6mm thick for panels up to 600mm x 600mm and at least 2mm thick for larger panels. Round all
edges and corners to a minimum radius of 3mm. passivate the panels and finish all surfaces with a wear
resistant paint system in the maker's standard colour. Provide details of the proposed panel construction
and paint system with the drawings submitted to the engineer for comment.
Design and construct the panels containing motor starters and controllers with protection to IP54 and
design the panels for continuous operation. Size and/or ventilate to maintain all internal components
within their maker's specified temperature limits with a plant room temperature up to 40°C
3.13.13 Motor Control Panels – Electrical Requirements
Motor control panels and their internal assemblies shall be type tested to BS EN 60439-1: 1994. Provide
details of type testing when submitting drawings to the engineer for comment.
Design all equipment and wiring for 50 Hz electrical supplies of 415V (3 ph) or 240V (1 ph) plus or minus
6%.
Design and construct all electrical equipment to be suitable for use in local ambient temperatures up to
40°C and with relative humidities up to 90% with occasional occurrences of moderate condensation. Proof
all equipment against moderate amounts of dust and corrosion by salt laden air where specified. Use only
materials resistant to mould growth and attach by vermin.
Protect all connecting cables against overload and short-circuit faults by appropriately sized fuses to BS
88. Select fuses protecting motor circuits to suit the motors finally installed according to the fuse
manufacturer's recommendations for the form of motor starting employed.
Gland cable and conduit entries to maintain the IP54 protection specified. Where light cables need to enter
the panel via trunking, provide a purpose made watertight upstand at least 75mm high to form a water
resistant junction between the panel and the cable trunking.
Terminate all incoming and outgoing cables in terminal blocks close the cable entry positions. Terminate
control cables carrying voltages of 110V and above in disconnectable terminal blocks for essential working
without isolating the main supplies, using appropriate safety procedures.
Ensure all fuses installed in the motor control panel provide satisfactory discrimination with sub-circuit
fuses within the panel and with the panel's main supply fuse.
Shroud all cable terminals, live parts of the switchgear and other components, including live parts to the
rear of switchgear, against accidental direct contact when testing and inspecting the panel. Install fuses
either as part of fuse/switches or in shrouded fuse holders.
Identify and mark all cables, cable terminals, fuses, switchgear and other components with permanent
labels using the circuit references used in the installation and on as-fitted drawings.
3.13.14 Motor Circuit Wiring
Unless specified differently elsewhere, install wiring types as scheduled below:
1. PVC/SWA/XLPE, 600/1000 volt grade, insulated and sheathed, with stranded copper conductors, run
on cable tray or clipped direct - connections to the main LV switchboard, to motor drives and to
control devices operating at 240V.
2. PVC insulated, 600/1000 volt grade, stranded copper conductors - control panel internal power wiring.
3. Screened and sheathed twisted pairs with stranded copper conductors, as specified by the Controls
Specialist, run in conduit or trunking - sensors and motorized valves etc. operating at voltages less
than 240V. Take account of cable lengths and voltage drops in specifying conductor sizes.
Except for the wiring specified by the controls specialist the minimum size of conductor used shall be
1.5mm².
Use crimped lugs by AMP or equivalent for all minor cable terminations, with the cable insulation secured
at the termination by a crimped plastic skirt. Prepare cable terminations in accordance with the crimp
manufacturer's instructions and using the tools specified. Leave sufficient lengths on cables to ensure
there is no tension on any connection.
3.13.15 Control Circuits
Design control circuits for operation of contactors to operate at 240 V. Provide control circuit wiring to be
at least 1.5mm² and sized so that voltage drop even during motor starting is never great enough to prevent
correct operation of all devices served.
3.13.16 Control Relays
Install control relays of the plug-in type which shall conform to BS 800 and BS 5992 with contacts rated for
operation up to 240 volts, 5 amps, 50 Hz.
Enclose control relays in dust proof covers.
3.13.17 Control Switches
Provide front panel rotary switches for the following duties:
1. Single speed, single motor drives: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
2. Two-speed motor drives: HIGH SPEED/LOW SPEED/OFF/AUTO
3. Motor drives with Duty 1 and Duty 2 motors: DUTY 1/DUTY 2 selector switch for use when the motors
are in HAND control with HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switches for each drive.
Arrange for all selector switches serving plant subject to AUTO control to have auxiliary contacts to signal
to the Building Management System when the drives are in auto control.
3.13.18 Lamp Indication
Provide indicator lights for the following functions for each drive served:
1. RUN: Green Lamp
2. TRIPPED: Red Lamp
3. PANEL LIVE: White Lamp
3.13.19 Panel Labels for Information and Warnings
Fix permanent engraved labels to all panels to provide information and warning to suitably qualified
persons carrying out operation and maintenance:
1. A label indicating the function of each switch and lamp indication.
2. A label on each openable panel door reading: "WARNING - ISOLATE PANEL BEFORE MAINTENANCE".
In addition, a self-adhesive warning label is to be fixed to each door giving access to 415 volt circuits.
3. A key diagram showing the source and identification of all power supplies entering a panel, their
function and means of isolation.
3.13.20 Motor Isolation
Provide all motor drives with local isolators for safe mechanical and electrical maintenance of the drives
served, including motor drives within packaged plant.
Install isolators with metal cases, protected to IP54 and with early break contacts to trip the drive starters
where assisted start is provided.
Fit a permanent engraved label near each motor drive to read: "ISOLATE MOTOR BEFORE MAINTENANCE".
3.13.21 Stand Alone Motor Starters
Mount stand-alone motor starters in type-tested steel enclosures protected to IP54. Equip the starters
with the following equipment and controls as appropriate:
1. Panel isolating switch.

2. Ammeter.
3. HAND/OFF/AUTO and SPEED control switch.
4. Motor Run (Green) and Trip (Red) indicating lamps.
5. Motor starter.
6. Labels and warning notices.
Ensure that it is possible to measure motor current safely with a suitable clip-on ammeter for
commissioning purposes.
3.13.22 Electro Magnetic Interference
Install measures to prevent electro-magnetic interference with control panel operation and to prevent
electromagnetic interference from control panels affecting other electrical equipment. Measures likely to
be required include:
1. Supply motor control panels direct from the main LV switchboard.
2. Wire control systems in twisted pair cable. Run control cables away from mains cables.
3. Use armoured cables for power circuits and full size neutral conductors.
4. Fit voltage surge suppression devices to mineral insulated cables, relay and contactor operating coils
and vulnerable electronic equipment.
5. Fit input and output harmonic filters to electronic inverters and motor soft starters.
3.13.23 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Subject the panels to physical inspection, high pressure voltage testing to BS 5419, sequence and
component operation testing before dispatch. Provide certificates recording the works inspections and
tests.
Allow time in the programme and attendance for the engineer to inspect the control panels at the maker's
works on completion of manufacture and test and before delivery. Give ten working days notice of
readiness for inspection.
Following installation on site check and provide evidence that all wiring connections are correct. Check
also that the functioning of all components and controls is correct, including the correct functioning of all
interfaces with associated equipment. Measure power wiring insulation and earth loop impedance and
record the results.
Following installation on site completion of the installation and all site tests allow programme time and
provide attendance for the engineer to inspect the installation and to verify test results.
Special units such as variable frequency inverters shall be checked and commissioned by the makers, or
according to the makers' specific instructions for the units fitted.
Measure and record all motor currents. Set motor overloads to motor nameplate full load currents. Note
that Star/Delta starters normally have overloads installed in the Delta Loop and set to full load current x
0.58.
Ensure that during commissioning and test no motor which has reached normal operating temperature is
started more frequently than twice in one hour, or according to the motor maker's instructions if different.
3.13.24 As Fitted Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Provide three copies of the following documents bound into durable hardback folders:
1. Description of equipment operation.

2. Schematic and wiring diagrams and panel general arrangement drawings.
3. Inspection and Test certificates.
4. Data sheets and manufacturers' addresses for all panel components.
5. Recommended spares list.
6. Schedule of recommended periodic inspection and maintenance, including safety precautions.
3.13.25 Schedule of Contractors Submittals
Submit the following drawings and documents in connection with the motor starters and controllers
specified above.
1. Control panel and assemblies type test certificates.
2. Control panel schematic and general arrangement drawings.
3. Details of control panel construction and finish.
4. Details of control panel labels and key diagrams.
5. Control panel works test certificates.
6. Control panel site testing and commissioning results.
7. Control panel as-fitted drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
3.14 UNITERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES
BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations EN 50091

3.14.2 General
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) describes a system arranged to provide a seamless transfer of
electricity supply from one source to another, usually from a mains supply system to a standby supply
system (usually utilizing batteries as the standby source) following a power supply failure and vice versa
on restoration.
A ‘static’ system utilizes electronic components to achieve this seamless transfer in conjunction with a
suitably sized battery bank.
The ‘system’ includes the electronic UPS module, batteries, chargers, mains conditioning systems and all
interconnecting cabling and wiring.
3.14.3 UPS Module
The UPS module(s) shall be manufactured to accord with the requirements of Section 3.2 of this
specification. The system shall comprise a dual conversion unit with integral rectifier, inverter and static
bypass.
The rectifier shall be sized to allow full load output from the inverter to be achieved whilst re-charge of
the battery bank from discharge state is ongoing.
Battery re-charge shall be provided via the UPS rectifier which shall be capable of providing 90% re-charge
of the battery string in 10 times the discharge period.
The feed to the static bypass shall be independent of the rectifier feed.
A Castell key switch shall be provided on the cabinet will control the UPS function and will have a minimum
of two stable positions.
Run (key captivated)

Bypass (key released)
In run condition the system will direct power through the rectifier and inverter and, under mains failure
will redirect the power from battery source via the inverter to the output.
In bypass mode the system will seamlessly revert to the secondary mains feed and bypass the rectifier,
inverter and battery system.
The Castell key may only be released when the system is in bypass mode.
An on load battery isolator lockable in the off position shall be provided. This unit shall be contained in a
purpose built enclosure with an exposed manual operating lever.
The equipment shall incorporate radio interference suppression in accordance with BS 800.
The UPS module shall seamlessly control the conversion from mains to standby power and vice versa under
all conditions.
The UPS module shall provide conditioning to ensure that the harmonic content on input to the UPS in
both battery and mains conditions complies with the requirements of Electricity Council Recommendation
G5/3 on the Client chosen network.
The UPS system neutrals shall be rated at 1.5 times the phase conductor maximum rating, to accommodate
high neutral current due to harmonic and single phase loads.
The UPS system earths shall be rated at 2.0 times the phase conductor maximum rating.
Access to all components for replacement or maintenance shall be provided by lift off panels or hinged
doors at the front of the equipment.
All components which remain live when the equipment is isolated for maintenance shall be screened to
prevent inadvertent contact and shall be suitably labelled.
An integral alarm and indication panel shall be provided within each UPS Module.
The indication panel shall have a front fascia mimic panel schematic, which will interactively (via LED’s and
digital indicators) show the status of the load, battery charge / discharge levels, switch and bypass
conditions.
Alarms indication shall be provided via text message to indicate the following as a minimum.
 General UPS fail Alarm

 UPS overload Alarm
 Output Over voltage Alarm
 Battery Over voltage Alarm
 High temperature Alarm

 Battery fail Alarm
 Impending shutdown Alarm
 Mains fail Alarm and Indication
 Battery on load Indication (indicating charge level)
 Output overcurrent Alarm
 Frequency error Alarm
 Fan fail Alarm
 Control panel fail Alarm
 Maintenance bypass Selected Alarm
 System in static Bypass Alarm and Indication
A facility shall exist for all these alarms to be onwardly transmitted via an RS 232 or RS 433 port to a BMS
system allowing remote interrogation
The UPS equipment must have built in protection against mis-operation and permanent damage to itself
and the connected load for all predictable type of failure within the unit. The input protection shall grade
with the output protection.
Indicating instruments shall be provided via digital metering as follows:-

 Voltmeter to indicate UPS line and phase output voltages.
 Voltmeter to indicate battery voltage.
 Ammeter to indicate battery charge and discharge currents
 Frequency meter to indicate UPS output frequency
3.14.4 Batteries
The battery banks shall be of the valve regulated lead acid recombination (or equivalent) type designed
and manufactured for a life of at least 10 years to British Standard BS 6290, Part 4. The battery shall be
capable of supporting the full specified output of the UPS for the designated period.
UPS batteries shall be mounted on closed stands in accordance with the battery manufacturer’s
recommendations, complete with the necessary interconnections.
Terminals and connections must have insulating shrouds and sleeves. It must be possible to remove and
replace any individual cell without disturbing other cells.
The battery stand shall be provided with a suitable steel base to distribute the weight evenly across the
floor slab.
All interconnecting cables shall be neatly fixed to the battery stand or of suitable length to avoid fixing
being necessary. Cable access systems shall be provided on the stands to allow a neat installation of cables
to and from the battery isolators and fuse transition units.
All cells shall be labelled with a unique reference indicating the battery cell number, the battery string
reference and the UPS battery bank reference. Labels on batteries shall be on the battery, and not on its
lid.
3.15 BUSBAR SYSTEMS
BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations BS5486 Low Voltage Switchgear
and Control gear Assemblies
3.15.2 General
Busbar trunking systems shall comply with BS5486. They shall have a fault withstand capability fit for the
characteristics of the supply.
Busbar trunking systems shall be suitable for normal mechanical loads unless otherwise indicated, and
they shall not be used to support other equipment.
Feeder units shall be fitted with an isolating switch where indicated. The switch shall comply with clause
3.2.7.
Tap-off units and tap-off facilities for future units shall be provided as indicated. The phase sequence shall
be maintained along the entire length of each busbar trunking system and shall be identical in all systems
in the installation. Phase colour shall be clearly marked in each trunking.
Conductors shall be of bar copper unless otherwise indicated. The neutral conductor shall be the same
size as the phase conductors unless otherwise indicated. Conductors shall be supported by high grade non-
hygroscopic and non-tracking insulating material. They shall be anchored in at least one position and a
means of taking up expansion and contraction incorporated.
Where the enclosure is of metal, trunking units shall be so joined that they form a circuit protection
conductor. In addition, where indicated, a copper strip shall be installed outside of and for the full length
of the busbar trunking. The strip shall be of the size indicated and shall be bonded to an earthing terminal
fitted to each trunking unit forming the system and to the protection conductor of the incoming cable at
the feeder unit.
The length of busbar trunking systems shall be determined from drawings for tender purposes. But all
measurements shall be checked on site prior to manufacture.
3.16 CABLES DUCTS AND TRENCHES
BS 7671 Requirement for Electrical Installations (IEE - Wiring Regulations)
3.16.2 Routes
Unless the routes of cables are indicated on the drawing they shall be determined by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer before work is started.
Cables installed on the surface shall be parallel with the lines of the building construction and properly
aligned.
Cables buried below ground shall, as far as practicable, follow the features of the site such as roadways
and building lines. Ducts at road crossings shall normally be at right angles to the line of the road.
3.16.3 Segregation
A minimum clearance in accordance with Table 3.6A shall be allowed from any equipment pipe or
ductwork; the distance shall be measured from the external surface of any lagging. In the event of difficulty
in achieving these requirements the Engineer shall be informed.
Spacing between cables shall comply with Table 3.6A but, where indicated, account must be taken of any
grouping necessary to maintain the current carrying capacities of the cables.
No stacking of cables on cable tray will be permitted, except for single core cables in trefoil and control
cables unless otherwise indicated.
Space shall be allowed along cable routes for future additions, where indicated, and cable supports shall
be of adequate size for the ultimate load.
Adequate space shall be left between cable runs and the building fabric and other services to allow for the
future removal or installation of cable.
3.16.4 Supports and Fixings
Cables shall be adequately supported, by one of the methods specified in section 3.6, throughout their
length except where they run through cable ducts or are buried direct in the ground. Fixing direct to the
building fabric by cable cleats may be adopted for single runs subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Equipment
Cable HV LV Telephone Co-axial Pipework
Ductwork
mm mm mm mm mm
Buried:
HV 50 300 300 300 300
LV 300 25 150 150 300
Telephone 300 150 50 50 200
Co-axial 300 150 50 50 200

AGL
300 150 150 150 200
(see note 2)
In Air:
HV 50 300 300 300 300

(see note
LV 300 150 150 150
3)
Telephone 300 150 - - 100
Co-axial 300 150 - - 100
Notes:
The minimum spacings apply unless otherwise indicated.
LV cables in air may be bunched subject to any requirements regarding segregation and installation
methods set out in the IEE Wiring Regulations and any requirements that may be indicated regarding
groupings, installation in defined conditions or installation in enclosed trenches.
When cables are in steel pipes the minimum spacings need not be maintained, but a minimum space of
25mm shall be left between the pipes.
IEE Wiring Regulations regarding space factors shall be observed.
Spacing of supports for HV cables shall comply with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations.
Cables shall be supported within 300mm of their termination at equipment; the weight of the cable shall
not be carried by the terminal box or gland.
Where cables cross expansion and settlement joints in the building structure they shall be fixed 300mm
each side of the joint and sufficient slack left between to allow for movement. Where the cables are buried
in the building fabric suitable provision shall be made to allow for movement of the structure. The
Contractor shall submit his proposals for the approval of the Engineer.
3.16.5 Trenching
Before commencing any excavation or trenching, the Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for
protecting existing underground services, including checking on the relevant record drawings of utilities.
Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600mm of existing services shall be by hand digging. All
services uncovered, whether expected or not, shall be reported immediately to the Engineer; they shall
be supported by slings or other suitable means and protected. Any damage to services, however minor,
shall be reported immediately to the Engineer; no repairs or replacement shall be done unless the Engineer
gives approval.
When cable trenches are opened all cables shall be laid as quickly as possible. The Engineer's approval
shall be obtained before a trench is backfilled, but generally backfilling shall be commenced within 24
hours of cable laying and the work completed speedily.
Trenches shall be excavated to provide a minimum cover for cables in accordance with Table 3.6B. Turf
and top soil shall be removed carefully and preserved for reinstatement in their original positions.
Excavations shall be carried out in accordance with BS6031 and shall comply with the Construction
(General Provisions) Regulations, 1961. Excavations shall be kept free of water and protected against
damage or collapse. The safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings, roads, sewers and
services from damage shall be ensured; all necessary sheeting, timbering, strutting and shoring shall be
supplied, erected and subsequently removed.
Before cables are laid the bottom of the trench shall be graded evenly, cleared of loose stones and then
covered for the full width of the trench with a 75mm layer of earth which has passed through a sieve with
a maximum mesh of 12mm or with sieved sand. For mineral-insulated cables the maximum mesh of the
sieve shall be 6mm and the depth of earth or sand shall be not less than 25mm. Where the level of trench
bottom has to change the slope shall not be greater than 1 in 12.
After cables have been laid a further layer of earth or sieved sand shall be added over the full width of the
trench and tamped, to provide finally not less than 50mm cover over the cables. The earth shall have
passed through a sieve with a maximum mesh of 12mm; for mineral-insulated cables the maximum mesh
size shall be 6mm.
Trenches shall be backfilled in layers and each layer shall be rammed. The first two layers shall be 100mm
deep and rammed by hand; the remaining layers shall be not more than 200mm deep and power ramming
may be used. Warning tapes and covers shall be utilized. Where applicable, top soil and turf shall be
replaced and the final level shall be level with or not more than 20mm above the adjacent ground level. A
higher degree of consolidation is required for excavations within shoulders and over-runs and adjacent to
paved areas used by aircraft; at these locations the final layer of reinstatement shall be compacted by
power ramming until maximum possible compaction is achieved.
3.16.6 Warning Tapes and Covers
A warning tape shall be placed above each cable that is laid direct in the ground and above each cable
duct. The tape shall be laid at a depth of 30mm below the finished surface level except where the depth
of roadway or paved area base exceeds 300mm in which case the tape shall be laid immediately below the
base.
Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150mm wide and 0.1mm thick. They shall be yellow in
colour and bear the continuously repeated legend "- CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW-", or similar, in
black letters not less than 30mm high.
Protection covers shall comply with BS2484 and Table 3.6C. they shall be provided for HV cables and for
mineral- insulated cables; for other cables they shall be provided only where indicated. Covers shall be laid
directly on the tamped sieved earth or sand that covers the cables.
3.16.7 Ducts
Cables shall be installed in cable ducts where they pass under or within 5m of railway tracks, where they
pass under roadways, where they are supported on bridges, and additionally where indicated.
Ducts shall be of a size suitable for the cables to be drawn-in and, if necessary in the future, withdrawn
without damage; the minimum size of bore shall be 100mm. the bore shall be smooth and entirely free
from rough spots, sharp edges, imperfections and protuberances.
Cable ducts of vitrified clay shall comply with BS65 and shall be extra strength class. They shall be joined
with plastic flexible sleeves to provide self-alignment of the bore.
Fibre ducts shall be heavy gauge pitch impregnated fibre conduits complying with BS4108, with snap ring
or taper coupling joints.
PVC ducts shall be plasticized PVC pipe complying either with BS4660 or with BS3506 classes B, C, D or E;
they shall have rubber sealing rings complying with BS2494. PVC ducts shall not be used where the depth
of cover exceeds 1m.
Steel tubes shall comply with BS1387 and shall have screwed socket joints and end bushes. Tubes shall be
protected against corrosion with a coat of bitumastic paint before they are installed. Tube of 100mm bore
shall be of light thickness; above this size they shall be medium thickness.
Location and Depth of Cover

In open ground and Under Under or alongside
Type of Cable In other situations
under pavements Roadways railways
mm mm mm mm
HV 800 1000 1800 as indicated

LV Telephone
500 800 1800 as indicated
Co- axial
Within Site Boundary Outside Site
Boundary
Under
AGL Open ground In open ground Under vehicle tracks
vehicle
tracks
400 800 500 800
Dimensions of cover
Number of cables
Type of Cable Material of cover (nominal) Diameter of cables
per cover
length x width
mm mm
Reinforced 914 152 50 1
HV
concrete 914 178 50 1
50 1
LV Telephone Co- 229 152
50 1
axial Earthenware 305 229
40 1
3.16.8 Laying of Ducts
Unless otherwise indicated, cable ducts shall be laid at depths which comply with the requirements of
Table 3.6B or National Joint Utilities Group, by agreement with the Engineer.
The bottom of trenches shall be rammed to provide a flat firm bedding; where rock is present a layer of
loose soil shall be spread over the bottom and also rammed. In water-logged or unstable soil a 75mm
thickness of grade 10 concrete, as defined in CP110, with 20mm aggregate shall be laid as a foundation
and soil placed around and above to a depth of 75mm above the top duct.
Where cable ducts pass under or within 5m or, railway tracks or under roadways the bottom of trenches
shall be rammed and the ducts laid on and surrounded by concrete providing a minimum cover of 150mm
all around. The concrete shall be grade 20, as defined in CP110, with 200mm of aggregate. At each joint
in the ducts flexibility shall be maintained by forming a joint in the concrete by a 25mm thick compressible
foam filter.
Cable ducts shall extend not less than 1000mm beyond the limit of roadways and paved areas. They shall
be at least 150mm away from gas and water pipes, drains, sewers and electrical plant. Where services
cross, the clearance shall be not less than 50mm. If difficulty arises in achieving these minimum clearances
the Engineer shall be informed.
Deflection from a straight line or variation in depth shall not exceed 1 in 30 horizontally nor 1 in 60
vertically and the cable duct shall pass the alignment tests.
Draw-pits shall be constructed at each change of direction and, for straight runs, at intervals not exceeding
10m for PVC or fibre ducts and 25m for vitrified clay ducts and steel pipes. Draw-pits shall be of adequate
size to enable cables to be drawn-in without damage or undue stress due to bending. The construction of
draw-pits and their covers shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Concrete shall comply with CP110 and shall be of a class suitable for the sulphate content of the soil in
accordance with Table 49 of the Code of Practice.
Alignment shall be proved by drawing a mandrel through each duct. The diameter of mandrels shall be
7mm less than the bore diameter. Mandrels shall be of wood, 250mm long.
While cable ducts are being laid nylon draw-lines shall be threaded through each length of duct. The draw-
lines shall have a breaking strength of not less than 50N and shall be at least 4m longer than the duct run.
Immediately after laying, and before backfilling the trench, the ends of the cable ducts shall be sealed
temporarily with hardwood plugs. Draw-lines shall be secured outside the plugs.
Where a cable duct is not used immediately, temporary marker posts shall be installed to locate the ends
of the duct, and retained in position until cables are drawn in. Markers shall be white painted wooden
posts 75mm x 75mm, standing not less than 600mm out of the ground.
Immediately before cables are drawn-in, ducts shall be cleared with a mandrel 150mm long and having a
diameter 12mm less than the bore diameter. The mandrel shall be followed by a circular wire brush with
a diameter 12mm less than the bore diameter.
3.16.9 Handling of Cables
Installation of cables shall be carried out only when the ambient temperature is above 0C unless a written
statement from the cable manufacturer confirms that no damage to the cable wire will result, and the
approval of the Engineer is given. The temperature of the cable shall have been above 0C, or above the
minimum temperature recommended by the manufacturer, for at least 24 hours immediately prior to
installation; any special measures to achieve this shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to the cables, to other services
and to building fabric. Recommendations or instructions available from the cable manufacturers
concerning the installation of cables shall be taken into account; in particular co-axial cables shall not be
bent in a radius less than six times the overall diameter. Any damage shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer.
Cable drums shall be unloaded carefully by means of either a crane or ramp and impact with the ground
shall be avoided. They shall be supported on axles and axle stands while the cable is being pulled; twisting
and abrasion of the cable serving or over sheath shall be avoided.
Cables shall be pulled over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable being dragged over ground
or other surface. For cables pulled into thrust borings or cable ducts and for all cables exceeding 10m
length, cable stockings shall be used for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken
on the cable cores as well as the sheath and excessive strain shall be avoided.
Cables laid in trenches shall cross other cables only at junctions clearances between the cables shall be
maintained at cross overs. Cables shall not be laid one above the other except by agreement with the
Engineer.
Only one cable shall be pulled into each duct except for the following, which may be bunched subject to
the requirements of Table 3.8A and a maximum space factor of 20%
Single-core cables forming one circuit; Mineral-insulated cables;

Alarm, control, communication and monitoring cables.
Cables that are to be installed in the same duct shall be bunched together and pulled in one operation;
additional cables shall not be drawn-in subsequently.
The ends of all cables shall be sealed during laying unless jointing or termination is carried out immediately.
The sealed ends of power cables shall be marked with the letter 'A' or 'Z' to indicate the core sequence,
'A' at the end where the sequence is clockwise and 'z' where it is anti-clockwise looking into the end.
3.16.10 Sealing Ducts and Openings
After cables have been installed the ends of all ducts and service conduits (including spare ways) shall be
sealed.
Where ducts and service conduits enter buildings the seal shall form a barrier against gas, water, oil, fire
and attach by vermin. Spare ducts and service conduits shall be similarly sealed with removable material.
The method of sealing shall be submitted for the Engineers approval before work commences.
Fire barriers at fire-resistant structural elements, such as floors and walls, shall satisfy the requirements
of BS476 Part 8 for insulation, stability and integrity for the period of time indicated. The method shall be
submitted for the Engineers approval before work commences.
3.16.11 Cable Guards
Cable guards shall be fitted where cables are mounted at low level on walls, poles, towers and other
locations indicated.
Cable guards shall be constructed from 1.6mm thick galvanized steel sheet and formed into a casing with
external flanges for fixing to the fabric.
Guards shall extend to a height of 3500mm above ground or floor level for HV cables and 1500mm for LV
cables. In external locations the guards shall extend 300mm below finished ground level; they shall be
protected inside and out with bitumastic paint extending from the bottom up to 150mm above finished
ground level.
3.16.12 Marking of Cables
Buried cables shall be permanently identified by concrete slab markers. The markers shall be 600mm
square by 100mm thick with impressed characters; they shall be made of grade 20 concrete, as defined in
CP110, with 10mm aggregate. The wording shall be "HV CABLE" or "LV CABLE" as appropriate together
with circuit details as indicated; in addition the word "JOINT" shall be added where appropriate.
Cable markers shall be installed flush with the finished ground level, on the precise line of the cable.
Cable markers shall be located at every point where a cable enters a building, sub-station, plinth or
distribution pillar; at each joint, change of direction, road and pathway crossing; and along the route of
the cable at intervals not exceeding 45m.
Except where cables are buried, located in switch rooms, in ducts and spaces designated solely for
electrical services, or have orange oversheaths, they hall be identified by adhesive bands coloured orange,
complying with BS1710. The bands shall be not less than 100mm long, located at least once within each
separate compartment through which the cables pass and at intervals not exceeding 12m.
Except where cables are buried or enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting, they shall be permanently
identified by discs. The discs shall be of laminated plastic materials with black characters on white;
characters shall be not less than 3mm high. The inscription shall indicate the nominal voltage, the
designation of the load, the number and cross sectional area of the cores and the rated voltage of the
cable.
Cable identification discs shall be attached to the cable with ties. Discs shall be located within 500mm of
terminations and joints, at least once within each separate compartment through which the cables pass,
and at intervals not exceeding 24m; they shall coincide with the colour bands.
3.16.13 Redundant Cables
Where cables are to be recovered they shall be cleaned and coiled on drums appropriate to the size of
cable.
Redundant cables shall be disconnected and removed unless otherwise stated.
3.17 INSPECTION AND TESTING
BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations
3.17.2 General
Inspection and testing shall be done in accordance with the IEE Wiring regulations, the requirements of
this Section and as indicated.
Inspection shall include a physical check that all equipment has been securely fixed and that all electrical
connections are mechanically sound.
3.17.3 Information
For equipment supplied under the contract the Contractor shall obtain from manufacturers the
time/current characteristics of all protective devices for automatic disconnection of supply and provide
copies to the Engineer and to the person or persons carrying out the inspection and testing
3.17.4 Testing Methods
The Engineer shall be notified of the method to be used for each type of test and the notification shall be
given not less than 28 days before the final tests are to be made. The tests shall be carried out in
accordance with the methods set out in the IEE Wiring Regulations.
For testing continuity of protective conductors and equipotential bonding an a.c. source shall be used
unless the Engineer agrees otherwise.
The method used to verify the effectiveness of the protection afforded by a residual current-operated
device shall give the operating time and the current used shall not exceed 100% of the nominal setting of
the device. For a fault-voltage operated device the test voltage between the exposed conductive part and
earth shall not exceed 50 volts. In addition to the tests simulating an appropriate fault condition any test
facility incorporated in the device shall be operated to test its effectiveness.
High voltage tests on HV cables and, where indicated, on LV cables, factory built assemblies and
transformers shall comply with the requirements for site testing in the appropriate British Standards.
Alternative methods to those set out in the IEE Wiring Regulations may be proposed for the approval of
the Engineer, but they shall be not less effective than those in the Regulations.
Where necessary to prevent damage to components of equipment the equipment shall be disconnected
for the duration of the relevant tests.
3.17.5 Power Cables
Tests shall be made immediately on completion of the installation of power cables to demonstrate that
the phase sequence is correct at all end connections.
HV cables and, where indicated, LV cables shall be tested at high voltage as soon as their installation is
complete.
LV cables not required to be high voltage tested shall be tested for insulation resistance as soon as their
installation is complete. The test voltage shall be 500V d.c. for installations rated up to 500V and 1000V
d.c. for installations rated up to 1000V. Tests shall cover all permutations between each conductor, screen,
metallic sheath, armour and earth.
The oversheaths of cables laid underground shall be given a voltage withstand test after backfilling of the
trenches is complete but before termination.
3.17.6 Alarm, Control, Communication and Monitoring Cables.
Cables shall be tested as soon as their installation is complete to ensure that the cores are continuous,
that they have not been crossed and that the insulation resistance is satisfactory. Insulation tests shall
cover all permutations between each conductor, screen, metallic sheath, armour and earth.
For polyethylene and dry paper-insulated communications cables the insulation resistance for each
conductor shall be not less than 1500  L megohms, where L is the cable length in kilometres. The
measured resistance of each conductor shall not exceed the calculated resistance by more than 5%; the
calculated value will be made available by the Engineer.
3.17.7 Conduit and Trunking
Where conduit is cast in-situ in reinforced concrete it shall be checked for freedom from blockage and
steel conduit shall be tested for electrical continuity as soon as the shuttering has been removed.
Steel conduit and trunking systems shall be inspected and tested before any wiring is installed; underfloor
ducting and flush floor trunking shall be inspected and tested before screeding.
3.17.8 Earth Electrodes
The resistance of each component earth electrode, whether for earthing of protective conductors,
lightning protection or an electrical system, shall be checked immediately after installation of the
electrodes and the results submitted to the Engineer.
3.17.9 Lightning Protection
Where the reinforcement of a concrete structure is indicated to form the down conductors, the electrical
continuity of the welded reinforcing bars shall be tested after each pour of concrete is completed.
At the completion of the whole lightning protection installation it shall be inspected and tested in
accordance with BS EN 62305 and BS7430.
3.17.10 Earth Fault Loop Impedances
The measured earth fault loop impedance for each circuit shall be checked against the maximum value
indicated in the IEE Wiring Regulations where the maximum value is exceeded the Engineer shall be
informed.
3.17.11 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
Fire alarm systems shall be inspected, tested and commissioned in accordance with BS5839.
3.17.12 Emergency Lighting System
Emergency lighting systems shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the "three-yearly" inspection
and test procedure laid down in BS5266.
3.17.13 Records and Certificates
Inspection and test results shall be recorded on forms agreed by the Engineer. Two copies shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 7 days of each test.
When all inspections and tests results are satisfactory a Completion Certificate and an Inspection
Certificate shall be given to the Engineer not later than the date of completion of the Works. The
certificates shall be given in the form laid down in the IEE Wiring Regulations BS5839 for fire alarm systems
and BS5266 for emergency lighting systems, BS6651.
The values of prospective short-circuit current and earth fault loop impedance at the origin of the
installation shall be recorded on the Inspection Certificate.
3.18 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS BY CONTRACTOR
BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations
3.18.2 General
Unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall provide the drawings and documents as specified within this
specification.
General layout drawing shall be drawn to a scale of 1:100 and detailed layout assembly drawings to a scale
of 1:20; if more detail is necessary scales 1:20, 1:2 and 1:1 may be used.
The numbers of sets of drawings and documents to be supplied shall be as stated.
3.18.3 Installation Drawings and Documents
Installation drawings and documents, including diagrams and schedules, shall show the details of the
Contractor's proposals for the execution of the Works and shall include everything necessary for the
following purposes:
To illustrate in detail the arrangement of the various sections of the Works and to identify the various
components;
To integrate the Works with the detail of the building and other installations. Installation drawings shall
include:
General layout drawings showing the location of all equipment including cable, cable tray, conduit,
trunking, ducting and earth electrodes;
Detailed layout drawings showing the location of all equipment including cable tray, conduit trunking and
ducting in switch rooms and plant rooms;
Assembly drawings of factory built equipment and site built assemblies;
Detailed layout drawings showing the connection of cable, conduit and trunking to equipment; detailed
layout drawings showing sections through ceiling voids and vertical shafts;
System diagrams, circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams for all installations and equipment.
Diagrams shall comply with BS5070. Interconnection diagrams shall indicate the type of cable, conductor
size and terminal numbering.
3.18.4 Builder's Work Drawings
Builder's work drawings shall show fully dimensioned details of all builder's work required in connection
with the Works together with the overall size and weight of equipment.
Where the Engineer agrees, holes may be marked out on site instead of being shown on drawings.
3.18.5 As-Installed Drawings
As-installed drawings, including diagrams and schedules, shall show all the information necessary so that
each installation can be operated, maintained, inspected and tested so as to prevent danger, so far as is
reasonably practicable. They shall incorporate the information necessary for the identification of the
devices performing the functions of protection, isolation and switching, and their locations. The values of
prospective short-circuit current and earth fault loop impedance at the origin of the installation shall be
recorded on the appropriate system diagram.
Circuit details including loading, origin, route, destination and, where buried, the depth below finished
ground level shall be shown for each cable, conduit, trunking and ducting. Conductor size and material and
the type of insulation of all cables shall be shown together with the number of cores in each cable or the
number of cables in each conduit, trunking or ducting. Where identification is by colour of insulation or
sheath this shall be shown. Joints and draw-in boxes shall be shown.
Where incoming supply cables are installed by others they shall also be shown.
Drawings shall indicate whether conduit, trunking or ducting is surface mounted, concealed in ceiling
spaces, in wall chases, in floor screens or cast in-situ.
All earthing conductors, main equipotential bonding conductors, main earthing terminal or bar, protective
conductors and supplementary equipotential bonding conductors shall be identified with function, origin,
route, destination, conductor size and material, type of insulation and, where buried, the depth below
finished ground level. Test points shall be indicated.
Earth electrodes shall be identified as to their type, dimensions, material and depth below finished ground
level. the nature of the soil and any treatment that has been given to it or special fill that has been used in
the installation shall be identified.
Details of each item of equipment, including luminaires, shall include electrical characteristics,
classification, degree of protection against ingress of solids and liquids, class of protection against
corrosion and manufacturer's name and reference.
Diagrams shall where necessary they shall be supplemented with physical arrangement drawings to assist
the location and identification of component parts of equipment.
Drawings of the lightning protection system shall include identification of those elements of the building
fabric used as air terminations and down conductors. Details of connection to structural steel frames or to
the reinforcement of a concrete structure shall be included. Test clamps shall be identified.
For underfloor and ceiling electric heating installations the location of cables shall be accurately
dimensioned and the cold loop resistances indicated.
During the course of the Works the Contractor shall maintain a fully detailed record of all changes to
ensure that the as-installed drawings are in all respects accurate.
Each drawing shall be in accordance with BS308 to ensure suitability for micro-filming and shall be on
durable translucent material, other than paper, of a standard size AO to A4 in accordance with BS3429.
The words "AS- INSTALLED" shall be placed in 19mm block letters adjacent to the title block of each
drawing together with the name of the site and the section of the Works, the title of the installation, the
date of completion of the Works, and the name of the Contractor.
A draft of each as-installed drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer before final issue is made.
3.18.6 Maintenance and Operating Instructions
For each electrical installation, system and individual equipment forming part of the Works, the
maintenance and operating instructions shall include:
A description of the extent and manner of operation, including duration periods of standby systems;
A description of the method used for compliance with the IEE Wiring Regulations together with
time/current characteristics for all protective devices for automatic disconnection of supply;
A copy of the inspection certificate and all the test records;
Comprehensive instructions for the switching on, operation, switching off and isolation, and for dealing
with emergency conditions;
Instructions for any precautionary measure necessary;
Instructions for servicing, including frequency and materials to be used, to maintain the equipment in good
and safe condition;
The names and addresses of suppliers of all major components together with the type and model
reference, serial number, duty rating and the order number and date.
Maintenance and operating instructions shall be indexed and contained in ring binders with stiff covers.
The name of the site shall be printed on the front and spine with, where more than one volume is
necessary, a suitable identification title. The date of completion of the Works shall be included on flyleaf.
Copies of manufacturer's data may be incorporated to supplement the descriptions and instructions but
shall not replace them. Only data relevant to the Works shall be included; where non-relevant data
appears on the same sheet it shall be clearly marked to show that it is not applicable. The data shall be
cross reference with the text and included in the index; if possible; it shall be contained in the ring binders,
but where this is not possible suitably protected box files or folder shall be provided.
A draft of the maintenance and operating instruction shall be submitted to the Engineer before the final
documents are issued.
3.19 SPECIAL LOCATIONS
3.19.1 General
Locations containing special installations, including those listed in this part, where particular hazards apply
shall comply with the minimum standards indication in this part.
Any other method complying with IEE Wiring Regulations, may be used providing the minimum standard is
demonstrably exceeded.
3.19.2 Locations Containing A Bath Tub Or Shower
The requirements relate to any washing area where the risk of electric shock is increased.
Additional requirements may be necessary where there are increased risks due to the state of health of this
individual.
These requirements apply to site built assemblies. Factory built assemblies shall comply with relevant
standards and be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and this part with respect to
socket outlets and switches.
Generally switches shall be mounted out of reach of fixed baths. Sockets outlets (240V) shall not be installed.
Specially designed and constructed outlets fed from SELV transformer complying with BS3535 shall be
installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
All installations shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of at least 500v ac rms for 1 minute
(preferably twice the working voltage plus 1000 volts).
Where protective measures of earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection are used the
arrangement shall comply with IEE Wiring Regulations for voltages above SELV and disconnection times shall
be a maximum of 0.8 seconds for other voltages.
The characteristics of all components of the supply shall be coordinated so that during a fault simultaneously
accessible conductive parts do not constitute a hazard.
Degrees of protection of enclosures against ingress of water shall be fit for the purpose and where water is
expected to be used for cleaning shall be at least IPX5, BS5490.
If employed, the following methods shall be additional to the other provisions of this specification.
Protection by means of obstacles.
Protection by means of placing out of reach.
Provision shall be made for connection of portable equipment only after the written consent of the Engineer.
Residual current devices shall be installed for additional protection.
Control switches of apparatus shall comply with the relevant standards and be approved by the British
Electrical approvals board for the purpose.
Control gear and accessories not specially approved for the location may be mounted outside the location
and operated by insulated cords.
Electrical equipment specially intended for use in a bath tub shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Underfloor heating in the location of the bath shall be covered by a metallic grid and/or have an earthed
metallic sheath in intimate connection with conductive floor materials and bonded of the local equipotential
bonding.
3.19.3 Swimming Pools
The requirements relate to any swimming pool or paddling pool and its surroundings where the risk of
electric shock is increased to the individual in normal health.
Additional requirements may be necessary where there are increased risks due to the state of health of the
individual.
These requirements apply to site built assemblies. Factory built assemblies shall comply with relevant
standards and be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and this part with respect to
socket outlets and switches and accessories.
General switches shall be mounted out of reach of persons using the swimming pool and conditions of lower
than normal body resistance.
Sockets shall be mounted out of reach, as defined in IEE Wiring Regulations and be arranged to be used only
by approved persons. They shall comply with BS196 or BS4343.
Specially designed SELV equipment to BS3535, approved by the engineer, shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions and the relevant standard.
All insulation shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of at least 500v ac rms for one minute
(preferably twice the working voltage plus 1000v).
Where protective measures of earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection are used the
arrangement shall comply with IEE Wiring Regulations for voltages above SELV and disconnection times shall
be a maximum of 0.8 seconds for other voltages.
The characteristics of all component parts of the supply shall be coordinated so that during a fault
simultaneously accessible conductive parts do not constitute a hazard.
Degrees of protection against ingress of water shall be fit for the purpose and where water is expected to
be used for cleaning shall be at lease IPX5, to BS5490.
If employed, the following methods shall be additional to the other provisions of this specification.
Protection by means of obstacles,
CVTEC PLUS Page 122 of 399 SECTION 4 – MECHANICAL SERVICES STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Protection by means of placing out of reach.
Provision shall be made for the connection of portable equipment only after the written consent of the
Engineer. Residual current devices shall be installed for additional protection.
Control switches on apparatus shall comply with the relevant standards and be approved by the British
Electrical Approvals board for the purpose.
Apparatus and accessories installed in close proximity to access the pool shall be protected by residual
current devices of agreed sensitivity, in any case to the standard:- 30mA nominal sensitivity, 40m Sec open.
Electrical equipment specially designed for the purpose and installed in the hazardous areas, for instance
floodlights, shall be each fed from separate output windings of an SELV transformer with a maximum of 18
volts output under all conditions of load.
Underfloor heating in the location of the pool shall be covered by a metallic grid and/or have an earthed
metallic sheath in intimate contact with conductive floor materials and bonded to the local equipotential
bonding.
3.19.4 Saunas
The requirements of 3.23.2 apply to locations containing a Sauna Heater. The electrical equipment shall
comply with relevant standards and be installed in compliance with the manufacturers' instructions.
3.19.5 Construction Sites
The requirements apply to any installations where the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations are not
met in full or where the work is of a temporary nature.
Equipment shall be compatible with the supply and/or standby supply. The system shall generally be one of
the following:-
TN-C-S TN-S
or TT
TT shall be fitted with permanent earth fault monitoring.
For the fixed part of the installation the maximum disconnection times for automatic disconnection shall be
5 seconds.
For the temporary installation the maximum disconnection times for automatic disconnection shall be:-
Voltage to
SELV 0.8 seconds
SELV to 120V 0.4 seconds
120V to 240V 0.2 seconds
Where protection is afforded by residual current devices the likely voltage to earth, calculated as the product
of the nominal operating current of the RCD and the impedance of the line earth loop (Zs x 1n), shall not
exceed 25 volts under fault operating conditions.
Where socket outlets rely upon electrical separation for protection each socket outlet shall be supplied from
a separate transformer.
Where reduced low voltage systems are used they shall be in accordance with BS CP 1017 and BS4363. The
degree of protection against ingress shall be fit for the purpose with a minimum of at least IP44.
Wiring systems shall be so arranged that no unintentional strain is placed on terminations other than that
intended in the design of the termination.
Where cables are routed across trafficked areas they shall be adequately protected against mechanical
damage. Plugs, sockets and cable complete shall comply with BS4343.
SECTION 4 – MECHANICAL SERVICES STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Amendment Record Sheet

SD0 Schematic Design Stage Issue 08.03.2018 CT
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Pipework
All pipework shall conform to the following requirements unless otherwise stated in the specification, or
drawings or agreed in writing:
a) All tubes shall be of even bore and wall thickness, clean and smooth throughout, be free from
corrosion, scale and internal constriction.
b) Whilst the tender drawings can be regarded as diagrammatic only, due allowance must be made for
setting pipework etc around piers and other such obstructions. Pipes generally shall follow the contour
of walls etc. Vertical pipes shall be plumb, without offsets and be set close to local projections in order
to follow their lines.
c) Pipework in visually exposed conditions shall be installed to have the neatest possible finished.
d) Piping shall be cut clean and square with the axis of the pipe and all ends reamed to remove burrs and
maintain the full bore.
e) All pipework shall be fitted so that the pipe surface or lagged surface when applicable is not less than
100 mm (4") from the finished floor or ceiling surface and not less than 25 mm (1") from the finished
wall surface, unless otherwise stated on drawings, or agreed by the Engineer. Minimum clearance
between electrical equipment and pipework shall be 150 mm (6") for hot water, steam, condensate
and gas, 50 mm (2") for cold water, when these services are run in parallel.
f) Ferrous piping shall have a rust proof coating before delivery to site, any rusting, damaged paintwork,
and welded surfaces shall be wire brushed and protected if accepted for such treatment by the
Engineer. One further coat of red primer shall be applied following completion of installation.
g) No foreign matter shall be allowed to enter pipework, plant or equipment etc during erection. All
connections shall be properly plugged, capped or fitted with blind counter flanges. Wood or paper
plugs shall not be used but purpose made plastic plugs or caps are acceptable.
h) Branch pipes shall be neatly bent or set to present a workmanlike appearance.
i) All pipework shall be tested after erection, if necessary in sections, to avoid holding up other trades.
No pipework shall be cased-in or lagged before it has been tested.
4.1.2 Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall conform to the following requirements unless otherwise stated in the specification,
on drawings or agreed in writing.
a) All mild steel pipework normally exposed to view in rooms and corridors shall have joints as follows:
Pipework up to and including 50 mm (2") bore shall have screwed joints. Joints shall be made with an
approved jointing compound or plastic jointing tape. Pipework 65 mm (2.5") bore and over shall be
flanged (unless butt welded) to the latest issue of the relevant BSS and be suitable for the pressure
involved unless galvanized pipe is used when screwed joints shall be used.
b) All mild steel pipework installed in boiler houses, plant rooms, tank rooms, ducts, ceiling voids and
external to buildings shall be welded. All galvanized pipework shall have joints in accordance with
Section 4.1.2(a) unless the pipework has been prefabricated and galvanized after manufacture.
c) All copper pipework except that on condensate services shall have capillary fittings up to and including
50 mm (2") bore and bronze welded fittings 65 mm (2.5") bore and above. Copper pipework on
condensate services shall have bronze welding fittings or "heavy" duty silver soldered fittings.
d) All steel tubulars shall be to BS EN 10255:2004 and be of "heavy" quality.
e) All screwed wrought iron and steel pipe fittings shall be to BS EN 10241:2000.
f) All malleable cast iron pipe fittings shall be to BS 143 and 1256 and be of the banded or beaded pattern.
g) All flanges, washers, bolts and nuts shall be to BS EN 1092-3:2003 except when connecting up to existing
Imperial equipment when BS 10 flanges shall be used; all flanges shall be faced across, drilled and be
complete with joint ring.
Joint rings shall extend to the inside edges of the bolt holes and when fully tightened the bolts shall
not protrude more than one full thread through the nuts. Bolts used to effect cold-draw on expansion
fittings should be removed after pulling up and replaced by bolts of the correct length.
h) All screwed joints shall be to BS 21 taper thread and be made up with an approved jointing compound
or PTFE tape.
i) The finish on fittings shall be the same as the finish on tube to which they are fitted, i.e. galvanized
fittings with galvanized tubing.
j) All steel butt welding fittings shall, where applicable, be to BS EN 10253-1:1999; BS EN 10253-2:2007
and be of "heavy" quality bevelled edge type with a wall thickness not less than the tube to which they
are to be fitted.
k) All capillary fittings shall be to BS EN 1254:1998 with integral solder ring or of the end feed pattern.
l) All bronze welding fittings shall be to BS EN 1254:1998 insofar as it applies and shall be of the insertion
type made with non-dezincifiable brazing rod.
m) Where it is necessary to deviate from a straight run, purpose made sets or springs shall be used in
preference to standard fittings. On pipework 50 mm (2") diameter and above, the sets and springs shall
be fire made; except in the case of galvanized pipework where standard fittings shall be used.
n) In all cases the tubes shall remain circular after setting.
o) All pipe fittings shall have connections of the size to suit the connecting pipework. No separate reducers
will be permitted except for fittings which are not made, for the sizes required. Bushes will not be
permitted.
p) Long screws are not acceptable and all screwed malleable iron unions shall have bronze to bronze seats.
Pipe unions on copper pipe shall be of brass or gunmetal with ground conical seats.
q) Union or flanged couplings as appropriate shall be used where pipework is connected to plant and
equipment (e.g. boilers, calorifiers, condensate coolers, pumps, tanks, cooling towers, heater batteries,
fan convectors, unit heaters, refrigeration equipment, sterilizing and catering equipment, reducing
valves, steam trap sets, automatically operated valved, humidifiers, bed-pan disposal units, etc).
r) Flanges or unions shall be incorporated in pipework at reasonable intervals of not more than 18 metres
s) (60 feet) to facilitate removal for inspection, maintenance or replacement.
t) Joints shall not be made in the thickness of any wall, floor or ceiling.
u) Nipples shall be of the "heavy" pattern; running nipples will not be accepted.
v) Connections to existing pipework shall be by purpose made fittings either screwed, compression
capillary, flanged or welded as appropriate to the size and material of the pipe.
w) Fittings of a particular type (e.g. malleable iron, capillary, welded, etc) shall be of the same make and
pattern.
x) Pipe fittings shall be installed in such a manner that air or condensate cannot be trapped and pipes can
be drained. Unequal tees shall be used in preference to equal tees with separate reducing fittings.
Unequal tees shall be eccentric pattern on horizontal pipes and concentric on vertical pipes. Bends shall
be used wherever practicable. Square, mitred, or "cut and shut" elbows or joints shall not be used. All
branches shall be made by easy sweep tees, twin elbows or sweep crosses except in drain positions or
where the use of sweep fittings may cause air locks and impede venting or draining, when square tees
may be used. Where the use of long sweep tees and bends would stand pipework too far from the wall
surfaces, and make for unsightly appearance, short sweep tees and elbows may be used providing that
the Engineer's approval is obtained beforehand. Care shall be taken to avoid the defacing of fittings.
Spanners of the correct size are to be used on all hexagons. Fittings will be rejected if badly marked and
the Contractor shall replace such at his own expense.
y) Reducing bushes will not be allowed.
z) All joints and fittings shall be suitable for the working and test media temperatures and pressures
involved.
aa) All joints shall be left clean as the work proceeds.
4.1.3 Pipe Supports
Shall be supplied and fixed to the following requirements:
a) Pipe supports shall be arranged at intervals not greater than those shown on the following table,
except for Piped Medical Gases and Vacuum, and Compressed Air which are given in the relevant Sub-
Sections. For pipes greater than 150 mm (6") diameter and pipes of materials not listed on the
following table, the values given in the latest issue of the CIBSE Guide B16 shall be used.
Where two or more pipes are supported on a common bracket the spacing shall be that for the smallest
pipe.
Pipe Pipe Intervals for Intervals for

Material Nominal Bore Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs
mm inches m feet m feet
Wrought 13 0.50 2.0 6 2.4 8
Iron 20 0.75 2.4 8 3.0 10
or 25 1.00 2.4 8 3.0 10
Mild Steel 30 1.25 2.7 9 3.0 10
or 40 1.50 3.0 10 3.6 12
Heavy Gauge 50 2.00 3.0 10 3.6 12
65 2.50 3.0 10 4.5 15
Copper 75 3.00 3.6 12 4.5 15
100 4.00 4.0 13 4.5 15
125 5.00 4.0 13 5.45 18
150 6.00 4.25 14 5.45 18
Pipe Pipe Intervals for Intervals for

Nominal Bore Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs
Material
mm inches m feet m feet
13 0.50 1.2 4 2.0 6
20 0.75 2.0 6 2.4 8
25 1.00 2.0 6 2.4 8
Light Gauge 30 1.25 2.4 8 3.0 10
Copper 40 1.50 2.4 8 3.0 10
50 2.00 2.7 9 3.0 10
65 2.50 3.0 10 3.6 12
75 3.00 3.0 10 3.6 12
100 4.00 3.0 10 3.6 12
125 5.00 3.0 10 4.5 15
150 6.00 3.0 10 4.5 15
b) Pipe supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and each support must take its due
proportion of pipe weight and allow for expansion and contraction.
c) Vertically rising pipes shall be adequately supported at base of riser to withstand total weight.
Branches shall not be used to support the riser.
d) All mild steel and copper pipework normally exposed to view in rooms and corridors and where fixed
to solid walls shall be supported by build-in long shank school board pattern brackets, unless otherwise
stated in the specification, on drawings or agreed in writing. Pipework fixed to lightweight partition or
walls, timber or metal work shall be supported by screw fixing school board pattern brackets. Copper
Pipe work forming short dead legs and medical gas and suction pipework shall be secured with
"Hospital" pattern brackets. Brackets on plain mild steel tube shall be of black japanned malleable
iron. Brackets on galvanized mild steel tube shall be of galvanized malleable iron. Brackets on copper
shall be cast brass or bronze with brass fixing screw where applicable. Brackets and fixing screws shall
be chromium plated or stainless steel where they are securing chromium plated or polished stainless
steel tube.
e) Pipework in boiler houses, plant rooms, tank rooms, ducts, ceiling voids, roof voids and outside shall
be adequately guided and supported. Hangers suspending pipework which is subject to movement
shall be complete with swivel joints at pipe rings and spherical washers at the top of the hanger rods,
which shall have a reasonable screwed length for adjustment, the adjusting screw shall be of the self-
locking type or be complete with locking back-nut. Pipework subject to movement that is supported
from below shall be fitted with rollers, chairs and guides.
f) Pipework that is not subject to movement and supported from below may rest directly on one of the
horizontal flats of the bracket, unless the pipe is copper when a lead strip shall be securely wrapped
round the pipe to interpose between the two surfaces. Pipework running horizontally shall not be
supported on pipe from another. Hinged pipe rings will be allowed but calliper hooks will not be
permitted.
g) Pipe rings on plain mild steel tube up to and including 50 mm (2") bore shall be of black japanned
malleable iron. Pipe rings on galvanized mild steel tube up to and including 50 mm (2") bore shall be
of galvanized malleable iron. Pipe rings on copper tube shall be of unpolished cast brass or bronze
except where they are normally exposed to view in rooms and corridors where they shall be of
polished finish. Pipe rings shall be chromium plated where they are securing chromium plated or
polished stainless steel tubes. Pipe rings on 65 mm (2.5") mild steel tube and over shall be of fabricated
mild steel, made in halves and secured by bolts. Rings and bolts on galvanized steel tube shall be
galvanized. Fabricated rings may be used on 65 mm (2.5") copper tube and over, in which case the
pipe rings shall be fabricated from sheet brass or copper with brass or bronze bolts.
h) Pipework installed external to building shall be of the same materials and finish as those installed
internally, unless specified hereinafter.
4.1.4 Sleeves and Wall Plates
a) Individual pipe sleeves shall be fitted to all pipes passing through walls, ceilings and floors. The pipe
sleeve shall be of the same material and finish as the pipe and shall leave a clearance of 1.5 mm (1/16")
to 3 mm (1/8") between the pipe and the pipe sleeve and shall be cut to finish flush with the finished
surface of the building fabric. The space between the pipe and the pipe sleeve shall be lightly caulked
with ceramic fibre rope or other equally suitable material. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor fixing the pipe sleeves to ensure that they are correctly located before and after building in.
b) Where pipes are normally visible where they pass through walls, floors, ceilings and room fixtures, the
pipes shall be fitted with correctly fitting plastic or zinc alloy dye cast polished aluminium finish wall
plates. Where wall plates are fitted to chromium plated or stainless steel tube the wall plates shall be
of zinc alloy dye cast chromium plated finish. In the case of plastic wall plates they shall only be fitted
to pipes which do not have a normal working surface temperature exceeding that which the
manufacturer recommends for their product. The make and type of wall plates to be used shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering.
c) All sleeves, wall plates, etc, shall allow for the pipes to pass freely and allow for expansion.
d) Pipes passing through sleeves in external walls of buildings, ducts, subways, etc, shall be caulked
between pipe and sleeve with an approved material, e.g. lead wool and ceramic fibre rope to form an
effective and permanent vermin proof and weather proof seal.
4.1.5 Pipework Expansion and Contraction
a) Provision shall be made for movement due to expansion either by expansion joints of the loop or
bellows expansion tube or by changes in direction of the pipework. Expansion joints or changes in the
direction of the pipework shall be correctly aligned to ensure satisfactory operation. Support at such
expansion joints shall be arranged to ensure that all expansion is taken up at the expansion joint or
change in direction of the pipework. Expansion joints shall be pre-stressed for the purpose of reducing
expansion stress under working conditions, the extent of the cold draw shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer. Where proprietary bends are used to take expansion and contraction they shall be
of wrought iron and not malleable iron for ferrous materials. Branch pipes and risers shall be free to
move in the correct direction. Where connections are taken to plant and equipment, the connection
is to be suitably set to permit movement, with the valves as the fixed point.
b) Each expansion joint shall be fitted with a clearly inscribed plate giving the following details:
Manufacturer's Name
Maximum Working Pressure
Direction of Flow
Maximum and Minimum Working Lengths
All expansion joints and loops shall be appropriately insulated.
Anchors shall be of adequate strength to resist the maximum stress, and to be securely built in. Details
of load on anchor points shall be passed on to the Engineer within four weeks of the Building Services
Contract being let. Details of the anchors to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
at least 14 days before the required manufacturing date
c) All pipework subject to movement shall be adequately guided.
Guide shall be adjustable in both directions in the lateral plane so that the pipework can be accurately
aligned with the expansion joint or loop.
Where the expansion joint is adjacent to the Anchor Point, two of the above type of Guide shall be
fitted.
Where the expansion joint falls midway between Anchor Points, four of the above type of Guide shall
be fitted, i.e. two on each side of the expansion joint.
The distance from the expansion joint and to the first guide must not be more than 4 pipe diameters
and the distance between the first guide and the second guide must not be more than 14 pipe
diameters. Each guide shall not be less than two pipe diameters long and have a clearance not
exceeding 1.5 mm (one sixteenth inch) up to and including 100 mm (4") above pipes and 3 mm (one
eighth inch) for 125 mm (5") bore pipes and over.
d) Guides, anchors and methods of support shall meet with the recommendations of the expansion joint
manufacturer and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before manufacture
commences. Guides and anchors shall be fitted directly onto structure approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere they shall not be supported by drop rods.
e) Expansion joints of a particular type (e.g. loop and lyre, bellow and articulated telescopic) shall be of
the same make.
4.1.6 Welding
a) Welding shall be carried out where specified in Section 4 Sub-Section 4.1 Clauses 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.
b) All preparation, welding rods, welding fittings, welding, welding accessories and equipment and tests
etc shall comply with the relevant British Standards.
c) All welders must hold a current certificate of competency for the type and class of work which he is
carrying out. The certificate of competency must be one issued by the National Joint Industrial Council
of the Heating and Ventilating Industry, British Oxygen Company or Lloyds. The names of welders,
together with a certificate of competency, shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval before
any such welder executes any welding. Each welder shall prepare a specimen weld for testing in
accordance with BS 2971. Every weld shall be stamped with the number of the certificate of competency
of the welder who has carried out the weld. Any welding, which is found to have been performed by a
welder whose name has not been previously approved, shall be removed and the pipeline re-welded by
an approved welder.
d) Random selected in-situ welded joints chosen by the Engineer may be tested by the radiographic
method and such welds shall comply with those standards set down in BS EN 1435:1997. In the event
of such random welds proving unsatisfactory, these welds shall be removed, remade and retested. Any
claim for costs involved in removing, remaking and retesting such faulty welds will not be accepted.
e) Distance between nearest points of two adjacent branch welds shall be not less than twice the diameter
of the larger pipe. The hole in the main shall be equal to the bore of the branch and where branches are
25 mm (1") or less in diameter the hole in the main must be drilled. Where holes are flame cut, all loose
scale, oxide, etc, shall be removed before welding the branch. Where swept branches are used, the
branch shall be used as a template for the hole in the main.
Above 150 mm (6") pipe tube ends for welding shall be bevelled. No sharp or gusseted bends will be
permitted. Where branch joints, bosses and drain pockets are made, special attention shall be given
to ensure that there is no obstruction and to ensure that full bore is maintained. All welds shall be
carefully made up so as to ensure perfect continuity of the cross section so joined. Square ends of
pipes shall not be flame cut. All welds shall be free from air holes or other internal defects, be
reinforced on the external fillet and run out on either side with no undercutting or matching. Blind
weld shall be made so as to fuse completely with a penetration sufficient to produce an internal
surface bead of not more than 1.5 mm (one sixteenth inch).
f) All galvanized mild steel pipe 125 mm (5") bore and above shall be arc welded. Where arc welding is
employed on the site it shall be used also for all steel welding flanges.
g) All slip-on welding flanges shall be welded both internally and externally.
h) The building fabric and decorations shall be protected by using suitable synthetic fire resistant mats and
every precaution shall be taken against scorching or fire damage. A minimum of two suitable fire
extinguishers shall be kept adjacent to any welding operations.
i) Under normal circumstances it will be necessary for the Contractor to use an alternative electrical supply
for welding to the established normal electrical supply of the building, if applicable.
j) Branch welds on all pipes shall be fitted with unions or flanges, as appropriate to the size of the pipe,
adjacent to the Branch.
k) All surplus jointing materials, etc, shall be cleaned off from any flanged joints and all ends of pipes shall
be reamered or filed to ensure the full bore is maintained.
l) Purpose made welding fittings to BS EN 10253-1:1999; BSEN 10253-2:2007 shall be used whenever
practicable on welded pipework.
4.1.7 Draincocks
a) Draincocks shall be supplied and fitted where indicated on the drawings and in the specification and
at all low points on water systems to ensure complete drainage.
b) Draincocks shall be 13 mm (0.5") bore unless otherwise specified and shall be of cast gunmetal or
bronze construction with screwed male inlet, ribbed hose outlet to suit a hose the bore of the inlet,
loose key operated and be to BS 2879 Type A.
c) Draincocks normally exposed to view in rooms and corridors shall be of the lockshield design.
d) Draincocks shall be of chromium plated finish where fitted to chromium plated or polished stainless
steel tube.
e) Four loose keys shall be supplied for each size of draincock fitted.
4.1.8 Drainage of Water Reservoirs
The Contractor shall provide drainage to all reservoirs and potential reservoirs in water systems. Reservoirs
and potential reservoirs include cooling towers, above ground catch pits, AHU air washers (including
humidifiers and dehumidifiers), cooling coils and air conditioning units. The Contractor shall also provide all
necessary drip trays.
All drip trays shall be designed to ensure no occurrence of spillage, leakage and trapping of solid matters
and liquids. Each drip tray shall be made of durable material suitable to environment in which it is installed,
and able to resist possible attack from water treatment agents and dosing chemicals. All drip trays shall be
easily accessible for access, maintenance and possible replacement.
The drainage outlet for any drip tray and reservoir/potential reservoir shall be piped to a water sealed trap.
The depth of the trap shall be at least twice the static pressure of the system fan, if applicable, and in turn
the drainage shall discharge into either an open tundish, trapped, or a floor gulley/channel trapped, to
provide a physical air break of minimum 15 mm.
Individual drainage systems from different drip trays and reservoirs/potential reservoirs shall not be
connected together. Each individual drain system shall have an air break.
Where the second drainage pipework enters a vertical drainage stack, the tundish or floor gulley shall
discharge into a second water sealed trap.
The Contractor shall ensure that adequate clearance has been given to allow the sitting of traps and enable
the correct gradients of drainage to be achieved.
Construction of traps and drainage pipework, unless otherwise specified, shall be as below:
i. Water Sealed Trap
Shall be manufactured in clear Borosilicate glass which complies with the material specification as ISO
3585:1998 and BS EN 1595:1997.
Each glassware trap and/or each of its components shall have a logo fired into the glass surface at the glass
factory to guarantee that the glass meets all standards and is quality assured.
Each joint on glass trap and/or each of its components shall be made with a nitrile ring and PTFE inset with
a stainless steel compression shell so constructed as to offer flexibility without affecting the integrity of
the joint, and be able to resist possible attack by water treatment agents and dosing chemicals.
When jointing to other materials, quick release standard couplings and/or adaptors as recommended by
the manufacturer shall be used to provide a safe leaf free transition and easy removal of traps.
Each trap shall incorporate 1 No. cleaning hole with tight sealed screw cap and shall be marked to indicate
normal operating level of water/fluid.
ii. Drainage Pipework
All drainage pipework and fittings, including tundish, shall be run in PVC correctly sized to suit drainage
requirements, and may be either solvent weld or push fit connections, all in accordance with the Building
Regulations. Wherever applicable, the drain shall be installed into the main drainage system by others.
All condensate drains shall be PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings, able to resist possible attack by water
services treatment agents and dosing chemicals. All pipe and fittings shall be run in the positions as
indicated on the relevant drawings, or as determined on site, approved by the Engineer, and laid to an
adequate fall to drain.
Where applicable, all condensate drains running in ceiling voids shall be laid to an adequate fall and
connected via a system of branch drains which run in common distribution drains, finally connected to the
vertical drain in the plumbing duct.
4.1.9 Air Eliminators
Air bottles or automatic air eliminators shall be supplied and fitted where indicated on the drawings and
in the specification and at all high points of the heating, domestic hot water service and cooling water
service installation where self-venting through the mains or taps cannot take place or would not prove
satisfactory.
a) Generally, air bottles shall be used on heating installations and automatic air eliminator on domestic
hot water installations and cooling water installations, unless otherwise stated on the drawings or in
the specification.
b) Air bottles shall be comprised of a 50 mm (2") square branch (or branch the diameter of the pipe being
vented, whichever is smaller) connected to an air bottle formed from 50 mm (2") tube and not less
than 225 mm (9") long (or size agreed with the Engineer) fitted with a cap and loose key operated 6
mm (one quarter inch) brass needle seat type air cock with loose key. Where the air bottle is fixed out
of reach a 6 mm (1/4") extension bleed pipe shall be neatly run from the top of the air bottle to a
convenient but unobtrusive position 1.375 metres (4'6") from finished floor level and terminate with
an air cock as before. Where the bleed pipe would be exposed to view in rooms and corridors, it shall
be run in 6 mm (one quarter inch) copper tube in a wall chase. In boiler houses, plant rooms and tank
rooms the bleed pipe shall be run in 6 mm (one quarter inch) mild steel tubes neatly run on the surface.
Automatic air eliminators shall be fitted to an equal square tee on the main together with the
necessary reducers. Automatic air eliminators on heating installations shall be of the non-ferrous
metal or of malleable cast iron with non-corrodible ball, valve and seat. Automatic air eliminators on
the domestic hot water shall be of non-ferrous metal with non-corrodible ball, valve and seat.
Automatic air eliminators shall have either an integral isolation valve or a separate 13 mm (half inch)
lockshield isolation valve with a flange or union between the valve and the automatic air eliminator.
From the outlet of the automatic air eliminator a male or female iron to copper union adapter shall be
fitted with a 6 mm (quarter inch) copper pipe to BS EN 1057:2006+A1:2010 neatly run to discharge at
the nearest suitable readily visible point external to the building. The discharge point shall not be into
a gutter, gulley, drain or onto a roof.
4.1.10 Vertical Thermometers
a) Vertical thermometers shall, unless otherwise stated, be mounted in the vertical position and be of
the mercury in lens glass type with cylindrical brass case and not less than 200 mm (8") long with
slotted brass revolving shutter.
b) Vertical thermometers shall have a straight or angle stem to suit the location, be perforated and be
complete with heat conducting grease filled brass pocket screwed BSP male thread.
c) Vertical thermometers shall be calibrated in degrees celsius with clear black lettering and scale on a
white background with not more than thirty and not less than fifteen divisions per 25 mm (inch).
Where an effectively fixed working temperature is being measured the scale shall be marked in red at
the working temperature.
d) Scales shall carry the name of the thermometer manufacturer.
4.1.11 Dial Thermometers
a) Dial thermometers shall, unless otherwise stated, be mounted with the dial in the vertical position and
shall, unless otherwise stated, be of the vapour pressure type with brass bulb, black finished steel case
and chromium plated bezel.
b) Rigid dial thermometers shall be flangeless.
c) Capillary tube dial thermometers shall be either flanged for panel mounting or be bracketmounted.
d) Panel mounted dial thermometers shall be either back or front flanged to suit either surface or flush
mounted panel arrangements respectively.
e) Rigid stem dial thermometers shall have either back or bottom entries with straight or angle stems
with either loose pockets or flanges to suit the mounting arrangements.
f) Capillary tube dial thermometers shall have plain bulbs with either loose pockets or flanges to suit the
mounting arrangements.
g) Unless specified hereinafter, dial thermometer shall be of bourdon type with 102 mm dial, 3/8" BSP
male inlet, black finished steel case and chromium plated bezel to BS EN 837-1:1998 with Class 1
industrial scales.
h) Pockets shall, unless otherwise stated, be of brass, filled with heat conducting grease.
i) Capillary tubes shall be of the correct length and have armoured flexible sheath. Capillary tubes shall
be neatly and securely clipped, have radiused bends not less than recommended by the manufacturer
and be routed for minimum risk of damage; this route shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to
ordering any capillary lengths.
j) Dial thermometers shall be calibrated in degrees Celsius with black pointer and clear black lettering
and scale on a white background with not more than 5C per division and not less than 2C per
division. Where an effectively fixed working temperature is being measured, the thermometer shall
be fitted with a tamper-proof loose red pointer which can be set on site to the working temperature.
k) Dials shall carry the name of the thermometer manufacturer.
l) Dial thermometers shall be as specified herewith and on the drawings and shall be of the same make
and style as any pressure or altitude gauges fitted herewith.
4.1.12 Altitude Gauges
a) Altitude gauges shall, unless otherwise stated, be mounted with the dial in the vertical position and
shall, unless otherwise stated, be of the bourdon tube type with 102 mm diameter, 3/8" BSP male
thread inlet with black finished steel case, chromium plated bezel and to be BS EN 837-1:1998 with
Class 1 industrial scale. Direct mounted altitude gauges shall be flangeless.
b) Panel mounted altitude gauges shall be either back or front flanged to suit either surface or flush
mounted panel arrangements respectively.
c) Altitude gauges shall have either back or bottom entries to suit the mounting arrangement and be
fitted with a bronze gauge cock with BSP female thread ends and ebonized lever handle. Where the
cock is exposed and fitted adjacent to the altitude gauge it shall be chromium plate finished.
d) Altitude gauges shall be calibrated in both kilonewtons/sq. metre and metres head of water with black
pointer and clear black lettering for the former scale and clear red lettering for the latter scale on all
white background with not more than five kilonewtons/sq. metres or ten metres per division and not
less than 0.5 kilonewtons/sq. metre or one metre per division.
e) Altitude gauges shall be fitted with a loose adjustable red pointer, which can be set on site to the
working head. The gauge shall be so assembled that the front must be removed before the position of
red pointer can be adjusted.
f) Altitude gauges shall have dials calibrated from zero to no less than 1-3 times and not more than twice
the operating pressure.
g) Dials shall carry the name of the gauge manufacturer.
h) Altitude gauges shall be as specified herewith and on the drawings and shall be the same make and
style as any pressure gauges or dial thermometers fitted herewith.
4.1.13 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
a) Pressure and vacuum gauges hereafter referred to as pressure gauges shall, unless otherwise stated,
be mounted with the dial in the vertical position and shall, unless otherwise stated, be of the bourdon
tube type with 102 mm dial, 3/8" BSP male thread inlet, black finished steel case and chromium plated
bezel and be to BS EN 837:1998 with Class 1 industrial scale.
b) Direct mounted pressure gauges shall be flangeless. Panel mounted pressure gauges shall be either
back or front flanged to suit either surface or flush mounted panel arrangements respectively.
c) Pressure gauges shall have either back or bottom entries to suit the mounting arrangement and be
fitted with a bronze gauge cock with BSP female thread ends and ebonized lever handle. Where the
cock is exposed and fitted adjacent to the pressure gauge it shall be chromium plate finished.
d) Pressure gauges on steam lines shall have "U" or ring syphon interposed between the gauge and the
tapping point where practicable fitted adjacent to the latter. The syphon shall be formed from steel
tube to BS EN 10216-2:2002; BS EN 10217-2:2002 and shall be filled with water prior to the gauge
being put into service.
e) Pressure gauges shall be calibrated in bars and kilonewtons per square metre for pressure and
millimetres of mercury for vacuum with black pointer and clear black lettering and scale on a white
background, with not more than five kilonewtons/sq. metre or one bar per division and not less than
0.5 kilonewtons/sq. metre or 0.1 bar per division.
f) Where an effectively fixed working pressure is being measured the pressure gauge shall be fitted with
a loose red pointer, which can be set on site to the working pressure. The gauge shall be so assembled
that the front must be removed before the position of the red pointer can be adjusted.
g) Pressure gauges shall have dials calibrated from zero to no less than 1-3 times and not more than twice
the operating pressure, and shall have positive and negative scales to indicate positive and negative
pressure respectively.
h) Dials shall carry the name of the gauge manufacturer.
i) Pressure gauges shall be as specified herewith and on the drawings and shall be the same make and
style as any altitude gauges or dial thermometers fitted herewith.
4.1.14 Dezincification
All pipework, fittings and brazing materials on copper pipework services shall be made of non-
dezincifiable material whether specified in particular detail or not. No materials subject to
dezincification shall be used.
4.1.15 Painting
a) All plant, equipment and pipework other than that with galvanized, stainless steel, chromed or
vitreous enamelled surfaces, or that fabricated from copper, brass or gunmetal, shall be given
protective coatings at the manufacturing works.
b) All plant, equipment and ferrous pipework which have been stored on site and become rusty on
outside surfaces or have damaged paintwork shall be wire brushed and then painted with one coat of
red oxide paint or zinc chromate galvanized paint after erection to prevent rusting.
c) Welded joints in pipes and purpose made items of equipment, such as brackets, anchors, steel hangers
and pipe guides, other than galvanized, shall be wire brushed and given a coat of red oxide or zinc
chromate paint after manufacture and a second coat after erection.
d) Damaged paintwork on all equipment shall be made good to manufacturer's finish.
e) All exposed pipework and metalwork, including ductwork in boiler houses, plant rooms, tank rooms
and outside, other than that which is given the requisite number of coats of paint at the
manufacturers' works, shall be given one coat of suitable priming paint and two coats finishing to
approved colour.
f) All bright machined parts are to be specially protected to prevent corrosion.
g) Metal surfaces shall be wire brushed and thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and
given the appropriate undercoating or treatment before the final finished coats are applied. Paint
applied to hot surfaces shall be suitable for the appropriate temperature.
h) Bright or machined surfaces which have become pitted or marked by rust shall be replaced.
i) All plant and major equipment in boiler houses, plant room, tank rooms, etc, shall be stencilled with
their title and capacity.
j) Operating positions of dampers, levers and handles, if not indicated on the equipment, shall be
suitable marked.
k) Decorative painting of services, heating surfaces and equipment other than specified under Section 4
Sub-Section 4.1 Clause 4.15 a) to f) shall be carried out under a separate contract unless otherwise
specified but all pipework and brackets shall be thoroughly cleaned before paint is applied.
4.1.16 Bacteria Free Materials
All materials supplied shall be of a type that will not support bacteria. No acoustic insulation or sound
deadening material shall be manufactured with any form of animal hair.
4.1.17 Materials and Equipment Suitability
All pipework, fittings, valves, etc, plant and equipment shall be suitable for the pressures, temperature,
conditions of use, etc, that may normally be expected to apply after the installation is completed, and for
any testing that is called for in this specification.
4.1.18 Checking of Connections
The correctness of all connections required to be made to all items of plant and equipment, whether such
plant and equipment has been supplied under this contract or not, shall be checked. Details of operation,
working and test pressures and temperatures shall be confirmed to others that may be concerned and
satisfactory confirmation received before the system is tested and commissioned.
4.1.19 Foundation Bolts
Foundation bolts of the correct diameter and length, of the Rawlbolt pattern with an approved type of
self- securing lock nut shall be supplied for each item of equipment fixed to a concrete base. Each item of
equipment shall be aligned and levelled using steel shims. Holding down bolts shall be correctly positioned
before grouting in of these bolts is carried out.
4.1.20 Machine Guards
Suitable mesh galvanized wire guards shall be fixed over the drives and all moving parts of all machinery.
The guards shall be of substantial construction to the approval of the Engineer. The guards shall be so
constructed that the rotation of shafts and the movement of drive belts may be readily observed without
removal of the guard. All guards shall be removable and provision shall be made so that easy access can
be obtained to the ends of the motors and shafts without removal.
4.1.21 Electrical Work
a) Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification, all electrical equipment specified herein shall
be supplied and fixed but the wiring to such electrical equipment shall be carried out under a separate
contract. `Loose' items for example, starters, control panels, etc, shall be handed over to the Electrical
Contractor for fixing and wiring together with all necessary wiring diagrams and instructions.
b) The electrical supply is 415/240 v 50 Hertz (cps) 3 phase (4 wire)/1 phase, unless otherwise specified.
c) Starters shall be supplied as follows whether singly or as components of a control panel:
d) Starters for single phase motor shall be fitted with overload protection of the adjustable dashpot type.
Starter for 3 phase motors up to 2 kW (2.5 HP) shall be fitted with 3 overload releases of the dashpot
type and single phasing prevention. Starters for 3 phase motors above 2 kW (2.5 HP) shall be fitted
with 3 overload releases of the dashpot type, no volt trip and single phasing prevention. For motors
above
e) 3.75 kW (5 HP) and up to 15 kW (20 HP) automatic Star-Delta starter shall normally be fitted.
f) Before ordering starters, checks shall be made with manufacturers of equipment or with the Engineer
as may be necessary, the phasing, the HP rating, type and duty rating of each starter required.
4.1.22 Identification of Components
The Contractor shall supply and install identification labels to all starters, switches, control items of
equipment and respective equipment with white traffolyte or equal labels engraved in red lettering
denoting its function or section controlled. The labels shall be screwed or permanently adhered to
equipment and at the most convenient positions. Care shall be taken to ensure labels can be read without
difficulty. Details of the lettering of the labels and the method of mounting or supporting shall be
forwarded to the Engineer for approval, prior to manufacture.
4.1.23 Valve Identification
All valves and stopcocks except radiator valves shall be fitted with a brass or traffolyte (white with black
lettering) 75 mm (3") x 50 mm (2") x 1.63 mm (16g) engraved with the valve reference, service, purpose
and the circuit or section it controls. The valve reference shall coincide with all valve charts. The Contractor
shall provide valve diagrams and reference charts for the boiler house, calorifier rooms and plant rooms
mounted in glazed frames and fixed in each relative room to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or the
Purchaser. Details of all lettering on the labels shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
manufacture.
4.1.24 Damper Location Identification
The Contractor shall provide coloured identified discs to either the ceiling, ceiling tile grid or wall, as agreed
with the Engineer. The discs shall be 25 mm diameter traffolyte securely screwed into position, to indicate
damper references and locations. Damper references shall coincide with all damper charts. The colour
coding of the discs shall also co-ordinate with the requirements of Clause 4.1.25. The Contractor shall
provide ventilation/air- conditioning distribution diagrams and reference charts for the plant room(s)
mounted in glazed frames and fixed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or the Purchaser. Colour(s) of
the discs and details of all lettering on the discs shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
manufacture.
4.1.25 3.1.25 Pipeline Identification
The Contractor shall provide pipeline identification for both thermally insulated and uninsulated services
in accordance with BS 1710 and other British Standards and regulations referred to therein. The
application shall be in accordance with requirements specified elsewhere. (Refer Section 4 Sub-Section
4.9).
A similar system of colour coding, as described in Clause 4.1.24, of ceiling tiles and casings behind which
pipework valves and stopcocks are located shall be provided. These shall take the form of coloured discs
and squares of 25 mm diameter or side fastened to the building materials.
Identification bands on different pipework adjacent to each other shall be applied neatly.
4.1.26 Ductwork Identification
The Contractor shall provide ductwork identification for both thermally insulated and uninsulated
ductwork services in accordance with Building and Engineering Services Association (Formerly HVCA)
Specification DW142 Appendix C and other relevant British Standards and regulations.
Identification labels shall be adhered on all ductwork, except those permanently concealed and
inaccessible. Application of labels shall be at intervals of approximately 1.8 m and at locations
recommended by DW142 Appendix C, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or the Purchaser.
Lettering on identification labels shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
manufacture/ordering. Lettering and colours on identification labels shall coincide with references in
ventilation/air conditioning distribution diagrams to be prepared by the Contractor.
Identification discs and labels on different ductwork adjacent to each other shall be applied neatly.
4.1.27 Tools and Accessories
Provide two complete sets of tools for adjustment and maintenance of all plant and equipment, etc. The
tools shall be of best quality and shall include four sets of loose keys for air cocks, drain cocks, lockshield
valves, grilles, diffusers, dampers, etc. Each set of tools shall be contained in a steel tool box fitted with a
padlock and two keys. Tool kits not to be used prior to handover to Engineer.
4.1.28 Setting to Work and Regulating
Each new system and those existing systems affected by the new installations shall be correctly tested,
balanced and regulated to ensure that correct distribution is achieved. Also all items of equipment shall
be lubricated with oil and/or grease, in accordance with manufacturers' recommendation, before setting
to work.
4.1.29 Pre-Commissioning Cleaning
Before the installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection tests required by this Specification,
the entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned both internally and externally. All water installations
shall be flushed out with clean water. All ductwork installations shall be blown through with compressed
air, care being taken to protect the Main Building Contractor's finished work by means of temporary
protective covers fitted over grilles and registers.
During the flushing out and blowing through process provision shall be made to exclude filters, pumps,
meters and other items of plant that could be damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation
shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Cold water services for domestic use shall, after cleaning as described above and testing as described
hereinafter, be sterilized by the application of chlorine by proportional injection method to the satisfaction
of the local Water Authority/Medical Officer of Health before being brought into domestic use.
4.1.30 Tests during Construction
During the progress of the work such tests shall be carried out as may be necessary to progress the building
works. Where pipes or ductwork are concealed in the fabric of the building they shall be temporarily sealed
and tested as hereinafter detailed for each particular installation.
4.1.31 Tests on Completion
Upon completion of the Works or sections thereof, pipework installations shall, after flushing out and
refilling with clean water has been completed, be thoroughly tested. Equipment and plant not designed
to withstand the specified pressure tests indicated below shall be isolated. All circuit valves shall be
òpened' fully and vents and feeds shall be temporarily sealed unless stated otherwise.
Pressure tests shall be carried out to test all mechanical services pipework as detailed in Section 2
Appendix 2K.
All hydraulic tests shall include associated feed and vents and shall be maintained for the specified
duration, during which period no pressure loss shall be recorded. During the test period all welds shall be
hammer tested and remain firm. Upon completion of the hydraulic pressure tests all items of equipment
and plant previously isolated shall be hydraulically tested to the pressure recommended by the
manufacturer for a period of not less than 30 minutes.
If thermal insulation is to be applied to plant and pipework installations this must not occur until all
pressure tests which are appropriate to the installations have been successfully completed, but where this
would prejudice the completion of the installation, the sections concerned shall be individually tested
before the application of the insulation.
4.1.32 Working Tests and Regulations
After completion of pressure tests, working tests and regulation of each installation shall be carried out.
The Low Pressure Hot Water Heating installation shall be subjected to normal working tests with plant
operating at their design working pressure and temperature.
During this test all necessary adjustments shall be carried out and the installations regulated in accordance
with the CIBSE Commissioning Code as detailed in Section 2.3.
Unless otherwise specified, all other pipe installations shall be subjected to a normal working test with
equipment operating at design working pressure and/or temperature. During these tests all the necessary
adjustments and regulation in accordance with the relevant CIBSE Commissioning Code as detailed in
Section 2.3.
4.1.33 Commissioning of Plant and Equipment
Each item of plant and equipment shall be tested for correct operation under varying conditions from full
to no load. For all items which require the setting of controls or operating devices which are not present
at the manufacturer's works and for other items where appropriate a competent engineer from the
manufacturer's work will be required to attend on site for setting up, testing and commissioning the
particular items of plant and equipment.
4.1.34 Water for Filling and Testing
The Contractor shall include the cost for filling and hydraulic testing of all relevant systems and for the
final filling when the systems are in working order.
4.1.35 Instructions to Personnel
Allowance shall be made for the instruction of personnel in the use, maintenance and operation of the
installation. A single complete demonstration of all services with full functional operation of controls shall
be given together with the testing of the safety devices and automatic changeover equipment.
4.1.36 Drilling and Cutting Metalwork
Permission in writing must be obtained from the Engineer before any structural steelwork is cut or drilled.
4.1.37 Pump Flexibles, Vibration Absorbers
a) Flexible connections (Rubber Bellows) shall be fitted to all pump suction and discharge connections,
chillers and other centrifugal reciprocating or vibrating equipment where it is marked on the drawing,
and where anti-vibration mounts or inertia bases are fitted.
b) Rubber Bellows shall have been laboratory tested for Noise and Vibration reduction capabilities, and
due certification must be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the order being placed.
c) Rubber Bellows shall be fitted as close to the sources of vibration as practicable. The pipe at the other
end of the bellows shall be a fixed point. This being necessary to isolate/reduce noise, vibration and
resonance’s from the distribution pipework to the building fabric.
d) Rubber bellows shall be single convolution of hand laid multi ply reinforced EPDM rubber with wire
reinforced cuffs. Flanges shall be able to swivel and be removable.
e) Tie bars with rubber top hat washers shall be used where the working pressure exceeds. 4.0 Bar g, or
where the plant is fitted to anti vibration mountings where untied bellows are used the manufacturer’s
recommendations for anchors and guides shall be followed to prevent forces being exerted onto the
pump casing and AV mounts. Tie bars shall be threaded and their length adjustable.
f) For working temperatures up to 70 degree C, the bellows car case shall be nylon reinforced. As Pipe
Solutions type EE or equal and approved.
g) For working temperatures between 70 and 100 degrees C, the bellows shall be manufactured and
approved to the recognized standard, DIN 4809:1986 Part 1. As Pipe Solutions type RR or equal and
approved.
h) All flexibles used on heating circuits shall have a design for life of 120 months at 100C, and after this
time have a minimum burst pressure of 30 bar, and provided with DIN 4809 part 1 Certification, as
evidence of this compliance.
i) These flexibles shall be fully traceable, and moulded into the membrane shall be manufacturer,
country of origin, type and batch number, serial number, recognizable colour flashes, and date of
manufacture.
j) For temperature above 100 degrees C, the bellows shall be of multi-ply construction stainless steel,
with Van Stone ends and swivel flanges. For installations where the pump is on “solid” AV mounts, the
overall length shall not exceed 130mm. As Pipe Solutions type BFC or equal and approved
4.2 STEAM AND CONDENSATE INSTALLATIONS (NOT APPLICABLE)
4.3 CLOSED SYSTEM HEATING AND CHILLED WATER SERVICES
4.3.1 Pipework and Fittings
a) All heating and cooling pipes shall be of "heavy" quality mild steel tube to BS EN 10255:2004 fittings
shall be of screwed malleable cast iron or butt welded mild steel as specified in Section 4.1.2. Screwed
malleable cast iron bends and tees shall be of the long sweep pattern. Butt welded mild steel fittings
shall be of the long radius pattern, branch connections shall be made by branch bends or by bending
the branch pipe and shaping it to form a branch bend. The use of elbows and square tees will not be
permitted except in the following instances where they shall be used.
i) Branches for draincocks
ii) Branches for air bottles or automatic air vents where no circulation takes place in the branch.
iii) Where the use of an elbow or square tee would avoid a joint being formed in the structure if a bend,
pitcher tee or twin elbow had been used.
b) Tank overflow, drain and warning pipes, heating, cold feed and vent pipes shall be either "heavy"
quality mild steel tube to BS EN 10255:2004 galvanized with zinc coating 305 g/m² to BS EN ISO
1461:2009 with galvanized screwed banded or beaded malleable iron fittings, or copper tube to BS EN
1057:2006+A1:2010 with capillary fittings but in any case shall meet with the water supply authority's
requirements.
c) Separate pump drain pipes shall be as Clause 4.3.1(b) above.
d) Common pump drain pipes shall be of "heavy" quality mild steel tube to BS EN 10255:2004 galvanized
with zinc coating 305 g/m² to BS EN ISO 1461:2009. Fittings shall be of galvanized screwed malleable
iron banded or beaded. Changes in direction shall be made by means of crosses with the unused
branches plugged off.
e) Bleed pipes from automatic air vents shall be of copper tube to BS EN 1057:2006+A1:2010 with fittings
to BS EN 1254-1:1998 with integral solder ring or of the end feed pattern.
f) Bleed pipes and fittings from air bottles shall be as a) above, except that elbows shall be used. Where
bleed pipes are to be chased and plastered into the structure the pipe and fittings shall be as e) above.
g) All flanges shall be to BS EN 1092-3:2003 unless otherwise stated. Flanges shall be faced across, drilled
and be complete with joint ring, washers, bolts and nuts.
4.3.2 Expansion Joints
a) Expansion joints shall be of the bellows type suitable for axial movement with either stainless steel or
copper alloy convolution, internal telescopic sleeve to prevent any offset movements being
transmitted to the bellows, external telescopic shroud to prevent external damage to the bellows -
permit the application of insulation - further prevent offset movement being transmitted to the
bellows, limit stops to prevent excessive compression and extension and welded-on mild steel flanges
to BS EN 1092-3:2003 unless otherwise stated.
b) Expansion joints shall be as specified herewith and as Section 4, Sub-Section 4.1, Clause 4.1.5 and on
the drawings.
4.3.3 Valves and Cocks
a) Unless otherwise stated, all valves shall be of the wheel type on the flow and lockshield type on
the return.
b) Valves shall be suitable for the temperature and pressure involved.
c) Hand wheels shall have direction arrows and "OPEN" and "SHUT" either cast or moulded onto the
wheel.
d) Valves exposed in view in rooms and corridors except in Boiler House and Plant Rooms shall be
of the easy clean gate or angle type of either cast gunmetal or bronze construction with screwed
ends, inside screw, non-rising spindle except on angle valves, composition wheel on wheel valves
and closed lockshield cover on lockshield valves and be to BS EN 12288:2010 or BS 2767 as
appropriate.
e) Valves in Boiler Houses, Plant Rooms and in other accommodation not exposed to view shall be
as follows:
i. Up to and Including 50 mm Bore
Exposed bonnet gate or angle of cast gunmetal or bronze construction with screwed ends, inside
screw, non-rising spindle except on angle valves, composition or metal hand wheel valves and be
to BS EN 12288:2010 or BS 2767 as appropriate.
ii. 65 mm Bore and Above
Gate type of cast iron construction with gunmetal or bronze trim, flanged ends to BS EN 1092- 3:2003
Table E inside screw, non-rising stem, wheel operated and be to BS EN 1171:2002.
f) Valves on pipes up to and including 50 mm bore indicated as regulating valves shall be of cast
gunmetal or bronze construction with screwed ends, inside screw, rising stem, spherically seated
disc, loose key operated and be to BS 5154.
g) Valves on heating cold feed pipe shall be as follows:
Exposed bonnet gate type of cast gunmetal or bronze construction with capillary or screwed
ends, inside screw and non-rising stem, wheel operated to BS 1952.
Gate type of cast iron construction with gunmetal or bronze trim, flanged ends to BS 10 Table E,
inside screw, non-rising stem, wheel operated and be to BS EN 1171:2002.
h) Three way valves on open vents be of the "Univent" type of cast gunmetal or bronze construction
with renewable glands, wheel operated with screwed ends. The outlet from the drain part of the
valve shall be piped to low level with pipe and fittings in "heavy" quality galvanised tube to BS EN
10255:2004 with galvanised malleable iron banded or beaded fittings.
i) Safety valves shall be of the fully enclosed spring loaded type of cast gunmetal or bronze
construction with easing/testing lever, locking device and screwed ends up to and including 50
mm bore and flanged ends to BS EN 1092-3:2003 for 65 mm bore and over.
j) Valves shall be sized by the manufacturer of the safety valve, in conjunction with the heat
generator/exchanger manufacturer and the appropriate British Standards and British Codes of
Practice.
k) Safety valves shall be clearly stamped with the working head for which the valves are suitable.
The outlet from the valve shall be piped to low level with pipe and fittings as specified in section
4.1. The pipe shall not rise from the valve so as to cause water to stand at the back of the valve
seat.
l) Valves specified in Clauses 4.3.3(d), (e) and (g) above shall be manufactured by the same
manufacturer. The same manufacturer shall manufacture all the valves and cocks of a particular
type.
4.3.4 Isolation Valves
The Building Services Contractor shall provide and fix in the low pressure hot water heating pipework
where indicated on the relevant drawing/description isolation valves. Lockshield head shall be installed on
return branches for regulation purposes otherwise wheel valves shall be provided.
Valves shall be of solid wedge fullway pattern, manufactured in gunmetal with corrosion resistant
headwork. Valves shall not have rising spindles and shall be complete with metal headwheels or
lockshield heads as required. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 12288:2010 for
Series B ratings, and shall be threaded to BS 21.
Valves shall withstand pressure of 9 bars, at 180C, 20 bars - 10C to 100C.
These shall be cast iron gate valves with wedge disc, non-rising stem, manufactured to BS 1550 to
pressure/temperature rating PNS, with pre-drilled flanges to BS EN 1092-1:2007. Valves shall
withstand test pressure at 5.6 bars at 150C bars at -10C to 120C.
4.3.5 Drain Taps
The Building Services Contractor shall provide and fix drain taps for emptying down the installation at all
low points on the system.
Drain taps shall be manufactured from bronze to BS 2879:1980 type À'. The drain taps shall be of a
lockshield design and shall be fitted with non-metallic washers and spindle squared for operation by loose
key. The inlet connection shall be screwed and angled outlet shall be serrated and suitable for hose pipe
connections.
4.3.6 Automatic Air Vents
The Building Services Contractor shall provide and fix in automatic air vents and air bottles at all high points
on the circuits, as indicated elsewhere in the Specification and/or tender drawings.
Automatic air vents shall be of the float pattern type manufactured from gunmetal or bronze with nickel
alloy spindle, valve and seating, brazed float, test cock and bolted cover. Automatic air vents shall be
complete with an integral lock head isolating valve and shall be suitable for a working pressure of 6.90 bar.
Air vents shall have 15 mm diameter screwed inlets and 10 mm diameter screwed outlets connection.
4.3.7 Non-Return Check Valve
The Building Services Contractor shall provide and fix non-return check valves in the positions shown upon
the relevant drawings.
Valve shall be of swing type and suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipelines.
Valves of size 50 mm and below shall be manufactured in bronze, to BS EN 12288:2010 for Series B rating,
threaded to BS 21, also to BS 10:2009.
Each valve shall incorporate renewable rubber disk and screwed bonnet and shall withstand pressure 25
bars from -10°C to 100°C.
Valves of sizes 65 mm and above shall be manufactured in cast iron, to BS EN 12334:2001, with flanged
ends to BS 1092-3:2003.
Each valve shall incorporate bolted cover and copper alloy trim, and shall withstand 13 bars at 220C and
16 bars at -10°C to 120°C.
4.3.8 Flexible Pipe Connections, Vibration Absorbers Expansion Bellows and Fan Coil Connections
a) Pump / Equipment Flexibles, Vibration Absorbers
Flexible connections (Rubber Bellows) shall be fitted to all pump suction and discharge connections, chillers
and other centrifugal reciprocating or vibrating equipment where it is marked on the drawing, and where
anti-vibration mounts, inertia basis are fitted.
Rubber Bellows shall have been laboratory tested for Noise and Vibration reduction capabilities, and due
certification must be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the order being placed.
Rubber Bellows shall be fitted as close to the sources of vibration as practicable. The pipe at the other end
of the bellows shall be a fixed point. This being necessary to isolate/reduce noise, vibration and resonance’s
from the distribution pipework to the building fabric.
Rubber bellows shall be single convolution of hand laid multi ply reinforced EPDM rubber with wire reinforced
cuffs. Flanges shall be able to swivel and be removable.
(i) Tie bars with rubber top hat washers shall be used where the working pressure exceeds 1.5bar.g.
Where untied bellows are used the manufacturer’s recommendations for anchors and guides shall
be followed to prevent forces being exerted onto the pump casing and AV mounts. Tie bars shall
be threaded and their length adjustable.
(ii) For working temperatures up to 70°C, the bellows car case shall be high tensile synthetic fibre
reinforced. As Pipe Solutions or equal and approved.
(iii) For working temperatures between 70°C and 100°C, the bellows car case shall be steel wire mesh
reinforced throughout, to prevent premature catastrophic failure. Mesh reinforced bellows shall
be manufactured and approved to the recognized European standard, DIN 4809 Part 1.
(iv) All flexibles used on heating circuits shall have a design for life of 120 months at 100 oC, and after
this time have a minimum burst pressure of 30 bar, and provided with DIN 4809 part 1
Certification, as evidence of this compliance.
These flexibles shall be fully traceable, and moulded into the membrane shall be manufacturer,
country of origin, type and batch number, serial number, recognizable colour flashes, and date of
manufacture.
(v) For temperature above 100 degrees C, the bellows shall be of thick and spirally wound multi- ply
construction stainless steel, with Van Stone ends and swivel flanges. For installations where the
pump is on “solid” AV mounts, the overall length shall not exceed 130mm. As Pipe Solutions or
equal and approved. For installations where the pump and/or pipework is on spring type supports,
the flexible shall be of identical materials, but shall be a lateral type unit with double membrane
to give greater flexibility for this type of installation. As Pipe Solutions or equal and approved.
b) Expansion Bellows
The Building Services Contractor shall provide and fix all necessary anchor points and expansion bellows to
allow for expansion and contraction of the respective pipework systems. Expansion loops will not be
accepted.
Bellows shall be axial expansion joint to absorb thermal expansion in straight pipelines. They shall be
installed at appropriate locations on the pipework system for use on steel pipelines.
Bellows are to comprise stainless steel bellows and carbon steel and with BSP male thread or flanges where
appropriate. They shall perform to BS 1443:2003 and shall withstand working pressure at 10 bar gauge
maximum test pressure at 1.5 times working pressure.
Bellows shall be of pipeline sizes and shall be fixed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
c) Fan Coil Connections
The Building Services Contractor shall make due allowances for ease of connection/ disconnection of
equipment and shall provide flexible hose connections and self-sealing quick release couplings as required.
These shall be as follows:
 Flexible hose connectors shall be provided with screwed ends as appropriate. They shall be
manufactured from approved material appropriate to the duty and shall be designed to withstand the
system test pressure.
 Quick release couplings shall be provided with screwed ends. They shall be manufactured from
approved material appropriate to the duty and shall be designed to withstand the system test
pressure.
The types and model references are as follows:
For heating service:
 Flexible hose connectors shall comprise a stainless steel convoluted hose with stainless steel over
braiding complete with carbon steel end connections, and shall be of fully welded construction.
 Quick release couplings shall comprise two nickel plated brass halves, a male and a female, each
complete with a shut off valve with a viton seat. The locking mechanism shall include 10 stainless steel
balls of 4 mm diameter for a secure and positive connection under pressure. Internal valve springs
shall be stainless steel. Each end of the coupling shall terminate with a female BSP parallel connection
with flat seat.
For chilled water service:
 Flexible hose connectors shall comprise a stainless steel hose with stainless steel over braiding
complete with carbon steel connections, and shall be of fully welded construction. Complete with
Àrmaflex' Class Ò' insulation with vapourseal and solid aluminium end protection caps.
 Quick release couplings shall comprise two nickel plated brass halves, a male and a female, each
complete with a shut off valve with a viton seat. The locking mechanism shall include 10 stainless steel
balls of 4 mm diameter for a secure and positive connection under pressure. Internal valve springs
shall be stainless steel. Each end of the coupling shall terminate with a female BSP parallel connection
with flat seat.
 Flexible hose connectors shall be suitable for a maximum working temperature of 95°C and a
maximum working pressure of 16 bar.
 Quick release couplings shall be suitable for a maximum working temperature of 95°C and a maximum
working pressure of 16bar.
 Quick release couplings shall be designed for easy one-handed operation; shall connect/disconnect
under pressure with minimal spillage, and shall have a minimal pressure drop.
 Quick release couplings shall be suitable for connection to control valves that terminate in a male BSP
parallel thread with flat face. They shall be capable of being installed side by side at the average control
valve port centres of 40mm. Flat faces at the bottoms of the female ends shall enable a positive
connection to be made by the use of fibre washers.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, in order that connection/disconnection of equipment is made with ease
throughout the building and that misalignment and vibration of equipment is accommodated the Building
Services Contractors shall:
(i) Use flexible hose connectors in conjunction with quick release couplings to reduce installation
and downtime maintenance costs on ceiling, wall and underfloor mounted equipment.
(ii) Supply and install flexible hose connectors and quick release couplings to the approval of the
Engineer.
(iii) Connect to items of plant in such a way that no stress is placed on the plant or connector.
(iv) Support service pipework independently so that no load is placed on the flexible hose
connectors.
(v) Install flexible hose connectors and quick release couplings in full accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
(vi) Ensure that the minimum bend radius as stated in the manufacturer's catalogue is not exceeded.
(vii) Not use flexible hose connectors to accommodate thermal expansion of the pipework.
(viii) Install pipe strainers to ensure debris does not clog the quick release coupling during flushing
out process.
4.3.9 Pressure Gauges
The Building Services Contractor shall provide and fix on the suction and discharge connections to each
circulating pump and other locations specified with pressure gauges. Each pressure gauge shall be mounted
vertically and be of the bourdon type with 102mm dial, 10mm male thread inlet, black finished steel case
and chromium plated bezel to BS 1780: Part 2 with Class 1 industrial scales. Each pressure gauge shall be
calibrated in kilonewtons per square metre and be fitted with a bronze gauge cock having female threaded
ends and ebonized level handle.
Pressure gauges shall be fitted with an adjustable red pointer which can be set on site to the working
pressure. They shall have dials calibrated from zero to no less than 1-3 times and not more than twice the
operating pressure, and shall have positive and negative scales to indicate positive and negative pressure
respectively.
4.3.10 Strainers
Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall provide and install Y-type pipeline strainers at locations
identified on Section 4 of this specification and/or tender drawings. All strainers shall be installed at easily
accessible locations to ensure ease in maintenance and shall be fitted at lowest possible point(s) of pipeline
circuit, beside drainage gulley whenever possible.
All strainers shall be of pipeline size unless otherwise specified.
i. Strainers of Line Up to and Including 50 mm Bore
 Strainer shall consist of gunmetal body and screwed cap, plus removable screen made of 18/8
stainless steel with 0.8 mm diameter perforations.
 Strainer shall incorporate screw ends with BS 21 tape thread.
 Pressure/temperature rating shall be PN25.
4.3.11 Radiators - Cast Iron
a) Cast iron radiators shall be of the Hospital Pattern, unless otherwise specified.
b) Radiators shall be supported by bottom brackets and high level stays arranged for building in
where radiator feet are not indicated.
c) The number and position of brackets and stays shall be as recommended by the manufacturers.
The top stay shall be so designed that the fixing nut does not project beyond the front of the
radiators and a chrome plated acorn nut shall be provided.
d) All brackets and stays shall be painted with two coats of primer paint.
e) Blind nipples shall be fitted to radiators with BOE connections.
4.3.12 Thermostatic Radiator Valves & Matching Lockshield Valves
The Thermostatic Radiator Valves shall have nickel plated, cast bronze bodies, screwed BSP and be suitable
for a maximum static pressure of 10bar. The thermostat shall have a liquid filled sensing element with a frost
protection setting and a positive òff' position. The thermostat shall be capable of having any value within
the range set as a high limit without the need of separate removable splines, grub screws, etc. The thermostat
shall be fixed to the valve body with a polished hexagon union nut. The complete Thermostatic Radiator
Valve shall be capable of closing off against a maximum differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 Bar).
4.4 DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEMS
4.4.1 Pipework and Fittings
a) Main incoming cold water pipe and all buried cold water pipes shall be in PVC-U Class E to B3505 with
fittings to BS 4346.
b) All above ground cold and hot water piping and fittings except those embedded in builders work shall
be PPR pipes to DIN – 8077, PN 20 and fittings to DIN - 19692, PN 25. Refer clause 12.0 for specification.
c) All the vertical drops of cold and hot water pipes embedded in builders work shall be in PEX pipes to DIN
16892 & 16893 with DVGW approval. PEX pipes shall run within 25 mm corrugated PVC conduit of red
or blue color depending on pipe service (hot or cold water).
d) All hot water supply / return pipe work and exposed cold water pipe work at roof shall be insulated.
PEX Pipes & Fittings
a) Cold and hot water distribution pipework embedded within builder’s work inside walls of bathrooms,
kitchen shall be composed of:
- Crosslinked polyethylene pipe according to DIN 16892 and 16893 pulled in a corrugated conduit of
ordinary polyethylene.
- Fittings and valves of DZR construction.
b) The inner pipe shall be a cross link polyethylene pipe withstanding up to 95 deg. C at a max. pressure of
10 bar without deformation or damage. Short time temperature loading up to 110 degree C.
c) The pipe shall be resistant to all natural constituents of drinking water to DIN 2000, disinfectants and
cleaning agents to DVWG – W291 and DIN 2000, anti-corrosion agents to DIN 1988 T4 (E) and common
building materials, such as mortar, cement and plaster.
d) The pipe manufacturer shall offer minimum of 50 years guarantee for the pipes and 10 years guarantee
for the complete system.
e) All pipes shall be stamped on equal intervals showing clearly the name of the manufacturers along with
the pressure and temperature rating of these pipes.
f) All pipes shall be laid so that the 16mm pex water pipe can be replaced, if necessary.
g) Pipes shall be connected to the different fittings via a wall box of reinforced plastic fitted with bronze
elbow suitable for 15mm or 20mm threaded connection. The box should be suitably designed in order
to enable the replacement of existing pipes in the event of their damage.
h) All valves, box elbows, tees, bends shall be of bronze. Connection shall be of a cone grip unions type
allowing: full flow capacity, minimum pressure loss, easily detachable with torque clearly defined for a
fool proof installation. Contractor shall use proper tools for assembly as recommended by
manufacturer, i.e. assembly pliers, Ratchet torque wrench, cutters, etc.
POLYPROPYLENE RANDOM COPOLYMER (PPR PIPES) & FITTINGS
a) PPR Pipes shall be SDR 7.4 P.P.R. Composite, Green color, made of special mixer of fibers integrated in
the middle layer of P.P.R. for more Rigid, Stable pipe for much less linear expansion in hot
water applications.
b) SDR 7.4 P.P.R. Composite pipes shall withstand a maximum constant working pressure 24.5 bars (355
psi) at 20 ºC with a lifetime expectancy of 50 years.
c) PPR Pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with
- WRAS (Water Regulations Advisory Scheme), U.K.

- NSF 61 & 14 (National Sanitation Foundation), U.S.A.
- DVGW (German Association for Gas and Water) – Germany
- ASTM F 2389
- DIN ISO 15874
- DIN-8077 – 8078
- BS 6920
- DIN 16962
d) PPR fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with DIN-16962 and shall be manufactured by ISO
Certified Company.
e) The polymer used for the manufacturing of the products must be approved by Worldwide Known
Quality Body Certifier such as, DVGW, SKZ, ISO 1584ff and NSF Standard 61 (Cold & Hot 180 F/82 C).
f) The pipes & fittings used for conveying potable water or likely to come into contact with potable water
shall not constitute a toxic hazard, shall not support microbial growth and shall not give rise to
unpleasant taste, or odor, cloudiness or discoloration of water.
g) PPR shall be virgin (no mix batching), pre-pigmented black color.
h) The polymer used for the manufacturing of the products must contain metal deactivators to reduce the
iron ions in the water to prevent corrosions.
i) PPR pipes shall be supplied to DIN 8077 A1 as per the table below:
Internal
Nom. Ø Weight
Diameter
(d) mm Kg/m
(di) mm
20 mm 14.40 mm 0.158
25 mm 18.00 mm 0.246
32mm 23.20 mm 0.394
40 mm 29.00 mm 0.613
50mm 36.20 mm 0.955

63 mm 45.80 mm 1.500
75 mm 54.40 mm 2.135
90 mm 65.40 mm 3.058
110 mm 79.80 mm 4.576
125 mm 90.80 mm 5.891
160 mm 116.20 mm 9.628
200.00 mm 145.20 mm 15.051
250.00 mm 181.60 mm 23.479
j) All PPR fittings shall be from the same manufacturer.
k) Fitting shall be one of the following; polyfusion welding or electro-fusion welding and comply with the
International Standard requirements.
l) Fittings for PPR shall be approved to DIN 16962 or equivalent.
m) Fitting metal bodies should be made of brass material by using dezincification resistance brass.
n) All water services installation shall be provided and installed to current Water Supply (Water Fittings)
Regulations 1999 and Water Bye-Law requirements and subsequent versions/updates to the
documents.
4.4.2 Draw – Offs
a) Each separate draw-off or range of draw-offs shall be fitted with a stop cock, the head clearly marked
HOT or COLD as appropriate, and these stop cocks shall conform to Clause 4.4.3 of thisSub-Section.
b) The pipework shall be connected to each draw-off point. The Contractor will co-ordinate the installation
of the final connections to the draw-off point with all other involved trades.
4.4.3 Valves and Stop Valves
a) Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or on the drawings, valves and stop valves
shall be supplied and fixed to the following general specification:-
(i) Other than servicing valves, all valves and stop valves up to and including 65mm bore shall be in
high quality leaded gunmetal to BS EN 1982:2008 or other non-dezincifiable alloy. Valves and stop
valves 75mm bore and above shall be in cast iron with bronze trim.
(ii) Other than servicing valves, all valves and stop valves up to and including 35mm bore shall have
capillary ends and valves and stop valves from 30mm bore up to and including 50mm bore shall
have capillary or screwed ends. Valves and stop valves 65mm bore and over shall have flanged
ends as Clause 4.1(d) of this Sub-Section.
(iii) All servicing valves shall be manufactured to BS 6675: 1986, of straight pattern unless otherwise
indicated. Each valve shall incorporate highly polished chromium ball chrome- plated body and
compression fittings.
(iv) Servicing valves shall be fitted on all water supply pipes to points of use including taps,
urinal cisterns, W.C. cisterns, float valves, washing machines, outlets of storage cisterns
of over 18 litres, and other locations where specified by the current Water Authority's
bye-laws or specified elsewhere in this Specification/tender drawings.
Servicing valves shall also be used in place of stop valves of size 22mm and below, wherever exposed
to view.
Servicing valves fitted adjacent to each other shall be installed in a neat and tidy manner.
(v) Valves used for regulating purposes shall have lockshield heads.
(vi) All screw down stop valves on mains cold water shall be supplied with freely rotating and sliding
washer plate having renewable washers.
(vii) All screw down stop valves on tanked cold water and domestic hot water services shall be supplied
with freely rotating washer plate but so secured as to lift with the spindle and having renewable
washers.
(viii) Valves and stop valves exposed to view in room and corridors except in plant rooms, boiler houses
etc. shall be of the easyclean pattern with:-
(a) Composition wheel on wheel valves.

(b) Lockshield covers on lockshield valves.
(c) Capstan head on stop valves marked `H' or `C' as necessary.
(ix) All valves and stop valves shall be in accordance with the latest relevant British Standard and shall
comply with the local Water Authorities Specification for water services and conditions of supply
of water by meter.
b) Isolating Valves
Isolating valves up to and including 65mm bore on: -
(i) Main cold water services shall be of the screwdown stop type.
(ii) Tanked cold water service and domestic hot water deadlegs being the last valve prior to a draw-off
shall be of the screwdown stop type.
(iii) Tanked cold water and domestic hot water services but excluding the last valve prior to draw- off
shall be of the gate type.
Isolating valve 75mm bore and over on mains cold water shall be of the sluice type Isolating valves
75mm bore and over on tanked cold water and domestic hot water services shall be of the gate type.
c) Gate valves shall be to BS 5154:1991 or BS EN 12288:2010 as applicable, with inside screws and non-
rising spindle up to and including 65mm bore and to BS EN 1171:2002 75mm bore and over.
d) Screw down stop valves shall be to BS 1010-2:1973.
e) Sluice valves shall be to BS 5163-2:2004.
f) Check valves up to and including 65mm bore shall be of the swing type, renewable composition faced
disc to BS 5154:1991 or BS EN 12288:2010 as applicable.
Check valves 75mm bore and over shall be of the swing type, renewable composition disc to BS EN
12334:2001.
g) Ball valves up to and including 50mm bore shall be of the Portsmouth type with screwed male inlet,
outlet with copper silencing pipe and be to BS 1212 with copper ball to BS 1968.
Ball valves 65mm bore and over shall be of the full equilibrium type with bronze body and cover with
flanged inlet and outlet drilled to BS EN 1092-3:2003. Valve to be complete with renewable washers,
brass or galvanized iron lever, copper float and copper silencing pipe with anti-syphonage provision.
Ball valves shall be suitable for the pressure involved.
h) All valves and cocks of a particular type shall be by the same manufacturer and be of the same type.
4.4.4 Strainers
Strainers shall be supplied and fitted where indicated on the drawing and specified elsewhere in 4.3.10
a) Strainers up to and including 50mm bore shall have bodies in brass or bronze with screwed
connections with brass removable screens.
Strainers 65mm bore and above shall have bodies in bronze with flanged ends with bronze or stainless
steel removable screens.
On completion of the system testing as described in Clause 4.4.7 and after a reasonable length of
period of operation of the system, the Contractor shall allow for removal of all strainer screens for
inspection/cleaning purposes. The Contractor shall also allow for removal of selected strainers at the
end of the Defects Liability Period for inspection by the Engineer.
Evidence of excessive system debris identifiable to installation of the system will entail
inspection/cleaning of all strainer screens and relishing/re-chlorination of the system at no additional
cost to the accepted contract sum.
4.4.5 Special Requirements for C.W. Services
The following special requirements shall apply to C.W. services: -
a) Notwithstanding the mandatory requirements of Bylaw 49 of the Water Supply Bylaws and section
4.9 of this specification. The following practices shall be complied with to protect against freezing.
(i) Where no provision for frost protection has been allowed for in the heating system, all cold water
pipework inside the building shall not be less than 20mm nominal size and outside the building
shall not be less than 25mm nominal size, to ensure that economic insulation thicknesses are
selected from BS EN ISO 12241:2008, BE 5422:2009.
(ii) All ventilated roof and floor voids are considered as outside the building in relation to clause
(a) above. Cold pipework running adjacent to ventilated eaves or the perimeter external wall of a
building will not be allowed without the approval of the Engineer.
b) All work carried out on C.W. services and ancillary equipment shall comply with British Standards
and Codes of Practice and the Local Water Authorities Specification and By-Laws.
c) Valves, stop cocks, fittings etc. shall bear the stamp of the local Water Authority and/or the WRC, if
specified by them, as proof of having being tested.
Fittings not bearing the mark will be rejected and must be replaced at no extra cost to the Contract.
Any charges made by the Water Authority shall be included in the tender price.
d) Only plumbing tradesmen shall be employed on C.W. services.
e) Unless the Water Authorities requirements are different tests on the installations shall be as
described below. If the Water Authorities requirements are different they shall have precedence.
4.4.6 System Cleaning
The system shall be allowed to work with water running from each and every draw off point in turn until all
oil and foreign matters have been removed. On completion of this operation all strainer screens shall be
removed, cleaned and replaced.
4.4.7 Systems Testing
The systems shall be filled with water and subjected to a hydraulic pressure test of at least twice the working
head of the lowest point of the system, but in any case not less than 1000 kN/m2 for mains cold water
system, and 350 kN/m2 for Domestic Hot Water and Tank Cold Water Systems. The test pressure must be
sustained for one hour before inspection commences and for the duration of the inspection without
"topping up".
a) See also relevant clauses of Section 4.1.
b) The domestic hot water system shall then be run under normal working conditions for a period of one
hour and then inspected under load. The system shall be allowed to cool to ambient conditions, i.e. for
24 hours and the heat load re-applied for one hour and then inspected. Any faults which occur due to
thermal expansion and contraction shall be rectified.
4.5 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPE SYSTEMS
4.5.1 Scope
This section of the specification, internal drainage only, relates to the manufacture, delivery to site and
installation of soil pipes and waste pipes for sanitary fittings, vent pipes and condensate drain pipes. The
extent of the soil, waste, vent pipes and condensate drain pipes is as indicated on the drawings.
4.5.2 Quality Assurance and Standards
The equipment and installation shall comply with the Standards and Codes of Practice listed elsewhere or
their approved equivalents. In particular, they shall comply with BS EN 12056-2:2000 "Sanitary Pipework".
In the event of a discrepancy between this specification and any relevant Standard or Code of Practice, the
specification shall be followed and the Engineer notified immediately for clarification.
Products shall have received standard commercial tests to comply with the quoted standards to have
received appropriate listings for certificates of approval. All pipes and fittings shall be BS "kite marked" to
indicate conformity with the required standards.
4.5.3 Workmanship
All work undertaken in part or whole shall be carried out and completed to the quoted standards and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in accordance with the Tender Drawings and this specification.
Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of any pipework either to the unit or any
other part of the building shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representatives.
4.5.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Care shall be taken upon delivery of pipes to ensure that damage does not occur. Pipes and fittings shall be
stored under cover and protected while stored on site. Fittings shall not be stacked.
PVC-U pipework shall be stacked on a reasonably flat level surface, on timber battens not less than 75 mm
wide spaced at a maximum of 1m centres. Side support shall also be provided at intervals of not more than
.4m. Pipes should not be stacked more than 7m high when stored in the open, or exposed to strong sunlight.
Fittings should also be stored under cover and kept packed until required. Solvent cement should be stored
in a cool place out of direct sunlight and away from any heat source.
4.5.5 Pipework Installation – General
All pipes, fittings and components shall be checked for soundness and freedom from defects and damage
prior to installing.
Any metal pipes or fittings found to have defects in the coating shall be set aside.
The defective areas on these pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a protective
coating compatible with the original coating, where large areas of coating are defective these pipes and
fittings shall not be used.
All stacks shall be installed truly vertical, and horizontal pipework shall be true in alignment and to uniform
gradient. All stacks shall be supported with at least one pipe support bracket at each storey height fitted in
a manner to support the vertical load, and in any case the distance between pipe supports shall not exceed
the distances specified in this specification.
Pipe supports shall be fixed as the pipework installation proceeds, improperly supported pipework shall not
be left for later fixing of pipe supports.
All suspended pipework shall be positioned as close to the slab soffit as practicable governed by the
relationship of other services and ductwork as applicable. Provision shall be made in the fixing of branch
pipes to the main vertical stack to prevent sheering or deformation due to vertical movement of the main
pipe.
All bends on soil stacks shall be large radius bends. All changes of direction and branch connections on
suspended soil and waste pipe runs shall be made with 135 bends and branches, except where this is not
practicable, in which case the fittings shall have the greatest angle possible below 135.
All pipework shall be securely supported with substantial brackets, hangers or clips. All ferrous brackets,
hangers and accessories shall be galvanized or zinc plated or other equal and approved rust-proof finish.
Care shall be taken to ensure that pipe axis is parallel with the axis off the pipe ring or bracket and that drop
rod supports are vertical. All supports shall be in alignment and shall not impose side strain on the pipework
and shall provide uniform pipe gradient.
Hole positions for pipe support fittings shall be set out and approval obtained from the structural engineer
prior to drilling any holes in structural steelwork, concrete slabs, or walls.
Additional supports shall be provided at branch connections and changes of direction on suspended
pipework providing a stable and secure pipework system capable of being rodded through without
detriment to the system.
Branch connections shall be supported independently and not used to help in the support of its parent main.
Vertical pipes connecting horizontal runs shall be securely supported at or near the base.
All drilling and plugging and fixing of supports with rust-proof screws, bolts or anchor devices, including self-
drilling type anchors, shall be included.
4.5.6 PVC-U Pipework and Fittings
The pipes and fittings shall comply in all respects with the following British Standards/Dubai Municipality
Standards.
BS EN 1401-1:2009
Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and sewerage. Unplasticized poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC-U). Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system
BS 4660:2000
Thermoplastics ancillary fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160 for below ground gravity drainage and
sewerage
BS EN 1329-1:2014
Plastics piping systems for soil and waste discharge (low and high temperature) within the building structure.
Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system
BS EN ISO 1452-1:2009
Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under
pressure. Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC U). General
BS 4346-1:1969
Joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes.
BS EN 1519-1:2000
Plastics piping systems for soil and waste discharge (low and high temperature) within the building structure.
Polyethylene (PE). Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system
BS EN 274-1:2002
Waste fittings for sanitary appliances. Requirements
BS EN 681-2:2000
Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in water and drainage applications.
Thermoplastic elastomers
Pipes shall be supplied in plain ended lengths.
The minimum acceptable wall thicknesses of pipe and fittings shall be as follows:
75mm Pipe 3.18mm 75mm Fittings 3.43mm

The method of jointing to be employed shall be that of solvent welding using the manufacturer's approved
cement. Seal ring joints shall be used where necessary to accommodate thermal movement.
The grade of polymer used for the pipe shall have a minimum softening point of 82C and for the fittings a
minimum softening point of 79C when tested by the Vicat method as described in British Standard BS ISO
2782:2012.
Pipe and fittings shall be of colour grey except for exposed connections to sanitary ware which shall be colour
white.
Fittings for connections of branch waste and ventilating pipes shall consist of waste bosses fitted to pipe or
integral moulded boss adaptors on fittings. Alternatively, connections may be solvent jointed to branch
fittings utilising socket reducer fittings where necessary.
Branch soil pipe connection to WC pan outgo, or similar soil appliance outgo, shall consist of multikwik or
similar and approved flexible connector jointed into plain end PVC-U pipe.
Holder bats shall be made of mild steel protected from corrosion by galvanizing, or plastic coating. They shall
have a two position fixing suitable, either as a pipe support allowing thermal movement, or as a clamp fit on
a fitting creating a fixed point.
Vent pipes passing through the roof shall terminate with a neoprene/aluminium weathering slate,
weathering collar, and a balloon grating.
4.5.7 High Temperature PVC Waste System
Pipes are to be supplied plain ended and all fittings to be socketed at both ends. The minimum acceptance
wall thickness for pipe to be as follows:
32mm
(1.91mm)
40mm
(2.03mm)
50mm
(2.16mm)
All pipe and fittings to comply with the Code of Practice recommendations.
The method of jointing to be employed shall be that of solvent welding using the pipe and fittings
manufacturer's approved cement. Seal ring joints shall be introduced where it is necessary to
accommodation expansion.
The grade of polymer used for the pipe shall have a minimum softening point of 100C when tested by the
cantilever method as described in British Standard 2782 Method 102C.
All waste fittings shall have a minimum softening point of 80C 5 kilogram 'Vicat' method as described in BS
ISO 2782:2012 Method 102D.
All pipes and fittings shall be to colour grey British Standard 1660/1 1055, Grade 9.100.
Traps should be moulded from white polypropylene. The fitting will comply in all respects to British Standard
Kite mark.
The complete waste system when assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions shall be capable of satisfactorily standing up to the tests laid down in BS EN 1329-1:2000, BE
4514:2001, Section 13, elevated temperature cycling requirement and thereafter passing the system test as
laid down.
The system shall be installed to accommodate thermal movement between fixed points by installing
expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be fitted if the fixed points are greater than 1m apart, or on long
straight runs without fixed points, at maximum 4m apart. Expansion joints shall be made by using selected
fittings as indicated on the drawings and fitted in the direction of flow as marked on the fittings.
The pipes shall be fixed in straight runs and all horizontal runs are to be laid to gradients in accordance with
Code of Practice, but in any event not less than 1 in 48 unless otherwise instructed.
The installation, method of jointing and fixing shall comply in all respects with the manufacturer's fixing
instructions.
Access rodding eyes shall be provided at the end of all PVC floats and generally at any changes of direction.
Access at the end of PVC floats shall be via access tees. All access eyes are to be as fixed in an accessible
position.
4.5.8 Connections to Sanitary Fittings
The soil pipes or waste pipes to the various sanitary fittings shall be of the following sizes: /Dubai Municipality
Guidelines
(1) Wash basins 50mm dia. waste pipe, with

36mm self-resealing bottle traps.
(2) Sinks and Washing 50mm dia. waste pipe, with

Machines and 40mm tubular traps.
Dishwashers.
(3) Showers 50mm dia. waste pipe, with

40mm tubular traps.
(4) Baths 50mm dia. waste pipe, with

40mm tubular traps.
(5) Floor Gullies 100mm dia. waste pipe, bottom

outlet, with 100mm dia. tubular "P" trap
with access to bottom below slab.
(7) Planting Area 50mm dia. waste pipe, with

tubular 'running' trap.
(8) WC's 100mm dia. soil pipe, with pan
connector.
The term "sanitary fittings" shall include all kitchen and laundry equipment that requires plumbing services.
4.5.9 PVC-U Pipework Installation
The installation, method of jointing and fixing shall comply in all respects with the PVC manufacturer's site
work instructions.
Solvent welded joints shall be made using the manufacturer's approved cement.
Seal ring fittings shall be used where necessary to accommodate thermal movement, or the sockets of
standard fittings shall be converted to seal ring joints by the addition of a seal ring adaptor.
A seal ring expansion joint shall be provided in each length of pipework that is fixed at both ends and exceeds
1 metre long, and where possible this expansion joint is to be formed by using an expansion jointed fitting
at one end of the pipework (for example, by using an expansion boss connector at a boss, or by using an
adaptor to convert a welded socket of a fitting into a seal ring socket). Where the length of the pipework
exceeds the distance stated below, intermediate expansion couplings shall be inserted to divide the
pipework up into lengths that do not exceed that distance:
Pipes up to and including 50mm size - 1.8 metres. Pipes

over 50mm size - 3.6 metres.
In addition, where a branch/boss connection is made to a stack at a level that is more than 500mm from a
fixed point on the stack, an expansion joint shall be provided between the branch/boss connection and the
fixed point.
Fixed points on pipes shall be considered to be where they pass through, or connect at, floor and roof slabs,
at all welded branch joints, and any other welded joints except straight couplings and bends.
Cut ends of PVC pipes shall be formed square with a fine toothed saw and then made smooth. For solvent
welded joints, the pipe shall be pushed fully in against the shoulder of the socket and for expansion joints
the end of the pipe shall be chamfered and set back 12mm from the shoulder of the socket. In both cases,
the pipe shall be marked beforehand to demonstrate that the correct penetration has been achieved.
Joints between PVC pipe and other materials shall be made with the fittings and the jointing materials
recommended by the PVC manufacturer.
PVC caulking bushes solvent welded to PVC pipe size 50mm or less, or ring seal polypropylene caulking
brushes, shall be used for connection to metal or non-metal caulking sockets (including socket reducer as
required) with tarred gaskin at one third socket depth and PC4 or similar cold caulking compound firmly
caulked home into the remaining socket space.
Joining PVC pipe to clayware drain pipe spigot terminals shall comprise insertion of the PVC pipe into the
clayware pipe system polypropylene adaptor.
PVC pipes shall be fixed so that they are supported to provide thermal movement, with all expansion
couplings anchored to prevent movement, with brackets supplied by the PVC pipe system manufacturer.
Such fixings shall be provided wherever necessary to locate and stabilise the pipework in correct alignment
and to uniform gradient and in addition shall be at the maximum spacing shown as follows:
PVC Pipe Size Vertical Pipes Horizontal Pipes
38mm (1.½") 1.2 metre 0.5 metre and below

50mm (2") 1.2 metre 0.9 metre
Brackets supporting PVC pipework from walls shall be galvanised or plastic coated mild steel.
For pipe size 75mm and above they shall incorporate two-position fixing for either pipe barrel support
allowing thermal movement or as a clamp fit on a fitting creating a fixed point. PVC packing strips shall be
used on the pipe supports which provided for thermal movement.
Suspended PVC pipework shall be supported with galvanised or plastic coated mild steel pipe brackets with
bolted or screwed connection to galvanised or similar rust proofed screwed drop rod hanger secured
through the slab with a 100mm x 6mm thick mild steel drilled backplate and nut at structural slab level, or
screwed into an expanding anchor socket fixed in the concrete soffit, including backnut, unless shown
otherwise on the Tender Drawings.
Supports on 50mm suspended pipe size and above shall permit thermal movement of the pipe barrels and
shall securely clamp and real ring expansion sockets.
Where drop rod hangers over 300mm long support expansion sockets the bottom of the drop roof shall be
braced back to the concrete soffit with a bracing rod or angle section at 45 and parallel with the pipe
longitudinal axis fixed with anchor bolt or similar to the soffit. Alternatively, thermal movement limiter (TML)
brackets as manufactured by Key Terrain Ltd., or approved equivalent, with vertical drop rod hanger as
described shall be used to 100mm and 150mm pipe size.
Additionally, to pipework suspended at more than 300mm below soffit and where branch pipework
exceeding 2 metres length joins the main run, the junction support shall be cross braced either side of the
vertical hanger at right angles to the main pipe longitudinal axis to resist thermal movement from the branch
pipe.
Supports shall be fixed to walls using an expansion type fixing with bolt. Shot fired bolts shall not be used to
support pipework. Holes for expansion anchors shall be drilled. The expansion bolt shall be 'set' by driving
it into the hole and expanding it with either a threaded rod or a bolt.
Suspended pipework shall be supported with galvanized steel or cast iron brackets with galvanized screwed
drop rods fixed using either expansion bolts (as above) with back nuts, or securing through the slab to
100mm x 100mm x 6mm thick mild steel drilled back plate and nut at structural floor level.
Where drop rod hangers over 300mm long support the pipe the bottom of the drop rod shall be braced back
to the concrete soffit with a bracing rod or angle section at 45, parallel with the pipe longitudinal axis and
fixed with an expansion bolt or similar to the soffit. If a branch pipe joining the main run exceeds 2m in length
the junction support shall be cross braced either side of the vertical hanger at right angles to the main pipe
longitudinal axis to resist thermal movement from the branch pipe.
4.5.10 System Access
Access points shall be provided to facilitate rodding through, inspection and testing of the pipework.
Access points shall be installed near the base of all stacks, at changes of pipe direction, in the vicinity of or
on all stack branches or grouped stacked branches at each storey, on the upstream end of common branch
waste pipes, on the top of stub pipe upstands and elsewhere indicated on the Contract Drawings and defined
by BS EN 12056-2:2000.
Access points shall always be positioned above floor level of sanitary appliances unless it is impractical to do
so, and they shall be orientated so as not to be obstructed by the structure or pipework and such access
points shall correctly relate to removable panels in order to facilitate ease of removal of the access plate,
rodding through and replacement of the access plate.
All in-line access doors shall be contoured to match the pipe bore.
Metal or plastics rectangular or oval type access doors shall be fitted with brass or other rust-proofed fixing
bolts/screws and soft rubber gaskets.
Copper pipe end access shall comprise copper or copper alloy screwed cap fitting and plastics pipe end access
shall consist of plastic screwed cap fitting, all complete with sealing washer.
4.5.11 Floor Gullies and Gratings
Floor gullies shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Gullies and gratings shall be of approved pattern
as scheduled on the drawings.
The installation, method of jointing and fixing shall comply in all respects with the manufacturer's
instructions. Floor gullies shall be sealed firmly and securely supported by the slab/deck/floor construction.
It is essential to ensure that gullies are free from obstruction/debris before fitting gratings and any gullies
left in position prior to fitting, the grating shall be temporarily sealed or plugged to prevent ingress of debris.
4.5.12 Overflows
WC cistern overflow and water heater cistern overflows shall be of 22mm PVC-U pipe as indicated on the
drawings.
Overflows shall terminate through an external wall, at low level over a drained toilet floor or over a gully as
indicated.
4.5.13 Pipework Sleeves
Where pipework passes through walls or floors a sleeve of suitable diameter shall be fitted. Sleeves for PVC
pipes shall be plastic, copper or galvanized mild steel of close tolerance pattern.
Where a PVC pipe off 40mm diameter or greater passes through a fire compartment wall or floor (as defined
in Section B/2/3/4 Appendix F of Building Regulations) pipework shall be sleeved with a proprietary and
approved sealing system such as DUFAYLITE intumescent sleeves. Appropriate test certificates shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval before commencement of the works.
All sleeves shall finish flush with the finished surface and oversize sleeves shall be sealed with proprietary
intumescent fire packing material in the annular space around the pipe.
The hole around all sleeves shall be infilled with concrete fire-stop infilling.
All pipe penetrations size 50mm nominal and less in a visual position shall be fitted with a white plastic wall
plate or floor plate.
4.5.14 Access Doors
Access doors shall be provided as required for all clean-outs and other elements requiring access above
ceiling or behind walls or as indicated on the drawings. The installation of all doors will be performed under
the specification of other trades. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work and assume responsibility of
accessibility.
The door types, finishes and exact locations shall be as indicated on the Architect's drawings.
4.5.15 Sealing Pipework Open Ends
Particular importance shall be placed upon the proper protection and sealing of open ends to pipework and
fittings during construction.
All pipework open ends or open sockets or open fittings shall be properly sealed, plugged or capped during
the progress of the works to prevent entry of building materials and debris.
Plastic, shaped hardwood or metal discs, plugs or drain plugs will be acceptable for this purpose. Screwed-
up paper or cloth pushed into open ends will not be acceptable and shall not be used.
4.5.16 Testing
The sanitary plumbing installation shall be air tested in accordance with BS EN 12056-2:2000 Code of Practice
for Sanitary Pipework, Section 12.
Air testing for soundness shall be carried out in sections as the works proceed to suit the progress of the
building work, pipes to be concealed shall be tested before being enclosed, and final testing shall be carried
out at completion.
The tests shall be carried out by means of suitable air pressure equipment, the testing plug shall be fitted
with a tee piece with a cock on each branch, one branch being connected by flexible tube to a manometer
scale.
The pressure applied shall be equal to 40mm water gauge and shall remain constant for a period of not less
than three minutes. All sanitary fitting trap seals shall be fully charged and open ends of pipework plugged
during the period of the test.
All tests shall be recorded by the Contractor and shall be carried out in the presence of and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing apparatus, equipment and fittings
together with competent site operatives to carry out the required resting and shall be responsible for
carrying out any necessary remedial works and reinstatement of pipework which fails to meet the
requirements of the tests, including retesting to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no extra cost to the
Contract.
4.5.17 Completion
At completion of the works the Contractor shall systematically flush through the pipework runs with clean
water checking for water tightness at joints and freedom from obstruction within the pipes. Any suspect
pipe runs shall be rodded through with flexible drain rods and re-flushed with water.
All protective coverings shall be removed from sanitary fittings and appliances which shall be cleaned and
checked out to ensure that they function as intended.
All trap seals shall be charged with water and the whole of the sanitary plumbing installation shall be left in
clean working order.
4.6 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT)
4.7 VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS
4.7.1 Ducting – General
Prior to manufacturing of any ductwork, fully detailed working drawings of the ductwork installations,
including details of joints, flanges and supports, shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.
All ductwork shall be designed and constructed to minimize noise, drumming, air turbulence, corrosion and
ingress and egress of water and air.
Ductwork, unless otherwise specified, shall be of galvanized mild steel construction in accordance with the
requirements of DW/144 issued by the Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association.
Ductwork exposed to outside weather conditions and ductwork conveying air to and/or from evaporative
and air cooled condensers and cooling towers shall be fabricated from not less than 1.6mm (16swg) mild
steel sheet suitably stiffened and complete with flanged joints.
Minimum thickness of sheet metal ducting shall be in accordance with current edition of DW/144. Ductwork
installed in plant rooms shall be flanged throughout.
The Contractor shall provide ductwork identifications in accordance with Sections 4.1 and 4.9 of this
Specification.
4.7.2 Low Velocity Ducting
Ductwork installed between items of plant shall be not less than 16 swg with spigot socket or flanged
connections designed and constructed to neatly connect to the plant.
Circular ducting exceeding 1220mm diameter and rectangular ducting where one side exceeds 610mm wide
shall be flanged at a maximum of 3.650 metres centres.
Rectangular and circular ducting shall be constructed from galvanized cold reduced, close annealed patent
flattened sheet steel with longitudinal seams folded, locked and dressed flush to ensure an airtight joint.
Lateral joints for erection purposes shall unless otherwise stated be of the slip type, intermediate joints shall
be riveted.
Spiral wound ducting may be employed. Lateral joints shall be made with a separate connector in the form
of a double spiral with centre swage.
Fittings shall be fabricated from sheet with a thickness not less than the ducting to which it is fitted. Fittings
shall be either formed and/or fabricated with welded, riveted or formed and locked joints.
Segmental type fittings shall be designed and constructed so that the radial angle of each segment does not
exceed 22.5° (i.e. minimum of five segments on a 90° bend).
All flanges, stiffeners and ductwork which has been welded shall immediately after construction have all raw
edges and exposed mild steel painted one coat of zinc rich cold galvanizing paint and touched up where
necessary after erection.
Slip and intermediate joints shall be arranged so that the direction of airflow is from the spigot into the
socket.
Slip joints shall be in accordance with tables in DW/144 current edition. Unless otherwise stated slip joints
shall have a minimum insertion length of 50mm and be secured with self-tapping screws at 50mm centres
on circular ducts up to and including 610mm diameter., and rectangular ducts where any of the sides do not
exceed 610mm wide. Gutter bolts, washers and nuts shall be used on duct sizes exceeding the
aforementioned.
Slip joints and riveted joints shall be sealed with an approved duct sealing compound and finally finished
with an approved 50mm wide PVC backed silver grey colour self-adhesive duct sealing tape with equal
overlap.
Flanged joints shall unless otherwise stated be in accordance with DW/144 current edition. Flanged joints
shall be either welded and/or riveted to the ductwork but in either case the ducts shall be turned up between
the flanges. Flanged joints shall be made up with galvanized bolts, washers and nuts at 75mm centres with
the joints sealed with a full face 3mm thick soft neoprene gasket with holes neatly cut for the bolts and fixed
to one flange face with an approved adhesive.
Flanged joints connecting to plant shall be as specified in the aforementioned paragraph except that the
flange face dimensions and drilling shall match with flanges on the plant.
Bends and branch pieces shall wherever possible have an inner radius equal to the width of the duct when
measured in the same plane.
Bends having a radius less than that mentioned in the aforementioned paragraph shall be fitted with splitters
rigidly fixed to the inside of the duct at equal centres as near to 100mm as possible, the splitters shall be
concentric with the radius and shall be carried perpendicular to the straight sides of the duct both up and
downstream of the bend. The leading edge of the splitters shall be covered with a `C' shaped section
extruded rubber strip fixed with adhesive to prevent noise.
Elbows shall be fitted with aero foil section turning vanes mounted in runners and rigidly fixed to the inside
of the duct.
Branch ducts shall wherever possible enter the main duct at an included angle of 45°. Where space precludes
the branch duct entering the main duct at 45° an angle boot connection will be permitted. Boot connections
shall have the throat at an angle of 45° and a length on the straight equal to half the radial width of the duct.
Where branch connections are not formed as part of the main duct then the branch shall be either welded
or riveted to the main duct. The branch connection shall be accordingly formed for either welding direct or
riveting with a flange to the outside of the main duct
Ductwork contractions and expansions shall have an included angle not exceeding 60° and 20° respectively
and be either eccentric or concentric to suit the location.
4.7.3 Ducting Supports
Brackets for ductwork shall be spaced to ensure adequate support and where practicable shall be fitted
adjacent to joints.
Vertical ducts shall be supported at a flanged joint between each floor level. Brackets shall be fabricated
from mild steel flat angle, channel or circular section. Bolting or screwing of support brackets to ductwork
will not be permitted.
Brackets on ductwork with external insulation and vapour barrier shall be insulated between the bracket
and the ductwork and the vapour seal maintained.
Brackets exposed to outside weather conditions shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture.
Brackets not hot dip galvanized after manufacture shall immediately after construction and again after
erection be painted with zinc rich cold galvanizing paint.
Detail drawings of the ductwork brackets shall be submitted to the Engineer at the same time as the
ductwork working drawings are submitted.
4.7.4 Manually Operated Leaf Dampers
Leaf dampers shall be of the single or multi-blade pattern as indicated on the drawings and at all major
branch take off points.
Damper blades shall be of folded construction or reinforced to form a rigid blade which will not twist under
air pressure. They shall be of the same material from which the associated ductwork is made, rigidly fixed to
the operating spindle.
Damper spindles shall unless otherwise specified be fitted in the horizontal position wherever practicable.
Damper spindles fitted in other than the horizontal position shall be fitted with a thrust washer to support
the vertical weight of the damper blade.
Damper spindles shall be supported in self-lubricating sintered bronze lined open end cast aluminium
bearings accurately aligned and securely fixed to the ductwork.
Multi-blade dampers shall be of the opposed blade type and shall be mounted in a flanged casing. Each
damper shall not exceed 230mm in width and shall be arranged so that the blade tips overlap each other by
12mm. The blade tips shall be covered with soft neoprene edge strip fixed with an approved adhesive to
form a good seal between the damper blades. Multi-blade dampers shall have the blades linked so that they
operate from a single lever.
Each damper shall be complete with a cast aluminium operating lever and quadrant incorporating a self-
lubricating sintered bronze bearing, operating lever locking screw and the words "OPEN" and "SHUT" cast
on the quadrant. Damper lever shall be at easily accessible location and not be obstructed by other building
services and building fabric.
On multi-blade dampers where observation of the damper blades cannot be readily obtained a 100mm
diameter inspection hole with cover shall be fitted adjacent to the damper so that the operation of damper
blades may be readily observed.
After final balancing has been completed the quadrant shall have a small "V" shaped notch neatly filed in
the quadrant indicating the centre line of the operating lever when in the balanced position.
The Contractor shall provide damper location identifications in accordance with Section 4 Sub-Section 4.1.
4.7.5 Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be of the single blade pattern and comply with the fire test requirement of BS 476-
24:1987, ISO 6944:1985, and as follows: -
a) The damper blade shall be manufactured from not less than 4mm (8 gauge) mild steel complete with
gravity weights and suspended off centre with EN56AM stainless steel pivots from a mild steel casing
of not less than 3.2mm (10 gauge).
b) The damper blade shall be retained by a fusible link-set to fuse at 70°C (158°F).
c) Internal mild steel framework and sealing stop with ample clearance to allow for blade expansion.
d) Damper frames shall be suitable for spigot connection to adjacent ductwork.
e) Access to linkage shall be through an inspection door provided in the damper unit. The access door
shall be of the bolt on type fastened by wing nuts and sealed with an air tight gasket. The position and
size of the access door shall be such that the damper blade can be reset with ease and a new fusible
link fitted.
f) Blades shall be parallel to the long dimension of the damper unit.
g) The Contractor shall be prepared to demonstrate to the Engineer, the Local Fire Prevention Officer
and Loss Prevention Officer, the effective mechanical operation of each fire damper. Fire dampers
shall be tested in situ.
The Contractor shall provide damper identifications in accordance with Section 4 Sub-Section 4.1.
4.7.6 Inspection and Cleaning Openings
a) Inspection and cleaning openings shall be provided in the approximate positions shown on drawings
or where specified in Section 4 of this specification. In all cases they shall be orientated to facilitate
their usage taking into account the surrounding physical limitations. Wherever the latter permits, the
opening should be on the underside of the duct.
The covers shall be constructed from 1.6mm (16swg) galvanized mild steel sheet with 25mm folded
edges and diamond stiffened where fitted on flat ductwork surfaces. They shall be completely
removable and secured by heavy gauge steel toggle catch and hook fasteners.
b) The joint between the inspection and cleaning covers and their associated ductwork shall be sealed
with a soft neoprene full face gasket secured to the associated ductwork with an approved adhesive.
c) Inspection openings shall be to the following sizes unless specified elsewhere:
i. Rectangular Ducting
Depth shall be the width of the duct less 25mm top and bottom or 230mm deep whichever is the
smaller by 230mm long.
ii. Circular Ducting
Depth shall be a quarter of the total circumference of the duct of 230mm measured on the
circumference whichever is the smaller by 230mm long.
d) Cleaning openings shall be to the following sizes:
i. Rectangular Ducting
Depth shall be the width of the duct less 25mm top and bottom or 460mm deep whichever is the
smaller by 460mm long.
ii. Circular Ducting
Depth shall be a quarter of the total circumference of the duct or 460mm measured on the
circumference whichever is the smaller by 460mm long.
e) Inspection and cleaning openings exceeding 380mm sq. which will accept personnel shall have the
duct stiffened and/or thickened to accept the additional weight.
4.7.7 Test Holes
Test holes shall be provided to BS 848 Part 1 2007/ BS ISO 5801:2007 on the inlet and outlet of each item of
equipment making up a plant and in the position shown on the drawings. The test holes shall comprise a
25mm diameter hole sealed with a rubber cable entry plug.
4.7.8 Kitchen Canopies
Valance hoods for kitchen equipment shall be fixed at a height of not less than 1.98 metres from the
underside to the floor. They shall be fitted with a drip channel all round bottom of canopy and be complete
with drain connections at low points. The Tenderer shall submit full details of these hoods at the time of
tendering. Supports to suit the building construction shall also be supplied.
Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, canopies shall be constructed of polished aluminium extrusions
comprising angles, tees and channels with vertical infill panels on sides and ends of translucent lightweight
clear `Filon' or equal of a non discolouring and fire resistant nature.
Aluminium canopies shall be of Valance design and manufactured in mirror finished panelling.
4.7.9 Kitchen Extract Baffles
Extract baffles shall be fixed with a 150mm ceiling clearance.
The baffle shall be manufactured in two parts for easy fixing and removal for maintenance and cleaning.
The framework shall be prefabricated from aluminium alloy to HE30 - WP (BS 5834) for strength and
resistance to corrosion. Aluminium fixing screws shall be provided for fixing purposes.
The baffle plates shall be prefabricated from "Bondene" PVC - CIAD aluminium of equal and approved with
embossed finish.
Aluminium angle shall be bonded to the top side so that fixing screws or rivets do not spoil the appearance
from below. Fixing holes shall be provided in the angle to mate with those on the framework.
Rigid PVC or equal and approved edging shall be fitted to provide a neat finish.
4.7.10 System Testing
The ventilation system shall be balanced to give the correct volumes and distribution required as shown on
the drawings or in this specification, and provision made for smoke bombs and other necessary equipment.
4.8 THERMAL INSULATION
4.8.1 General
4.8.1.1
With the exception of LTHW pipework installed within the occupied space for heating all ducting steam,
condensate, heating, hot water, cold water and chilled water services shall be insulated with an approved
type and quality of thermal insulation, unless otherwise stated in the Specification or on the drawings (See
Clause 4.8.1.7).
4.8.1.2
Wherever the works pipework and piping, ductwork and ducting are used in connection with insulation all
fittings on these portions are also implied. In the case of ductwork, all air scoops, diffuser and grille boxes,
plenum boxes and plenum chambers, unless otherwise indicated are implied, whether fitted with acoustic
insulation or not.
4.8.1.3
No thermal insulation shall be applied until the installation has been satisfactorily completed and pressure
tested and witnessed by the Engineer or his representative.
4.8.1.4
Insulation shall be carried out only by an approved specialist firm of repute. Manufacturers’ certificates of
declared conductivity for the materials used shall be provided when requested by the Engineer.
4.8.1.5
Poor quality, badly finished works, irregularities in the thickness or surface of insulating material proper or
the covering will not be accepted. Any insulation defects due to defective materials or bad workmanship
revealed during the contract maintenance period shall be replaced at no extra cost to the client. All work is
to be left free from burrs, smooth, clean and properly finished. All thermal insulating materials shall be new
and fully dried out and so maintained throughout the progress of the work; the only exception shall be those
materials which are applied wet, subject to the materials not depending on an initial dry state before
application.
All fibrous particles remaining after cutting and fabrication shall be removed by suction cleaning. The whole
of the insulation covering shall be left clean on completion of the work.
4.8.1.6
Unless otherwise indicated the thicknesses of insulating materials used within buildings for pipework carrying
hot and cold fluids, for ductwork, for flue gas ducting and for frost protection of cold water pipework shall
be determined from Tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. Insulation thicknesses in these tables shall be increased by one
standard size, or as indicated, when such equipment, pipework or ductwork is used externally to buildings.
The thickness of insulation applied to vessels and tanks shall be as indicated in Tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 for flat
surfaces.
4.8.1.7
Thermal insulation and methods of application shall comply with the requirements of BS EN ISO 12241:2008
or BS 5422:2009 and the following:
The materials, adhesives and finishes, shall be suitable in all respects for continuous use without degradation
throughout the range of operating temperatures and within the environment indicated. They shall be
designed to provide proof against rotting, mould, fungal growth and attach by vermin.
It shall be free from objectionable odours at the temperatures at which it is to beused.
Any work carried out on existing thermal insulation material or finish which contains CDM in any form, the
Contractor's attention is drawn to his responsibilities in accordance with the approved code of practice and
guidance note `Work with asbestos insulation and asbestos coatings' published by the Health and Safety
Executive; `The Asbestos Regulations' and
`Control of Pollution (Special Wastes) Regulations'.
Retain adequate strength.
4.8.1.8
It shall not suffer permanent deterioration as a result of constant moisture due to condensation.
4.8.1.9
It shall not suffer deterioration at the maximum temperature and under the specified conditions of use.
4.8.1.10
It shall be capable of being applied to any of the following metal surfaces where applicable, without causing
corrosion under normal working conditions to mild steel, stainless steel, cast iron, wrought iron, copper,
brass, gunmetal, bronze, aluminium, lead and galvanized surfaces.
4.8.1.11
The insulating materials used shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, be classified non-
combustible. Insulation facing materials may be combustible provided they are not more than 0.8 mm thick
and they have a surface spread of flame property to Class 0 when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 7.
Insulating materials and their finishes whose surface classification complies with Class 0, as defined by the
Building Regulations, shall be used within those sealed parts of building structures which, in the event of fire,
would isolate smoke, noxious or toxic fumes from habitable spaces.
At fire barriers the fire integrity of the barrier must be maintained by converting the insulation to non-
combustible type, e.g. mineral wool, all suitably fire stopped.
4.8.1.12
Insulating materials, including any adhesive used, shall be free from substances which in the event of a fire
would generate appreciable quantities of smoke, noxious or toxic fumes.
4.8.1.13
All pipework and ductwork shall be insulated separately; adjacent parallel pipes or ducts shall not be married
together with insulating material. Clearances between insulated surfaces shall not be less than 25mm. Where
an obstruction occurs in the pipeline, e.g. valves, flanges, brackets, pipe sleeves, the insulation shall
terminate at each side of the obstruction.
Where roller supports are fitted, the insulation shall terminate to allow for the expansion of the pipe and
ensure that the insulation remains clear of the roller support. Plastic insulation shall be neatly bevelled
around inspection doors, terminations at pipes, flanges, unions, valves, brackets, etc.
4.8.1.14
Unless specified elsewhere, all exposed insulated pipework and ductwork from finished floor level to a height
of
1.5 metre shall be protected against mechanical damage by 1mm thick polished aluminium sheeting, lapped
and secured with round head self-tapping screws.
4.8.1.15
Notwithstanding Clause 4.8.1.1 thermal insulation shall be applied to:
Boilers, calorifiers, cylinders, hot wells, steam accumulators and condensate receivers, cold and chilled water
vessel and accumulators (except where insulated jackets are provided)
All pipework flanges and valves carrying fluids at temperatures above 50°C and other pipework as indicated
(see Clause 4.8.1.16).
Flues from oil and solid-fuel fired boilers, gas boilers fired by forced air burners and flues servicing all multi-
boiler installations, except diluted flue systems, or where the flue is of pre-insulated or twin wall design. The
insulation shall be performed rigid sections or slabs, applied direct to the flue and finished with 18 SWG
(1.2mm) aluminium, or other suitable approved metallic casing.
Cold water cisterns, feed and expansion cisterns and vent pipework as indicated.
4.8.1.16
Thermal insulation shall be applied to air distribution ductwork and to components within distribution
systems such as fans, heater and cooler casings (which convey conditioned air within plant rooms) and to
ductwork (including recirculation air ductwork) conveying warmed or chilled air through unconditioned
spaces or the open air. Distribution systems conveying fresh air and exhaust air shall be insulated (unless
indicated otherwise).
Thermal insulation shall be applied to chilled water pipework distribution systems and to components within
distribution systems such as valves and storage vessels. Condenser water pipework, cold water pipework and
cold water vessels shall be provided with means of frost protection in accordance with Table 4 or as otherwise
specified.
4.8.1.17
Where specified, insulation within plant and calorifier rooms, tank spaces and where normally visible but
without an external cladding, shall be painted except where it is concealed, protected by metal or plastic
casings, or has weatherproof or special decorative/protective finishes. (Absorbent surfaces shall be given a
first coat of priming paint). The paint system shall have: one filling coat, two primary coats and one finishing
coat of approved quality, hard gloss heat resisting paint to BS 1710 colour code unless the existing colour
code is different, in which case the Engineer shall be consulted.
Each coat of paint shall be of a different shade to enable progress to be followed. The paint system shall be
suitable for the temperature range of the outer surface of the insulation.
The painting system shall not degrade the required fire protection properties to BS 476 Part 7 Class 1.
4.8.1.18
All other insulation shall be fitted with PVC bands at 6metres maximum centres, changes in direction,
branches and on both sides of any floors and walls through which it has passed. The widths of the bands shall
be the same as the pipe bore and shall be to BS 1710 unless the existing colour code is different in which case
the Engineer shall be consulted.
All services shall be further identified by painting or labelling the name of the pipe contents on the insulation
adjacent to all valves, at all changes of direction, at all inlets and exists to services and voids, ducts and at
either side of walls and floors.
In addition, self-adhesive laminated labels, with bold print up to 20 mm size with printed text describing the
service and zone/area served shall be provided on all pipework, tray work, ductwork at 10 meter intervals
using a Brother multi-use labelling machine.
The size of all lettering shall be approximately 50mm high. Arrows showing the direction of flow of the pipe
contents shall also be painted on the insulation at these positions. The arrows shall be either black or white
to contrast with the colour on the insulation and shall be approximately 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm
bore and 150mm long on larger pipes.
Identification code for chemical pipework shall include the chemical symbol. Identification code for
refrigeration lines shall include the refrigerant number.
In addition, direction flow arrows shall also be provided; they shall be over marked with the letter `F' or `R'
to indicate flow or return as appropriate.
Valve hand wheels and exposed bodies of valves shall be painted in the identifying colour of the service. Care
shall be taken not to paint any labels on the valves or over any screw threads.
4.8.1.19
High density phenolic foam made pipe support insulation blocks, together with pipe brackets or appropriate
sizes, are to be provided on all cooling water and chilled water services pipelines. Pipe support insulation
blocks shall be cut to the correct size to suit pipe outside diameter, and shall incorporate Class 0 vapour
barrier on surface for prevention of condensation and resistance of physical damage (see Clause 4.9.4.1).
Vapour barrier shall have an overlap of 25mm minimum to ensure its integrity. The thickness of each pipe
support insulation block shall be identical to that of the pipework insulation material on the same pipe run,
and all pipe support insulation blocks shall be of sufficient strength to withstand constant load, imposed load,
and elevated temperature conditions.
Installation of pipe support insulation blocks shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
4.8.1.20
Any insulation damaged shall be made good to at least the same standard and specification as the original
insulation.
4.8.1.21
Insulating materials and the application of insulating materials shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO
12241:2008– BS 5422:2009. Identification of pipeline shall be to BS 1710 where applicable (See Clause
4.8.1.18).
4.8.1.22
The operational surface temperature of cladding applied to boilers, other vessels, pipework and flues shall
not exceed 55°C in an ambient temperature of 20°C.
4.8.1.23
Where insulating materials are finished with metallic cladding, the cladding shall be electrically continuous
in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.
4.8.1.24
Where specified in the following Clauses of this sub-section, insulation shall be protected and finished by
fabricated, polished or hammered aluminium sheet. Aluminium sheet minimum thickness as below secured
with `pop' rivets or self-tapping screws at 50mm pitch, end joints covered with 38 mm wide aluminium strip
and purpose made aluminium caps. All joints to be sealed with grey coloured suitable sealant when a vapour
barrier is required.
Thickness of Aluminium Protective Covering

Insulation Flat Sheet Ribbed Sheet
0D mm mm mm
Up to 150 0.7 (1.2) see note 1 0.4
151 to 450 0.9 (1.2) see note 1 0.6
Above 450
and flat 1.2 (1.9) see note 1 0.9
Note 1 The thickness shown in brackets is for use where damage by impact is likely to occur.
4.8.1.25
Insulation applied to plant, equipment, vessels and the like shall be neatly cut around all manufacturers’
name and test pressure plates to leave these visible except in the case of cold surfaces where there is a risk
of condensation forming where the name and test pressure plates shall be duplicated and fixed to the
finished insulation.
4.8.1.26 Insulating Materials and Thicknesses

Insulation materials shall be mineral wool or phenolic foam non CFC blown, unless specified otherwise, with
thicknesses of material in accordance with the tables of minimum thickness for the thermal conductivity
specified forming part of this section of the specification.
 Mineral Wool
Preformed rigid pipework insulation shall have a nominal density of not less than 120kg/m3.
Rigid/flexible duct insulation shall have a nominal density of not less than 48kg/m 3.
 CFC Free Phenolic Foam
The contractor shall, where otherwise specified or where alternatively preferred, use preformed rigid CFC
free phenolic foam pipework insulation which shall have a nominal density of 35kg/m3.
The Contractor shall be required to prove the coefficient of thermal conductivity of each material he
proposes to use. If called upon to do so by the Engineer the Contractor shall arrange to have samples of the
materials tested in accordance with the procedures laid down in BS EN ISO 5172:2006, all fees and expenses
of such tests being met by the Contractor. If the test results are not satisfactory in the opinion of the
Engineer, he shall have the right to order replacement of all material represented by the unsatisfactory
sample.
4.8.1.27
All pipework, accessories and valves (including stems), strainers, flanges, pump bodies, etc, shall be provided
with insulating "wrap around jackets".
The jackets shall be manufactured from silver silicone elastomer coated glass fibre Class "O" finish and
incorporate Velcro fastening flaps for ease of installation.
The insulation shall be a minimum of 50 mm mineral wool.
The jackets shall be as manufactured by:
Unitherm Insulation System

Trent Valley Industrial Estate
Station Road
Rugeley
Staffordshire WS15
2HQ
Tel: 01889 574333
(ISO-Cover range or equal and approved)
In the case of plant rooms, where specified, in lieu of wrap around jackets, insulated split aluminium hinged
boxes with snap fasteners shall be provided.
4.8.2 Methods of Application – Pipework
4.8.2.1 Extent of Insulation and Application
The following identifies the extent of systems to be thermally insulated and the method of application. In
addition, particular requirements are stated which are not otherwise covered by the tables for minimum
thickness of insulation forming part of this specification section.
4.8.2.2 Hot Water Heating
All pipework and fittings, with the exception of those exposed within the occupied areas of the building, shall
be insulated in accordance with the table of minimum insulation thickness for hot water heating.
 Mineral Wool
Pipework shall be insulated with mineral wool, rigid pipe sections with factory applied, reinforced aluminium
foil laminate. The whole to comply with BS EN ISO 12241:2008, BS 5422:2009 and BS 5970:2001, water
vapour permeance and Building Regulations Class Ò' definitions.
Joints to be securely taped with 75 mm wide soft aluminium foil tape (type Idenden T503 or similar and
approved). The whole to be further retained in position by aluminium bands at not less than 450mm centres.
Components shall be insulated with a flexible mattress to the same thickness as adjacent pipework insulation.
Each mattress shall consist of glass cloth filled with mineral wool and stitched to form a quilt and complete
with eyelets to ensure ease of fastening. The outer cover of the mattress shall comprise PVC sheeting of
approved colour. Mattresses shall be secured by means of lapping wire and bands as necessary.
Valve bodies, flanges and strainers in plant rooms shall be completely enclosed with split aluminium boxes
(fabricated from 1.0mm thick aluminium sheets) containing insulation infill to match the pipework
specification. (See also clause 4.8.1.27).
Valve boxes shall be of sufficient size to allow valve wheel/lockshield stem to project outside the box.
Elsewhere, valve bodies, flanges and strainers shall be insulated with purpose made removable muff covers
as specified under Clause 4.8.1.27. Valves and flanges on pipework system exposed to atmosphere shall be
insulated with pre-formed rigid sections as specified for the pipework.
4.8.2.3 Domestic Hot Water Service
All pipework and fittings, with the exception of those exposed within the occupied areas of the building, shall
be insulated in accordance with the table of minimum insulation thickness for domestic hot water service.
 Mineral Wool
foil laminate. The whole to comply with BS EN ISO 12241:2008– BS 5422:2001 and BS 5970:2001, water
Joints to be securely taped with 75 wide soft aluminium foil tape (type Idenden T503 or similar and approved).
The whole to be further retained in position by aluminium bands at not less than 450mm centres.
Components shall be insulated with a flexible mattress to the same thickness as adjacent pipework insulation.
Each mattress shall consist of glass cloth filled with mineral wool and stitched to form a quilt and complete
with eyelets to ensure ease of fastening. The outer cover of the mattress shall comprise PVC sheeting of
approved colour. Mattresses shall be secured by means of lapping wire and bands as necessary.
Alternatively, pipework shall be insulated with preformed sections of CFC free phenolic foam with Class Ò'
aluminium foil faced, closely butted and secured with three aluminium bands per metre.
With the exception of in-heated plant rooms and underground ducts, valves, strainers and flanges shall be
left uninsulated. In unheated plant rooms and underground ducts valves, strainers and flanges shall be
insulated with purpose made removable muff covers. Valves and flanges on pipework systems exposed to
atmosphere shall be insulated-formed rigid sections as specified for the pipework.
Valve bodies, flanges and strainers in plant rooms shall be insulated to the same specification details given in
Clause 4.8.2.2 Hot Water Heating.
4.8.2.4 Domestic Cold Water (including mains and tank water services)
All pipework and fittings, on roof of the building, shall be insulated in accordance with the tables of minimum
insulation thickness for domestic cold water service.
 Mineral Wool
foil laminate. The whole to comply with BS EN ISO 12241:2008– BS 5422:2001 and BS 5970:2001, water
Joints to be securely taped with 75mm wide soft aluminium foil tape (type Idenden T503 or similar and
approved). The whole to be further retained in position by aluminium bands at not less than 450mm centres.
Attention to be paid to maintaining vapour barrier, particularly at termination points, where insulation
edges are to be over taped and returned to piping surface.
Furthermore, where insulation abuts pipe supports, insulation shall be taped to maintain the integrity of
the vapour barrier.
Components shall be insulated with hinged boxes with snap fasteners, fabricated from 1.2mm thick
aluminium sheeting lined internally with rigid mineral wool slabs or pipe sections to the same thickness as
the adjacent insulation and secured to the inside of the box with suitable adhesive. (See also Clause
4.8.1.27).
The space around the fitting shall be filled with a non-setting mastic compound containing a suitable
granulated insulating material to form a vapour barrier.
Alternatively pipework shall be insulated with pre-formed sections of CFC free phenolic foam with Class Ò'
foil faced sections close butted with longitudinal overlap of the foil sealed with Chilstix CP85 contact
adhesive. All butt joints between sections shall be sealed with a band of 75mm wide self-adhesive Class Ò'
foil faced tape to match facing.
Valves, strainers and flanges located in unheated plant rooms, boiler rooms and underground ducts shall
be insulated with purpose made muff covers to match the pipework insulation. Valves and flanges, on
pipework systems exposed to atmosphere, shall be insulated with pre-formed rigid sections as specified for
the pipework.
4.8.2.5 Chilled Water
All chilled water pipework, fittings, valves, strainers, vessels and pumps shall be insulated in accordance
with the table of minimum insulation thickness for chilled water service.
 Mineral Wool
Pipework shall be insulated with mineral wool, rigid pipe sections with factory applied, reinforced
aluminium foil laminate. The whole to comply with BS EN ISO 12241:2008, BS 5422:2009 and BS 5970:2001,
water vapour permeance and Building Regulations Class Ò' definitions.
Joints to be securely taped with 75mm wide soft aluminium foil tape (type Idenden T503 or similar and
approved). The whole to be further retained in position by aluminium bands at not less than 450mm
centres.
Attention to be paid to maintaining vapour barrier, particularly at termination points, where insulation
edges are to be over taped and returned to piping surface.
Furthermore, where insulation abuts pipe supports, insulation shall be taped to maintain the integrity of
the vapour barrier.
Components shall be insulated with hinged boxes with snap fasteners, fabricated from 1.2mm thick
aluminium sheeting lined internally with rigid mineral wool slabs or pipe sections to the same thickness as
the adjacent insulation and secured to the inside of the box with suitable adhesive. (See also Clause
4.8.1.27).
The space around the fitting shall be filled with a non-setting mastic compound containing a suitable
granulated insulating material to form a vapour barrier.
 CFC Free Phenolic
Alternatively pipework shall be insulated with pre-formed sections of CFC free phenolic foam with Class Ò'
foil faced sections close butted with longitudinal overlap of the foil sealed with Chilstix CP85 contact
adhesive. All butt joints between sections shall be sealed with a band of 75mm wide self-adhesive Class Ò'
foil faced tape to match facing.
All valves (including stems), strainers, flanges, pump bodies, etc, shall be completely enclosed with split
aluminium boxes (fabricated from 1.0mm thick aluminium sheets) containing insulation infill to match the
pipework specification. The insulation infill and the joints between the boxes and adjacent insulation shall be
such as to ensure the vapour barrier is maintained
4.8.2.6 Condenser Water
Condenser water pipework and fittings shall be insulated only where located in unheated plant rooms and
where exposed to atmosphere.
Insulating materials and application shall be as specified for heating water service.
4.8.2.7 Air Bottles and Automatic Air Vents
Insulation to air bottles and automatic air vents shall be in accordance with the specification for the
respective water pipework.
4.8.2.8 Relief Pipes
Insulation to relief pipes from safety valves and pressure relief valves shall be in accordance with the
specification for the respective water pipework.
4.8.3 Method of Application – Ductwork
4.8.3.1
Fixing methods for insulation shall provide a minimum of direct metal paths which thermally bridge the
insulation, particularly when the insulation is metal faced. Thermal insulation shall cover all forms of flanged
joints, fasteners and stiffeners either by means of purpose made boxes or by increasing the general thickness
of the insulation to give at least 6mm cover. Where insulation is applied in layers all joints in all layers shall
be staggered.
4.8.3.2
Insulation shall be discontinuous at access doors and test holes and permit their proper use. Elsewhere, the
insulation and its outer covering shall each be continuous, and shall not be pierced or fouled, particularly at
supports. Any water proofing shall be made good round the supports to achieve an acceptable level of
proofing. Insulation at supports shall be material of sufficient compressive strength to take the loads
transmitted to the supports.
4.8.3.3
Pre-formed slab insulation shall be applied with adjacent sides lapped to maintain a uniform thickness at
corners. Insulation shall be fixed securely with adhesive and by impaling on fasteners which may be rustproof
metal studs, split prongs, plastic studs or other approved devices fixed to the duct surfaces. Fastenings shall
be suitable for the thickness and weight of the insulating materials and finishes to be applied and shall be
spaced at approximately 300mm centres. Fastenings shall be finished flush with the surface of the insulation
to which they are applied.
4.8.3.4
Aluminium foil or plastics faced pre-formed slab insulating materials shall be placed on the outside of
ductwork with adjacent sides lapped to maintain a uniform thickness at corners. All joints shall be sealed
with tape of the same material as the facing which is to be held in place with contact adhesive.
4.8.3.5
Where an insulated duct passes through an external building element, adequate precautions shall be taken
to prevent the entry of rain water into the building.
4.8.3.6
Flexible insulation shall have all circumferential longitudinal joints sealed with tape of the same material as
the insulation facing. The external surface of the insulation shall be wrapped with galvanized wire netting of
25mm mesh, 1mm thick, and the netting joints shall be secured with a lacing of 1mm galvanized wire. Care
shall be taken to ensure that insulation material is not crushed during application.
4.8.3.7
Thermal insulation and acoustic insulation materials shall be applied to the ductwork only where indicated.
Insulation material shall be cut to accurately fit the duct surfaces. The insulation shall be fastened to the duct
using adhesive spread over the entire surface in combination with piercing fasteners finished flush with the
insulation surface. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that edges of all internal insulating materials,
where exposed or butted against similar edges, are sealed and secured to the surfaces of the duct. They shall
be protected with channel sheet metal of not less than 0.8mm thickness and 13mm width or be provided
with other approved means of protection to prevent erosion and peeling. Unless otherwise indicated or
approved, internal duct linings shall be faced with perforated metal plates of approximately 50% free area.
All materials shall have adequate strength and cohesion to resist erosion at maximum design air velocity and
shall not produce dust.
4.8.3.8 Insulation Specification - Sheet Metal/Plastic/Rigid Ductwork
Ductwork to be insulated with mineral wool having a nominal density of 48 kg/cu.m and factory applied
reinforced aluminium foil laminate facing, complying with BS EN ISO 12241:2008, BS 5422:2009 and BS
5970:2001, water vapour permeance and Building Regulations Class Ò' definition.
Joints to be securely taped with 75mm minimum wide soft aluminium adhesive tape.
On ductwork up to 600mm maximum dimension, the corners shall be provided with 22swg 50mm x 50mm
aluminium angle and insulation, further retained in position by aluminium bands at not less than 450mm
centres.
On ductwork over 600mm maximum dimension, the insulation shall be further retained by 19-22 swg x 50
mm mesh galvanized wire netting. Care shall be taken to maintain vapour barrier integrity.
On ductwork up to 500mm diameter or 600 mm flat oval width, the insulation shall be further retained in
position by aluminium bands at not less than 450 mm centres.
On ductwork over 500mm diameter or 600mm flat oval width, the insulation shall be further retained by 19-
22 swg x 55mm mesh galvanized wire netting.
Alternatively, rectangular ducting shall be insulated with CFC free Foilphen K laminate. This shall be cut on
site so that the top and bottom slabs overlap the sides at all four corners of the duct. The insulation shall be
adhered to the duct using KP31 general purpose two-way contact adhesive. The insulation on the underside
of the duct shall additionally be secured by means of Fastfix insulation pins and washers spaced at 300 mm
centres.
Finish of Class Ò' foil faced finish with all joints overlapped in the foil jacket and sealed with Chilstix CP85
contact adhesive. All other joints shall be sealed with 100mm wide self adhesive matching Class Ò' tape. All
exposed edges of the insulation pins or other protrusions shall be primed with Chilstix CP85 and then sealed
with 100mm wide self-adhesive matching Class Ò' tape.
All test holes, sensing and control elements, damper operators/quadrants; the insulation shall be neatly cut
and finished. The following sheet metal ductwork system shall be insulated:
 all sheet metal ductwork systems within boiler rooms, and plant rooms;
 all sheet metal ductwork conveying return air;
 all sheet metal ductwork conveying mechanically cooled/air conditioned and heated supply air;
 all sheet metal supply air ductwork systems exposed to atmosphere;
 all sheet metal ductwork conveying heated air where located within unheated areas of the building
including ceiling voids with exposed roofs and builders work services ducts and exposed walls.
4.8.3.9 Flexible Ductwork
Flexible ductwork sections and connections shall be insulated to achieve the same standard as specified for
the associated sheet metal ductwork and shall be provided with an external foil vapour seal.
4.8.4 Vapour Barriers

4.8.4.1
Where thermal insulation is applied to the outside of piped and ducted services, equipment and plant used
to convey, store or generate fluids or gases at temperatures lower than the design ambient dew point
temperature indicated, a water vapour barrier shall be provided. The vapour barrier shall be applied such
that it is continuous and gives protection to the whole surface of the insulation which it protects. It shall not
be pierced or otherwise damaged by supports or by the application of external cladding. At points of support
means of load distribution shall be provided using phenolic foam non-CFC blown of high density minimum
80kg/m3 for pipework up to 125mm diameter and 120kg/m3 for pipework 125mm and over, with the vapour
barrier continuous through the support points.
4.8.4.2
Unless otherwise indicated the vapour barrier shall have a permeance value not exceeding 9.05 g/(sMN).
4.8.4.3
The material chosen for the vapour barrier and its method of application shall be compatible with the thermal
insulation which it is to protect. The following may be used (subject to Clause 4.8.1.7).
1) Wet-applied vapour barriers of the cut-back bitumen type, bitumen emulsions with or without
elastomer latex, vinyl emulsions and solvent based polymers.
2) Elastomer sheets with all joints adequately overlapped and continuously sealed.
3) Polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, Polyisobutylene or other plastics tapes or sheets.

4) Epoxide and polyester resins.
5) Sheet metal with all joints adequately overlapped and continuously sealed to a vapour-tight
condition.
6) Metal foil used alone or laminated to building paper, building sheet or plastic film with all joints
adequately lapped and continuously vapour sealed.
4.8.4.4
Unless otherwise indicated the vapour barrier shall be a foil laminate with all joints adequately lapped and
sealed with 75mm wide foil faced adhesive tape.
4.8.5 Thermal Insulation of Equipment in the Plant Rooms and in Ventilation Plant Rooms
4.8.5.1
The heating and hot water supply calorifiers, condensate receivers steam accumulators, heat exchangers
and condensate pumping traps in plant rooms shall be insulated as follows:
a) For Curved Convex or Concave Body Sections:
With long stranded mineral fibre mats bonded with resin to form flexible rolls, maximum thermal
conductivity 0.0462W/m degrees C. The insulation shall comply with Class O fire rating.
b) For Flat Body Sections:
With rigid preformed mineral fibre slabs, maximum thermal conductivity 0.0462W/m degrees
C. The insulation shall comply with Class O fire rating.
4.8.5.2
For cold and chilled water storage vessels and chilled water accumulators, these shall be insulated with
Phenolic Foam or sheet sections in flexible roll form, having a maximum thermal conductivity 0.0462W/m
degrees C. These materials of less than Class Ò' fire rating shall not be used without further protection when
Class Ò' fire rating is required.
4.8.5.3
Insulation shall be selected having a constant thermal conductivity value, in order to provide a consistent
insulation thickness throughout.
4.8.5.4
a) Methods of application for mineral fibre mats.
The insulation shall be adhered to the item of plant with a suitable non-flammable adhesive to the
manufacturer's recommendation.
b) Methods of application for mineral fibre slabs.
The insulation similar to that for ductwork and generally in accordance with Clause 4.8.3.9.
4.8.5.5
Over this shall be fitted (1.0mm) stucco embossed aluminium cut so that it can be fitted neatly around all
mountings, manholes and bosses.
4.8.5.6
The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 for flat surfaces.
4.8.5.7
Where access panels occur the cover shall be insulated such that they can be readily removed when required.
4.8.6 Thermal Insulation of Pipework in Plant Rooms and Ventilation Plant Rooms and that Exposed to
view Elsewhere.
All pipework shall be insulated with rigid preformed mineral fibre insulation half section enclosed in a foil
finish to meet Class Ò' fire rating. Foil finish colour to be consistent throughout installation. Maximum
thermal conductivity 0.0462W/m degrees C. Sections shall be arranged with hinge to the top and longitudinal
end laps of 25mm which shall be well sealed down using non-inflammable adhesive and secured to the
pipework with 25mm non-ferrous banding at 300mm centres.
4.8.6.1
4.8.6.2
Over this shall be fitted 20 SWG (0.9mm) stucco embossed aluminium cut in 1 metre lengths and rolled so
that they can be fitted neatly and lapped by not less than 40 mm. The sheet metal shall be secured by self-
tapping screws or pop rivets at not more than 150mm intervals. Circumferential laps should be secured at
quarter segments. At 4.5 metre intervals an unsecured joint shall be left to permit expansion. Bends, branch
connections and tees shall be fitted with purpose made 20 SWG (0.9mm) sheet aluminium segments secured
by self-tapping screws or pop rivets.
All necessary ends of the lagging (ie at valves and fittings) shall be provided with aluminium end caps.
All valve bodies, spindles and flanges above 50mm size shall be insulated in accordance with the following:
Insulating boxes shall be formed 20 SWG (0.9mm) aluminium sheet approved construction in two equal
halves retained by clips and/or hinges around the component. (See also Clause 4.8.1.27).
4.8.6.3
Flanges shall have round boxes secured by self-tapping screws and valves shall have `D' shaped boxes with
easily released catches for access to valve.
These boxes shall be lined with mineral fibre insulation to all surfaces, any excessive air space internal shall
be packed with insulation. (See also Clause 4.8.1.27).
The thickness of the insulation shall be as indicated in tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
4.8.7 Thermal Insulation of Ductwork in Plant Rooms and Ventilation Plant Rooms and Exposed to
View Elsewhere
4.8.7.1
All rectangular ductwork shall be insulated with rigid preformed mineral fibre slabs insulation enclosed in a
foil finish to meet Class Ò' fire rating. Foil finish colour to be consistent throughout installation. Maximum
thermal conductivity 0.0462W/m degrees C.
4.8.7.2
Insulation shall be selected having a constant thermal conductivity value in order to provide a consistent
insulation thickness throughout
4.8.7.3
Rigid circular or oval ductwork shall be insulated in accordance with Clause 4.8.9.1.
4.8.7.4
Over rectangular, circular or oval ductwork shall be fitted 20 SWG (0.9mm) stucco embossed aluminium
sheet. At 4.5 metre intervals an unsecured joint shall be left to permit expansion.
4.8.7.5
In the case of flue gas ducting irrespective of location inside the building this shall be insulated and clad in
accordance with Clauses 3.9.7.4 and 3.9.7.4 respectively with the exception that 18 SWG (1.2mm) aluminium
sheet shall be used, see Clause 4.9.1.15(c). In the case of ductwork outside the building this shall be treated
additionally as external ductwork.
4.8.8 Thermal Insulation of Pipework in Service ducts, Voids and Ceiling Spaces and Boxing Out (Not
in Plant Rooms)
4.8.8.1
Shall be insulated with rigid preformed mineral fibre insulation half section enclosed in a foil finish to meet
Class Ò' fire rating. Foil finish colour to be consistent throughout installation. Maximum thermal conductivity
0.0462 w/m degrees C. Sections shall be arranged with hinge to the top and to have longitudinal and end
laps of 25mm which shall be well sealed down using non-inflammable adhesive and secured to the pipework
with 25mm non- ferrous banding at 300mm centres. (See also Clause 4.8.1.27).
4.8.8.2
Insulation shall be selected having a constant thermal conductivity value in order to provide a consistent
thickness throughout.
4.8.8.3
Where valves 50mm size and above occur in the ceilings and ducts, these shall be insulated in accordance
with Clause 4.8.1.27. Valves 50mm size and below in shall be insulated as Clause 4.8.8.1.
4.8.8.4
On pipework operating below ambient temperature, all insulation joints shall be perfectly sealed to provide
an adequate vapour barrier.
4.8.8.5
All pipework in occupied areas to be boxed in shall be insulated as Clause 4.8.8.1.
4.8.8.6
Pipework installed in occupied areas not to be boxed in and, in the following circumstances, shall be
uninsulated unless otherwise indicated:
Pipework whose surface temperature is between 50°C and 95°C and sited up to 2 meters above floor level
(Notwithstanding Clause 4.9.1.14).
Pipework sited at less than 2 meters above floor level which is specifically designated as heating surface and
whose surface temperature exceeds 95°C but which is screened against physical contact.
Pipework sited at more than 2 meters above floor level which is specifically designated as heating surface.
4.8.8.7
The thickness of the insulation shall be as indicated in tables 1, 2, 3 4 and 5.
4.8.9 Thermal Insulation of Ductwork in Service Ducts, Voids and Ceiling spaces (Not in Plant Rooms)
4.8.9.1
All supply air ductwork, fresh air and recirculation air ductwork to plant items shall be insulated with long
stranded mineral wool bonded with resin to form flexible rolls. The material shall have a maximum thermal
conductivity of 0.0462W/m degrees C and a minimum density of 0.16kg/cu.mm the insulation shall be
enclosed in foil finish to meet Class Ò' fire rating. Foil finish colour to be consistent throughout installation.
4.8.9.2
4.8.9.3
The insulation shall be continuous run and shall follow the contour of the fittings. The insulation shall be
adhered to the ductwork with a suitable non-inflammable adhesive in accordance with these clauses and to
the manufacturer's recommendations. The material shall be faced with a foil finish to meet class Ò' fire
rating. Foil finish colour to be consistent throughout.
4.8.9.4
Where access panels occur the cover shall be insulated such that they can be removed when required.
4.8.9.5
25 mm galvanized 1 mm thick steel wire mesh shall be fitted all round the insulation foil finish on all ductwork
of size 400mm and above. All wire ends shall be arranged so that there will be no risk of the wire mesh
causing injury to personnel when in physical contact with the mesh itself (See Clause 4.8).
4.8.9.6
The thickness of insulation shall be as indicated in table 5.
4.8.10 Thermal Insulation of Services External to Building Either Exposed or in Ducts, etc
4.8.10.1
The thermal insulation of services installed in external positions shall be as that described for services in
ducts, trenches and voids, etc, with the addition of a weatherproof protection consisting as indicated:
a) Enclosed in 0.9mm thick aluminium sheet with all joints sealed and arranged to shed water.
b) Covered in roofing felt and galvanized wire netting of 25mm mesh and finally treated with two coats of
bituminous weatherproofing compound to BS 3416 type 1 Class A.
c) One layer of 0.8mm minimum thickness Polyisobutylene sheeting wrapped round with minimum
overlaps of 38mm longitudinal and 25mm at ends. All overlaps to be sealed with suitablea dhesive.
4.8.10.3
The finishes specified in Clause 4.8.10.1 shall be perforated on the underside of all horizontal runs with 6
mm diameter holes at approximately 150mm centres. The horizontally lapped joints shall lie to one side of
the bottom centre line exposed edge downwards so that the perforations are made in one thickness of the
material, with the underlying preformed insulation open to atmosphere at these points.
4.8.10.4
The weatherproof finish to the insulation of cold water pipework shall be as Clause 4.8.10.1 without the
requirement for perforation on the underside as indicated.
4.8.10.5
On all pipework, unions, valve and stopcock bodies shall be insulated by neatly sectioning to fit sectional
insulation of an appropriate size segmenting by mitres where necessary to ensure maximum contact and
then weatherproofing in with the remainder of the pipework.
4.8.10.6
For equipment mounted outside buildings these shall be insulated as equipment inside except Clause 4.8.1.6
and 4.8.10.1 shall apply.
4.8.10.7
The thickness of insulation shall be as indicated in tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 and Clause 4.8.1.6.
4.8.10.8
Control valve and actuators. The valve body shall be insulated in accordance with 4.8.10.5. A removable,
insulated weatherproof enclosure shall be provided for the valve actuator assembly and linkages if
applicable. The enclosure shall completely weatherproof the complete control valve actuator/linkage
assembly without impairing the normal operation of the valve. The enclosure shall be easily removed and
reinstalled to allow periodic inspection of the operation of the valve and maintenance.
4.8.11 Thermal Insulation of Water Storage and Feed and Expansion Tanks
4.8.11.1
Shall be insulated on the sides, on the top and underneath (except where Clause 4.8.11.3 applies) as
practicable, with preformed slabs of mineral wool secured in position with a suitable adhesive and aluminium
bands with corner angles of the same material. The maximum thermal conductivity shall be 0.0462W/m°C.
4.8.11.2
4.8.11.3
In the situation where cold water storage tanks and F. & E. tanks are located immediately above ceilings of
heated spaces, the insulation should be omitted from the underside of the tank to the approval of the
Engineer, in order to prevent freezing of the tank contents.
4.8.11.4
The thickness of insulation shall be as indicated in tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 for flat surfaces.
4.8.11.5
The slabs shall be suitably shaped to clear flanges etc and be arranged so that any appropriate insulation
may be removed for any tank inspection purposes. The insulation shall then be faced with a foil finish to
meet class Ò' fire rating. Foil finish colour to be consistent throughout.
4.8.11.6
All joints shall be carefully sealed to give a consistent vapour barrier.
4.8.11.7
Where manholes occur, the cover shall be insulated also such that the cover can be removed when required.
4.8.12 Thickness of Insulation
Selection shall be from these tables and to any particular requirements specified in Section 4 of this
specification. Thicknesses shown are the minimum for the particular service and conductivity. For
intermediate conductivities the minimum thickness shall be determined by selecting the nearest larger size.
TABLE 1: MINIMUM THICKNESS OF THERMAL INSULATION FOR HEATING INSTALLATIONS
Nominal
Bore Declared Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)
(mm)
LTHW MTHW Systems HTHW Systems
Systems and Condensate and Steam
0 >0.02 >0.040 >0.055 0 >0.02 >0.040 >0.055 0 >0.02 >0.040 >0.055
to to to to to to to to to to to to
0.02 0.040 0.055 0.070 0.02 0.040 0.055 0.070 0.02 0.040 0.055 0.070
Minimum Nominal thickness of Insulation (mm)
15 15 25 40 40 20 40 40 40 30 50 50 50
20 20 30 40 40 20 40 40 50 30 50 50 50
25 20 40 40 40 20 40 40 50 35 50 50 50
30 20 40 40 50 20 50 50 50 35 50 50 50
40 20 40 40 50 20 50 50 50 35 50 50 65
50 20 40 50 50 25 50 50 50 35 50 75 75
65 20 50 50 50 25 50 50 50 35 65 75 75
80 25 50 50 50 25 50 50 65 40 65 75 75
100 25 50 50 65 30 65 65 65 40 65 75 100
125 30 50 50 65 30 65 65 65 40 65 100 100
150 30 50 65 65 35 65 65 65 40 65 100 100
200 30 50 65 65 40 65 65 65 50 65 100 100
250 35 65 65 65 40 65 65 75 50 75 100 100
300 40 65 65 65 50 65 65 75 50 75 100 100

Flat
40 65 65 65 50 65 65 75 50 75 100 100
Surfaces
Notes associated with Table 1:
Note 1: Where insulation is required to prevent condensation on refrigeration pipes, or freezing of

water services (See Table 4 Note 1)
Note 2: The same thickness insulation should be used for copper pipes of similar size.
Note 3: Due allowance shall be made for pipe sizes which are based upon the outside diameter.
Note 4: Phenolic foam insulation is not acceptable where service temperatures exceed 150 °C.
TABLE 2: MINIMUM THICKNESS OF THERMAL INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER INSTALLATIONS
Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)

Nominal bore (mm) up to 0.02 0.021 to 0.040 0.041 to 0.05
Thickness of insulation (mm)
15 25 38 40
20 25 38 50
25 25 38 50
32 25 38 50
40 25 38 50
50 25 50 63
65 32 63 63
80 32 63 63
100 38 63 63
125 38 63 63
150 38 63 75
200 38 63 75
250 38 63 75
Flat Surfaces 38 75 100
Note 1: Where insulation is required to prevent condensation on refrigeration pipes, or freezing

of water services (see Table 4, Note 1).
Note 2: The same thickness of insulation should be used for copper pipes of similar size.
Note 3: Due allowance shall be made for pipe sizes which are based upon outside diameter.
Note 4: A continuous vapour barrier is to be maintained on all chilled water installations.
TABLE 3: THICKNESS OF THERMAL INSULATION FOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER SERVICES
Declared Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)

Nominal 0 >0.02 >0.040 >0.055
Bore (mm) to to to to
0.02 0.040 0.055 0.070
Minimum Nominal Thickness of Insulation (mm)
15 15 25 40 40
20 20 30 50 50
25 20 30 50 50
30 20 40 50 50
40 25 50 50 50
50 25 50 50 50
65 25 50 50 50
80 30 50 50 65
100 30 65 65 65
125 35 65 65 65
150 40 65 65 65
Flat Surfaces 40 65 75 75

of water services (see Table 4, Note 1).
TABLE 4: THICKNESS OF THERMAL INSULATION FOR COLD WATER SERVICES - FROST PROTECTION
Declared Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)
Pipework Within Buildings External Pipework

Nominal 0 >0.02 >0.040 >0.055 0 >0.02 >0.040 >0.055
Bore (mm) to to to to to to to to
0.02 0.040 0.055 0.070 0.02 0.040 0.055 0.070
Minimum Nominal Thickness of Insulation (mm)
15 20 30 50 75 25 40 65 100
20 20 30 50 75 25 40 65 100
25 20 30 50 75 25 40 65 100
30 20 30 50 75 25 40 65 100
40 20 30 50 75 25 40 65 100
50 20 25 30 50 20 25 50 65
65 15 25 30 50 20 25 50 65
80 15 25 30 50 20 25 50 65
100 15 20 25 40 20 25 30 50
125 15 20 25 40 20 25 30 50
150 15 20 25 40 20 25 30 50
Flat
Surface 15 20 25 40 20 25 30 50
s

of water services the recommendations of BS 5422 shall be followed but in any event in
the case of prevention of freezing, the thickness of insulation shall not be less than that
given in table 4.
Note 2: The same thickness of insulation should be used for copper pipes of similar sizes.
Note 4: Reference should be made to BS 5422. The use of these sizes should not be used in these
circumstances. See Section 4.3 Clause 4.4.5.
TABLE 5: MINIMUM THICKNESS OF THERMAL INSULATION ON DUCTWORK CARRYING WARMED OR

CHILLED AIR
Maximum Temperature
Difference (°C)
10 25 50
between Air in ductwork and
Ambient Air
Up to 0.041 0.056 Up to 0.041 0.056 Up to 0.041 0.056
Insulation thermal
to to to to to to
Conductivity (W/m °C)
0.040 0.055 0.070 0.040 0.055 0.070 0.040 0.056 0.070
Insulation Thickness (mm)

38 50 50 50 50 75 63 75 75
Note 1: Phenolic foam insulation is not acceptable where service temperatures exceed 150°C.
Note 2: Thermal conductivity values relate to a mean temperature of 20°C.
Note 3: Vapour barriers to be applied to insulation on ductwork conveying fresh air and
conditioned supply air.
4.10 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE)
4.11 AIR HANDLING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
4.11.1 Fans - General
a) Values of the resistance to air flow of items of equipment, ductwork and/or the total distribution system
indicated in the contract documents are approximate. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
verify these values based on the equipment offered and provide fans capable of delivering the required air
volume when operating against the actual total system static resistance Fans shall be `type' tested in
accordance with the requirements of BS 848-9:2007 and shall be selected to give the air volume flow rate
and sound power level specified in the contract documents.
b) All fans shall be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of withstanding the pressures
and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. Additionally, all belt driven fans
shall be capable of running continuously at ten per cent in excess of the selected duty speed or maximum
speed in the case of variable speed applications.
The make, performance (subject to a. above) and type of fan shall be as indicated.
Fan drives shall be in accordance with the relevant section of this specification.
c) Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all às cast' bearing surfaces for bolt heads and
washers shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461:2009 or to BS EN ISO 2081:2008 or BS EN ISO 2082:2008.
Holding-down bolts for fans and motors shall be provided with the means to prevent the bolts turning when
the nuts are tightened. Anti-vibration mountings shall be as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Fans
heavier than 20 kg shall be provided with eyebolts or other purpose made lifting facilities.
d) Where indicated, fans shall be fitted with variable air inlet guide vanes which shall be matched to the fan
performance to give stable control. Vanes shall be closely interlocked to ensure movement in unison and
operation shall be automatic. Vane blades shall not vibrate or flutter throughout their movement and the
construction of the linkage system shall minimize friction and lost motion. The linkage system shall be
designed to minimize hysteresis.
e) The shaft and impeller assembly of all centrifugal, axial flow and mixed flow fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. All propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced where the impeller
diameter is 750mm or greater. Limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with BS ISO 10816-
1:1995+A1:2009, unless otherwise specified.
f) Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be grease/oil ball
and/or roller type or alternatively oil lubricated sleeve type. All bearing housings shall be precision located
in position and arranged so that bearings may be replaced without the need for realignment. Bearing
housings shall be protected against the ingress of dust and, where fitted with greased points, they shall be
designed to prevent damage from over-greasing and be fitted with dust caps. For grease lubricated systems
the bearings shall be provided with grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing
manufacturer. For oil lubricated systems the housings shall provide an adequate reservoir of oil and shall
include a filling plug and be oil tight and dust proof. Systems other than total loss types shall include an
accessible drain plug. All bearing lubricators shall be located to facilitate maintenance without shutting
down plant.
Belt drives shall be in accordance with the relevant section of this specification. Taper lock pulleys shall be
used on motor and driven units of all fans. Belt speeds shall not exceed 25m/s.
g) The surfaces of all ferrous metalwork not having a permanent protective or decorative finish shall be
cleaned to remove all grease, rust and flaking paint etc, given one coat of rust preventative paint plus two
finishing coats of an approved quality and colour.
4.11.2 Centrifugal Fans
a) Centrifugal fans for high-velocity high-pressure systems (defined within Building and Engineering Services
Association (Formerly HVCA) Specification DW/144) shall be backward bladed type with aero foil section
blades.
Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5kW at the fan shaft shall be of the
backward and aero foil bladed type having a fan total efficiency not less than 75%.
b) Fan casings shall be constructed from heavy steel plate, welded throughout and reinforced with tees and
angles and designed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan installation. Fans other than those
in air handling units shall be provided with flanged outlet and inlet connections unless otherwise indicated.
A plugged drain point shall be fitted at the lowest point in the fan casing. Permanent indication shall be
provided to show the correct direction of rotation of the fan impeller. Fan casings shall be provided with
removable access panels which shall incorporate purpose made air seals. The sizes of access panels shall be
such as to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller.
The internal surfaces of the fan casing shall be smooth, without lips, burrs, sharp edges and any other
manufacturing defect or anomaly which will cause a resistance to the air flow through the fan assembly.
Impellers shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy of riveted, welded or other approved construction,
with spiders or hubs of robust design.
c) The casings and impeller of the centrifugal fans shall form an inherently anti-corrosion finish, eg galvanized,
be manufactured from a corrosion free material, eg PVC, or shall be given an anti-corrosion finish of anti-
corrosion primer (free of lead), undercoat (if necessary) and one finish coat, unless the manufacturer's
standard is higher, in which case it will be accepted in preference.
d) Centrifugal fans for low-velocity, low pressure systems (defined within Building and Engineering Services
Association (Formerly HVCA) specification DW144) shall be a forward curved bladed type. The blades shall
be welded to a back plate and shroud. The hub shall be welded to the back plate. The fan casing shall be of
sheet steel with the scroll plate welded to the casing side plates. All other details shall be as clauses b. and
c. above, where appropriate. Forward blade fans shall be selected from that part of their performance curve
where hunting cannot occur.
e) Supports for centrifugal fans shall have their side frames welded to the outside face of the fan casing. The
support shall have a mild steel channel base which shall be extended to allow the fitting of a motor for
either a direct or belt-drive arrangement. Where the fan assembly is not to be installed in an air- handling
unit the support shall incorporate the means to attach a belt guard over the whole pulley/belt assembly.
The support shall be capable of correctly and adequately supporting the fan, and motor, if applicable, at
the specified angle of discharge.
f) The fan shall be driven by an electric motor directly or indirectly as specified elsewhere. In a direct drive
application the fan and motor shall have separate shafts which shall be keyed together or shall be
connected through a coupling. The motor shall be supported on a steel pedestal base. In an indirect drive
application the fan and motor shall be connected by endless V-belts over a pulley on the fan shaft and on
the motor shaft.
4.11.3 Axial Flow Fans
a) Axial flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel stiffened and braced where necessary to
prevent drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided for bolting to a base or to supports. Inlet
and outlet connections shall be flanged to facilitate removal. For in-duct mounting the length of the fan
casing shall be greater than the combined length of the impeller(s) and motor(s). Electrical connections to
the motors shall be via an external terminal box secured firmly to the casing.
b) Impellers shall be of steel, aluminium or plastics and the blades shall be secured to the hub, or the blades
and the hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be eyed to the shaft. Blades shall be aero foil section
or laminar and capable of pitch adjustment where indicated.
c) Where axial flow fans are driven by motors external to the casings of the fans the requirements of this
specification for drives and guards shall be met. A guard is not required for any part of a drive which is
inside a lockable fan casing. An access panel with purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing;
the access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance and shall incorporate a keyed lock. If the panel is
not lockable the drive shall be guarded.
d) Where axial flow fans of the bifurcated type are indicated, the motors shall be placed between the two
halves of the casing in the external air.
e) Fan casings shall be inherently anti-corrosion eg galvanized, be manufactured from a corrosion free
material, eg plastic, or shall be given an anti-corrosion finish.
4.11.4 Propeller Fans
Propeller fans shall be ring mounted or diaphragm mounted as indicated. Impellers shall be of steel, aluminium or
plastics and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece. A wire guard
or similar protective device shall be fitted to the inlet of open mounted fans. The motor shall be connected via a
direct drive.
4.11.5 In-Line Centrifugal or Mixed Flow Fans
Mixed flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel or aluminium, stiffened and braced where necessary
to prevent drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided for bolting to a base or supports. The inlet and
outlet shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. Stator vanes shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy. The unit
shall be designed to facilitate easy access to the impeller. Drives and guards shall be provided in accordance with
the relevant section of this specification where motors are mounted external to casings. An access panel with
purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing; the access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance
and shall incorporate a keyed lock. If the panel is not lockable the drive shall be guarded.
4.11.6 Mechanical Roof Extract Units
a) The fans used in roof extract units shall meet the appropriate requirements of the proceeding clauses
relating to fans generally and to particular types of fans Cowls and bases shall be of materials which are
resistant to the weather, solar radiation, atmospheric pollution and are appropriate to the location of the
fan. Casings shall be formed to facilitate a weatherproof fitting to the building structure. Adequate access
to electrical supply terminals and lubrication points shall be provided by means of hinged cowls or
otherwise as appropriate. Back-draught dampers and/or fire release dampers shall be provided
where indicated. Bird guards of not greater than 25mm mesh shall be provided as an integral part
of the unit.
b) Construction of the unit shall permit easy removal of the weather shield and access from roof to fan and
motor unit for maintenance, servicing and/or removal.
Local isolators shall be mounted externally to casings and the terminal boxes shall be accessible from the
roof.
All roof units shall be provided with an aluminium insulated roof curb.
4.11.7 Mechanical Wall Extract Units
a) The fans used in wall extract units shall meet the appropriate requirements of the proceeding clauses relating
to fans generally and to particular types of fan.
Fan wall units shall be provided with the following:
(i) Galvanized steel or plastic wall box with adjustment to accommodate variation in wall thickness.
(ii) Back draught shutters of aluminium, plastic or zinc coated steel construction, gravity hinged flap,
automatic iris damper or automatic spring flap damper.
(iii) Weatherproof high impact flame retardant plastic outdoor wall grille.
(iv) Peep proof high impact flame retardant plastic indoor wall grille.
(v) Slow running resiliently mounted direct driven centrifugal fan having aluminium multi-vane impeller
and zinc coated steel finished black fan case.
(vi) Terminal box factory wired to fan motor.
(vii) Wall box to have cable entry grommets in each side and service access.
4.11.8 Twin Fan Mechanical Extract Units
a) Twin fan extract units shall comprise:
(i) Independent direct driven forward multi-vane centrifugal fans running in sleeve bearings and
mounted in individual scrolls with automatic changeover dampers.
(ii) Impellers and scrolls finished in an anti-corrosion paint.
(iii) Back draught shutters incorporated into each fan discharge. Alternatively a single changeover
damper may be provided with an additional back draught damper in the discharge ductwork.
(iv) Ample removable panels to give easy access from the roof to all components. Panels are to have
weather tight air seals.
(v) Pre-drilled holes with suitable glands for electrical connections into the unit.
(vi) Air flow switches to give automatic changeover on failure of duty fan.
(vii) Anti-vibration isolators located beneath each fan.
(viii) Flexible ductwork connections fitted internally to fan discharge connections of heavy quality fibre
glass reinforced canvas having a Class 1 flame spread to BS 476: Part 7: 1997.
(ix) Motors shall be to BS EN 60034-3:2008 and shall have ventilated enclosures and sealed-for-life
bearings.
b) There shall be adequate access to the lubricating points provided.
The casings may be either aluminium or galvanized sheet steel bonderised and provided with a long life
weather resistant epoxy coated factory finish.
c) Each unit shall be provided with facilities to enable remote manual operation from a control panel. The
control panel shall enable selection of duty fan, and provide indication of fan failure and standby fan
òn'. When used for a toilet extract application, a run-on timer, adjustable between 5 and 30 minutes,
shall be incorporated.
4.11.9 Smoke Extract Fans
a) The housing shall be of monobloc construction manufactured in aluminium alloy and incorporating air
operated shutters. Fixings shall be non-corrodible. Access panel fixings shall be stainless steel and captive.
b) Exhaust air shall be discharged through high velocity outlets protected by hinged bird guards that
automatically open if debris collects beneath them. Shutters shall be compressed air operated under
normal conditions. In the open position they shall not obstruct the air flow. In the closed position they shall
seal at a high angle to ensure sufficient shedding of rain. Shutters shall be forced and held in the open
position by spring loaded arms which shall be normally restrained by a fusible link rated at 72C unless stated
otherwise.
c) Fans shall be single inlet, high performance, mixed flow impellers, manufactured in aluminium and
dynamically balanced. They shall incorporate asymmetric blade spacing to reduce peak noise levels and be
held in the motor shaft by a taper lock arrangement. Resilient mountings shall be used to support the fan
and motor assembly on the baseplate to minimize mechanical noise and vibration.
d) Motor insulation shall be class B or greater. All standard motors shall have sealed-for-life bearings and shall
be totally enclosed fan ventilated (to IP54). If a water drenching section is specified then the rating shall be
IP55. The unit shall be externally fitted with a weatherproof electrical isolator pre-wired at the works to the
motor via heat and fire resisting cable.
e) A water drenching section shall be provided where indicated to each fan immediately below the unit inlet.
This section shall comprise a heavy gauge steel casing containing special water spray nozzles connected to
a valve, held closed by a temperature reactive glass bulb. The system shall be provided with a 20mm
connection to a water supply of sufficient pressure and detailed elsewhere in this specification.
f) Access to the unit shall be provided to allow complete and easy removal of the fan/ motor assembly. Unless
otherwise indicated the finish shall be natural aluminium with steel components suitably protected.
g) Controls shall be housed in dust and hose proof enclosures to IP55 (IE 144) and be suitable for the glanding
of heat and fire resisting cables.
4.11.10 Air Filters General
a) Filter assemblies shall operate with at least the efficiencies specified below. Filter material shall not be
carried over. Filters shall be complete, with robust purpose made holding frames which shall not distort in
operation. All filters shall be arranged to facilitate access for cleaning, removal and refitting. Purpose made
seals shall be provided to prevent air leakage around filters and the effectiveness of the seals shall not be
impaired by periodic removal and refitting of the filter cells. Any special tools necessary for removal and
refitting shall be provided.
A differential pressure gauge shall be provided across each filter bank and the gauge shall be fixed in such
a position, outside the casing, that it is accessible and easily read. The gauge shall incorporate a graduated
scale on which the reading of maximum pressure drop shall occur in not less than 75% of the total scale
length. The point at which the filter medium would require replacement shall be clearly and indelibly
marked.
b) Filter grading shall be as specified elsewhere. In the absence of a particular requirement the following
grades of filter shall be used:
Primary Secondary
General Factory and Office Areas G3

High Grade Office Areas F6
Computer Rooms G3 F7
Hospital Wards G3 F6
Hospital Operating Theatres* G3 F8
Retail Stores and Restaurants F5
Food Factories G3 F6
Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Areas G3 F9
Libraries F7
Theatres, Concert Halls, Cinemas, Leisure
Centres, Swimming Pools G3 F6
Airport Terminal Buildings
Exhibition Centres
Hotels G3 F6
Museums, Art Galleries** G3 F8
Schools F5
Residential buildings G3 F7
* Tertiary filtration at point of entry into room, H10-11 for operating theatres, H10-14 for pharmaceutical
research and manufacturing.
** Carbon filtration to be provided where indicated in the particular specification.
c) Where indicated, the Contractor shall arrange for two samples of each type of filter intended for use on
the installation to be submitted for testing to the standards specified.
d) New, clean filter media shall be installed for all filter types on the following basis:
Commissioning and Testing - one set
Handover - one set (plus one set as part of the issue of spares)
e) Unless specified elsewhere to the contrary, all calculations by the contractor to determine fan pressures
shall assume a filter resistance to airflow based on:
(Filter Dirty Resistance - Filter Clean Resistance) + Filter Clean Resistance

2
Where the filter dirty resistance shall be 250Pa or the manufacturer's recommendation, whichever the
lower figure, at the arrestance or efficiency specified.
f) Filter Grading
Mechanical media type filtration is based on moving a known volume of air through a filter media which
is designed to give the required efficiency, at an agreed pressure drop. As the efficiency requirement
increases, then media area must also be increased to compensate for the resulting increase in filter
pressure drop for the same air volume. A combination would be primary plus secondary to achieve F9
final filtration.
The following air filter grade list is for BS EN 779 and BS EN 1822 tests. The tests apply to filters used for
HVAC, controlled zones and other process control requirements.
BS EN 779 BS EN 779 BS EN1822

FILTER GRADE
Arrestance % Efficiency % Minimum MPPS %
G1 <65%
G2 65<80%
G3 80<90%
G4 >90%
F5 40<60%
EU6 F6 60<80%
EU7 F7 80<90%
EU8 F8 90<95%
EU9 F9 >95%
EU10 H10 85%
EU11 H11 95%
EU12 H12 99.5%
EU13 H13 99.95%
EU14 H14 99.995%
MPPS - Most Penetrating Particle Size
Test type applications;
G1 – G4 Average value for collection of large particles using synthetic dust. Filters installed to prevent
mechanical systems fouling and as pre-filters to secondary and semi-HEPA range.
F5 – F9 Average percentage value (for atmospheric dust spot efficiency) using atmospheric air. Filters
installed to keep buildings and process spaces clean and free from airborne pollution.
H10 – H14 EN 1822 – oil mist aerosol MPPS. Filters for specific (high efficiency) air quality control.
Arrestance and/or efficiency to ASHRAE 52-76 and Eurovent 4/5 will be accepted as equivalent to BS EN
779:2012 for grading with test dusts. Efficiency to Eurovent 4/4 will be accepted as equivalent to BS 3928:
1969 for grading with a sodium flame test.
g) Fire Properties of Filter Media
Where a flameproof filter medium is indicated, the material shall comply with the performance
requirements of BS 3120 when tested in accordance with BS 3119.
Where washable type flameproof filters are offered or specified the filter medium shall comply with the
above requirements both before and after the washing treatment prescribed in BS 3120 Appendix A.
Where flameproof filter medium is indicated, and the filter is built into sheet metal ducting, the ducting
shall not be less than 1.6mm thick for at least 1.8m upstream and 1.8m downstream of the filter; the
immediate frames or cases of the filter elements shall be of a material, when tested in accordance with BS
476 Part 4:1970, classified non-combustible.
4.11.11 Replaceable Medium Type Filters
Filters of this type shall have arrestances or efficiencies appropriate to the grading specified when tested in
accordance with BS EN 779:2012. The design air velocity at the face of all filters shall not exceed 2.5m/s. Bag filters
shall inflate fully, shall not sag or flutter or be obstructed by contact with other filter faces or duct surfaces when
operating between 60% and 110% of design air volume flow rate for fixed volume systems or between minimum
and maximum air volume flow rates for VAV systems.
4.11.12 Disposable Type Panel Filters
The filter medium shall be glass, natural or synthetic fibre or fabric. Metal wool filters will not be accepted. The
design air velocity at the face of all filters shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. Cardboard frames
shall not be used for filters where the specified arrestance exceeds 90% (G4 grade).
Unless otherwise indicated, filters shall be selected from the following range of preferred nominal sizes:
(i) 600mm x 600mm x 45mm (min)
(iI) 500mm x 500mm x 45mm (min)
(iii) 450mm x 450mm x 45mm (min)
(iv) 600mm x 300mm x 45mm (min)
4.11.13 Open Cell Plastics Cleanable Type Filters
a) The filter medium shall be processed open cell formed plastics and shall be washable using household
detergent and water. The element shall be supported on plastic coated steel wire formers with a metal
frame. Filters of this type shall have efficiency not less than 90% when tested in accordance with BS EN
779:2012. The design air velocity at the face of all filters shall not exceed 0.25m/s. At the design air volume
flow rate the initial (clean) resistance shall not exceed 75Pa.
4.11.14 Automatic Fabric Roll Filters
a) The filter shall comprise the complete assembly of filter frame, motor, drive, pressure differential sensor
and filter medium. The filter shall operate automatically to maintain the operating resistance within a range
suited to the filter medium and the required operating efficiency. Provision shall be made for manual
overriding of the automatic starting and stopping of the filter movement by the inclusion of an "inching"
button on the control panel. Automatic movement shall be controlled by the resistance across the filter,
unless otherwise indicated. Visual and/or audible warning that the end of the clean filter medium is
approaching shall be provided. Unless otherwise indicated, the driving motor shall be automatically
switched off when the end of the filter medium is reached.
b) Unless otherwise indicated, the initial (clean) resistance of the filter shall not exceed 65Pa and a mean of
125Pa under design operating conditions. The air velocity through the filter medium shall not exceed 2.5
m/s. Filters of this type shall have an efficiency of not less than 80% based on a static test of the medium
over its operating resistance band to BS EN 779:2012.
c) The motor and drive, the electrical insulation and lubricants shall be suitable for the conditions indicated.
The motor, drive and associated control equipments shall be accessible for maintenance without disturbing
the filter medium or roll. The filter frame shall be provided with an effective seal to prevent air leakage
around the medium. The filter frame assembly shall incorporate a wire grid immediately upstream of the
medium to prevent it being distorted or torn.
4.11.15 Heating Coils
Air heating coils shall be supplied and installed in the positions shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
duties stated on the drawings.
The heating coils shall be constructed of copper tube with expanded-on or otherwise bonded aluminium fins. The
tubes shall be arranged in a series flow and welded to copper headers. Fin spacing not to be greater than 315 per
metre. Turbulators will not be acceptable.
Where positioned in ductwork the coil surface shall be housed in heavy gauge sheet steel (1.6mm) casing, galvanized
after manufacture, with galvanized flanges drilled for direct attachment of ductwork as indicated on the drawings.
The casings shall be insulated as specified elsewhere.
Casings on heating coils for the systems shall be airtight for operation at their respective system fan pressure
+25%.
Heaters shall be supported so that their weight is not transmitted to ductwork and so that they can be removed
without disturbing adjacent ductwork. Pre-insulated duct inspection doors shall be provided on both the upstream
and downstream side of the heater.
The use of dissimilar metals in the construction, where likely to cause electrolytic corrosion, shall be avoided.
Coil face velocities shall not exceed 3.0m/s.
The coil assemblies shall be hydraulically tested after completion of the installation. Coils shall be suitable for a
working pressure of 6.9bar. Before manufacture of coils is commenced detailed manufacturing drawings shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and in accordance with details elsewhere in this specification.
Heating coil fin thickness shall not be less than 0.4mm with fin spacing not less than 2.5mm.
The air and water head loss through any coil shall not exceed the scheduled loss. Air vents shall be provided at
the high point to allow venting of all coils.
The Contractor shall supply and install a strainer before the control valves supplying each coil.
4.11.16 Cooling Coils
Air cooling coils shall be supplied and installed in the positions shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
duties stated on these drawings.
The cooling coils shall be constructed of copper tube with expanded-on or otherwise bonded aluminium fins. The
tubes shall be arranged in series flow and welded to copper headers. Fin spacing not to be greater than 315 per
metre. Turbulators will not be acceptable.
Sealing devices shall be provided at tops and bottoms of coils to minimize air by-pass and water carry over.
Where positioned in ductwork the coil surface shall be housed in a heavy gauge sheet steel (1.6mm) casing,
galvanized after manufacture, with galvanized flanged drilled for direct attachment of ductwork as indicated on the
drawings.
Connection headers shall be enclosed in a sheet steel casing. Drain pans shall be provided within the casing for
cooling coils and extended to catch condensation on the headers. The drain pan shall be laid to a fall to ensure that
no stagnant water is in contact with the airstream. The casings shall be insulated.
Casings on cooling coils for the systems shall be airtight for operation at their respective fan pressures +25%.
A deep drain trap shall be fitted at the outlet of all drain pans. The water seal shall be 25mm deeper than the total
air pressure developed at the coil.
The use of dissimilar metals in the construction, where likely to cause electrolytic corrosion, shall be avoided.
Coil face velocities shall not exceed 2.5m/s.
The coil assemblies shall be hydraulically tested after completion of the installation. Coils shall be suitable for a
working pressure of 6.9bar. Before manufacture of coils is commenced, detailed manufacturing drawings shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and in accordance with details elsewhere in this specification. Cooling fin
thickness shall not be less than 0.4mm with fin spacing not less than 2.5mm.
The air and water head loss through any coil shall not exceed the scheduled loss. Air vents shall be provided at the
high point to allow venting of all coils.
Large coils shall be horizontally divided into two or three sections for ease of handling and provided with flanged
copper pipe headers for connecting up.
Lifting lugs shall be provided to facilitate handling. The assembled coils shall be self-supporting.
Due allowance shall be made in the design and construction of the coil to accommodate all expansion.
Cooling coils shall be supported so that their weight is not transmitted to ductwork and so that they can be removed
without disturbing adjacent ductwork. Pre-insulated duct inspection doors shall be provided on both the upstream
and downstream sides of the cooler coil.
The Contractor shall supply and install a strainer before the control valves supplying each coil.
Coolers shall be arranged in a contra-flow pattern, with the flow of chilled water entering the leaving air end and
leaving at the entering air end. The flow and return connections and headers shall be so arranged to ensure an equal
flow of water through all the tubes. Provision shall be made for thermal expansion of the tubes, for effective venting
of the cooler battery and connections, and for draining of the cooler battery headers and tubes.
Up to and including 50mm bore connections shall be made using ground-in spherical seated unions. Pipework 65mm
bore and above shall be connected using flanged joints. Isolating valves shall be provided on flow and return
connections, arranged so as to facilitate removal of the cooler. The isolating valves shall be provided with side
pressure tappings as indicated in the relevant section of this specification.
4.11.17 Refrigerant Direct Expansion Coils
Coolers shall be provided with refrigerant distributors, and connections to the tubes shall be designed to ensure an
equal flow of refrigerant to each tube. Return (or suction) connections shall be arranged to ensure complete
drainage of any oil in the cooler. Coolers shall be dehydrated, charged with an inert gas and sealed after
manufacture.
4.11.18 Air Washing and Humidifying Plant - General
All ductwork enclosing humidifying plant shall be watertight. Ductwork and plant shall be protected from corrosion
either by choice of materials or by an approved protective finish. Particular care shall be taken in the design of plant
and the choice of materials to minimise electro-chemical corrosion between dissimilar metals and to prevent the
legionella bacteria forming.
4.11.19 Humidifiers
4.11.20 Air Terminal Devices - General
Grilles and Diffusers
The testing and rating of air terminal devices and the definition of terms used concerning such devices shall be in
accordance with BS EN ISO 5135:1999.
The sizes of all air terminal devices shall be based on the dimensions indicated and shall be suitable for the air volume
flow rate, air diffusion and noise rating indicated.
Where no size is given they shall be selected to provide the necessary air volumes, throw, diffusion and air pattern
in the areas they are serving while not infringing the respective operational NR levels in the spaces.
All supply air grilles and diffusers will be selected to provide an adjustable air pattern.
The materials of construction shall be steel, aluminium or plastics as indicated. All items shall be protected against
corrosion and be provided in fully finished condition.
The perimeters of all air terminal devices shall be provided with positive seals to eliminate air edge leaks.
Particular attention shall be given to joints between plenum boxes and linear diffusers.
Each supply air grille and register shall have two sets of separately adjustable blades, one set horizontal and one set
vertical. Each supply air register shall be provided with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper. All blades and dampers
shall be adjustable from the front of the grille or register.
Each exhaust or air grille may have either a single set of blades or bars, either vertical or horizontal, or a lattice or egg
crate front, or shall be as indicated. Each exhaust air grille shall, in addition, be provided with an opposed blade multi-
leaf damper operable from the front of the register.
The Contractor shall provide vaned equalizing deflectors in duct take offs where grilles are located at right angles to
main air stream and within 1 metre of the main supply duct or any change in direction of the ductwork.
4.11.21 Toilet Extract Grilles
Toilet extract grilles unless otherwise indicated shall be of the egg grate type fabricated from aluminium 12.5mm x
12.5mm x 12.5mm egg crate core mounted in an extruded aluminium bonded flange with removable core.
Each grille shall have an opposed blade multi-leaf damper adjustable without removing the grille core.
4.11.22 Diffusers
Unless otherwise indicated rectangular diffusers shall be constructed from aluminium extrusions and shall have
removable cores. Discharge shall be 1, 2, 3 or 4 as indicated/scheduled on the drawings.
Each diffuser shall have an opposed blade multi-leaf damper which shall be adjustable without removing the diffuser
core.
Diffuser flange and fixing details shall be as indicated on the drawings.
4.11.23 Linear Diffusers
Unless otherwise indicated, linear diffusers shall be constructed from aluminium extrusion to form one or more 25mm
wide slats giving fixed one or two way discharge as indicated/ scheduled on the drawings.
The diffuser shall be surrounded by an extruded aluminium bonded flange as indicated on the drawings.
Ductwork header boxes shall be connected to the diffusers as indicated on the drawings.
Each diffuser shall be fitted with equalizing deflectors to control horizontal spread and direction.
4.11.24 Induction and Terminal Units
General
Testing and rating of terminal units shall meet the requirements of the following British Standard Specifications:
1. Methods for testing and rating air control devices for air distribution systems. BS 4979.
2. Induction units for air distribution systems. BS 4954.
3. Methods for testing and rating terminal reheat units for air distribution systems. BS 4857.
4.11.25 Induction Units
Filters, cooling coils, heating coils and thermal and acoustic insulation shall comply with the appropriate sections of
this specification, with the following exceptions or alternatives:
Air screens may be of nylon fibre or glass fibre and shall be suitable for collecting lint from the recirculated air.
Unless otherwise indicated, cooling coils and heating coils shall be formed of copper primary surface tubes with
aluminium secondary surfaces.
Casings shall be of rigid construction and be inherently corrosion resistant. Alternatively, if of sheet steel they shall
be protected against corrosion internally and externally. All corners shall be without sharp edges. Casings shall
include space for pipework connections and air ducting as necessary, and there shall be ready access to the filter,
the primary air nozzles and any valves and controls.
Primary air plenums shall be treated with thermal and acoustic insulation. Units shall be complete with a device to
regular primary air pressure and air volume flow rate. Primary air nozzles shall be arranged to induce an even
secondary circulation across the cooling and/or heating coils. The unit air outlet shall incorporate means of
directional control of air supply where indicated. Induction units shall comply with the sound power level indicated.
Cooling/heating coils shall include an air cock and shall be effectively sealed to prevent air by-pass around the coil.
Drain pans shall be of a material which is resistant to corrosion or is protected against corrosion and shall have a
slight fall to a drain connection; drain connections shall be provided with screwed plugs. Each unit shall include a
readily removable and replaceable air filter.
The arrangement of units (e.g. wall or ceiling mounted) and the need for sheet metal casing shall be as indicated.
4.11.26 Single Duct Terminal Units
Casings shall be of rigid construction and be inherently corrosion resistant. Alternatively, if of sheet steel they shall
be protected against corrosion internally and externally by stoved primer or plated finish. Units shall incorporate a
self-acting constant flow rate device. The pressure drop across the unit at design air volume flow rate shall not
exceed 250Pa. Where indicated terminal units shall incorporate an additional feature to give a variable air flow rate
determined by thermostatic control.
When the inlet control device or devices are at the closed positions the air leakage across the device at the indicated
pressure shall not exceed 2% of the maximum air volume flow rate for which the unit is designed. If a flow rate
controller is mounted within a box means shall be provided to facilitate access.
All units shall be supplied to comply with the sound power levels indicated. Acoustic lining shall be securely fixed
and shall be proof against erosion by the airflow.
4.11.27 Variable Air Volume Units
Variable air volume units shall be of the single duct type as indicated on the drawings.
Each unit shall be complete with a variable volume regulator, fabricated of corrosion resistant materials and
complete with pneumatic/electric/electronic operator.
Each regulator shall be factory calibrated for the specified maximum and minimum air volume; however, it shall be
fully field adjustable over the range 0-100%. The regulator shall at all times maintain air volumes within plus or minus
5% regardless of inlet pressure variation from 250N/m2 to 2000 N/m2. Variation in volume shall be achieved by
movement of variable volume regulator as detailed by the room thermostat (or other control device).
Each unit shall be formed from a galvanized sheet steel casing (minimum thickness of 0.7mm) with 25mm thickness
internal acoustic insulation. Acoustic insulation shall be faced/ coated to prevent erosion. Leakage through casing
shall not exceed 2% of the maximum rated volume at 250N/m2 internal pressure.
Each unit shall have an integral or separately attached acoustic silencer fabricated in a similar manner to the VAV
unit casing.
VAV units/silencers shall be selected so that the silencers and a room attenuation of 8dB, the sound pressure level
in the room/space does not exceed the levels scheduled as the drawings at an inlet static pressure of 1000 N/ms
(noise generated by diffusers/grilles not included).
Each unit shall have easily removable access panels to variable volume regulator.
Where noted on the drawings, VAV units shall have a distribution box from which circular ducts shall be run.
Supply air ducts to the units shall be circular.
4.11.28 Fan Coil Units
Fan coil units shall be of the twin coil, four pipe concealed type as detailed on the drawings.
Units shall be installed either horizontally in ceiling voids or within builders work casings vertically against walls.
In all cases the unit shall be lined with 25mm thick acoustic absorbent material having a sealing coat to prevent fibre
migration.
Units shall be selected to deliver the specified duty and airflow at the lowest practical fan speed in order to meet
the NR values scheduled on the drawings.
Units for horizontal mounting in ceiling voids shall be fitted with a return air plenum on the intake end of the unit.
All u nits shall comprise quiet running direct driven centrifugal fan(s), cooling/heating coil and washable filter all
housed in galvanized sheet steel chassis.
The cooling/heating coil shall be constructed from copper tube with aluminium fins mechanically bonded or
expanded onto the tubes. The coil shall be suitable for a working pressure of 6.9 bar g. The coil shall have two chilled
water, two LPHW connections and air vents and shall be circuited to achieve the scheduled duties.
Fan motors shall be resiliently mounted and suitable for 240 volt, single phase, 50 Hertz electrical supply. Motors
shall have at least three operating speeds.
A 25mm deep insulated corrosion proof drain pan shall run the full width of the cooling coil and shall extend under
the control valves and coil connectors. The drain pan shall have a 25mm diameter condensate drain connection.
Inlet and outlet grilles/diffusers shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
Control of the fan coil units shall be as described elsewhere in this specification. Each
coil connection shall have an Allen key operated isolating valve.
All water flow rates, air flow rates, air and water temperatures and noise ratings shall be as detailed on the schedules.
4.11.29 Air Handling Units - General
Individual components forming part of packaged air handling plant shall, in addition to this section, comply with the
appropriate sections contained elsewhere in this specification.
The Contractor shall provide air handling units to the details contained in the drawings and/ or schedules. Each unit
shall be complete with fan section, cooling coil, heating coil, as specified. Additionally, mixing sections, filter sections
and humidifier sections shall be provided as required and as detailed in the schedules.
Equipment design shall be such that selected filter media, bearings, insulation, motors, etc, will be suitable for
temperatures, humidities existing in and around the unit. Each section should have matching cross section
dimensions, be of the same construction type and shall present a clean internal appearance to ensure even airflows
through the unit.
Panel Construction
A double skin method of construction shall be employed, panels being of G90 hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel,
each sheet of 1.2mm minimum thickness. The insulation layer shall be mineral wood insulation of a thickness greater
than 25mm with maximum heat transmission of 0.9W/m2°C. The construction of the panel shall be such that it can
withstand a positive or negative pressure equivalent to system static plus 25% or a minimum of 500Pa unless
otherwise specified. The equivalent construction shall be such that the unit has smooth internal and external
surfaces to provide easy service and cleaning.
Units located internal to plant rooms shall have outer skin of plastisol coating (colour to architect's choice) with self-
finished galvanized steel inner finish. Units located externally shall have plastisol coated inner and outer skin finish.
The framework shall be primed, etc, undercoated and epoxy painted.
Air leakage limits shall be to Class B as specified in Table 2 of DW 144 unless otherwise specified. Individual sections
shall be jointed by means of a strong/sturdy clamping section.
All panels shall be flush-fitting within the casing. Fixed panels shall be secured by using either high tensile spring
clips which are detached from inside the unit or by hexagonal headed self-drilling screws, with heads capped with
colour coded nut covers to match the plastisol finish and with screw projections internally capped.
Sealants shall not be used in any part of the sealing process; all sealing shall be using neoprene heavy duty
recoverable type gaskets.
Inspection panels in sections shall be easy to open and close and equipped with recessed quick-release fasteners
designed for operation by means of a key or knob. The door seal shall be effective and provide the same degree of
air tightness as specified for the rest of the unit.
Access to fan, filter and cooler coil inspection sections shall be hinged for frequent access.
The complete unit shall be provided with a base beam capable of withstanding the load of the unit. This beam shall
be provided with adjustable feet to take up any irregularities. This frame shall lift the base of the unit sufficiently to
allow the installation of water traps on cooling coils.
Reinforced lifting points shall be built in the chassis framework at the top four corners of each component making
up the air handling unit.
Frame Construction
The frame to the unit shall be one of the following constructions:
 Rectangular hollow section:
Heavy duty chassis frame fabricated from rectangular hollow section mild steel tube incorporating a press
formed panel landing member. The framework shall be of welded construction throughout and shall be fitted
with internal steel bulkheads and carrier rails upon which the various components shall be mounted. Reinforced
lifting points shall be built in and the complete assembly shall be painted with one coat primer, one undercoat
and one coat gloss finish of approved colour.
 Penta-post Section Steel:
A five angle penta-post heavy gauge galvanized steel framework to provide maximum strength with
minimum weight. Minimum metal thickness to be 14 gauge (2mm).
The unit framework shall be fully welded at each mire corner and will incorporate welded mounts to enable
intermediate stiffeners to be incorporated as necessary.
Fans
The fan and motor shall be isolated to prevent vibration and noise being transmitted via the unit. The fan shall be
of the backward bladed centrifugal type, erected on a purpose-made steel frame and supported on approved anti-
corrosion spring type anti-vibration mountings within the fan enclosure casing and flexible connections shall be
provided to the fan.
Mixing Boxes
These shall be fitted with fresh and recirculation air dampers of equal size with dampers of the opposed blade type.
The arrangement of the dampers on the box shall be to suit the specified requirements of each plant as indicated
on the drawings.
Dampers within Packaged Plant
Dampers used in sections of packaged plant shall be of the multi-leaf type. The damper blades shall be constructed
to ensure rigidity and prevent distortion and jamming in operation. The blades shall be securely fixed to their
operating spindles so that differential movement between them cannot occur. Spindles shall be carried in non-
ferrous nylon or ball bearings and air seals shall be provided at all casing penetration points.
All dampers shall be motorized low leakage, with opposed blade unless otherwise specified.
Manually and automatically operated dampers shall include a means for indicating externally the position of damper
blades. Manual dampers shall include a device for positioning and locking the damper blades. The positions of all
manual dampers, as set after final regulation, shall be indelibly marked at the adjusting devices.
Damper actuators shall be kept to an essential minimum number and all actuators shall be provided with
mounting brackets.
Unless otherwise indicated, air leakage through dampers when in the closed position shall not exceed 5% of maximum
design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total pressure.
The dampers shall be motorized to the closed position when the unit is off.
Filter Sections
Each air handling unit shall be fitted with either a coarse panel filter, bag filter section or a combination of both,
according to the particular function and location of the plant, as detailed on the drawings, and schedule. Filters shall
be as specified in the relevant section of this specification. A pressure differential indicator shall be mounted on the
outside of each filter section.
Other Components
Fan section, cooling coils, heaters and humidifiers, etc, shall conform to the relevant section of other parts of this
technical specification.
Outdoor Units
Air handling units for outdoor installations shall be supplied with a castellated PVC coated galvanized sheet steel
sloping roof. Bulkhead light fittings shall be provided in each section with a weatherproof external switch and all
wiring in galvanized mild steel conduit.
Controls
The supplier of the AHU shall allow for provision and co-ordination in the unit for power and control wiring.
Grommets shall be supplied to allow adequate sealing of such holes once cables have been installed.
4.11.30 Discharge Plenums
Discharge plenums shall be provided on the discharge side of the fan or where indicated on the drawings.
4.11.31 External Louvres
Wall mounted intake and discharge louvres shall be of the weatherproof type suitable for exposed situations.
Louvres shall be horizontal aluminium extrusions incorporating a water stop all mounted in a border flange. Louvres
shall have a minimum of 60% free area. A bird screen of 10mm galvanized mesh shall be fitted behind each louvre.
External finish shall be stove enamelled to an approved colour.

4.11.32 Kitchen Hoods
Kitchen exhaust hoods shall be constructed to the sizes and details indicated on the drawings.
Where dimensions are not indicated the hood shall be constructed with a minimum overhang of 300mm over the
equipment it serves on all free sides. It shall also terminate at 2.1meter above finished floor level and extend at least
to ceiling level.
Exhaust volumes shall be as indicated on the drawings. Where these are not indicated they shall be designed to fall
within the following limits:
Wall/corner Canopy 0.35-0.5 m/s

Island Canopy 0.65-0.75 m/s
Shelf Canopy 0.4-0.7 m/s
Hoods shall be suitable for use over grease, heat and steam generating equipment, and the construction of the
canopy shall be designed to minimize maintenance requirements whilst keeping the unit at optimum efficiency and
minimum pressure drop.
Canopies shall be assembled by high penetration welding with all visible welds ground smooth and repolished. All
visible surfaces shall have a fine grain satin polished to 240 grit No. 4 finish and adequately protected.
Grease filtration shall be from either a full length single sided our double sided all stainless steel washable baffle
type grease eliminator panel, on a robust stainless steel frame, designed to operate on a constant pressure drop
(maximum 50Pa).
The extract plenum shall also be complete with an all welded and sealed grease collection spare draining into a
grease removal box, and ductwork flanges shall be from the rear or top of plenum box as indicated on the drawings.
Lighting shall be provided to all hoods. Lighting shall be designed to be grease, heat and steam proof. Fittings shall
be fluorescent recess mounted with electronically start control gear and with gasketted diffuser for quick access.
Each fitting shall be independently wired to a remote control box. The lighting should be designed to achieve an
average illuminance of 400 lux on the working surface and be capable of operation under continuous high heat
conditions.
The canopy manufacturer shall submit a fabrication drawing to the architect and engineer prior to construction of
the canopy for approval. This should detail all dimensions and specifications for the unit and fire extinguishing
system.
For details of the fire extinguishing system for the hoods refer to the "Fire Engineering" section of this specification.
4.11.33 Variable Speed Drive Units for Control of Pumps/Fans
Description
The variable speed drives for fans and pumps specified elsewhere in this document shall be of the static frequency
convertor type utilizing digital WC technology to ensure full rated motor performance is available at rated motor
speed without the need for motor derating which has not been allowed in the selection of motor sizes.
The frequency convertor should be available both in a format suitable for mounting within a control panel cubicle
and also for stand-alone operation with enclosure IP54 and must be a complete assembly, ie must contain any
necessary chokes, RFI filters and signal isolation cards.
Control functions of the frequency convertor should be by Microprocessor and selection of functions/options should
be via a user-friendly menu system addressed via a digital key pad and display mounted on the unit.
Preference will be given to equipment which is manufactured to meet current international norms regarding noise
emission and immunity.
Specification
1. Supply Regulations
1.1 Line Voltage 3x380/415V

+10% 50/60 Hz
1.2 Power Factor Better than 0.9
1.3 Electrical Noise To be capable of observing VDE875 (curve G)
1.4 Supply Interruption To be able to ride through mains loss of up to 500 milli-seconds
without tripping
1.5 Mains Disturbance Must be able to observe requirements of VDE160 on main transients
1.6 Harmonics Full harmonic current analysis must be available for full load and half
load operation up to and including the 25th harmonic
2. Output Characteristics
2.1 Output voltage Full supply voltage must be available at 50 Hz
2.2 Output current 13% full load current must be available for 60 seconds (intermittent
duty)
2.3 Output frequency 5-55 Hz
2.4 Torque Characteristic Optimization to load by selection of quadratic torque characteristic.
2.5 Motor Derating Full rated motor output to be available at 50 Hz without the need
for derating
2.6 Acceleration/deceleration 0-360 seconds independently adjustable ramps.
2.7 Switching on the output The unit must be capable of withstanding switching on the output
without damage
2.8 Connection to Rotating/ The unit should be capable of being connected to a Counter Rotating
Motor rotating or counter rotating motor without damage.
2.9 Frequency Hopping The unit should be capable of bypassing up to four preset
frequencies to minimize undesired mechanical system resonance.
3. Protection Functioning
3.1 Output Protection Output phase to earth

Output phase to phase
Motor regeneration
Motor overload
Invertor over temperature
3.2 Input Protection Over voltage of supply

Under voltage of supply
Phase loss
3.3 Motor Thermal Protection Built in motor thermal protection based upon speed/current/time
calculation with selectable trip function.
4. Control Function
4.1 Local Remote Facility Unit should have ability to be operated either from a remote signal
or via the on-board key pad.
4.2 Control Signal Reference selectable

0 -10 V
4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA
Digital inputs - 24 V
(PNP)
For start/stop
preset speed
trip reset
raise lower speed
The drive must have built in signal isolation
4.3 Output Signals Selectable analogue output for speed or current
4.4 Output Digital Signal Programmable relay output to provide drive status and trip
information
4.5 Diagnostics On board diagnostic codes should be available, indicating type of

fault and severity. Last fault memory should also be included.
4.6 Closed Loop Control Software derived. P1 function should be available for both set point
and calibration. Additional facility for a three point digital control
should be available.
5. General
5.1 Motor Selection The drive must be suitable for standard induction motors with
interphase barrier insulation.
5.2 Motor Cable Selection Motor cable should be screened to provide low electrical noise
emission and cable length up to 300 m should be possible without
the extra cost of integral motor chokes.
5.3 Enclosure The enclosure should be protected to a minimum of IP54 for free
standing in the plantrooms.
4.11.34 Pumps and Fans
Where variable speed drives and pumps are specified, the contractor shall ensure that the pumps and fans are fully
compatible with the drive system selected.
4.12 WATER SERVICES PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
4.12.1 Circulation Pumps - General
Values of the resistance to fluid flow of items of equipment, pipework and/or the total distribution system indicated
in the contract documents are approximate. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify these values and
provide pumps capable of delivering the required fluid volume when operating against the actual total system
resistance.
Pumps shall be `type' tested in accordance with the requirements for BS EN ISO 9906:2012 and shall be selected to
give the correct fluid flow rate and, unless otherwise indicated, test certificates and performance curves shall be
submitted.
Pumps and their drive shall be segregated such that failure of pump seals shall not result in damage to the drive
motors. For chilled water or similar closed circuits `canned rotor' or glandless type may be used.
The pump inlet and outlet branches shall be flanged and drilled in accordance with the tables of BS EN 1092- 2:1997
appropriate to the maximum working pressure. Taper pieces shall be provided where necessary to connect to
distribution pipework. Alternatively, pumps shall have screwed inlet and outlet connections in accordance with BS
21 and be so designed as to preclude breakage when screwing in the pipes. Full way type with direct or approved
indirect drive in-line pumps shall have connections the same size as the main pipework.
Each circulating pump shall be installed with a valve on the inlet and a vale on the outlet connections. Non- return
valves shall be provided on the pump side of isolating valves where pumps are arranged in parallel.
Motors and starters shall be in accordance with the relevant section of this specification.
Dripless mechanical shaft seals shall be limited to system temperatures below 120°C. Where packed glands are
provided, separate drip pipes shall be run to discharge visibly over the floor drains.
Bearings shall be either sleeve type with oiling ring and reservoir, or ball or roller type with grease lubricator. The
bearings shall be outside the stuffing box and shaft seal.
Each floor-mounted circulating set shall be properly levelled, bolted down and grouted in, on a concrete base as
detailed on the drawings, which will be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing
all dimensions and details to enable the bases to be set out. Anti-vibration mountings and flexible connections shall
be provided as indicated. The Contractor shall ensure that the complete unit is efficiently balanced to eliminate noise
and vibration. Belts, where fitted, shall be correctly aligned and tensioned.
Altitude gauges shall be connected to the main on each side of the circulator. Where duplicate pumps are provided
the gauges shall be connected to the common suction and delivery mains. Wherever possible the gauges shall be
wall-mounted at the same horizontal level and provided with flanged backs.
In other respects, the gauges shall be in accordance with the relevant section of this specification.
Pumps shall be complete, where specified, with a drain plus and, except where the pump is inherently self- venting,
an air cock.
4.12.2 Low and Medium Temperature Hot Water Heating Circulation Pump (up to 120 °C and 3.5bar)
1) Circulating pumps shall be electrically driven.
Horizontal or vertical circulators of the following types:
a) Centrifugal and suction with direct or approved indirect drive and taper connections, where
necessary, on the suction and delivery ports. Direct driven pumps shall be mounted on a common
bedplate;
b) Full way type with direct or approved indirect drive, in-line pumps shall have connections the same
size as the main pipework.
2) Castings shall be of close grained cast iron, cast steel or gunmetal; impellers shall be of bronze, gunmetal
or cast iron fully machined and dynamically balanced. Shafts shall be of stainless steel; bearings may be of
ball, roller or sleeve type.
3) Dripless mechanical shaft seals shall be fitted.
4.12.3 Chilled Water Circulating Pumps
Pumps shall be of the centrifugal type. Castings shall be of close grained cast iron, cast steel or gunmetal; impellers
shall be of bronze, gunmetal or cast iron fully machined and dynamically balanced. Shafts shall be stainless steel;
bearings may be of ball, roller or sleeve type.
Dripless mechanical shaft seals shall be fitted.
4.12.4 Condensate Pumps and Receiver Sets
Pumps shall be electrically driven centrifugal type arranged in duplicate with manual changeover. They may be
horizontal or vertical, resiliently connected direct coupled or indirectly coupled with vee-belt drive and facilities
for belt tensioning. They shall be mounted on a common bedplate or chassis. All parts of pumps in contact with
condensate shall be of non-corrodible metal.
Inlet and outlet ports shall be flanged and provided with taper connections. Each pump shall be installed with
isolating valves on the section and delivery sides and shall be mounted on anti-vibration mountings where indicated.
Condensate receivers shall be of heavy gauge welded steel or copper construction and shall be supported on a base-
plate fabricated from mild steel plate. Steel receivers shall be painted internally and externally with two coats of
anti-corrosive solution. Each receiver shall be provided with a bolted access cover, high and low water level control
gear for operating the pumps, drain cock, combined vent and overflow and connections for condensate return and
pumps suction.
4.12.5 Hot Water Service Circulating Pump
Pumps shall be of the centrifugal type. Castings shall be of gunmetal fully machined and dynamically balanced. Shafts
shall be of stainless steel; bearings may be of ball, roller or sleeve type.
Dripless mechanical shaft seals shall be fitted.
4.12.6 Oil Circulating Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT)
Oil circulating pumps shall be electrically driven positive displacement screw or gear type. They shall be suitable
for the viscosity and temperature of the grade of oil to be pumped.
Each pump shall be fitted with an integral pressure relief valve.
Motors and starters shall be in accordance with the relevant section of this specification, except that pumps for
transferring oil from a main tank to a service tank shall be started manually and switched off automatically by means
of a float switch fitted in the service tank, unless otherwise indicated.
4.12.7 Boiler Feed Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT)
General
1) Pumps shall be electrically driven centrifugal type, horizontal or vertical pattern arranged for direct drive
through a resilient coupling, with pump and motor mounted on a common bedplate. The pump sets shall
be supported on brick or concrete bases, alternatively they may be integral with a packaged steam boiler.
All parts of the pumps in contact with condensate shall be of non-corrodible metal.
2) Shaft seals shall be provided in accordance with the general clauses.
3) Bearings shall be as specified in the general clauses. Each bearing shall be housed in a pedestal separate
from the gland seal.
4) Inlet and outlet ports shall be flanged and provided with taper connections. Each pumps shall be installed
with isolating valves on the suction and delivery sides and shall be mounted, when not supplied as an
integral part of a packaged steam boiler, as specified in the general clauses.
4.12.8 Semi-Rotary Hand Pumps (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT)
Semi-rotary hand pumps shall comply with BS 1208:2005 type B, complete with foot valve and strainer. They shall
be fixed securely in position. For the drainage of boiler houses and plant rooms, they shall be suitable for hot water
with a maximum temperature of 99C. For the drainage of oil storage catch pits, shaft seals of the toroidal Ò' ring
pattern shall be provided.
4.12.9 Sump Pumps
Pump casing shall be cast iron with poly urethane lined wear resistant diffusers.
1) Impeller shall be wear resistant, semi shrouded, multivane with adjustable diffusers.
Shaft shall be Stainless Steel 316SS.
2) Motor shall be squirrel cage induction type, class F insulation capable of a maximum of 15
starts/hour.
3) Motor casings shall be with integral cooling ribs for maximum heat dissipation.
4) Pumps shall be fitted with two mechanical seals with silicon carbide rotating & seat stainless steel
spring, flexible bellows and gaskets. The chamber between the shaft seal to be oil filled.
5) Shaft shall be mounted on pre-greased rolling element bearings.
6) Cable junction chamber shall be a sealed terminal chamber with separate gland assemblies
incorporating strain relief clamps.
6) Pumps shall be suitable for a maximum depth of submersion with the flanged outlet directed
vertical upwards.
7) Pumps shall be selected to match the duties indicated on drawings.
8) Pumps shall be supplied with control panel complete with integrated fuse elements, handoff
automatic switch, motor contactor, duty pump selector switch, run/trip lamps for individual pumps
etc. Pumps shall be controlled by a unit mounted float control. The pumps shall operate at high level
and stop at low level of water in the sump pit.
4.12.10 Submersible Pumps
1) Electric submersible sewage pumps shall be suitable for wet sump or dry pit installation and for
intermittent or continuous operation.
2) Pump shall be suitable for a maximum depth of submersion with the outlet directed vertically upwards.
3) Motor shall be of the synchronous squirrel cage type, IP68 rating, hermetically enclosed within the stator
housing. Stator shall be wound with double lacquered wire and subsequently triple dipped to provide
insulation in accordance with IEC 85 temperature Class F (155 Deg. C). Stator winding over temperature
shall be prevented by bimetallic thermal switches or thermistors embedded in each of the stator phase
windings. Motor shall be designed for a maximum of 15 starts/hour. Motor casing shall be with integral
ribs for maximum heat dissipation. Motor casing shall be of cast iron.
4) Cable entry glands shall be suitably designed to effectively seal the junction box from the surrounding
liquid at depths up to 10 metres and to mechanically restrain the cable to avoid distortion of the land
rubbers and to prevent kinking of the cable adjacent to the cable entry.
5) Motor shaft shall be of stainless steel series 400 and mounted on robust pre-greased rolling element
bearings rated for L10 duty life of at least 100,000 hours at the rated capacity. The shaft seal assembly
shall comprise of two independent mechanical face seals mounted in tandem with an interposing oil
chamber to cool the seals and to act as an additional leakage barrier. Seal combination shall be high wear
resistant tungsten carbide/tungsten carbide.
6) Pump casing shall be constructed of fine grained grey cast iron, with fluid passages large enough to
allow solids of any size which can pass through the impeller.
7) Pump casing shall be smooth profiled volute geometry for clog free operation fitted with replaceable
inlet wear rings, fabricated from heat treated stainless steel.
8) Fabricate impeller of fine grained grey cast iron, Class 30 or better. Impeller shall be dynamically
balanced single/multi-channel type depending on the pump selection and duty specified.
9) The shredding system shall consist of spiral bottom plate with stationary cuter ring with cutting edges
and a shredding motor located below the impeller for optimum blockage free running.
10) A mixing valve mounted directly on the pump casing shall be automatically activated to provide
efficient mixing of the sump content prior to discharge.
11) The control panel shall be prewired, with IP65 enclosure and include the following:
A. Panel mounted, door interlocked disconnect switch.
B. Circuit breaker and earth leakage breaker for each pump.

C. Magnetic starters with 3 leg overload protection.
D. Selector switch Hand Off Auto (HOA) for each pump.
E. 24 Volt control transformer.
F. Float switch for high level alarm and pump operating.
G. Pilot lights for power on, pump failure, high water level.
H. Volt free contacts to interface with Building Management System for Power ON, HOA switches
in auto position, Common fault, pump run/trip, high level and Hours run meter (One per pump).
12) Pump operation shall be automatic controlled through mercury type float switches installed in the
sewage collection pit.
13) Pumps shall be supplied with all accessories including foot bends, stainless steel guide rails, stainless
steel lifting chains, float switches, gate and check valves on each pump discharge.
14) All fasteners on the submersible pump and motor casing shall be type 316 stainless steel.
4.12.11 Calorifiers General (NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS PROJECT)
DHW storage calorifiers shall comply with BS 853-1:1990+A3:2011; non-storage heating calorifiers shall comply
with BS 3274 type 2.
Each calorifier shall be provided with:
1) A relief valve;
2) A 75mm diameter dial altitude gauge;
3) A 75mm diameter dial thermometer;
4) An open vent pipe on systems open to atmosphere;
5) Control and high limit thermostats in accordance with the relevant section of this specification;
6) A drain cock;
7) A bursting disc where indicated. The rating of the bursting disc when fitted to a calorifier shall be
equal to one-and-a-half times the shell working pressure or the relief valve setting, whichever is
the greater.
Heating surfaces shall be formed from copper U-tubes. Bodies of non-storage calorifiers shall be cast iron, or of mild
steel welded or riveted.
Bodies of storage calorifiers shall be of copper.
The tube plate and tube chest cover shall be provided with a lifting ring where the flange diameter is 600mm and
over. Provision shall be made for easy removal of the heating surface from the body. Sufficient set-bolts shall be
provided to enable the tube next to be withdrawn without breaking the joint between the tube plate and the chest
cover plate.
Flange drillings should be uniform, as far as practicable, to permit interchange of tube assemblies.
Horizontal calorifiers shall be supported on brick or concrete piers and/or mild steel cradles. Sheet lead pads shall
be fitted on the bearing surface of copper calorifiers. Vertical calorifiers shall be provided with feet and a purpose-
made steel support frame.
On installation of two or more calorifiers each safety vent shall be connected into a common vent pipe through a
three-way cock so arranged that no calorifier can be isolated simultaneously from the open vent pipe and the free
outlet.
4.12.12 Indirect Cylinders
Copper indirect cylinders shall comply with BS 1566-1:2002 Grade 2. Hand holes shall be not less than 150mm
diameter and each shall be provided with a cover secured by studs and nuts.
Cylinders larger than or for a greater working head than those specified in BS 1566-1:2002 shall be constructed in
accordance with BS 853-1:1990+A3:2011. Such storage calorifiers, with the exception of mild steel indirect type,
shall be provided with a stiffening ring and manhole not less than 300mm diameter. Each mild steel indirect cylinder
shall be provided with a bolted top.
Manhole covers shall be secured with studs and nuts or with one or more external bridge(s). Joints for hand hole
and manhole covers shall be made with approved reusable jointing material.
Supports for mild steel and copper cylinders shall be as detailed above for storage and non-storage calorifiers.
4.12.13 Cold Water Tanks - General
Cold water tanks shall be one of the following types, as indicated on the drawings:
1) Bulk Reinforced Concrete Water Tank
2) GRP Sectional Roof Tank
4.12.14 Bulk Reinforced Concrete Tank
The bulk cold water storage basement tank for the development shall be Reinforced Concrete Tank with GRP lining
of the sizes indicated on the drawings from one of the specified vendors. The storage tanks shall comply with the
applicable Local Regulations & International Regulations for Potable Water Storage Tanks.
 Jointing materials shall be suitable for drinking water and shall be of a non-toxic nature.
 All facilities for pipe connections shall be made at the Manufacturer's works. Pipe connections for up to
50mm nominal bore pipework shall be screwed sockets. Pipe connections for pipework 65mm nominal
bore and above shall be studded pads suitable to receive counter flanges.
 All tank covers shall be provided with purpose made manholes of a minimum 600mm x 600mm with
hinged or bolted lids. Where tanks are provided with internal ladders separate manholes shall be
provided to the ladder and to the ball float valve or float switch. Tanks with no internal ladder shall be
provided with one manhole positioned to allow access both to the tank interior and to the ball float valve.
 Tank shall be provided with vent cowls to adequately ventilate the interior.
 An approved pattern vortex inhibitor shall be fitted within the storage tank at the start of the suction
and drain pipes. The inhibitor shall prevent a vortex within the tank and be used to overcome a large
'dead-water' area at the bottom of the tank.
 Provide an internal separation and concrete tank wall to divide tank into two separate water
compartments such that one half of the tank can be drained and cleaned while keeping the other half in
operation.
 Provide tappings for all piping connection as indicated on the drawings. All connections to tanks shall be
factory constructed and tested. In no case shall tappings be done on site.
 Vent cowls and overflows shall be fitted with a suitable galvanized mesh screen to prevent insects and
vermin from entering the tank.
 All internal fixings, supports, tie bars etc. shall be entirely corrosion resistant or of stainless steel
 grade 316L
 Detailed construction drawings of all tanks shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
manufacture.
The tanks shall then be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide a hydrostatic tank contents gauge for each water storage tank compartment.
The gauge shall be calibrated for the dimensions of each respective tank and be mounted on the wall adjacent to
the tank along with a suitable label. Interconnecting pipework between the gauge and the tank shall be small bore
soft copper suitably protected in locations where it is exposed to damage.
The water supply for the building shall distributed up risers from the low level tank/ basement pump room to the
high level roof water storage.
4.12.15 GRP Sectional Roof Tank
Roof tanks shall be Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) INSULATED water tank complete with inspection cover and pipe
connections. The tanks shall be suitable for ultra violet light and comply with BS Standards and with the Local
Authority Regulations.
The tanks shall be manufactured by Hot Press Molded method to the quality standard requirements of BS EN ISO
9001: 2008 and shall comply with BS 6920: 2000.
The panels shall be manufactured from sheet molding compound (SMC) using hot press molded method at high
temperatures up 150°C using unsaturated polyester resins and glass fiber.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the drawing. The details of the
tank shall be approved by the Engineer before any installation works begins. Water leakage test shall be carried out
for a period of 48 hours for the tanks and a 5 year guarantee from the manufacturer is required. The tank shall have
the following additional components in addition to the components listed above:
 High level electric float switches interlocked to their pressure pumps.
 Vent with wire mesh
 Interconnecting pipes with valves for all tanks
 Overflow and drain connection
 Access cover and access ladder
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all structural steel bases and assemble tank in strict compliance
with manufacturer’s instructions. The tanks shall then be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The tank shall comply fully with the current local authority regulations and include screened vent, raised ball valve
chamber and screened over flow. The tank shall also be provided with the facility to be provided with temperature
sensor and high /low level gauges to monitor tank water contents from the BMS.
The Roof GRP tank shall be supported on Builders work level base / concrete piers as required of sufficient strength
to support the load of the tank, the level base / concrete piers finished tolerances shall be in accordance with the
tank supplier’s requirements and recommendations.
The tank shall be fitted with a suitably sized float valve arrangement. The contractor shall ensure that sufficient head
room is provided to permit correct operation and maintenance access.
Storage tanks shall be warranted by the manufacturer until the end of the defects liability period.
4.12.16 Sterilization
See section on commissioning.
4.12.17 Mechanical Fittings for Concrete Water Storage Tanks
The storage tank shall be divided into two sections so that each section can be isolated for cleaning and inspection
without interfering with the supply of water.
This shall be achieved by the use of a header pipe of adequate size into which each section is connected and from
which the distribution pipes branch off. Each branch into and out of the header pipe shall be provided with a stop
valve.
Each section shall have its own float operated valve and overflow pipe. Outlets should be positioned at the
opposite ends of tank sections to inlets to avoid stagnation of the water.
Each section shall have its own access manhole.
Each section shall be lined internally as indicated on the drawings.
4.12.18 Pressurization Units - LTHW and MTHW Systems - General
Pressurization units shall be one-piece, packaged fully factory assembled, pipe, wired and complete with operating
and safety controls and all customary auxiliaries deemed necessary by the manufacturer, for the safe controlled
automatic operation of the equipment.
The units shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1) Break tank
2) Pressure vessel
3) Pressuring pump
4) Valves and fittings
5) Controls and instrumentation
Break Tank
This shall be a steel tank galvanized after manufacture complete with connections for inlet ball valve, outlet
supply line, overflow and loose top cover.
The tank surfaces shall be bonderised, primed and finished in epoxy paint to colour. A
high pressure ball valve having brass body and copper float shall be provided.
Pressure Vessel
This shall be a mild steel pressure vessel complete with air valve and internal butyl removable rubber diaphragm. A
pressure gauge shall be provided on vessel to indicate system pressure.
Pressurising Pumps and Valves
These shall comprise duty and standby vertical multistage centrifugal type pumps with close coupled induction motors.
Pump bodies shall be cast iron and stainless steel with internals of stainless steel and bronze and fitted with
mechanical seals.
The following valves and fittings shall be provided:
1) Pump isolating gate valve(s)

2) System isolating gate valve(s)
3) Non-return valve
4) Adjustable setting pressure reducing valve
5) Suction flow control valve
6) Air purge/separator
7) Automatic air vent with isolating valve
8) Spring loaded safety valve to protect unit against excess pressure.
Controls and Instrumentation
The following controls and instruments shall be provided:
1) High pressure switch

2) Low pressure switch
3) System pressure servicing switch
4) Pressure gauge
5) `HAND' ÒFF' ÀUTO' starter with manual reset thermal overload, fused supply, and run and trip
lights
6) Alarm bell, muting switch and warning lamps.
Pre-wire all the above items to a composite front accessible control panel having high and low pressure alarm lights,
mains isolator switch and terminal block suitable for field services interlocks to provide a complete packaged unit. The
panel shall have a stove enamel finish.
Base Frame
All components shall be mounted onto heavy section steel folded and welded base frame complete with lifting eye
bolts.
Base frame shall be primed and undercoated with epoxy paint finish.
Provide non-ferrous braided flexible pressure hose connections on interfaces with pipework system. Final electrical
connectors shall be made with armoured flexible conduit.
4.12.19 Cold Water Boosting Set
A. Contractor to supply and install packaged booster and transfer systems designed for a total
system capacity as shown on Pump Schedule. The systems shall be tested and calibrated, and shipped
to the job site as an integral unit ready to receive suction and discharge piping and incoming power
supply.
B. The pumps shall be vertical Multi-stage in-line centrifugal pump. The pump shall have capacity as
shown in the schedules. Each pump shall be constructed with 316 L stainless steel impellers and
diffusers, a high temperature mechanical seal with carbon vs silicon carbide, EPDM elastomers
throughout, tungsten carbide against ceramic pump bushings and a cast iron motor bracket.
Flanges will be ductile iron I slip ring and isolated from liquid. The pump is to be coupled with a
3500 RPM NEWA motor and with enclosure using a rigid split coupling. Motor bearing shall be
sized to allow a 20,000 minimum hour B10 calculated life. Spring type anti-vibration mounts shall
be provided for all water pumps.
C. Booster pumps shall be complete with integral or remote variable speed drives and with
manufacturer sized pressure vessel preferably on the same skid
D. The pumps shall be complete with temperature control, gate valves, check valves, pressure
gauges, thermal bleed circuits, wiring, conduit and inter connecting pipework, mounted on anti-
vibration mountings and neatly arranged and firmly supported by the framework of the unit.
Suction connection shall be horizontal, as close to the base as possible to connect to inlet pipe
from the water storage tank.
E. The diaphragm pressure vessel shall be constructed of a steel shell with polypropylene lining on internal
wetted areas and a butyl rubber diaphragm.
F. Staging of booster pumps shall be accomplished by solid state current sensing relays, with reset
capabilitywithin4%. The electronic relays shall have an external trip set point knob and a dial with
LED trip light indicator and built in two seconds delay to prevent false trip due to current surge.
G. Pump service shall be accomplished without disturbing the suction and discharge piping.
Combination pressure reducing valves(booster) with non-slam feature shall be mounted in
eachpumpcircuit.Interconnectingpipingbetweenpumpsshallpreferably be copper or same
material as the suction and discharge piping to the pump set assembly. Isolation valves shall be
provided for each pump set. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on the suction and discharge headers.
The pumps shall be protected from thermal build up, when running at no- flow, by a common
thermal relief valve.
H. The pump set control panel shall be in a NEMAI enclosure which includes motor starters, time
delays, protected control circuit, transformer, current relays, hand-off-automatic switches for each
pump, minimum run timers, and low suction pressure cut out and shall incorporate the following
features as applicable:
1. General purpose water resistant enclosure.
2. Main disconnect switch.
3. Fused circuit for each motor.
4. Magnetic starters with three overloads.
5. Current sensing devices.
6. Selector switch for each pump.
7. Control circuit transformer.
8. Minimum run timers.
9. Low limit pressure switch.
10. Low pressure alarm light.
11. Circuit breakers for each pump.
12. High pressure cut-out switch.
13. ‘Power-on' indicating light.
14. Overload indicating lights.
15. Panel mounted gauges.
16. All other components required to achieve the control sequence specified.
17. Alternating relay circuit.
18. Power on: Amber.
19. Individual motor overload: Red.
20. Low suction pressure: Red.
I. Provide automatic pump rotation based on actual runtime. The time difference between pump
starts shall be adjustable. The control circuit shall be interlocked so that failure of any starter will
energize the succeeding starter. The control panel shall also contain all required contacts for
monitoring and control from the Building Management System if required in the control section
J. A pressure switch for each of the Booster pumps and a system pressure gauge should be mounted
on a common pressure manifold to eliminate using small bore fittings to ensure easy replacement of
pressure switch or gauge, and to ensure that the pump set arrangement is compact and has
only one common pressure signal source. Demand shall be met in the first instance from the
pressure vessel. When the vessel pressure has fallen to a preset minimum (the "cut-in" pressure)
the first duty pump shall start. In the event of the failure of the duty pump the standby pump
shall automatically take its place. As demand reduces and the pressure builds up to a pre-
determined cut-out pressure, the pump will stop. An adjustable timer for each pump shall be
fitted in the control panel to ensure frequent switching cannot occur.
K. Transfer Pumps switching shall be controlled by float switches installed in the roof storage tank.
L. A log level float switch installed in all storage tanks shall prevent dry running of respective
pumps.
4.13 HEATING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT (NOT APPLICABLE)
4.14 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
4.14.1 Scope of Work
The Mechanical Services Installation Contractor shall employ the services of the selected Automatic Controls
Specialist (see Appendix 4A) who shall be responsible for providing a comprehensive control, interlock and
monitoring intelligent DDC outstation automatic control system, all to conform to relevant British Standards as set
out in this specification and in the particular specification in Section 4.0.
The Automatic Control system shall be designed to monitor and control all of the plant and systems described in the
specification and on the drawings unless otherwise indicated. This specification shall be regarded as the minimum,
it is not exhaustive and the Automatic Controls Specialist shall be responsible for including for enhancing the system
where necessary and providing additional features etc to ensure the Automatic Control System fully caters for
monitoring and controlling the Mechanical and Electrical plant and systems within this contract.
The selected automatic controls specialist shall be responsible for the manufacture, supply, installation, supervision,
testing and commissioning of the Automatic Controls which shall include but not be limited to:-
(i) All control panels, including power and control sections, to feed the Mechanical Services
Installations (Control and Power sections to be fully segregated within separate compartments of
the Control Panel).
(ii) Local operator station terminal/keypads behind lockable Perspex hinged enclosure, in the front of
each control panel to allow local interrogation and control, alarm registers, time programmes,
manual override, set point adjustment, etc.
(iii) For all plant items served from control panels provide hand/off/auto rotary switches with push
test indicator lamps.
(iv) All sensors, control valves, actuators, etc and associated field wiring and containment. All
necessary co-ordination with the Mechanical Services Installation Contractor to position pockets
and sensors in representative locations as recommended by the sensor manufacturer.
(v) All power wiring and containment from the control panel to the associated equipment supplied.
(vi) All local isolators/lock-off stop buttons and final connections to plant.
(vii) All controllers.
(viii) All invertors.
(ix) Full training and demonstration of the installation.
(x) Comprehensive O & M Manuals incorporating control panel and wiring diagram drawings, full
points schedules, full controls philosophy description, manufacturers' data sheets, etc.
The standalone intelligent DDC outstation software programme must be stored within non-volatile memory and not
be reliant upon battery backup. A power failure, battery failure or system shutdown must not cause the outstation
to lose its engineering software.
The standalone intelligent DDC outstations must utilize high quality reliable software to enable the input to
output cycle times to be performed within one second of a deviation, thus ensuring accurate control.
4.14.2 General
Information
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and collation of all electrical loadings of plant and equipment
associated with the works and shall prepare and/or obtain manufacturers drawings of all electric, electronic and/or
pneumatic work associated with the Contract. The drawings shall be in the form of single line diagrams and
comprehensive wiring diagrams, clearly showing the location and function of each component with the
manufacturers figure number or other identifying symbol, and noted to show the components specified.
The Contractor shall indicate on the drawings any item or wiring which the Contractor believes will be provided by
others. Any such indication is for information only and will not absolve the Contractor from his responsibility to
provide a complete control system.
The voltage, starting current, running current and duty in kw shall be clearly marked against each motor and all
associated components shall be suitable for all conditions resulting from this data.
All control panel termination shall be identified separately by numbers, and all fuses and contactors shall be clearly
marked with the required ratings and settings.
The drawings shall be integrated, so that they form complete details for the installations, and the pneumatic details
shall show all information for each group of components so that they function as intended. ‘Typical’ wiring diagrams
of individual components will not be accepted.
The Contractor shall submit for comment in a timely fashion as set out in Section 2 copies of the electrical wiring
diagrams, pneumatic diagrams complete with electrical control equipment details, point schedules, controls
operation methodology, and four copies of the control panel fascia layout drawing to the Contract
Administrator/Engineer.
4.14.3 Standard Control Panel Specification
General
a) Scope
Certain plant items are attended by special risks, for example fire or explosion. In these instances,
additional requirements may be necessary but are not detailed in this particular specification.
(i) Project Technical Specification
Should a particular project specification be produced this must be read in conjunction with this
technical specification. All areas of conflict shall be clarified by the Engineer.
(ii) General Operating Conditions
The electrical equipment shall be such that its installation, operation and maintenance can comply with the
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989; the Health and Safety at Work, etc, Act 1974, and any subsequent
relevant legislation.
The electrical equipment shall also satisfy the requirements of the Regulations for the Electrical Equipment
of Buildings, issued by the Institute of Electrical Engineers and all the relevant British Standards, ISO's, IECs,
CECC standard codes of practice. This specification is supplementary but the most stringent requirements
must be met.
(iii) Conditions of Installation
The electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Particular
attention is to be made on heat emitting equipment installed within the control panel and the enclosure
is to be ventilated accordingly so as to conform with the temperature rise requirements as laid down in BS
EN 60439-1:1999, IEC 60439-1:1999.
(iv) Suitability of Electrical Equipment and Components
Electrical equipment shall be capable of giving satisfactory performance under the operating conditions
and under the starting conditions and duty cycle of the plant for which it is to be used. Arrangements shall
be made where necessary to protect components against external conditions (impact, vibration and dust,
etc). The selection of all components shall be such that they are used within the design ratings stated by
the component manufacturer (voltage, correct application, temperature, etc) not only under normal
conditions, but also under the most unfavorable conditions, within the limits foreseen for the functionality
of the electrical equipment. Use shall be made of standard production components that conform to the
relevant British Standards where they exist and preference shall be given to standard production
components which are obtainable from more than once source of supply.
(v) To ensure the objectives of the specification, enhanced performance shall not be obtained by
over-rating.
The electrical equipment shall be designed and the components selected from the manufacturers'
published data with the object of enabling the equipment to operate continuously at the rated duty cycle
of the plant without the need for adjustment or replacement of any components in the electrical system
for a minimum period of 30,000 hours or 250,000 plant operations, whichever is the greater. This is a design
objective and not a guarantee of an electrical component.
(vi) Supply Voltage
The electrical equipment shall be designed for operation at the supply voltage or voltages as stated by the
project specification. Unless otherwise specified the equipment shall operate correctly over a range of
voltages between 90% and 106% of the nominal supply voltage. If there are several supply voltages this
condition shall apply to each of these.
(vii) New Techniques and Material
The manufacturing techniques referred to in subsequent clauses are based on correct practice and
knowledge. It is not intended that strict compliance with this specification shall inhibit developments
making use of new techniques and materials. New materials and practices not covered by this specification
shall not be used except by agreement between the supplier and the Contract Administrator.
(viii) Drawings
General arrangement/Electrical drawings for all equipment supplied under this contract, including details
of cable entries, method of fixing and layout of panel back plate, shall be supplied for each control panel
on the latest version of AutoCAD or comparable.
Drawings shall be submitted in advance of the manufacture date to allow an adequate period for
comment/approval.
(ix) Spares
A recommended comprehensive spares list for long term maintenance purposes together with a list of all
equipment manufacturers shall be provided for each control panel.
(x) Degree of Protection
All control panels are to be manufactured to IP54 unless otherwise specified.
b) Construction of Control Panels
(i) General Mechanical Requirements
The Control Panel's shell shall be so constructed as to prevent the ready ingress of dust. The joints of plates
and doors shall be suitably packed, using neoprene or equal (not rubber).
Maximum door section width including frame - 800mm. This is to be adhered to, unless permission in
writing is given.
Maximum height - 2000mm, excluding plinth. This is to be adhered to unless permission in wiring is given.
Materials - folded mild sheet minimum thickness 1.8mm or mild steel angle frame which supports sheets
of mild steel minimum thickness 1.25mm, or a proprietary system of construction.
Control panels shall be stiffened as necessary to ensure rigidity, lifting eyes to BS 4278 (1985) shall be
provided for convenience in handling large and heavy control panels. Section housing starting resistors
and/or other heat emitting apparatus shall be ventilated to prevent overheating.
All doors shall be electrically or mechanically interlocked such that no door can be opened unless the main
isolator is ÒFF'. However, if each section is electrically separate then individual isolators shall be provided
to isolate each section and each door shall be fitted with individual locks.
All cut outs are to be accurate and true, edges shall be de-burred and painted.
A minimum clearance of 50mm to be allowed between the side of the control panel and the nearest
component. Wiring looms or plastic trunking may be taken to the edge of the control panel.
The main isolator must be mounted on the back plate.
A minimum 10% spare space shall be provided within each control panel.
(ii) Wall Mounting Control Panels
Maximum depth - 300mm unless internally mounted equipment necessitates special depth.
Door locks to be Lowe and Fletcher type T44 handle. Eldon compression lock type 61 or Emka 5mm 2 bit
lock.
Door keys - Lowe and Fletcher number 92286, Eldon type 6R or Emka 5mm. Two keys to be supplied.
Undrilled detachable gland plate(s) shall be provided at the bottom of the control panel for main incoming
cable and undrilled detachable gland plate(s) shall be provided at the top of the control panel for outgoing
services. These shall be earthed.
Should a control panel be located in an area where condensation is likely, anti-condensation shall be
supplied, complete with internally mounted thermostat set to maintain an internal temperature of 11°C.
(iii) Floor Mounting Control Panels
Maximum depth - 600mm.
Door lock - to be Lowe and Fletcher type, L44 handle, Eldon `T' handle or Emka 5mm. Two keys to be
supplied for each lock.
Door keys - Lowe and Fletcher number 92286, Ronis number C21323 or Emka 5mm. Two keys to be supplied
for each lock.
An aperture to be provided at the bottom of each control panel; suitable glanding arrangements are to be
provided.
All gland plates shall be earthed.
(iv) All Control Panels
A rating plate is to be fitted inside each control panel adjacent to the main isolator stating the following:
a) Supply voltage
b) Control voltage
c) Current rating
d) Fault level (if required)
e) Date of manufacture
c) Paint Finishes
(i) General
All internal and external surfaces shall be free of all blemishes and inclusions. Painted
surfaces shall be uniform and free of runs.
After fabrication all surfaces are to be degreased and chromate etched. After
etching all surfaces are to be coated with two coats of suitable primer. All
internal surfaces are to be stove enamelled white.
External surfaces are to be stove enamelled light grey generally to BS 381C shade 631 or other colours as
specified elsewhere.
d) Labels
(i) External
Labels shall be provided for each starter and for each system lamp(s). Labels shall be secured using plated
instrument headed screws or other proprietary fixings (self-adhesive shall not be accepted).
Where any item of equipment or section of the control panel remains LIVE, when the doors are open, then
such items or section must bear engraved warning labels of yellow/black/yellow laminated materials and
all live parts shall be adequately shrouded in accordance with the requirements as scheduled in BS EN
60947-1:2007+A1:2011.
Facia layouts shall be symmetrical as far as is practicable.
(ii) Internal
All equipment to be adequately identified with engraved white/black/white laminated materials suitably
fixed adjacent to the equipment either by fasteners or by a suitable adhesive. No labels shall be fixed to
trunking lids if this can be avoided. Where an adhesive is used steps shall be taken to ensure that the surface
to which the label is to be fixed shall be prepared in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's
instructions. (Dymo tape or equivalent shall not be accepted).
e) Wiring
(i) General
Screened cable or wire must be used. The screening must be of non-ferrous materials and connected to the
earth terminal.
Internal wiring shall be fully identified at each end of each cable by numbered ferrules with power and
control wiring segregated and enclosed in separate pvc slotted trunking with removable covers. Wiring to
equipment mounted on doors shall be enclosed in spiral wound plastic sheathing or secured with plastic
harness. All trunking within the panel shall be sized for 50% spare capacity.
All wiring shall be carried on the front surface of the mounting plate in plastic cable trunking of the
ventilated type with clip-on covers and purpose made connector pieces and accessories or strapped in
looms with straps permitting easy access to the looms and clipped to the mounting plate.
All plastic trunking and plastic straps used shall be of a fire resistant, self-extinguishing type.
Cable conductor sizes must be rated taking into account all grouping, bunching and enclosing factors. Wiring
outside the trunking or look shall be neatly set for connection to terminals or equipment.
All wiring to rear mounted terminal strips shall be carried through the mounting plate to the terminals
and suitably protected.
When large wiring looms are carried onto a door/switch section a mechanical fixing device must be used;
self-adhesive devices may only be used on small looms up to 10 cables. No more than 5 conductors shall be
in any one loom. A minimum of 5 spare cables shall be run to each door.
Minimum cable size on all motor drives is 1.5sq.mm.
Neutral cables are not to be shared.
Controls circuits on all 3 phase control panels shall be wired to the red phase.
In compartmented control panels each compartment is to have a separate control fuse. Attention
must be paid to BS EN 61439-1:2011 and BS EN 61439-2:2011.
All cabling is to be LSF unless otherwise stated.
(ii) Low Voltage AC Cables
(Normally exceeding extra-low voltage but not exceeding 1000 volts between conductors or 600 volts
between conductors and earth).
To be PVC insulated to BS 6231:2006 and BS 6724:1997+A3:2008 (solid or stranded).
Shall have a minimum conductor size of 1.5sq.mm on all power circuits and 0.75 sq.mm on control
circuits.
To be in phase colours - red, yellow and blue for three phase voltage, neutral to be black.
Cables larger than 25sq.mm can be single colour with phase colour sleeves. Tape is not acceptable. To
be in red and black for single phase control panel circuits.
110V to be brown.
(iii) Extra Low Voltage AC Cables
(Normally not exceeding 50Volts between conductors or to earth).
To be PVC insulated to BS 6231:2006 and BS BS 6724:1997+A3:2008 (solid or stranded).
To have a minimum conductor size of 0.5 sq.mm.
24v to be white.
(iv) Low Voltage DC Cables
(Normally exceeding extra-low Voltage but not exceeding 1000 volts between conductors or 600 volts
between conductors and earth).
To be PVC insulated to BS 6231:2006 and BS 6724:1997+A3:2008 (solid or stranded). To
have a minimum conductor size of 1.5 sq.mm.
To be grey in colour.
Red and black ferrules are to be used to denote polarity.
(v) Extra Low Voltage DC Cables
(normally not exceeding 120Volts between conductors or to earth).
To be PVC insulated to BS 6231:2006 and BS 6724:1997+A3:2008 flexible. To
have a minimum conductor size of 0.2 sq.mm
To be violet in colour.
Red and black ferrules are to be used to denote polarity.
(vi) Wiring Carried Across to Hinged Sections
To be PVC insulated reference to BS 6231:2006. To
have a minimum conductor size of 0.5sq.mm.
f) Terminations
(i) General
All outgoing electrical cables to be terminated in a terminal strip at the top or bottom of the control panel
as required. A minimum distance of 150mm shall be maintained between the top of the terminals and the
control panel shell.
The smallest terminal must be capable of accepting a 2.5mm conductor cable.
Fused terminals shall be provided for all control power ie 24V AC.
25sq.mm cable and above shall be terminated by a bolted lug type termination. Compression type is not
acceptable.
They shall be fully numbered in consecutive order from let to right or top to bottom in conjunction with
the wiring diagram and fitted so that extra units may be added. Locking device wire shall not be used.
Sufficient terminal rail to be allowed to fit an additional 5% terminals or 55mm in length, whichever is the
greatest.
They shall be suitably sized to cater for long runs of external cable where voltage drops necessitate a larger
size than standard for load concerned.
All cables, internal wiring to starters, contactors, control instruments or any associated equipment,
including terminal blocks, shall be fitted with one cable crimp per cable and be terminated by a pre-
insulated crimp using an approved crimping tool.
All cables shall be permanently designated at each and every termination in accordance with the control
panel drawing. The marking of each cable shall be by means of an expanding sleeve or ferrule (`C' type
markers are not acceptable) of the correct size for the resistor colour code.
g) Floor Mounting Control Panels
The incoming mains cable entry to be via an aperture in the bottom of the control panel unless
otherwise specified.
A suitable glanding off plate is to be provided.
The incoming main cable is to terminate directly onto the incoming or live side of the main isolator.
Enough room is to be left in the control panel to spread and terminate large cables in accordance with the
cable manufacturer's recommendations.
h) Wall Mounting Control Panels
The incoming mains cable entry to be via a detachable undrilled gland plate located in the bottom of
the control panel unless otherwise specified.
The incoming main cable is to terminate directly onto the incoming or live of the main isolator.
Enough room is to be left in the control panel to spread and terminate large cables in accordance with the
cable manufacturer's recommendations.
i) Equipment
(i) General
Manufacturers of approved equipment are listed on the following pages.
When connecting feeder cables to busbars the connections are to be shrouded and colour coded.
Components mounted within the control panels are to be screwed into tapped holes on the back mounting
plate or to be rail mounted as per BS 5584 1985 (EN 50-022). Self-tapping fixings are not permitted.
Components are to be marked up on finished drawings.
Shrouding of equipment must be carried out using material that is fire resistant and self-extinguishing.
A document pocket is to be provided within the control panel for drawings, etc. The pocket is to be
purpose made or of a proprietary rigid plastic material.
(ii) Main Isolator and Fuse Switches
Main isolators to comply with BS EN 60947-3:2009+A1:2012 to be able to open and close under load
conditions.
Incoming connections are to be shrouded.
Enough room is to be left in the control panel to spread and terminate large cables.
(iii) Fuses
To be of the HFC type complete with bridges, terminal shrouds and carriers.
Fuse links to comply with BS EN 60269-1:2007+A1:2009, BS 88-1:2007 and BS HD 60269-2:2010, BS 88-

2:2010.
Up to 63A rated fuses to be mounted on open busbars in banks indicating the phase colour by the use of
coloured sleeves. Neoprene sleeves are preferred.
Fuse systems having a total loading of 20Amps or less may be wired in a looped ring main system. Fuse
systems exceeding 20Amps in total shall be busbar mounted.
Over 63A rated fuses may be mounted to suit the equipment served.
All fuses to be readily accessible without a dangerous approach being necessary.
Space for 3 spare fuse ways per phase shall be provided.

Discrimination between fuses in series shall be maintained.
A fuse chart is to be provided and shall be mounted on a cardboard material and covered by clear
acetone or clear plastic material on the inside of the door.
(iv) Starters
To comply with:
o BS EN 60947-4-1:2010
o BS 4941 Part 2 1977 (IEC 292-2)
o BS EN 60947-4-1:2010
To be suitable for use with 3 phase, 3 wire, 315V 50 Hz supply.
Up to 37.5kW to be fitted with interchangeable thermal overloads with differing adjustable ranges. To
have built in protection against single phasing by means of a differential trip bar.
To have accessible overload reset buttons and back contacts on the overload trip switch. To
have coils suitable for 240V, 50 Hz supply unless otherwise specified.
To have resistance banks housed in separate well ventilated sections of the control panel.
To be of the same manufacture in any control panel or group of control panels under the same project
number.
(v) Contactors
To comply with BS EN 60947-4-1:2010.
To be of the same manufacture as the starters used in any one control panel or group of control panels
on the same project.
(vi) Relays
To be suitable for 240V 50 Hz supply unless otherwise specified.
Not to exceed two manufacturers when used in any control panel or group of control panels on the
same project.
(vii) Switches
To be of the rotary type.
(viii) Indicator Lamps
To be red for overload indication.
To be green for run indication.
To be amber for control circuit. To
be other colours as specified.
(ix) Plugs and Sockets
All socket outlets are to conform to BS EN 60309-2:1999, IEC 60309-2:1999.
All 13Amp switched socket outlets are to be metal clad and flush fitting. They must be suitably
protected by an ELCB.
(x) Equipment Manufacturer
Switches (rotary) GEC

Santon
Craig and Derricott
Kraus and Niamer
Eaton/Cutler Hammer
Lamps (Low Voltage Filament) GEC

Tranilamp T/MH240/4
Yoshida or equal and approved
Lamps (Neon) GEC
Tranilamps NB/MH240/4
Yoshida or equal and approved
Eaton/Cutler Hammer
Fuses GEC RS Series

GEC Safeclip Series
Simplex
Siemens
Isolators GEC
Crabtree
Kraus and Niamer
Merlin Gerin
MTE
ABB Stromberg
Watford (fuse switch only)
Siemens
Square D
Control Relays (plug in types) Any reputable manufacturer using standard 8, 11

or 14 in bases
Push Buttons GEC

Eaton/Cutler Hammer
or equal and approved
Contactors and Starters GEC

ABB
B&J
CGE
MTE
Sprecher & Schuh
Simplex
Siemens
Telemecanique
Danfoss
MCCB Crabtree
Sprecher & Schuh
Siemens
ABB
M&G
Terminals Phoenix
Klippon or equivalent
CVTEC PLUS Page 239 of 399 SECTION 5 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
Timeswitches Sangamo
WEG
Grasslin
Lacron
Timers (synchronous) GEC

Londex
Omron
Schleicher
Siemens
Lacron
Timers (electronic) GEC

Schleicher
Omron
Siemens
Sprecher & Schuh
Tele Control
Lacron
Manual Motor Starters/ B&J
Motor Protection CB's Sprecher & Schuh
j) Earthing
(i) General
An earth circuit shall consist of a separate earth conductor and comply with CP 1013 1965 and the
requirements as per BS EN 61439-1:2011 and BS EN 61439-2:2011.
The impedance measure between the main earthing terminal and any associated metal part which may
have become live due to an insulation fault shall not exceed 0.10 ohm.
All paint and grease is to be removed from jointing.
A non-ferrous main earthing terminal shall be provided close to the main incoming cables. It shall be of
such a size as to allow the connection of an earth continuity conductor in accordance with the following:-
For incoming conductors up to and including 16mm², cross sectional area, the main earthing terminals
shall be dimensioned to be equal to that of the main conductors. Where the main incoming conductor is
larger than 16mm², cross sectional area, the main earthing terminal shall be dimensioned to be at least
50% of the main incoming conductor.
The removal of any electrical component shall not interrupt the earth continuity of the remainder of the
electrical equipment.
When removable or withdrawable parts of control enclosures are equipped with metal supporting
surfaces precautions must be taken to guarantee a permanent good conductivity. The earth circuit of a
withdrawable part shall remain effective from the connected position.
For lids, doors, cover plates and the like, the usual metal screwed connections and metal hinges will
suffice to ensure continuity provided that no electrical devices are attached to them.
Earth circuits shall not include any switching devices.
(ii) Inspection and Testing at Manufacturers' Works
The engineer reserves the right to inspect the control panel(s) at the manufacturer's works and shall be
given the opportunity to test each control panel. Such inspection and test shall include mechanical and
electrical test of the equipment supplied.
The following documents are to be made available to the client or client's representative by the supplier
at the time of inspection:
o Drawings to which the control panel has been manufactured.

o Any other specifications or letters issued to the manufacturer.
o The project specification.
(iii) Test Procedure
All control panels shall be tested at works before despatch and are to be tested in accordance with BS EN
61439-1:2011 and BS EN 61439-2:2011. The minimum degree of protection is to be in accordance with
BS EN 60947-1:2007+A1:2011 and is to be IP 54.
(iv) Earth (Ground)
All control panels for test are to be earth bonded with an impedance of less than 0.1ohm, back to the
proven factory earth system. Using an earth loop impedance tester, carry out a full ac test in accordance
with IEE Regulations and CP 1013 1965. Earth continuity shall not exceed 0.1ohm.
(v) Voltage Supplies
For all three phase control panels a 415Volt, 50Hz four wire supply is to be connected to the incoming
side of the main isolator and neutral link via an earth leakage circuit breaker. DO NOT SWITCH ON.
For all single phase control panels a 240Volt, 50Hz two wire supply is to be connected to the incoming
side of the main isolator, via an earth leakage circuit breaker. DO NOT SWITCH ON.
If the control circuit is 110Volt, 50Hz and the 110Volt transformer is not contained within the control
panel, a separate 110Volt 50Hz supply is to be connected direct on to the control circuit via an earth
leakage circuit breaker. DO NOT SWITCH ON.
(vi) Continuity Test
Check the whole of the wiring against the circuit diagram with a bell or buzzer. Correct any faults or
omissions and recheck.
(vii) Insulation Test
The insulation resistances measured with a direct voltage of 500Volts between each conductor of the
power circuits, the individual conductor of the control circuits and the earthed frame shall not be less
than 100milli-ohms.
When the control circuits are not directly connected to the power circuits, separate tests shall be made
between the power circuits and the earthed frame, between the power circuits and the control circuits
and between the control circuits and the earthed frame and shall not be less than 100milli-ohms.
Electronic and other components which are not designed to withstand such a high test voltage shall be
disconnected during the test.
(viii) Operating Tests
Switch on the main isolator and check the door interlock(s) (mechanical or electrical). Switch òff'.
Override the door interlock(s) and switch òn' main isolator, energize all electrical equipment in
accordance with the circuit diagram. It shall be proved that the operation of all the electrical equipment
is correct and that the sequence of operation is normal.
Check all outgoing supplies; three phase motor supplies are to be checked with a phase rotation meter to
ensure the rotation is correct.
k) Fire Circuit
Unless otherwise indicated each control panel shall be provided with a control relay which shall be de-energized
on receipt of a fire signal from the fire alarm system. A termination box, clearly labelled, shall be provided on the
back plate, for this external connection.
4.14.4 Peripheral Field Devices
The peripheral devices provided by the selected BMS manufacturer shall be of a proven high quality to the
acceptance of the engineer.
All peripheral devices shall be of a single source manufacture and supply and be manufactured to and in
accordance with ISO European standards.
Temperate Sensors
Shall be incorporated within suitable housings to suit the specific location, ie duct or room, having a PTC co-
efficient thermistor bead accurate to within ± 1°C.
Humidity Sensors
Shall be incorporated within suitable housings to suit the specific location, ie duct or room, having a threshold control
range of between 10 and 90% RH with an accuracy of ± 5% RH.
Air Quality CO2 Sensors
Shall be incorporated within suitable housings to suit the specific location, ie duct or room, having a threshold
range of 0-100 % air quality scaled in parts per million (PPM) and to be accurate to within ± 2% of the control range.
Immersion Temperature Sensor
To be provided within and complete with BSP pockets incorporating a PTC thermistor bead accurate to ± 5°C,
pockets should be copper for LPHW and stainless steel for chilled water.
Air Pressure Sensors
To be provided with all necessary duct tappings and connection tubes selected to suit the specific pressure range and
be accurate to ± 3% of the measured pressure ranges.
Air Differential Pressure Switches
To be provided with all necessary duct tappings and connection tubes selected to suit the specific pressure range
of the air filter or as a proving device for a supply fan and be accurate to ± 5% of the measured pressure range.
Ventilation Plant Battery Frost Protection Thermostats
To be the capillary type provided with all necessary fixings and having accurate temperature adjustment, 1°C
dead band and incorporate automatic reset.
Hydraulic System Differential Pressure Switches
To be provided with all necessary pipe tappings and connection tubes and selected to suit the specific pressure range.
It should be accurate to within +/- 5% of the measurement range.
Damper Actuators
Shall be the fully modulating direct coupled type incorporating a reverse operation selection switch; the actuators
shall be provided for operation from either 0-10V or 0-20V dc and be of the spring return type as Belimo.
LPHW / CHW Modulating Control Valves
Shall be supplied complete with all necessary couplings or flanged and be provided for operation from either 0-
10V or 0-20V dc actuators.
The control valves shall be of the highest quality construction having a minimum rangeability of 100 to 1 or
greater and a maximum leakage rate of 0.02% per kvs.
The control valves shall be the lift and lay or plug and seat type and be provided with spring return actuators to
fail closed to coil in the event of a control system failure or plant shutdown.
The control valves must be provided with a hand operation to allow simple manual positioning regardless of the
control system operation.
4.14.5 General Control Standards - Supply and Extract Fans
All supply and extract, constant or variable air volume fans shall be started and stopped by individual dedicated
control system outputs.
The control system shall be engineered to enable local manual on or off operation.
Indication of status manual or automatic shall be indicated at the local operator stations.
Hours of operation indication for each fan shall be engineered into the system accessible both locally from its
operators stations.
An air flow proving device, either provided as an integral component of the fan or supplied as a separate control
system peripheral device shall be provided and connected to the associated intelligent outstation to provide local
and/or central air flow status for all fans.
Where a fan is of the variable speed type controlled from a local frequency invertor a 0-10V positioning signal in
addition to the enabling signal shall be provided. The 0-10V signal should represent 0-100% of fan speed and
indicated accordingly at the local operating station.
Hydraulic Circulation Pumps
All individual pumps, supplied in duplicate sets shall be started and stopped by individual dedicated control
system outputs.
The control system shall be engineered to enable local manual on or off operation.
Indication of status manual or automatic shall be indicated at the local operators stations.
Hours of operation indication for each fan shall be engineered into the system accessible locally from the
operator’s stations.
A hydraulic differential pressure flow proving device (per duplicate pump set) shall be provided as a separate control
system device and connected to the associated intelligent outstation to provide air flow status.
Duplicate Pump Sets
In the event of a flow failure of a selected duty pump the automatic control system shall be engineered to initiate
the standby pump and generate an alarm condition reported to the local operator’s stations.
Automatic duty cycling of a duplicate pump set shall be incorporated within the control operation of the
associated intelligent outstation to ensure equal wear and tear for maintenance purpose.
4.14.6 Design Drawings and Documentation - Control System Wiring Diagrams
The selected building management system manufacturer shall be responsible for producing detailed control
system wiring diagrams in AutoCAD A4 format. The control system manufacturer shall be totally responsible for
the system design which should include for all necessary or standard safety interlocks.
The control system design drawing shall be submitted to the engineer for comment and acceptance prior to
commencement of manufacture.
Enclosure Internal and Facia Layout Drawings
In addition to the control system electrical wiring diagrams the control specialist shall be responsible for producing
detailed internal component layout and control panel facia layouts in AutoCAD A4 format. The layout drawings
shall be submitted to the engineer for comment and acceptance prior to commencement of manufacture.
Software Structure Design
The control system manufacturer shall produce a control system detailed description of operation. The description
must be produced in adequate detail to determine all control logic and interlocking operation of the total control
system.
The description of operation shall be submitted to the engineer for comment prior to commencing detailed
software engineering.
Following the engineer's acceptance of the control system description of operation the control system
manufacturer shall produce software function logic design drawings showing all control, interlock and software
logic design in function block format.
The drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD A4 format with function paths control logic clearly and simply laid out
for ease of understanding. The control system manufacturer must be able to demonstrate to the engineer that the
control logic format complies with the accepted description of operation.
4.14.7 Operating and Maintenance Manuals
The control specialist shall be responsible for producing three sets of comprehensive operating and maintenance
manuals to be handed to the client prior to handover/acceptance.
The O & M's shall include as a minimum the following:
a) Control system wiring diagrams

b) System description of operation
c) Software logic diagrams
d) Component specification sheets
e) System commissioning reports including all control and time settings.
4.14.8 Commissioning/Handover/Client Instruction Training
The controls specialist shall ensure that their engineers assigned to this project are fully trained and experienced
with the operation of all the equipment proposed for this project.
In addition, the controls specialist should ensure that the assigned engineers remain on site to meet the project
programme.
The controls specialist shall include for periodic on-site attendance by their commissioning specialist to advise on
matters relating to the electrical wiring and control system installation and to respond to any queries regarding
the installation and interfacing of the equipment.
Testing of the system shall include checking that the equipment is correctly positioned and installed, correctly
connected electrically and operates correctly both mechanically and electrically.
The controls specialist shall be responsible for the initial start up of all mechanical plant and shall provide all
necessary attendance. The controls manufacturer shall check the continuity of the control wiring prior to start up.
However, before doing so they will ensure that all trades are clear of the equipment and that they are made aware
of the intended tests. The start up is for testing of rotation of motors primarily but the motors shall be run up to
full speed to check the current drawn and the operation of the various safety devices in the starting circuitry.
Where the rotation is found to be incorrect the controls manufacturer will notify the relevant Electrical Wiring
Installer.
The controls manufacturer shall liaise with the specialist commissioning engineers responsible for the
commissioning of the mechanical plant. They shall ensure that all interlocks with the control systems are
operational to permit the safe testing of the equipment concerned.
The whole of the automatic control system shall be commissioned by the controls manufacturers after the testing
period following the guidelines laid down by the 17th Edition of the IEE Regulations and the CIBSE in their
Commissioning Code Part C. During commissioning standard and site specific control algorithms and sequences
shall be proven for operation with respect to all associated field equipment. On completion of commissioning the
system shall be handed over to the engineer in an orderly manner. The control manufacturer will provide handover
sheets for all items of plant. These sheets are to be signed by the engineer to ensure compliance.
Backing up of the on-site software disks, their own archive disks and ensure that all drawings and documents
pertaining to the control system are present and up to date shall be the responsibility of the controls manufacturer
and shall be carried out before leaving site.
The controls specialist shall include full client training at a time to suit the client after the systems have been set
to work and are fully operational.
4.14.9 Mechanical Installation
The Mechanical Services Installation Contractor shall programme the delivery of the controls and associated
equipment to meet the needs of the construction programme and shall be responsible for the off-loading, hoisting,
positioning and protection of all such equipment and shall allow for all cranage/plant associated with this
requirement.
During the installation period the controls specialist shall be responsible for advising the Mechanical Services
Installation Contractor of any environmental conditions at the site for any equipment of their supply which they
consider to be detrimental to the equipment's future operation. The subsequent installation of any equipment
during the building process shall not negate the equipment's warranty.
All mechanical plant control items, ie sensors, thermostats, etc, shall, unless otherwise specified, be supplied by
the controls manufacturer. They shall be responsible for the items including all ancillary brackets, supports, fixing
and sensing tubes.
The controls specialist shall supply all control valves and immersion pockets/duct probes to the Mechanical
Services Installation Contractor.
The Mechanical Services Installation Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and weatherproofing,
where required, of the control valves and immersion pockets/duct probes into the pipework/ ductwork in all
services. The controls specialist shall detail to the Mechanical Services Installation Contractor any requirements
there may be regarding the weatherproofing, positioning, attitude and hydraulic considerations of these items
before installation.
4.14.10 Automatic Control System Connection Cable Specification
The electrical installation works shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations and
good working practice.
The electrical wiring from the control panels to peripheral field components shall generally be in accordance
with the following cable standards specification.
Control System Device Cable Type Reference Minimum Cross Sectional Area
Temperature sensors Beldon or equivalent N/A

up to 42m 8761 N/A
up to 96m 8760 N/A
up to 240m 8720 N/A
Magnetic control valves
20mm SWA/SINGLES/MULTI To 60m - 1.5mm²

To 100m - 2.5mm²

To 85mm - 2.5mm²

To 65mm - 2.5mm²

To 50m - 2.5mm²
To 80m - 4.0mm²

To 30m - 2.5mm²
To 50m - 4.0mm²

To 30m - 2.5mm²
To 50m - 4.0mm²
Motor control valves

(3 point) SWA/SINGLES/MULTI 1.5mm²
Damper actuators SWA/SINGLES/MULTI 1.5mm²
Thermostats/pressure
switches/humidistats SWA/SINGLES/MULTI 1.5mm²
Power circuits
(fans/pumps etc) SWA/SINGLES/MULTI CSA to be determined
in accordance with the
16th Edition Cable Sizing
Regulations
Power circuits SWA/SINGLES/MULTI Final connections shall

(boilers) utilise heat resistant cable
Main plant monitoring/ SWA/SINGLES/MULTI 1.5mm²

control connections
Containment
The controls shall be installed in dedicated automatic controls containment, clearly labelled at 3m intervals along
its length.
The complete installation shall be carried out using suitably rated PVC singles or SWA installed within either trunking
or conduit or fixed to cable tray (SWA).
All final connections from galvanised conduits (max 1.25m) shall utilise a flexible Kopex type containment
system.
It should be noted than an installation method where cables are fixed direct onto building fabric shall not be
permitted for either power or low voltage control wiring within this contract.
Local Isolation
All power circuits to fans, pumps, boilers, etc, shall be routed through a suitably rated local isolation unit. Where
the equipment has star delta starting local lock off stops shall be provided
SECTION 5 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

SD0 Schematic Design Stage Issue 08.03.2018 SD
5.1 Introduction
This Section of the Specification covers the design development, supply, delivery, off loading, installation and
services co-ordination, cabling, wiring, connecting, making off, testing, commissioning, handing over on
completion in a satisfactory working order and correction of defects during the defects liability period of all
systems, items, parts and apparatus specified in these documents, schedules and drawings.
The tender documents have been produced in accordance with the requirements of BSRIA document BG6/2012
up to Technical Design Stage only (RIBA Stage 4). In that respect the Contractor shall carry out all detailed design
activities as detailed within BSRIA guide BG6 as follows-
Pro-Forma 5 A, B & C: Production of information (RIBA stage 4b and 4c) Pro-Forma 6: Mobilisation and Construction
(RIBA stages 5) Pro-Forma 7 : Post Practical Completion (RIBA stage 6)
The contractor shall provide all design information as requested by the Project Manager for checking/ comment.
As a minimum this shall include the following-
• Completed detailed design packages at stage 4b

• MEP services installation/shop and record drawings
• Technical submissions for all plant and equipment.
• Commissioning method statements
• Handover documentation
• All test sheets.
The Contractor shall include for all works and materials allied and incidental, which are not explicitly specified, but,
which are necessary to complete the installation as a working whole.
All work shall conform to the best principles of modern practice and shall be carried out by competent tradesmen
of the appropriate Construction trades.
By acceptance of the contract the successful Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the successful operation
of all the works specified herein.
Inclusion shall be made for transport of all materials, plant and equipment to site, for all necessary off-loading
unpacking, storage and assembly. The Contractor shall pay for all associated charges for labour, freightage and
demurrage.
The Contractor shall, wherever necessary, pay all fees to manufacturers, suppliers, inspectors etc for attendance
installation, commissioning and testing of any part of the electrical plant and / or items of equipment, included in
this contract.
This document is intended to provide the specification for the electrical installation for the new residential
development called Q Gardens located within Arjan, Dubai.
The project consists of a two four storey residential blocks that are positioned on top of a single-storey ground
CVTEC PLUS Page 252 of 399 SECTION 6 – PARTICULAR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION

floor retail & parking facility for the two blocks above, with associated communal areas located at ground floor
and podium level.
The building is located in Arjan, Dubai, UAE.
The buildings will generally consist of residential apartments, and associated leisure facilities, with a shell and core
retail facility at Ground Level, which will be fitted out by their prospective tenants at a later stage.
This document should be read in conjunction with all other related specifications and room data sheets
appertaining to the scheme, in particular Silcock Leedham Consulting Engineers Ltd. (SLCE) Standard Technical
Specification.
The Contractor is strongly advised to visit site prior to tendering and make all due allowances for restrictions
created by the services and proposed routing. Such visits are to be by prior appointment only. The Contractor shall
arrange for the site visit in advance of attendance. No additional monies will be available for failure to comply with
this request.
Where the detailed requirements given in this section are at variance with the Main Contract Documents and
Room Data Sheets issues identified are to be raised, by the Tendering Contractor during the Tender period.
5.1.1 Project Location
Arjan, Dubai, UAE.
5.1.2 Scope of Electrical Works
This section sets out the roles and responsibilities, and the limitations of the tender M&E specification and
drawings.
The Electrical Services Contract covers the supply, delivery, offloading, installation and services co-ordination,
cabling, wiring, connecting, making off, testing, commissioning, handing over on completion in a satisfactory
working order and replacement of all faulty parts during the defects liability period of all systems, items, parts and
apparatus specified in these documents, schedules and drawings.
All work shall conform to the best principles of modern practice and shall be carried out by competent tradesmen
of the appropriate JIB grades. (or equivalent)
By acceptance of the contract the successful Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the successful operation
of all the works specified herein.
Inclusion shall be made for transport of all materials, plant and equipment to site, for all necessary off-loading

demurrage.
installation, commissioning and testing of any part of the electrical plant and / or items of equipment, included in
this contract.
The Contractors responsibility in relation to proposed project are as detailed below. The Contractor shall include
within their tender to undertake all the duties identified.
The scope of Electrical works to be included for in the Electrical Contractors tender return includes the supply,
delivery to site, off-loading, final co-ordination and positioning, installation, setting to work, testing and
commissioning of the complete Electrical Engineering systems to the development which is to be completed to
the satisfaction of the Client, Architect and Silcock Leedham.
The scope of electrical works includes but is not necessarily limited to the following;
 Switchgear located within the consumer intake room on level 1.

 LV distribution.
 LV distribution boards.
 Earthing installations.
 All lighting, power and controls cabling.
 Localised lighting control systems.
 All power, communications and data containment systems.
 Complete small power installation.
 All containment, local isolation and final connection to equipment.
 Cat 6 data cabling and containment installations.
 Cat 6 termination and testing.
 IT/telecommunication installations detailed on the scheme drawings.
 Complete internal lighting installation.
 Escape/Emergency lighting installation.
 Fire alarm system installation.
 Complete electrical installation including mains cabling and containment to all Mechanical Services
equipment.
 Temporary site lighting, power & fire alarm
 Services identification
 Contractors own site working drawings
 O&M manuals
 As fitted drawings
 Testing and commissioning
 Demonstration to Client
In the event that approved O+M manuals, as Installed drawings and commissioning documents are not handed
over on the contract completion date, the Contractor shall provide 24 hour maintenance cover for all the
engineering services until the approved handover documents and staff training is given.
The Contractor shall include for full maintenance and breakdown cover for a period of 12 months from completion,
provided in addition to defects liability.
5.1.3 Responsibility

The Contractor shall make reference to and include within the tender return for all duties listed in the Schedule
of Responsibilities appended to this document. Typical project responsibilities can be apportioned as detailed
below.
5.1.4 Consultant Responsibilities
The consultant shall be responsible for the identification, clarification and production of tender documentation
necessary to enable the Mechanical and Electrical Contractor to provide a complete tender return package for
the project.
5.1.5 Contractor Responsibility
The contractors responsibility in relation to proposed project are as detailed below. The contractor shall include
within their tender to undertake all the duties identified.
 Undertake the supply and installation of a complete and functional electrical services installation,
adhering to the SLCE Particular specifications and drawings, including SLCE Standard specifications
incorporating any necessary changes to the installation due to final site co-ordination.
 Complete the installation in order to ensure that the contract services are properly and fully co-
ordinated with the building fabric and structure to the Client’s satisfaction.
 Provide all working drawing information, prior to ordering and installation of equipment.
 Include for all costs associated with providing working drawings and any co-ordination deemed
necessary due to satisfy the constraints of the structure, finishes and other services.
 The co-ordination and preparation of the appropriate working drawings shall be carried out in
accordance with an agreed contract programme.
 The supply, delivery, off-loading, storage, installation, testing and commissioning of the installation.
 Demonstration of operation of all electrical systems to the clients chosen representative.
 Attend co-ordination meetings with other sub-contractors arranged by the main contractor and agree
co-ordination, not only relating to the sequence of operation but also to the preparation of working
drawings which will fully reflect the agreed scheme.
 Liaise with all necessary sub-contractors and others as necessary to ensure co-ordination of the works
in relation to building elements and services.
 Install all services in such a manner so as to ensure correct performance and adequate fixing to the
structure to avoid conflict in the positioning of the various electrical and mechanical services installed

by others.
 Fixing and installing correctly all plant, equipment and materials.
 Inspecting all plant, equipment and materials as delivered or where specified at the manufacturers
works.
 Demonstrate that the equipment is capable of the method of operation, as specified to the satisfaction
and acceptance of the Engineer.
 Demonstrate that the overall and complete systems perform correctly in the required manner and as
intended by the specifications and drawings to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Engineer.
 Provide record drawings of the complete installation.
 Provide Operating and Maintenance manuals for the complete installation in the electronic format.
 Provide a full set of test results in an approved format for all tests and commissioning operations to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
 The Contractor shall include for all exclusions identified by the specialised sub-contractor.
 All diversions, Isolations, strip out works.
 The Contractor shall provide a complete schedule of rates for all electrical service elements upon
appointment to the project.
5.1.6 Standards of Workmanship
The workmanship and materials of the installation shall be of the highest standard in accordance with this
specification and associated documents, which shall be to the complete satisfaction of the SLCE and Clients
Engineer or representative. Should any section of work or materials fail to meet the required standard, it shall be
replaced by the Contractor at no extra cost to the contract.
5.1.7 Electrical Services Technical Design Drawings
The Contractor shall refer the following layout drawing provided with the tender pack for the schedule of 100%
detail design electrical services layout information:
 The selection of as built information.

 The tender drawings for electrical services.

The drawing issue sheet for the electrical services is as referred to within the Appendix section within
this specification.
All electrical services layout drawings & information issued with the specification are to indicate the 100% detail
design electrical services requirements. The construction stage development of the services including all builders
work details etc. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor & no information given on the drawings provided
shall be relieve them of this responsibility.
5.1.8 Standards and Regulations
The design and installation of the materials shall conform to the requirements of the following
documents current at time of agreement of contract:
Installation Statutory Regulations, Standards and other system design guidance

General  DEWA Regulations
 IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
 British Standards Institution
 NFPA National Fire Protection Agency (USA)
 LEED Gold Standard
 Dubai Green Guide
 Dubai Municipality
 Dubai Civil Defence
General – British  Building Regulations
Regulations & Technical  The Health and Safety at Work Act
Guidance  Construction, Design and Management Regulations 2015
 The Care Standards Act 2001
 Equality Act 2010
 Electricity at Work Regulations
 The Fire Precautions (Workplace) Regulations 1997
 The Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations 2002
 The Electricity Supply Regulations Pt2 1998
 British Standards Specifications and British Standard Codes of Practice
 BSRIA Design Guides
 CIBSE Design Guides
 Secure by design Requirements
 British council of offices guidelines
Electrical Distribution:  BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations
HV Distribution  BS7430 – Code of Practice for Earthing
LV Distribution  Building Regulations Part L2
Electrical Metering  CIBSE Technical Memoranda TM39 – Building Energy Metering
Surge Protection  Electricity Council Engineering recommendations G5/3 and G5/9.
(Lightning and
Electrical network Reference should also be made to SLCE standard specification for additional
surges) system and component standards.

Life Safety Systems:  Building Regulations Part B

 BS9999 – Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and
Automatic Fire Alarm use of buildings
System  BS 5839 Pt1 – Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings. Code of
practice for system design, installation, commissioning and maintenance
 BS5839 Pt9 - Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings. Code of
practice for system design, installation, commissioning and maintenance
of emergency voice communication systems
 BS8300 – Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of
disabled people; Code of practice
 BSEN54-20:2006 – Fire detection & Fire Alarm Systems. Aspirating
Smoke Detectors
 FIA Code of Practice – Best practice design, installation, commissioning
&maintenance of aspirating smoke detector systems
 LPCB Approvals and Requirements
Reference should also be made to SLCE standard specification for additional

system and component standards.
Systems for the Disabled  BS8300 – Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of
disabled people; Code of practice

Data & Telephony  BSEN50174-1:2001. Information Technology – Cabling Installation.

Specifications and quality assurances.
 BSEN50174-2:2001. Information Technology – Cabling Installation.
Installation planning and practices inside buildings.
 BSEN50174-3:2003. Information Technology – Cabling Installation.
Installation planning and practices outside buildings


Lighting:  SLL Code for Lighting

 NFPA 72 National Fire Protection Association for fire alarm system
Internal Lighting and life safety requirements
 CIBSE LG3 Visual environment for display screen use
Emergency Lighting
 CIBSE LG7 Lighting for offices
 BSEN12464-1: Light & lighting – Lighting of work places: Part 1 – Indoor
work places
 BS5489-1: Code of practice for the design of road lighting: Lighting of
roads and public amenity areas
 BSEN13201-2: Road lighting: Part 2 – Performance requirements
 BSEN12462-1: Lighting of work places: Part 2 – Outdoor work places
 ILE – Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light
 Building Regulations Part B
 BS9999 – Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and
use of buildings
 CIBSE Lighting Guide 12 – Emergency Lighting Design Guide
 BS5266-1:2005 – Emergency Lighting: Code of practice for the
emergency lighting of premises
 BSEN62304:2006 – Automatic test systems for battery powered
emergency escape lighting
BSEN50171:2001 – Central Power Supply Systems

Although the above document list does not intend to be exhaustive, it is intended to give the contractor
an indication of the likely related standards and regulations applicable to a scheme of this nature.
Although every effort has been made to harmonise all information, should any contradiction exist, then
the Project Engineer should be informed at Tender stage in order to determine precedence.
5.1.11 Tender Return Documentation
The Contractor shall return the tender documentation as contained in Section 7, of this Specification. The
mechanical and electrical summaries must be completed in their entirety; failure to complete the
summaries may render the Contractor’s tender invalid.
5.2 HV Supply / Public Utility Supply
Design Parameters
Read in conjunction with the Codes of Practice, Standards and Guidelines outlined within section 5.1.10 of this
document .

System Description
DEWA are to provide a new 11kV HV supply including ring main units, transformers, switchgear, distribution
equipment, metering and associated cabling within the proposed HV intake room located at Level 0 adjacent the
site boundary.
DEWA will require minimum room dimensions as detailed within ‘Section 11.4’ of the DEWA Regulations for
Electrical Installations. The single room substation shall be suitable to accommodate the required number of ring
main units, transformers and HV metering equipment to meet the detail design and as required by DEWA.
The contractor shall develop the design in line with DEWA requirements during the detailed design development
phase.
It is proposed to install the consumers LV switch panels and equipment within a dedicated switch room located
immediately adjacent to the distribution substation. The switch rooms shall be complete with an interconnecting
door lockable only from the distribution substation.
Single bulk metering will be done at 11kV and provided by the DEWA. Tenant metering will be developer's
responsibility and be arranged as per the schematic layouts in line with DEWA requirements.
The Contractor shall liase and co-ordinate the design of the onsite HV system with the supply authority HV system,
such that grading and protection between the two systems occurs.
The Contractor shall include for the development of the tender information based upon the manufacturer,
equipment, and controls as detailed within the tender documents
The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the HV network design meets the requirements of the design
criteria within this specification, and develop the HV scheme as the contract progresses to take account of the
development of the main contract package of works and requirements of the DEWA supply authority.
HV Earthing Proposals
The contractor shall provide a dedicated earthing network to serve new HV/LV infrastructure. The proposed
earthing system network impedance shall not exceed 1 ohm. The earth electrode(s) shall be housed in an approved
hand hole which shall be fitted with a heavy duty inspection cover. The earth electrode shall comprise of a copper
clad rod at least 15mm diameter driven to a minimum depth of 3 meters.
In order to achieve the above value in areas of high soil resistivity it may be necessary to install more than one
earth electrode. Where this figure cannot be achieved, DEWA must be consulted.
5.3 LV Distribution
Scope of Works

The Contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to work a complete low voltage electrical
distribution system throughout the site including:-
 New low voltage electrical distribution system to serve the Building A, Building B and all common levels
MDB’s, SMDBs, local distribution boards, life safety systems, plant and equipment.
 Liaison with DEWA in respect of the approved LV metering and provision of all required metering
equipment, CTs etc. within the main building switchboard / low voltage arrangement.
 Connect all new outgoing low voltage sub-main circuits to the main low voltage switchboard (to include
testing, commissioning and setting to work).
 Allow for post construction site attendances to establish requirement for power factor correction and
provide required power factor correction.
Design Parameters
document.
All distribution electrical switchgear sub-main cabling will be sized to include for 25% spare ways for future
expansion.
All primary containment will be sized to include 25% spare capacity for future installations.
System Description
The contractor shall provide a low voltage distribution system to serve Building A and Building B residential,
commercial, landlord and life safety LV systems, emanating from the LV outgoing ACB of each of the step down
transformers as follows:-
A number of floor standing, front/back access, top & bottom cable entry/exit main distribution panels (MDBs), to
form 4b Type 6 rated at 50kA for 1 second shall be provided as detailed below:-
 MDB01 – fed from TX1 serving the residential supplies located with Block A
 MDB02 – fed from TX2 serving the residential supplies located with Block B
 MDB03 – fed from TX3 serving the commercial, chillers and plant supplies
 MDB-ESS – fed from TX4 serving the landlord essential services c/w 500kVA on site standby generator
change over support.
Each of the proposed main distribution boards (MDB) shall be supplied via multiple XLPE/LSF/AWA/LSF Cu single
cables, routed on heavy duty ladder containment systems fixed within the low level trenches located within the
DEWA HV RMU transformer substations and consumer intake and LV switch rooms.
All panels above shall include provision to include a temporary generator set with protection devices rated at
2500 Amps.
All switch boards shall be complete with provision for electronic surge protection and power factor correction

facilities and also a temporary generator connection point complete with manual castell key type operated
changeover provision.
All LV section panels shall be completed with 20% spare capacity within.
Sub-main supplies will be provided from these switchboards to serve MCB Distribution Boards, Mechanical Control
Panels, Fire / Security / Disabled Refuge Alarm panels throughout the building. Metering will be provided at the
main switchboard where possible, or at the MCB Distribution Boards where split load boards are utilised. All meters
will be connected to the BMS system via the existing protocol.
Essential Generator Service
A 500KVA canopied generator set shall be installed within the designated generator room. The rating of the
generator shall be capable of delivering the full maximum demand of the proposed essential services.
An automatic changeover switch shall be provided within the new low voltage room and link to the generator in
the adjacent room. The fuel tank shall be included within the same package as the generator, which shall be non-
containerised.
Rising Bus Bar Distribution
The Contractor shall supply and install a number of 2000A rising power bus-bars, each close coupled direct to
their respective main distribution panel via a dedicated outgoing panel section and shall be complete with
integral ACB protection and metering, to serve main vertical LV distribution as follows:-
 BB1 – close coupled and fed from MDB01 serving the residential supplies located with
block A
 BB2 - close coupled and fed from MDB02 serving the residential supplies located with
block B
 BB3 - close coupled and fed from MDB03 serving landlord block A HVAC services on the
roof plant deck
 BB4 - close coupled and fed from MDB04 serving landlord block B HVAC services on the
roof plant deck
Rising busbar BB1 & BB3 shall be located within the main electrical service riser within block A. Rising busbar
BB2 & BB4 shall be located within the main electrical service riser within block B.
The minimum rating of each busbar shall be 2000 Amp TPN&E. The rising busbars shall be complete with all
necessary manufacturer’s end feed units, bends, couplers, tap off units, fire rated enclosures barriers and
accessories as necessary to complete the installation , tap off units, end feed units etc. connection of the rising
busbars, to the 2000A MCCB’s and the main LV panel boards shall be via a solid connection.
Sub-main Distribution

The Contractor shall provide sub main cabling to serve the proposed switch panels, distribution boards and fixed
items of equipment taking the form of XLPE/SWA/PVC Cu multicore cabling with copper stranded conductors and
will be installed upon heavy duty ladder and galvanised tray-work. Each sub main cable will have full size phase
and neutral conductors.
Typically, Sub-mains cabling will be provided from the main low voltage switch panel to serve a minimum of, but
not necessarily limited to, the following items of equipment:
1. Sub main distribution panels

2. Commercial tenants LV supply ‘hand shake’ points.
3. LV supplies for future swimming pool plant room, external services, gym, landscaping and 3rd party
LV requirements
4. All major Items of mechanical plant and equipment
5. Final circuit lighting and power distribution boards
6. Tenants intruder alarm panel
7. Connection from essential generator – MDB-GEN-01
All panel boards 50KA at 1 second; this also applies to any outgoing protection devices within the particular panel
board.
Three phase and neutral distribution boards will utilise BS EN 60898 MCB’s and BS EN 61009 RCBOs with a
minimum 10kA rating. Each board will include a minimum of 25% spare capacity. Spare ways will be provided with
blanking covers throughout and will not be populated with devices.
Each distribution board will be provided with type written circuit charts contained within a fixed plastic sleeve. The
schedule will be complete with MCB ratings and appropriate description of final circuit served.
Each distribution board will incorporate engraved traffolyte label c/w black lettering on white background and
appropriate description.
Sub Main Distribution Boards
The new final circuit distribution boards shall be provided to serve all final circuits. Full discrimination shall be
provided between all fuses, MCCB’s and MCB’s. Sub metering shall be provided to all distribution boards to meet
the requirements of Building Regulation Part L & CIBSE TM39 “Building Energy Metering’ DEWA Regulation.
The new lighting, power & general low voltage distribution boards shall have the following specification:-
Low voltage distribution boards shall be provided as detailed on the containment series indicative layout drawings
and in accordance with this specification. The Contractor shall make due allowance for any additional LV
distribution boards not detailed on the indicative tender drawings, required to complete the landlords fit out
design and installation in accordance with landlord / tenancy agreements and the proposed energy metering
strategies.

MCB distribution boards shall comply with BS EN 60439-3, and be supplied and installed complete with lockable
MCB's, blanking pieces, integral isolating switch and flush lockable doors. External protection shall be IP3X to BS
EN 60529.
All miniature circuit breakers shall comply with BS EN 60898 and BS EN 60439, and have type B characteristics for
power circuits and type C for lighting circuits.
All RCBO's shall be of the combined MCB/RCD type and comply with BS EN 60898 and IEC 1008. RCBO’s shall be
used to protect circuits supplying dedicated socket outlets outside the equipotential zone as prescribed in BS7671.
Other building services items as required, i.e. FAP, HVAC panels & systems shall be fed direct from the main MCCB
distribution panel. The location of this has not been confirmed.
Final Circuit Distribution
Generally all final circuits will be PVC single core Cu (6491B), in galvanised steel cable trunking systems throughout
feeding lighting circuits and small power circuits.
Typically, small power and data will be provided within screed mounted three compartment trunking and floor
box units.
Final circuit cabling to wall mounted accessories on finished walls will be recessed within the building fabric to
provide a flush finished installation. Final circuit cabling to accessories on fair face or exposed walls are to be cabled
in surface galvanised steel conduits to final accessory location.
Fire Alarm cabling will be Red, LSF insulated, soft skinned CWZ rated cable, supported on cable tray.
Circuit protective, equipotential and supplementary bonding conductors will be PVC/Cu (green/yellow) cables
installed in conduits, trunking and cable tray.
All final circuit cables will be sized to suit the ratings of the individual circuits with full allowance being made for
grouping factors, voltage drop thermal conditions and disconnection times given in the IEE Wiring Regulations,
17th Edition. The minimum final circuit conductor size permitted will be 2.5mm² for lighting and 4mm 2 for small
power, whilst ensuring that the voltage drop at full load current, on any final circuit, does not exceed 3% of the
nominal voltage for lighting and 5% for other circuits (including sub-mains).
Appropriate segregation of electrical systems will be maintained throughout. 400 volt potential will be avoided
where practical, otherwise appropriate warning labels will be provided. There will be 300mm between banded
services within the ceiling void. Separation within trunking will be provided by either a sufficient space between
banded services, or the introduction of a steel divider sheet within the trunking.
Earthing & Equipotential Bonding
The earthing and equipotential bonding of the installation shall be provided by the contractor to comply with the
requirements of the DEWA regulations and the 17th Edition of the IEE wiring regulations, and all the amendments

published to date, the electricity supply authority requirements and BS7430:1991 Code of Practice for Earthing.
Protection against indirect contact shall be provided by means of earthed equipotential bonding and automatic
disconnection of the supply.
The earth of the installation shall emanate from the earth connection copper bar terminal located within the main
electrical switchroom, adjacent to each of the main switch panel panels.
Main equipotential bonding conductors shall be provided from the main earth bar(s) adjacent to the proposed
new MDBs to a minimum of the following items.
 Incoming water service
 Major plant items
 Landlords mechanical services pipework and ductwork
 Structural steelwork
 Lightning protection system
Suitable bonding conductors shall be provided from the main earth bar adjacent to the proposed new switch panel
to a minimum of the following items.
 Tenants mechanical services pipework and ductwork
 Clean earth bar within the landlord & tenant commons rooms room
 Screed mounted galvanized trunking and floor box installation
Supplementary bonding conductors shall also be provided to all extraneous metal work, pipe work and free
standing steel catering equipment regardless of whether an earth path already exists by metal to metal joints,
connecting to the main equipotential bonding conductor.
The main earth bar shall be constructed of high conductivity copper, tinned and fixed off the wall by rigid PVC
insulators. All equipotential bonding conductors terminated on piped services shall use proprietary earthing
clamps.
Containment Systems
The Contractor shall supply and install a complete cable ladder, tray, trunking, basket and conduit containment
system. Containment systems shall be as follows:

Sub main cables shall be installed at high level fixd to soffits, within services risers, in ceiling voids, plant rooms
and electrical risers on dedicated steel galvanised heavy duty ladder and medium duty return flange power cable
tray. In all other located cables shall be cleated to the building fabric.
Fire alarm system cables shall be installed in ceiling voids, on dedicated cable baskets, clipped direct to soffit
and building fabric in plant room locations. In all other located cables shall be installed within PVC conduit
systems or clipped to the building fabric. All other cabling drops and rises into room locations shall be
protected by means of chased metal conduit, flush finish. (As per approved shop drawings)
Cable basket shall be steel galvanised throughout. The minimum cable basket depth shall be 54mm. Cable basket
shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers approved fixing methods utilising manufactured bends,
junctions and propriety fixings. Containment systems are to accommodate the minimum bending radius of
cable.
Containment systems shall be fixed or suspended direct from the ceiling soffit via anchor bolt, threaded rod &
unistrut bracket arrangements. Use of manufacturers approved suspension methods will require approval from
the project engineer prior to installation.
All containment systems shall be mechanically coupled throughout. Where cabling leaves cable basket &
trunking systems approved manufacturer proprietary interconnections, support & gland brackets, box & conduit
connectors shall be used to ensure continuous containment systems.
Cable trays should be bonded at each joint/segment with a single core bonding cable. This ensures electrical
continuity and compliance with the EMC directive. When the basket tray is cut for any purpose, the integrity of
the earth bonding shall be fully maintained.
Flush mounted steel galvanised back boxes shall be provided to accommodate all final outlets and accessories.
Containment shall be coupled to the back boxes via steel conduit coupling & brass bush arrangement. Purpose
made patresses shall be provided to support steel back boxes located within partition walls.
All cabling shall be installed flush. All cabling drops and rises shall be protected by means of chased metal
conduit, flush finish. No surface installed cable shall be permitted. No cable capping shall be permitted as means
of mechanical protection.
The Contractor shall have deemed to have fully co-ordinated all the services including taking into account
mechanical and electrical coordination, structures and any other obstructions
Where routed above suspended ceilings, cable tray / basket and trunking shall generally be supported using
unistrut cradle or proprietary suspension system.
Where cable trays / baskets pass through fire compartment walling, the Contractor shall be responsible for fire
sealing around the tray / basket.
Conduit
All conduits shall be heavy gauge. Where conduits are to be installed in the floor screed, they shall be installed
at a depth and in a manner that will not reduce the strength of the floor or cause cracking of the screed.

Conduit shall be a minimum diameter of 25mm unless stated otherwise.
Where flexible conduit is required, it shall be metallic and limited to a maximum length of 600mm.
Trunking Installation
Cable trunking shall be galvanised steel throughout but shall not be installed until the cable trunking routes and
their method of installation have been agreed on site.
Cable Basket/Tray
All cable tray shall be complete with 45° gusseted corner pieces at tee junctions, crossovers and changes of
direction. This is a requirement to achieve minimum bending radii of cables.
Within suspended ceilings/bulkhead areas, the cable tray shall be suspended from purpose made unistrut channel
and drop rods or wall mounted top hat brackets. Within floor voids, the cable tray shall be fixed to the floor slab
ontop hat brackets.
Where cable trays pass through fire compartment walling, the contractor shall be responsible for fire sealing
around the tray/basket.

5.4 General LV Power
Scope of Works
The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to work a small power distribution system serving
general power outlets and dedicated items of equipment as required by the mechanical services layouts, interior
architects layouts and information and landscape architects detailed information.
Design Parameters
document.
System Description
The installation shall comprise all necessary components to form a complete low voltage power installation from
the final circuit distribution board to final outlets or fixed equipment.
The contractor under their contractual obligations shall ensure all necessary electrical supplies required for all
systems covered by this contract are catered for and included within their tender costs.
Refer to the small power drawings for the quantities power outlets required within the refurbished space. The
drawings also indicate typical provision for ancillary systems listed below:
 Outlets associated with security systems, PA systems, access control systems

 Outlets associated with cleaning sockets
 Outlets associated with Fire Alarm.
 Outlets associated with mechanical plant including fan coil units and water heaters
 Screed floor boxes, junction boxes and screed trunking systems served via radial circuits. All floor box
units to be frameless.(subject to Shop drawing approval)
 Lift general and secondary fire-fighting supplies
All new circuits will be wired as a conventional final ring circuits. All power circuits’ minimum cable size will be
4mm². All accessories will be manufactured by MK or equal and approved. Pending a review of final wall finishes,
it is proposed to install grey coloured socket outlets in order to comply with Building Regulations Part M
requirements.
All accessories suitable for flush mounting where indicated. Accessories shall be selected in accordance with
Building Regulations Part ‘M’ with consideration for accessibility, visibility and ease of use.
All accessories, cables and containment shall be flush mounted unless other stated, suitably fixed to the building
fabric, no cables or containment shall be fixed to the ceiling grid or suspensions.

The Contractor shall refer to standard architect drawings for typical elevations. In addition the Contractor shall liase
with all specialist sub-contractors with regards to their final equipment power supply requirements.
Plant areas shall be surface metal gang type with external services being a minimum IP44 rating suited to the
environment.
The mounting height of all accessories shall be in accordance with BS 8300.
Socket outlets are to be RCD/RCBO protected in accordance with the requirements of the IEE Wiring regulations.
The Electrical Contractor shall ensure that the small power installation complies fully with 543.7 of BS 7671 and to
that end it shall be assumed that all ring mains will have a leakage to earth of greater than 10mA. Dual earth socket
outlets shall be used throughout.
Cleaning Socket Outlets
Cleaning sockets will comprise single switched socket outlets provided at suitable locations such that any room,
corridor or ancillary area of the building is no more than 10m from a socket outlet. In individual rooms a minimum
of one outlet will be provided. Residual protection shall be provided with all associated circuits.
Switched Socket Outlets
The contractor will supply and install switched socket outlets with plastic finish front cover plates as where flush
fitting and metal where surface fixed. Metal clad outlets will be used in plant areas.
Ancillary Equipment Supplies
The contractor shall allow for the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of LV supplies to serve:-
 Electric water heaters.

 Access control systems.
 Fire alarm, security alarm & systems LV supplies.
In addition to the above, the Contractor shall ensure they have liaised with all other specialist systems providers
to ensure the necessary LV supplies & control are being provided to complete their systems installations.
Landlord Facilities
The contractor will supply and install a complete small power installation to serve landlord areas.

5.5 General Lighting
Scope of Works
The contractor’s scope of works will be;
 Supply, install, test, commission and set to work all complete general lighting systems to be as required
by the interior architects layouts and information and landscape architects detailed information.
Design Parameters
The ‘front of house’ internal lighting design for Block A and Block B has been carried out by the interior architect
The Contractor shall deal directly in regard to obtaining the relevant design information on luminaire performance
and complete control strategy.
The contractor shall refer to all information provided within the main contract package and deal directly in regard
to obtaining the relevant design information on luminaire specification and complete lighting control strategy.
System Description
The lighting drawings indicate the proposed scheme and in particular the luminaire type to be used in each area.
All luminaires will be located in accordance with details prepared by the Architect and selected to meet the clients’
approval. All luminaires mounted within areas of suspended ceiling will form an integral part of the false ceiling.
Recessed fluorescent luminaires will be fixed via proprietary clamping pieces to the Tee Bar and independently
suspended from structural load bearing members. Recessed downlighter luminaires will be supported via suitably
reinforced ceiling tile, with backing patress units.
Lighting sub-circuits will be protected by MCB's no greater than 10 amps with a design load of no more than 2/3
nominal trip rating of the protective device.
Where luminaires are wall mounted the wiring will terminate direct into each luminaire by means of a back entry
conduit box.
Where grid switch assemblies are used with voltages exceeding 230 volts the assemblies will be supplied complete
with phase barrier and cover plates. Labelled “Warning 400 Volts” in red 5mm high lettering.
All lighting switches will be rated at a minimum of 20 amp capacity.
All luminaires will utilise dimmable LED technology with high frequency ballasts and supplied complete, control
gear, transformers as appropriate with a lamp colour temperature of 4000K unless stated. A luminaire schedule
highlighting the relevant LED and fluorescent products are attached with in the Appendix section of this
specification.

All switching points with multiple lighting control options are to be clearly and concisely labelled to indicate control
procedure, user friendly operation is imperative.
In areas with daylight linking and external windows, lighting control will be provided by ceiling or soffit mounted
combined absence and photocell controlling the lighting. The photocell will detect natural day lighting and
compensate the artificial lighting accordingly to meet the design criteria.
Lighting Installation Co-Ordination
The ceiling and wall finishes vary throughout the building and as such, the contractor shall consult the architect’s
finishes details to determine the exact details in a given area and coordinate with ceiling, floor and wall finishes
and other trades to ensure there is no conflict of services.
The contractor shall ensure all necessary fixings are provided throughout, where suspended ceilings are provided
sufficient hangers are to be installed to manufacturer recommendations. The contractor shall include for all
necessary fixings within the Tender.
General Lighting Control (Standalone occupancy sensor)
Switch Room Lighting Control
All plant room areas will be provided with a manual switches located at the entrance to each space.
5.6 Emergency Lighting
Scope of Works
The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to work a complete emergency lighting installation
in accordance with the latest requirements of NFPA 70, Dubai Civil Defence and BS 5266. The contractor shall make
reference to the accompanying layouts.
The contractor shall supply and install all equipment as detailed on the EP-B-6500 series layouts, EP-B-6016
schematic layout and as required by the interior architect’s layouts and information and landscape architects
detailed information.
Design Parameters
document and the appropriate sections of the Silcock Leedham Standard Electrical Specification.
The emergency lighting design for Block A and Block B has been carried out by the interior architect The contractor
shall deal directly in regard to obtaining the relevant design information on luminaire performance and complete

control strategy.
The Contractor shall refer to all information provided within the main contract package and deal directly in regard
to obtaining the relevant design information on luminaire specification and complete lighting control strategy.
System Description (Monitoring type system)
Exit signs will be provided at final exit points in agreement with the fire strategy as well as strategic positions to
ensure maximum viewing distances are not exceeded. At final exit points, bulkhead luminaires will be positioned
externally to illuminate the immediate vicinity outside the exit.
On completion of the works the Contractor shall provide on behalf of the Client, an Emergency Lighting Test and
Completion Certificate following a 3 hour duration test.
System shall be addressable, self-diagnostic and automatic testing of luminaires.
The type of power systems for monitored type self-contained shall be at least Type 10, Class3, Level 1 in accordance
with NFPA 111, standard on stored electrical energy emergency and standby power systems.
The control equipment, self-contained luminaire and accessories shall be tested and approved by the laboratories
as an assembly and as a “system” to be acceptable as monitored type self-contained emergency lighting system.
The power system of the monitored type self-contained system shall be of type 10, which cut-in within 10 seconds
of the failure of the mains.
Power supply shall be of level 1 category which is installed where failure of the equipment to perform could result
in loss of life. (threat to building life safety)
5.7 CCTV, Access Control & SMATV Systems Scope of
Works
 The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to work a standalone ‘open protocol’ CCTV,
Access Control & Intruder Alarm Systems, each intelligently linked & networked to serve each building
individually.
 The contractor shall supply and install all equipment as detailed CCTV security schematic layout
and as per SIRA/DPS latest regulation and requirements.
 The contractor shall supply and install all equipment as detailed on the audio video intercom
schematic layout.
Design Parameters
document.
The development security systems shall generally comprise of the following integrated systems:

- Access Control Systems

- CCTV Systems
Access Control Systems
Access control provision is proposed for the basement and level 1 as shown on the security layout drawings.
The access control system shall comprise of proximity card swipe reader on the “non secure” side, mag lock /
shoot bolt locking mechanism, and on the “secure side”, push to exit release button, emergency break glass,
mag lock PSU, fire alarm interface.
Any access control arrangements within the tenanted units shall be at the discretion of the Tenant. No provision
shall be made under the basebuild other than traditional lock and key security.
The Contractor shall establish how many access keys or FOBS are required and make a suitable allowance within
the tender return.
CCTV Systems
Close Circuit Television Camera (CCTV) systems shall be deployed through the development as required by the
Dubai Police. Discrete fixed and PTZ dome IP based cameras shall be used throughout, connecting via the LAN to
the central controller / multiplexer and digital recording equipment located within the Landlords Admin Room.
Viewing monitors, controller and key pad shall be provided at the landlord control room.
The following areas shall be provided with CCTV coverage.
The following areas shall be provided with CCTV coverage.
• Lift Lobby - all

• Lift cars - all
• Landlord entry and exit locations
• Car parking area
• Security entry and exit point
• Comms room entry and exit point
The CCTV shall have sufficient frames per second (fps), and picture clarity (megapixels) to allow facial recognition
of any location in the space coverage, and operate in colour at low light. Pre-programmed tours and web based
viewing shall also be a function of the systems.
The camera positions are as shown on the security series drawings and have been determined following
engagement and confirmed requirements stated by the Dubai service. The final positions of cameras are subject
to further confirmation. The CCTV provision is proposed to serve the entire building as shown on the security
layout drawings.

Internal Cameras
Internal cameras shall be complete with suitable lens combination. Where a suspended ceiling exists the cameras
shall be semi-recessed into the ceiling using a reinforced aperture. Where no suspended ceilings exist the cameras
shall be suspended from pole mounts.
The cameras shall be suitable for operation from full sunlight (105 lux) through to artificial fluorescent lighting
(100-500 lux). The exact illumination levels shall be measured by the Contractor to ensure appropriate camera
selection prior to installation. Colour reproduction is required at all times.
The Contractor shall connect video and video motion signals to the control equipment using a network connection.
The Contractor shall conceal all cables within galvanised steel conduit/trunking where exposed. Where concealed
above ceilings support any cables on wire cable basket suspended from the slabs etc.
The contractor shall ensure that all CCTV equipment is of the same manufacturer and in line with the latest DPS/SIRA
regulations.
Recording Equipment
The contractor shall supply and install stand-alone recording equipment compatible with the CCTV installation.
The final location shall be agreed by the contractor with the client, the architect and the engineer. However for
the purposes of the Tender, the contractor shall allow for the recording equipment to be located within the office.
The system shall be connected to the IP network and record video and audio from all cameras and transmitters. It
shall allow playback to a desk Pc located within the office and via the System Administrators’ PC’s. The system shall
accept software based on a Windows PC running on the system.
The contractor shall supply and install all power and data supplies associated with the CCTV recording equipment
and provide all the necessary UPS back up as per latest SIRA/DPS regulations.
SMATV Systems
The contractor shall supply, install and complete system for central antenna television system as shown on
the drawings, as specified in the shown specifications and to final drawing from an approved supplier.
Contractor scope of work shall also include supply and installation of cable trays and trunking, TY socket
outlets and cable drawing for distribution for 24 Nos. of television signal on RF (directly on TY) and channels
from 4 satellites (as specified on the drawings) on IF to all outlet points indicated in the drawing. The
primary system equipment and its components shall be installed by a specialist subcontractor and is to be
approved by the resident engineer in accordance with the specifications as listed in this document.
The central antenna TY system supplier shall be an authorized distributor of such equipment, maintaining
local staff of specialist and trained technicians for engineering assistance, installation and maintenance of
the equipment. All of the equipment or components for the system installed shall be from the same
manufacturer, expect from items not included in their manufacturing range. Items no include in the range
of manufacturer shall be proposed to and separately approved by the engineer.

The system shall be capable of providing 24 free to air channels (selectable at site) from the dish antennas
connected. The system shall be made for the distribution of other channels is IF with the latest cascadeable
switching technology. The system shall be designed in such a way, that a maximum number of MATV /
SMATV channels can be distributed through the cable network, and as to anticipate for future additions of
polarities/ programs.

The system shall provide for reception of the following Satellites: 1) Arab Sat 2) Nile Sat 3) Hot Bird & 4 4)
INSAT 2E
The dishes for the satellite reception shall be solid construction with polyester powder coated finish to
provide maximum protection from UV exposure and weather to ensure a long life. The satellite dishes shall
be warranted for a minimum period of five years
The contractor shall be responsible for providing lightening protection for all roof top equipment and the
main equipment of the system. For the roof top equipment, the protection should include lightening
arresters for antenna mast. The satellite dishes shall be fitted with an adequate surge arrester at the point
where the cable gross into the building from the roof.
5.8 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
Scope of Works
 The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to work a new fire alarm system to serve the
all landlord areas with interfaces for the tenant areas.
Design Parameters
document.
Reference shall be made to the Fire Strategy Document and Dubai Civil Defence requirements and regulations.
System Description
A fully monitored automatic analogue addressable fire alarm system will be provided to serve the block A and
block B.
The system will fully comply with Local Dubai Authority, Fire Officer and Building Insurers Requirements and
provide a level of automatic detection coverage consistent with L1 as prescribed by BS 5839.
The automatic fire alarm system for the building will comprise of the following main components.
 Manual Call Points

 Automatic Fire Detection
 Electronic Fire alarm sounders
 Fire Alarm Beacons
 Manual call points
 Fire alarm interfaces
 Fire Alarm Panel

The new fire alarm system will have capacity for 20% future expansion and provide facility to be interfaced to a
remote monitoring station via a redcare telephone line.
Control Panel
The existing panel within the landlord area shall be utilised, the final location to be confirmed on site.
Automatic Detection
A selection of automatic smoke and heat detectors will be provided throughout the building. The choice of
detector will be selected to best suit the location and installation environment.
The existing detectors shall be disconnected and removed according to the construction phasing, including for
any cabling distributing from the landlords core area.
The detectors shall be positioned as shown on the fire alarm layout drawings to suit the proposed layout for the
Block A and Block B.
Automatic detection will be provided within ceiling voids where they are greater than 800mm.
All detectors will be fully addressable and will be manufactured to comply with BS5445. Smoke detectors will be
of the optical type. Heat detectors will be selected to suit the application.
Manual Break Glass Units
Manual break glass call points will be located at all final exits and strategic locations throughout the building to
comply with BS 5839. All call points will be flush mounted.
The existing call point positions represented at the escape pints adjacent the stair cores shall be retained.
Sounders
Fire Alarm sounders will be provided to achieve sounder level coverage in line with BS5839. Where practical in
all areas the sounder modules will be incorporated within the detection module.
The existing sounders shall be disconnected and removed according to the construction phasing, including for
Sounder Beacons

Electronic sounders beacons will be provided to plant areas and all areas with high ambient noise levels.
Sounders will be provided to give sounder level coverage in line with BS5839.
The existing sounders shall be disconnected and removed according to the construction phasing, including for
Sounders and Flashing Beacons will be provided to disabled / toilet areas and within small offices where person
of hard of hearing could be working alone.
Sounders will be used to provide an audible alarm of either 65 dB or 5bB above the normal background noise in
all areas of the building.
In areas detailed on the drawings the detection module will also comprise a sounder and flashing beacon module
and the VADS (Code of Practice for Visual Alarm Devices).
Door Hold Open Devices / Access Control
Where shown on the drawings the contractor will supply and install fire alarm interfaces to door hold open devices
and access controlled doors. Theis shall consist of new cabling as the existing interface units are to be retained in
position.
Cabling
All cabling will be a minimum of 1.5mm² 2-core LSF “firetuf” or equivalent soft skinned cabling. The outer
covering of the cables will be coloured red for fire alarm equipment.
All cables will be run on medium duty return flange galvanised cable tray, clipped direct and run within voids.
Where more than two cables are routed together, they will be installed on medium duty return flange galvanised
steel cable tray.
Mechanical protection will be provided to cabling installed below 1.2m.
Fire Alarm Outputs and Interfaces
The fire alarm system will provide a number of outputs and monitoring interfaces to external equipment, which
will be affected on receipt of a fire alarm signal.
Interfaces will be provided for the following as a minimum:-
 Security door release systems – Designated door security mag-locks to release.

 Access control doors – to release to open on alarm
 Mechanical Plant Operations – All designated mechanical services plant will be shut down on receipt of a
fire alarm signal via a designated interface unit. An override switch will be provided within the main fire

alarm panel which will give manual override facility of the mechanical services plant interface in order to
isolate plant shut down when the system is being tested.
 Lift – On activation of the fire alarm system the lift will automatically return to ground level and the lift
doors will open and remain open until the fire alarm has been reset.
 Fire Doors – Designated fire doors will close.
 Audio/Visual equipment within Main Hall
 Fire Protection Pumps
 Sprinkler Zone Valves
Power Supplies
The contractor will install all associated power supplies to serve all fire alarm equipment and interfaces. Main
panel power supplies will be derived from dedicated outgoing way on the main LV panel and will be suitably
identified, painted red and labelled 'FIRE ALARM DO NOT SWITCH OFF’. Additional supplies will be terminated
adjacent to the respective equipment via an un-switched fused connection units suitably labelled with the
equipment served. The Contractor will include for power supplies to all fire alarm ancillary equipment e.g. door
Mag-Locks etc.
5.9 Data – Structured Cabling Installation
The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to work the structured cabling installation for the data
and telecommunication system to serve Block A and Block B.
Design Parameters
document and in line with the latest System Provider regulations (DU/Etisalat).
System Description
All active equipment and computer equipment shall be provided by the clients ICT Provider. The Contractor shall
liaise with the ICT Provider, to ensure that all data structured cabling, fibre and copper back bone cabling,
requirements are catered for.
The installation shall be designed and installed to accommodate all outlets, with 25% spare capacity allowed for
on all arterial containment routes.
The contractor shall include for the following:
 Liaising with the clients ICT Provider

 Cabling and Infrastructure containment installation. All containment shall be designed with a minimum
of 25% spare capacity for future expansion. All types of containment to utilise manufactured corners
 Supply and installation of user outlets and patch panels
 Four number twin switched socket outlets per cabinet, fed from two number alternative Distribution
Boards for resilience. The latter shall be confirmed by the ICT provider
 Supply and termination of cables to user outlet and patch panel. Excel face plates on all network
terminations around the building
 Testing of all installed cabling
 Voice only cabling and distributed telephone multicore cables shall conform to BS6701
 Supply of cable management units within cabinets
 Supply of telephone RJ45-RJ11 adapters
Uninterrupted power Supplies and Power Distribution Units within cabinets shall be provided by the clients ICT
Provider.
Telecommunication service from the services provider shall be received in the main Telecom(s) rooms
located in the ground floor of building. The room shall be provided with stand-by power, air-conditioning
and dedicated distribution board as per service providers requirements.
The incoming cable services shall be terminated in the main MDF (Main Distribution Frame) and distributed
through the Floors Distribution Closets in each floor of the towers. The incoming service route to the site is
to be discussed and agreed with master developer and landscape architects.
Distribution to apartments shall be in accordance with a Fiber to home technology.
Apartment shall have recessed apartment Telecom junction (ONU) box near to the entrance and cabling to
all Tel/Data outlets will be carried out using Cat 6 UTP cable and terminated at the outlets. A containment
provision for Wi-Fi antennae from apartment ONU to provisional locations shall be provided.
RJ45 Outlets
Faceplates will normally be modular single or double gang, fitted with shielded RJ45 modules; two number for
single gang boxes and four number for dual gang boxes. The data module shall be category 6 compliant, and

shuttered. Faceplates shall be fitted flush to the wall, floor box or on dado trunking.
All outlets shall be mounted on a recessed back box no less than 45mm deep.
Data Outlets within the switch room areas shall be provided within metal clad accessories.
Telephone System Installation
The contractor shall supply and install Cat 6 cabling from the tenant Server Room to all the telecommunications
outlets detailed on the scheme drawings. The communications cables will be terminated at the faceplates
alongside RJ45 outlets, the contractor shall provide a dedicated telephone patch panel within the server room
within its own wall mounted cabinet to satisfy the number of RJ45 outlets designated for telephone usage on the
scheme drawings.

It is assumed that the lifts and fire alarm system telephone points have been provided already by the landlord.
All designated telephone lines to be left with a 2m coil within the server room to be routed to designated
distribution point instead of the patch panel if required by tenants.
Testing & Commissioning
All work shall be tested. This shall include visual inspections and appropriate mechanical and electrical tests.
Each outlet shall be tested, and a report presented in a format which is acceptable to the client.
Labelling and Documentation
Cables shall be labelled with an agreed coding system, to the clients’ standards and with agreed cable types.
Bundles of cables shall be labelled at a maximum of every 15 metres. Cables should be labelled where they pass
through walls on either side; and out of trunking and at both termination points.
Final Outlet labelling shall be numbered in a continuous range, which is related to the room number of the rack,
rack number, and patch panel outlet number.
All cables shall be secured at regular intervals and labelled according to the labelling scheme below, to be legible
for at least 15 years. All labels must be printed and must be black on white background.
5.10 Earthing and Bonding
Scope of Works
The Contractor shall supply, Install, test, commission and set to work a new earthing & bonding protection
system.
Design Parameters
document.
System Description
A complete earthing system will be provided within through Block A and Block B, with dedicated earth bars
adjacent each MDB and SMDB linked to the main earth bars located within the level one consumer intake room
All main CPC and equipotential bonding conductors will be connected to the main earth bar and each will be
numbered with proprietary cable markers.

Adjacent to the main earth bar will be provided and permanently fixed, a plastic label having a yellow background
and bearing in black a warning triangle and wording “WARNING – SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS - DO NOT
REMOVE”.
In addition, the label will identify from the numbered cable markers, each of the CPC and bonding connections,
clearly identifying each bond for each service.
Circuit Protective Conductors
An efficient protective conductor will be provided throughout every part of every circuit of the installation. The
size of the protective conductor will be at least in accordance with the minimum requirements of the IET
Regulations but where the protective conductor comprises a cable not forming part of a composite cable, no cable
smaller than 2.5 sq. mm if mechanical protection is provided, or 4.0 sq. mm where mechanical protection is not
provided, will be used. Such cables will have copper conductors with green/yellow insulation of the same type as
specified for the sub-circuit cables for that part of the installation.
The earth terminal of every socket outlet and minor power accessory will be connected to the protective
conductor. Where the protective conductor is formed by a conductor and auxiliary i.e. metal conduit, trunking,
duct or metal sheaths of cables, the earth terminal will be connected by means of a green/yellow LSF insulated
copper earth tail to an earth terminal incorporated in the associated box or enclosure.
Supplementary Bonding Conductors
Supplementary bonding conductors will be provided to ensure effectual equipotential earthing throughout the
building. Extraneous conductive parts in any room which contain an electrical accessory will be bonded. All hot
and cold pipework, showers, sinks and wastes will be directly and independently bonded to the protective
conductor.
All structural steelwork which will remain accessible when the building is complete, together with fixed metal
framework on which equipment or apparatus is mounted, will be bonded to the protective conductor.
Mechanical items exposed metal pipes will be bonded to the protective conductor but where metal to metal joints
exist and form a continuous electrical circuit of negligible impedance when tested, one bonding connection for a
group of radiators or pipework may be made. At least one such connection will be made for every 200 sq. m of
floor area served by the radiators and pipework. Supplementary bonding conductors will be copper cables,
insulated with green/yellow LSF. Bonding conductors will have a cross-sectional area not less than the smallest
circuit protective conductor, associated with the metalwork being bonded.
5.11 Testing and Commissioning
5.11.1 Scope of Works
The entire Works shall be inspected, tested and commissioned in accordance with all relevant British Standard
Specifications and Codes of Practice, the details given in this Specification and to the entire satisfaction of the

Engineer.
No section of the Works shall be concealed prior to testing and inspection.
5.11.2 Snagging and Defects
The Contractor shall undertake their own snagging and defects inspection to ensure that the performance
specification is met. The Engineer shall be invited to snag the works upon completion of The Contractors own
snagging. All certification shall be handed to the Engineer, signed and dated before PC will be given by the
Engineer.
5.11.3 Attendance
All necessary skilled and unskilled labour shall be provided for attendance duties during testing and commissioning,
including pre and post-test activities. Fuel, water, electricity, gas and other consumables required for testing and
commissioning shall be provided by the Contractor. All fuel tanks, lubrication systems and the like shall be left fully
charged at Practical Completion. Batteries shall be left in a fully charged condition.
Representatives present during inspection and testing shall be fully conversant with the system concerned and the
method of system and instrument operation.
Manufacturers or specialist representatives shall attend where necessary to ensure that the Works are tested and
commissioned in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. All items concerned with electrical
supplies shall be certified ready for use by the Contractor. The commissioning engineer shall attend site regularly
during the month prior to commencing work to become fully familiarized with the Works, to monitor the progress
of the installation and to ensure that all test facilities required for commissioning are correctly installed.
5.11.4 Test Certificates
Duplicate signed test certificates shall be provided. Test certificates shall identify the Contractor, the Project name
and the date of test. They shall list the apparatus or section under test, maker’s number (if any), the nature,
duration and conditions of test. The certificate shall include details of the test instrument including serial number
and the details of its calibration certificate. The result of the test shall be declared and the certificate signed by the
person conducting the test.
Where a test has been independently verified, the witness shall countersign the certificate. The name of the
company represented by the witness shall be added.
No test shall be valid until the test certificate is provided.
5.11.5 Witnessing of Testing and Commissioning
The Contractor shall demonstrate the specified works to the Engineer in a fully operational and commissioned
state. The Contractor shall accommodate the engineer in undertaking their role to witness commissioning on
behalf of the Employer. The Contractor shall undertake the commissioning and witness as satisfactory before

inviting the engineer to site having first provided a minimum of 5 working days’ notice.
The Engineer will attend site on one single day to witness a proportion of the recorded testing and commissioning
results, measurements and operation of systems. Should witnessing not be satisfactory due to the test results
being in excess of 10% of the results previously recorded by the Contractor then at the discretion of the Engineer,
the Contractor maybe required to completely re-test and commission the entire system at their expense within
the timeframe of the construction programme.
5.11.6 O&M Manuals and As Fitted Documentation
As fitted documentation shall be provided to enable the safe operation and maintenance throughout the building's
working life.
The Contractor shall provide three copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with BSRIA
Application Guide 1187 "Operating and Maintenance Manuals for Building Services Installations" (Class D) and the
appropriate British Standards, as referred to in Sections 2 and 3
The manual shall be fully indexed, load automatically into a front-page menu and include free software copies of
Adobe Acrobat reader and AutoCAD 2000 reader as standard.
Drawings shall be produced using AutoCAD 2000 with the AEC layering convention by the Contractor to be
incorporated within the CD-ROM manual.
The Contractor shall provide three copies of As Fitted drawings, bound into the Operating and Maintenance
Manual, in accordance with BS 8210 1986 guide to Building Maintenance Management, the appropriate British
Standards and produced to micro-filming standards to satisfy the criteria identified within BS 5536 for this process.
The drawings shall be to a minimum of A 1 size using a computer aided drafting facility which shall be based on
AutoCAD.
As fitted drawings shall be handed over complete at practical completion approvals.
5.11.7 Training of Maintenance Staff
The contractor shall allow for a period of full and comprehensive training of maintenance staff to familiarise them
with the correct operation and the running of the equipment. Training shall be during normal working hours on
site and shall be a minimum of, but not necessarily limited to, five days duration, allowance shall be based upon
ten non- consecutive visits, i.e. a 1/2 day per visit.

SECTION 6 – PARTICULAR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION


SD0 T0 Schematic Design Stage Issue Issued for 08.03.2018 CT CT
Tender 05.05.2018

6.1 Introduction
This Section of the Specification covers the design development, supply, delivery, offloading, installation and services
co-ordination, cabling, wiring, connecting, making off, testing, commissioning, handing over on completion in a
satisfactory working order and correction of defects during the defects liability period of all systems, items, parts and
apparatus specified in these documents, schedules and drawings.
The tender documents have been produced in accordance with the requirements of BSRIA document BG6/2012 up
to Technical Design Stage only (RIBA Stage 4). In that respect the Contractor shall carry out all detailed design activities
as detailed within BSRIA guide BG6 as follows-
Pro-Forma 5 A, B & C: Production of information (RIBA stage 4b and 4c)

Pro-Forma 6: Mobilization and Construction (RIBA stages 5)
Pro-Forma 7: Post Practical Completion (RIBA stage 6)
The contractor shall provide all design information as requested by the Project Manager for checking/ comment. As
a minimum this shall include the following-
 Completed detailed design packages at stage 4b

 MEP services installation/shop and record drawings
 Technical submissions for all plant and equipment.
 Commissioning method statements
 Handover documentation
 All test sheets.
All work shall conform to the best principles of modern practice and shall be carried out by competent tradesmen of
the appropriate Construction trades.
By acceptance of the contract the successful Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the successful operation of
all the works specified herein.
Inclusion shall be made for transport of all materials, plant and equipment to site, for all necessary off- loading
demurrage.
installation, commissioning and testing of any part of the electrical plant and / or items of equipment, included in this
contract.
This document is intended to provide the specification for the electrical installation for the new residential
development called Q Gardens located within Arjan, Dubai.

The project consists of a two four storey residential blocks that are positioned on top of a single-storey ground floor
retail & parking facility for the two blocks above, with associated communal areas located at ground floor and podium
level.
This document should be read in conjunction with all other related specifications and room data sheets appertaining
to the scheme, in particular Silcock Leedham Consulting Engineers Ltd. (SLCE) Standard Technical Specification.
The Contractor is strongly advised to visit site prior to tendering and make all due allowances for restrictions created
by the services and proposed routing. Such visits are to be by prior appointment only. The Contractor shall arrange
for the site visit in advance of attendance. No additional monies will be available for failure to comply with this
request.
Where the detailed requirements given in this section are at variance with the Main Contract Documents and Room
Data Sheets issues identified are to be raised, by the Tendering Contractor during the Tender period.
6.1.1 Standards
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall meet the requirements of, but not be limited to the following
documents and standards unless otherwise indicated in this specification:-
a) Conditions of Contract
b) Other Standards:-
o American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
o Guides to Good Practice as published by the Chartered Institution of Building Services

Engineers. (CIBSE)
o Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
o American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

o National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
o Loss Prevention Council (LPC)
o Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association (HVCA)
o Building & Engineering Services Association (B&ES)
o UK Institute of Plumbing Engineers (IoP)
o American Society of Plumbing Engineers
o Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA)
o Latest edition of British Standard Specifications and British Standard Codes of Practice (current
at date of tender), and European Norms.
o Water Regulations
o The Local Authority Environmental Health Officer's requirements.
o Local Municipality requirements
o The Local Civil Defence requirements.
o DEWA regulations
o BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installations.
o IET Wiring Regulations
o Building and Engineering Services Association (Formerly HVCA) Ductwork Specification

Standards, DW 144, 145 and 171 inclusive.
o Dubai Green Building Guide
o CIBSE Commissioning Codes and BSRIA Commissioning Guides
o All other standards specifically noted within the Technical Sections of this specification.
o BSEN 12056: 2000 Parts 1-5 Gravity Drainage Systems Inside Building.

o BS 8000 – Part 13: Code of Practice for Above Ground Drainage and Sanitary Appliances.
o Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL)
o Dubai Municipality Drainage Regulation
In the event of a contradiction between this specification and any Standards or Codes of Practice, this specification
shall be followed and the Contract Administrator informed.
6.1.2 Drawings and Specification
Prior to commencement on site the Contractor shall provide working/shop drawings which show the complete
mechanical requirements for the project. These drawings shall be completed to include the following services for
each building area:
o General HVAC drawings

o Detailed integrated room design and ceiling drawings
o Pipework installation drawings
o Air pressure regimes and air flow drawings
o Above ground drainage installation drawings
o Manufacturers drawings
o Drainage installation drawings
o All other major specified plant manufacturers’ drawings
o Automatic controls, panel and field wiring drawings.
o Schematic drawings, all services.
In addition to the above drawings the Contractor shall provide copies of all specifications, plant and equipment
schedules proposed to the Project Manager for comment. For further details relating to the comments / approval
process refer to the main contract documents.
6.1.3 Provision of Design Information
The Contractor shall provide the following information, in addition to the documents detailed in this specification, for
each service (including works designed by specialist sub-contractors):
 Shop drawings (full coordinated)
 Proposed final equipment selections
 Any supporting calculations to constitute the selection, including final ESP calculations.
The Project Manager shall be given the opportunity to comment upon each of the above documents, the commenting
procedure shall be as set out for all documents.

The Contractor shall produce a schedule of all comments received along with details of agreed actions taken or
clarification to resolve any issue raised. The schedule shall be a “live” document updated on a regular basis as the
design develops and the commenting procedure progresses.
Drawings shall not be re-issued for further comment until all previous comments have been satisfactorily resolved
and any amendments necessary incorporated.
6.1.4 Design Development Responsibility
The Architect’s and Structural Engineer’s drawings provided within the main contract tender documents (along with
main contractors proposals) are to be used for tendering purposes.
The contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination of all services with regard to their relationship with each
other, the building structures and architecture, electrical, sequence of installation, method of support and exact
locating of fixing holes to be drill in the structure.
The Contractor shall base his tender upon information detailed within this Particular Specification, information from
the Principle Contract and any relevant design guides stated, all of which shall not be taken as being exhaustive, but
as indicative of the quality and minimum standards required for the project.
The lead engineering services co-ordination role shall be undertaken by the Mechanical Services Contractor.
The Contractor shall undertake final client / user group liaison, as part of the team, in order to carry out this role
effectively.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the production of design drawings, installation drawings, record drawings,
builders work drawings and ‘As Fitted’ drawings as detailed elsewhere in this Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any design work associated with producing builders work drawings and all
builders work information associated with the services installations.
The Contractor shall allow for attending any meetings necessary to provide full design and co-ordination of the
services installation with all other trades.
The Contractor shall assess all plant room sizes, riser sizes, void depths and service routes ensuring that the Architect
and Principle Contractor is fully aware of their requirements and can accommodate them.
6.1.5 General Design Criteria
The design of the engineering services is based on the parameters and design data stated in the following clauses and
these shall not be changed or amended without prior written notice from the Contract Administrator.

Careful consideration should be given to external ambient design conditions as this could lead to plant/systems being
oversized and a reduction in operating efficiency.
External Conditions
 Summer Design Temperature - 46°C db/30°C wb

 Winter Design Temperature - 11.6°C db
Internal Conditions
As per Section 6.1.6
Plant Areas
To suit manufactures requirements
Infiltration and Air Permeability
The amount of air leakage shall be minimized to reduce the building heating/cooling loads to be below 10m 3/hr/m2
@ 50Pa. To comply with Dubai Green Building Guides and as agreed with the design team.
Design infiltration rates shall be 0.25 air changes per hour (summer)
CO2 Emission Target
The buildings shall be designed to operate in the manner that minimizes carbon dioxide emissions and meets the
minimum requirements of the Local Municipality regulations.
Ventilation
Air Movement The air movement within the occupied space will be in accordance with the CIBSE and will not
exceed the following value
Winter 0.1m/sec
Summer 0.25m/sec
Air balance regime Toilets and showers negative adjacent space Cafe/Kitchens negative to
adjacent space

General
U Values See Architects details
Infiltration Summer rate of 0.3 air changes
Domestic HWS
Storage 60°C (min)

All wash hand basins outlets to be blended to 43 °C

Pipe Sizing Parameters Maximum Pressure Drop 300Pa/m
Max Velocity 1.0m/s < 50mm Dia
Max Velocity 1.5m/s > 50mm Dia
Pump Selection 10% margin on volume flow, 21.1% margin on pressure drop
Primary Pump / Circuit 110% of design flow rate to ensure direction of flow.
Ductwork Classification Building Regulations Part L, Building and Engineering
Services Association (Formerly HVCA) DW 144
Ductwork Access/cleanliness DW/TM2 Level 1, TR/17.
Specialist extract ventilation system recommendations for cleaning

ductwork.
Ductwork Velocities Duct sizes based on current CIBSE calculation methods and the following
maximum velocity criteria:
Main riser 5.0m/s
Main run outs 4.0m/s
Supply and Extract fans 10% margin on volume flow 21.1% on pressure drop to account
for duct leakage
Specific Fan Power To comply with Local Municipality
Diffuser/Grille sizing To be selected for a terminal air velocity of 0.25m/s within the
occupied zone.
Hot Water Storage As per CIBSE recommendations
Cold Water Storage As per DEWA regulations

Fresh Air and Exhaust Louvers Maximum free area jet velocity 4.0 m/s and
maximum face velocity 2.5 m/s
Noise Criteria The building services shall be designed and installed to the noise criteria
as recommended in CIBSE guidance.
Building services shall incorporate attenuation to ensure meet the

recommended noise levels.
6.1.6 Room design criteria
The following services requirements have been used within the base build design to ascertain MEP requirements.
Area Summer Winter
Relative Humidity Relative

Temperature (°C) Temperature (°C)
(%) Humidity (%)
Apartments 23 50 23 40
Retail 23 50 21 40
Restaurant 23 50 21 40
Entrance
Lobby/Reception 23 50 21 40
MEP Plant Areas 30 N/A N/A N/A
Electrical Plant Rooms 22 50 N/A N/A
WC Areas 23 50 19 40
Car Park - - - -

Area Extract Air/Air Changes/hour Rate Fresh Air (l/s/person)
Apartments (Bedroom
- 115% of Extract Air rate
& Living Room)
Apartments - Bathroom 12.50 LPS l/s/WC (Continuous) -
Apartments - Kitchen 50 l/s (Intermittent) -
Retail 90% of Fresh Air rate 3.8 l/s/p + 0.6 l/s/m²
Gym 90% of Fresh Air rate 10 l/s/p + 0.3 l/s/m²
Entrance
90% of Fresh Air rate 2.5 l/s/p + 0.3 l/s/m²
Lobby/Reception
-
MEP Plant Areas -
-
Electrical Plant Rooms -
WC Areas 35 l/s/WC or urinal -
6 ac/hr (Normal) 10 ac/hr

Car park 6 ac/hr (Normal)
(Fire mode)
6.1.7 Occupancy Profiles
The following occupancy profiles have been determined with the users and used within the concept design thermal
analysis;
Whole development will be utilized from 24 hours/day/7 days a week
The Contractor shall confirm all room occupancy profiles prior to developing the detailed design thermal model and
advise the Project Manager of any consequence of any subsequent profile change.

6.1.8 Green Building Guides Compliance
The shop drawing design and construction team shall be responsible for the production of all necessary information
required to meet the Green Building regulations of the Local Municipality.
6.1.9 EU Energy Performance Certificate
Not applicable on this project.
6.1.10 LEED Assessment
Currently there is no formal LEED assessment.
6.1.11 Co-ordination of Services
The contractor shall ensure that the routing of ducts, pipework controls wiring containment and positioning of items
of equipment do not obstruct or prevent the effective operation and maintenance (either planned preventative or
corrective) of any items of equipment installed, including installations by others. Claims for extras due to lack of
liaison and/or co-ordination between trades will not be considered.
6.1.12 Builders Work Details
The contractor shall be responsible for the design of all ducts and final builders work requirements and provision of
all necessary bracketing for support of installed equipment and plant including positioning of access hatches and the
like. In addition to the above requirements, the contractor shall detail all access platforms and gantries required to
maintain the installed plant and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. The costs
associated with design, supply and installation of all fixed access platforms and gantries shall be included within the
contractors Tender.
The contractor will be required to undertake an external utilities detection survey along the proposed route of any
new service trench routed between the statutory service termination point, across highways and into the building.
The contractor shall include for the marking out of all existing services on and around the site and for the production
of a comprehensive record drawing (produced in AutoCAD) indicating the extent of the existing services detected.
Builders work drawings are to be produced by the Contractor and approved by the project manager.

6.1.13 Technical Queries
Should any doubt exist to the interpretation of this specification and extent of work covered hereby, any technical
queries should be addressed to:-
Lead Consultant
CVTEC Plus Architectural Design Consultancy
P.O. Box 31110, Dubai, UAE
Tel. +971 4 435 6172
Fax +971 4 435 6173
The Contractor shall allow 7 working days for a reply to such queries by the engineer from receipt of such information.
6.1.14 Site Waste Management
The Contractor shall comply with the Site Waste Management Plan and ensure that all removed, surplus and
redundant materials are correctly segregated into material type, temporarily stored on site and arrange for its
collection by an appropriate Licensed Waste Disposal Company.
6.1.15 Asset Registers
The contractor shall include for producing a full site asset register.
All new item of equipment installed as part of the works shall be provided with a unique asset registration code along
with equipment references which will be uploaded to the client’s database.
The contractor shall allow for all works and liaison with Dubai Properties associated with this activity and in full
accordance with their requirements and recommendations.
Asset register shall include but is not limited to;

 Asset type (fan/condenser unit etc)
 Make
 Model
 Serial Number
 Year of build (if listed)
 Location of installation (by floor/area/room etc)
 Purchase cost

 Any additional installation costs

 Parent asset (if applicable)
The final details of the above are to be finally agreed in advance with Emaar and be undertaken in full accordance
with their requirements and recommendations.
6.1.16 Plant Maintenance and Access.
A plant maintenance and access report shall be written during the shop drawing stage to demonstrate that there is
adequate plant access and that plant can be removed and replaced easily. Details of any lifting equipment or mobile
cranes shall be included along with potential mobile crane locations. The removal and replacement of al plant and
equipment shall be detailed. This report will ultimately be incorporated in to the building manual. All equipment that
has back up redundancy required as part of the building design shall be configured such that the damaged component
can be removed and replaced without the need for a plant shutdown and hence no disruption to building operation.
6.2 General Description of Project
The project consists of a two four storey residential blocks that are positioned on top of a single-storey ground floor
retail & parking facility for the two blocks above, with associated communal areas located at ground floor and podium
level.
6.3 Outline Description of Works
The engineering services are to reflect the aspirations of the client by providing a high quality development but give
them as much flexibility as possible to not limit them to fixed layouts in the future as much as possible.
They are to provide a modern, low energy, efficient and inspirational working environment for the Staff and visitors.
The Mechanical Engineering Services works include, though not be limited to, the design, supply, and installation,
testing, commissioning and setting work of the following:
a) The finalisation of the design development of the engineering services to comply with the employers
requirements.
b) Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of new cooling within the building including but
not limited to packaged air cooled chilled water plant, pipework, valves, fittings, pumps, pressurisation
units, system dosing pots, air and dirt separators, thermal insulation, water treatment etc.

c) Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of new domestic hot and cold water services
installations to serve the building including, tanks, booster sets, electric water heaters, pipework,
valves, thermal insulation, chlorination, and controls, etc.
d) Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of new above and below ground drainage and
storm water drainage installations including pipework, fittings, etc
e) Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of new general fresh air make up supply air
ventilation services installations including ductwork, dampers, fittings, fans, air handling units,
attenuators, grilles, diffusers, louvres etc.
f) Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of new NFPA and local civil defence compliant
sprinkler and firefighting system, including pipework, valves, flow meters, drain lines, sprinkler heads,
fire hose reel cabinets, landing valves, standpipes, fire hydrants, ring main, controls, thermal insulation
etc.
g) Provision of plant, equipment, ductwork and pipework distribution thermal insulation.
h) Liaison with other service providers and contractors employed on the project to ensure that a fully
coordinated installation is provided. Ensure that the routing of services, ducts, pipework, controls
wiring containment and positioning of items of equipment do not obstruct or prevent the effective
operation and maintenance (either planned preventative or corrective) of any items of equipment
installed, including installations by others.
i) Provision of all builders works drawings to the architect and structural engineers for approval prior to
undertaking the works on site including the extent of access platforms and service gantries etc.
j) Provision of all builders works associated with the above services installations including, making good,
fire stopping, access gantries, secondary support steelwork, access platforms, etc.
k) Provision of installation and working drawings which show the complete mechanical requirements for
the project. These drawings shall be completed to include the following services for each area:-
a. All ventilation drawings
b. Pipework Installation drawings
c. Above ground drainage installation drawings
d. Automated controls drawings
e. All other major specified plant manufacturers’ drawings
f. Schematic drawings, all services.
l) In addition to the above drawings, provide copies of all specifications, plant and equipment schedules
proposed to the Contract Administrator for comment. For further details relating to the comments /
approval process refer to the Main Contract and Standard Specification.
m) Provision of all supplementary design and construction information for the successful completion of
the project including but not limited to;

a. Electrical power loads and control wiring information

b. Size and weight of plant and equipment
c. Health and Safety documentation
d. Information to Statutory authorities
e. Information for local municipality compliance
f. Information for local civil defence compliance
n) Be responsible for the design of all ducts and builders work requirements and provision of all necessary
bracketing for support of installed equipment and plant including positioning of access hatches and the
like. In addition to the above requirements, the Contractor shall detail all access platforms and gantries
required to maintain the installed plant and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements. The costs associated with design, supply and installation of access platforms and gantries
shall be included within the Contractors Tender.
o) Testing and commissioning of all services installed altered and extended under this contract to CIBSE
Commissioning Code M.
p) Provision of ‘as fitted drawings’ and operation and maintenance manuals
q) Provision of asset registers and asset tagging in full accordance with the requirements of the hotel
operator
r) Provision of first twelve months maintenance of all installed plant and equipment in full accordance
with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations.
6.3.1 Existing Services Strip Out
Not applicable in this project.
6.4 Incoming Services
6.4.1 Description of Works
The Contractor shall design supply install test and commission the following incoming services installations including
all associated liaison to obtain construction NOC (NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATE) and direct costs associated with the
provision of the new supplies with the associated supply authorities, generally as indicted on the drawings and
described in the specification, including but not limited to:
 New metered raw mains cold water supply which is to be installed to take full account of the anticipated
daily water demand for the current development proposals. Based on these current proposals the
incoming mains cold water supply has been calculated at 6 l/s based on a 6 hour refill period with
90mm pipe size.

 New local authority drainage connection. Final building sewer connection to the external sewerage
network shall be Contractor’s responsibility in compliance with the Local Authority and EWA Water
Standards & Specification.
The incoming main will also be responsible for the initial fill and top up of the firefighting water reserve, as will be
serving a combined storage tank.
The Contractor shall design supply install test and commission the new incoming services to serve the development.
The services will be designed such that the site pipework distribution from the boundary meter locations across the
site are sized to support the full site.
6.5 Ventilation Installation
6.5.1 Design Philosophy
The Contractor shall develop the design, supply, install, test and commission the following mechanical supply and
extract ventilation systems to serve the development.
The systems and services shall generally comprise of, but shall not be limited to the following:
 Mechanical supply and extract ventilation to all areas of the building as indicated on the drawings,
serviced by 4No. roof top Fresh Air Handling Units (FAHU) complete with integral thermal wheel.
 2No. Recirculating Air Handling Units (RAHU) providing ventilation and cooling to the
landlords/communal corridor areas.
 2No. Energy Recovery Units (ERU) providing ventilation and cooling, with integral cross flow plate heat
exchanger to the gym & retail areas.
 Secondary ductwork supplied by Fan Coil Units to provide Air conditioning to the spaces.
The contractor shall develop the design supply, install, test and commission all plant, equipment, ductwork and
fittings as indicated on the drawings, described in the specification and required to provide complete and working
installations.
6.5.2 Supply and Extract Ventilation
There are 4No. (FAHU) located at roof level serving all apartments (2No. FAHU per tower block) and 2No. RAHU on
the roof serving the landlords/communal circulation areas (1No. RAHU per tower block).
Each FAHU services approximately half of each tower, with the ventilation ductwork distributing through “mini risers”
routed through each of the apartments, where it locally serves a single or back-to-back apartments per floor, off the
local riser.
Air Handling Unit Framework

All air handling unit sections are manufactured in modular form, for ease of handling, delivery and installation on site.
The modular sections are bolted together through CNC punched plates welded to the unit framework. Self adhesive
gasket tape is used to ensure an airtight seal on the sectional joins.
All sections are manufactured from a minimum of 18 S.W.G. galvanised steel penta post framework. The mitred
corner joints are fully welded to form a strong rigid self supporting structure that prevents distortion and drumming
to pressures in excess of 2500Pa. The framework is double skinned and insulated with 50mm mineral wool to achieve

a Eurovent thermal bridging Class TB3. Double skinned and insulated intermediate cross members are welded into
the sections to accommodate access doors and to facilitate component removal.
Once the unit sections are fabricated and welded, zinc rich primer paint is applied to all welded areas.
Air Handling Unit Panels

All enclosure panels are suitable for flush mounting into the unit framework. The panels are fixed to the air handling
unit via colour coded drill screws to match the exterior finish. This in turn compresses the panels onto self-adhesive
gasket tape to ensure an airtight seal. Panel deflections comply with BS EN 1886; casing Class 2A. All panels are
removable; however, where regular access is required hinged type access doors are fitted.
All enclosure panels have a nominal thickness is 50mm. The outer skin panel material is manufactured from plastisol
coated galvanized steel finish to BS 10 A 05 Goosewing Grey. The Inner skin is manufactured from 0.8mm galvanized
steel. Insulation is CFC / HFC free expanding polyurethane foam, the density is 45 kg/m³ with a thermal conductivity
no greater than 0.023 W/mK.
The acoustic properties of the panel are as detailed below:

Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K
Insertion Loss (dB) 19.8 19.9 24.0 28.6 23.9 33.0 54.5 58.1
All gaskets and sealant used in the manufacture of the air handling unit sections are treated with a fungicide to
prevent microbiological growth.
Air Handling Unit Access

All access doors are hinged and adjustable in two dimensions. The door catches are quick release double action, cam
locks. Viewing windows and bulkhead lights are fitted to all sections that require regular maintenance. Self-adhesive
gasket tape is applied to the access door framework to ensure an airtight seal. Access walkways are provided utilizing
the welded galvanized steel base panel capable of supporting weight of two men, tools and equipment.
Air Handling Unit Base

The AHU base is manufactured from 100mm RSC Shot Blasted. Each sectional corner of the AHU base is pre-punched
with 35mm diameter lifting point.
Air Handling Unit Leakage

The air handling unit is manufactured to comply to a leakage standard BS EN 1886: 1998, Table 2; 400Pa negative
pressure and BS EN 1886: 1998, Table 3; 700Pa positive pressure.
As a basis for their tender the contractor is base their unit selections on the following manufacturers shown in
appendix A.

6.5.3 Ductwork
All supply and extract air ductwork systems shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet metal in accordance with
DW144 class ‘A’ air leakage in accordance with the standard specification.
Ductwork installations shall encourage low resistance through the system to improve specific fan powers.
Flexible ductwork shall be used to make the final connections to supply and extract grilles and diffusers, and must
not exceed a maximum length of 500mm or an inclusive angle of 45°.
The Contractor shall include for the preparation of fabrication drawings which are to be submitted for approval prior
to manufacture. The final location of ductwork, fan, and accesses shall be coordinated with other services and any
building restrictions.
6.5.3 Finishes
All services shall be concealed in risers and ceiling voids, or located in ‘Back of House’ areas such as plant decks.
Therefore no special finish is required other than manufacturer’s standard finish.
6.5.5 Thermal Insulation
All supply air ductwork from the general ventilation air handling unit including flexible ductwork and the fresh air
intake and exhaust ducts associated with the heat recovery ventilation units shall be thermally insulated and vapour
sealed in full accordance with the standard specification. Thermal insulation shall be foil faced mineral wool.
Aluminium cladding will be required within plantroom areas.
All return air / extract air ductwork shall be insulated where running within the internal vertical service risers and roof
top plantroom conveying heat recovery air back to the central plant.
All external ductwork and within plant rooms, roof top and plant decks shall be finished in aluminium cladding.
Polyisobutylene (PIB) finish shall not be allowed.

6.5.6 Volume Control Dampers
The Contractor shall install volume control dampers in all ductwork systems as indicated on the drawings and
described in the specification in full accordance with the standard specification.
6.5.7 Ductwork Access Doors
The Contractor shall install duct access doors in all ductwork systems as indicated on the drawings and described in
the specification in full accordance with standard specification and DW144.
6.5.8 Test Holes
Test holes for instruments shall be positioned adjacent to all dampers and items of equipment to enable fan duties
to be tested and regulating dampers adjusted to achieve the correct air flow rates. All test holes shall be positioned
in accordance with BS848 Pt 1 and across the width of the duct. All test holes shall be provided with removable plugs.
Where the ductwork is insulated the insulation shall be finished off neatly around the test holes to leave them
exposed.
All test holes shall be indicated on the as fitted drawings.
6.5.9 Attenuators
Where required to meet the acoustic requirements of the project, the Contractor shall supply, install and put into
operation duct mounted attenuators.
The attenuators shall be complete with acoustic infill media of rigid tissue faced rock wool guaranteed against erosion
with air velocities up to 30 metres per second and splitters shall be tested to BS 476, Part 7, and have a class one
flameproof surface.
The acoustic infill material shall be held in position behind a galvanized perforated sheet and a plastic membrane to
prevent absorption of moisture and release of particles into the air stream.
The attenuators shall be enclosed in a pre-galvanized mild steel sheet. The casing shall be of standard construction
for low velocity, low pressure ductwork system. All casing penetrations must have swarf traps. Length of fixings shall
be chosen to fit within swarf traps.

The complete attenuator assembly shall be inspected and the ends sealed to prevent ingress of dirt during transit and
when stored prior to installation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the attenuators are installed fully in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. The Mechanical Sub-Contractor shall also ensure that all necessary transformation pieces are included
for within his tender.
6.5.10 Grilles and Diffusers
The Contractor shall allow for the design supply, delivery, installation and full commissioning of all diffusers, grilles
and louvres
All supply air diffusers shall be of the square louvre faced four way fixed or linear slot diffuser, extract grilles shall be
similar when installed in the same area.
Toilet extract grilles shall be of the standard valve type.
All diffuser and grille colours shall be confirmed with the Architect.
As a basis for their tender the contractor is base their unit selections on the following manufacturers shown in
appendix A.
6.5.11 Fire & Smoke Dampers
The Contractor shall supply and install fire and smoke dampers in all ductwork systems that penetrate fire and smoke
compartments as indicated on the architect’s drawings, and where required by local Civil Defence.
6.5.12 Electrical
All wiring shall comply with the current edition of local authority regulations.
Where necessary internal electrical components shall be wired to the outside of the unit and terminated in a suitable
enclosure or isolator to prevent drilling of the unit casing on site.
6.5.13 Design Margins
The current design includes for all fans to be statically and dynamically balanced to achieve a balance grade of 6.3 in
accordance with table 1 of BS 6861 Part 1. At shop drawing stage, details of vibration isolation shall be provided to
the engineer for approval.
All fans have been sized to provide 10% margin on flow and 21.1% margin on pressure drop from the calculated design
figures, and the final selection of equipment by the contractor shall retain this margin. The contractor shall be
required to identify design margins in all submitted calculations and equipment selection.

6.6 Natural Gas Installation
Not applicable in this project
6.7 Hot and Cold Water Services
The Contractor shall develop the design, supply, install, test and commission the following hot and cold water services
installations as generally indicated on the drawings and described in the specification to serve the building, including
but not limited to;
 New incoming metered raw mains cold water service (MCWS) from the local authority meter to serve
the development
 Liaison with local authority for construction No Objection Certificate
 Boosted cold water service (BCWS) complete with break tank, booster set and fittings to serve the
landlord areas as required and future provision for Retail tenant fit-out
 MCWS from bulk cold water storage tank to serve domestic and fire-fighting cold water system
(Landscape equipment provided and detailed by others)
 Electric water heater units fed from the site wide boosted cold water service serving all hot water draw
off points, sanitary ware and equipment located within the WC area
 Cold water feed to plant equipment and rooms fed from site wide boosted cold water service
 Integrate the sub-meter to the Building Management System or Central Control and Monitoring System
to allow real time profiling and management of water demand and consumption.
All new hot and cold water services pipework shall be: Domestic cold water below and above grade:
A. PVC-U pipes and pipe fittings to BS 3505 Class E with push fit joints for below grade
installation.
B. PPR, polypropylene (Random polymer) as specified by DIN 8078 & 1354991having density
0.909 / cm2 / PPR pipes are joined using fusion welding.
Or PVC-U pipes to BS3505 with solvent welded fitting to BS 4346 for above grade Installation.
C. Cold water pipes embedded in builder's work shall be PEX tubes Cross-Linked PE pipes within
polyethylene sleeve.
Domestic hot water:
A. PPR, polypropylene (Random polymer) as specified by DIN 8078 & 1354991having density

B. Hot water pipes embedded in builder's work shall be PEX tubes Cross-Linked PE pipes within a
The hot and cold water systems shall be completed with all necessary draining, venting, isolating valves, double check
valves, strainers and pressure reducing valves, necessary to comply with the local water authority requirements, in
addition to those required to commission and maintain the system.
Line size isolation valves shall be provided on the final connection to each draw off or item of equipment whether or
not indicated on the drawings in accordance with the standard specification.
The hot water system will be via localized electric water heaters. The hot water system distribution shall be single
pipe flow only in accordance with the standard specification.
It is a requirement that all pipework within the building is to be routed in a concealed manner, utilizing ceiling voids,
and dedicated risers wherever possible. The contractor shall ensure that all pipework distribution and components
shall be fully accessible to facilitate ease of maintenance.
All pipework and fittings that are not “boxed in” or concealed but exposed to view in occupied areas shall be
chromium plate.
All hot water pipework and fittings shall be thermally insulated in full accordance with the Standard Specification.
The systems shall be duly flushed, pressure tested and chlorinated as per the standard specification.
The contractor shall ensure that the hot and cold water services systems are operating at the same static pressure’s
(dynamic) to prevent fluctuations in water temperatures where thermostatic mixing valves are utilized.
The contractor shall include or making the final connection to all items of sanitary ware and equipment that requires
a hot water supply.
Thermostatic mixing valves shall be supplied on the hot water final connection to all WHB, Showers and ablution taps
to limit the maximum draw off temperature to 43oC (adjustable).
6.7.2 Incoming Metered Mains Cold Water
The contractor shall provide a new incoming main complete with external isolation valve and chamber, internal stop
cock, new pulsed output water meter, double check valve and any other fittings required to meet the local water
authority regulations and to service the building.
The incoming mains cold water shall be stored within a dual compartment tank located within the ground level tank
room. The tanks shall be sized for 24 hour domestic, as per local water authority requirements, and include a fire
water reserve as per NFPA and local civil defence requirements.
Contractor to carry out the responsibility to secure all required approvals from DEWA/Local Authority prior to the
connection of new water mains.

6.7.3 Bulk Cold Water Storage Ground Tank
The bulk cold water storage ground level tank for the development shall be Reinforced Concrete Tank with internal
non-toxic GRP water tank lining suited for potable water use. The storage tanks shall comply with the applicable Local
Regulations & International Regulations for Potable Water Storage Tanks.
 Jointing materials shall be suitable for drinking water and shall be of a non-toxic nature.
 All facilities for pipe connections shall be made at the Manufacturer's works. Pipe connections for up
to 50mm nominal bore pipework shall be screwed sockets. Pipe connections for pipework 65mm
nominal bore and above shall be studded pads suitable to receive counter flanges.
 All tank covers shall be provided with purpose made manholes of a minimum 800mm (w) x 600mm (h)
with hinged or bolted lids. Tanks shall be provided with internal and external ladder to allow access
both to the tank interior and to the ball float valve.
 Tank shall be provided with vent cowls to adequately ventilate the interior.
 An approved pattern vortex inhibitor shall be fitted within the storage tank at the start of the suction
and drain pipes. The inhibitor shall prevent a vortex within the tank and be used to overcome a large
'dead-water' area at the bottom of the tank.
 Provide an internal separation and concrete tank wall to divide tank into two separate water
compartments such that one half of the tank can be drained and cleaned while keeping the other half
in operation.
 Provide tappings for all piping connection as indicated on the drawings. All connections to tanks shall
be factory constructed and tested. In no case shall tappings be done on site.
 Vent cowls and overflows shall be fitted with a suitable galvanized mesh screen to prevent insects and
vermin from entering the tank.
 All internal fixings, supports, tie bars etc. shall be entirely corrosion resistant or of stainless steel grade
316L
 Detailed construction drawings of all tanks shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
manufacture.
The tanks shall then be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide a hydrostatic tank contents gauge for each water storage tank compartment.
The gauge shall be calibrated for the dimensions of each respective tank and be mounted on the wall adjacent to the
tank along with a suitable label. Interconnecting pipework between the gauge and the tank shall be small bore soft
copper suitably protected in locations where it is exposed to damage.
The water supply for the building shall distributed up risers from the low level tank / ground level pump room to the
high level roof water storage.
6.7.4 Water Storage Tanks – Roof GRP tanks
Roof tanks shall be Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) INSULATED water tank complete with partition wall inspection
cover and pipe connections. The tanks shall be suitable for ultra violet light and comply with BS Standards and with
the Local Authority Regulations.

The tanks shall be manufactured by Hot Press Molded method to the quality standard requirements of BS EN ISO
9001: 2008 and shall comply with BS 6920: 2000.
The panels shall be manufactured from sheet molding compound (SMC) using hot press molded method at high
temperatures up 150°C using unsaturated polyester resins and glass fiber.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the drawing. The details of the tank
shall be approved by the Engineer before any installation works begins. Water leakage test shall be carried out for a
period of 48 hours for the tanks and a 5 year guarantee from the manufacturer is required. The tank shall have the
following additional components in addition to the components listed above:
 High level electric float switches interlocked to their pressure pumps.
 Vent with wire mesh
 Interconnecting pipes with valves for all tanks (equalizing line)
 Overflow and drain connection
 Access cover and access ladder
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all structural steel bases and assemble tank in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s instructions. The tanks shall then be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The tank shall comply fully with the current local authority regulations and include screened vent, raised ball valve
chamber and screened over flow. The tank shall also be provided with the facility to be provided with temperature
sensor and high /low level gauges to monitor tank water contents from the BMS.
The Roof GRP tank shall be supported on Builders work level base / concrete piers as required of sufficient strength
to support the load of the tank, the level base / concrete piers finished tolerances shall be in accordance with the
tank supplier’s requirements and recommendations.
The tank shall be fitted with a suitably sized float valve arrangement. The contractor shall ensure that sufficient head
room is provided to permit correct operation and maintenance access.
Storage tanks shall be warranted by the manufacturer until the end of the defects liability period.
6.7.5 Boosted Cold Water Service (BCWS)
The domestic cold water supplies to the building are to be provided from the boosted cold water system.
This system will be primarily served by the ground level bulk concrete cold water storage tank that will serve a suitably
sized cold water storage roof GRP tank, both tanks complete with level control, and associated packaged booster set,
with a duty and standby arrangement.
The packaged cold water booster set that will provide a boosted cold water service to serve the landlords domestic
water outlets.
The tanks and booster set are to be located within the plant room area generally as indicated on the drawings.

The roof tank shall be externally flanged, sectional GRP construction complete with raised ball valve chamber to
accommodate the appropriate air gap provisions and drip tray with drain to discharge into the above ground drainage
installations via an air gap and trapped gully arrangement.
Adequate access for maintenance must be provided around the perimeter of the tank and booster set.
The booster set shall comprise of a packaged cold water booster set incorporating multiple inverter driven variable
speed pumps to provide run and standby operation together with a suitably sized pressure vessels. All necessary
valves, flexible connections, non-return valves, etc. shall be installed, as recommended by the manufacturer. The
booster set shall be provided with separate stand-alone control panel. Bypass line with isolation valve shall be
provided across the booster pump set.
The packaged cold water booster set controls shall have the following control functions as a minimum:
a) An LCD display giving information to the user in "plain English" making programming, commissioning
and operating the unit very "user friendly".
b) Volt free relays for Building Management System interface signals to monitor equipment status
remotely and provide remote on / off control.
c) Automatic shut-down of pumps in the event of catastrophic pipe work failure.
d) Programmable delayed pump starting and/or reduced speed after a power cut to prevent system pipe
work damage caused by the effects of water hammer.
e) Anti-seizure feature to rotate idle pumps.
f) Electronic low water protection with automatic re-check of water presence
g) Comprehensive variable speed pump controls to reduce system noise and component strain.
h) 10 Alarm memories with date & time stamp for easier diagnostics of onsite problems.
i) Service call required reminder.
The cold water booster set will be sized and selected to provide a boosted domestic cold water service pressure of
up to 2.5 bar adjustable at the furthest outlet. System to include a pressure reducing valve on the outlet (if necessary)
to ensure the required design pressure is not exceeded.
The booster set to be commissioned by the manufacturer on the contractor’s behalf.

6.7.6 Electric Water Heaters
The hot water outlets within the bathroom and kitchen area shall be served by localized electric water storage
heaters.
The outer casing of the water heater shall be manufactured in white textured plastic coated corrosion proof steel.
The thermal insulation shall be CFC free fire retardant expanded polyurethane, 40mmthick.
The water container shall be glass lined horizontal type, with internal air gap system. Pressure tested to 15bar.
Each water heater shall be complete with:

 Safety group valve (pressure/temperature relief/drain/check valve)
 Drain cock with hose union
 Electrical immersion heater elements
 Temperature gauge
 Variable water temperature thermostat
 Manual reset high limit cut
All water heaters shall have a minimum 5-year guarantee.
All safety relief drains from the water heaters shall discharge to the nearest floor trap via a tundish arrangement.
All relief drains shall be in copper pipework.
6.7.7 Pipework and fittings
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary pipework and fittings as indicated and described in the
specification.
Domestic cold water below and above grade:
A. PVC-U pipes and pipe fittings to BS 3505 Class E with push fit joints for below grade
installation.
B. PPR, polypropylene (Random polymer) as specified by DIN 8078 & 1354991having density
C. Cold water pipes embedded in builder's work shall be PEX tubes Cross-Linked PE pipes within

Domestic hot water:
A. PPR, polypropylene (Random polymer) as specified by DIN 8078 & 1354991having density
B. Hot water pipes embedded in builder's work shall be PEX tubes Cross-Linked PE pipes within a
The hot and cold water systems shall be complete with all necessary draining, venting, isolating valves, double check
valves and strainers necessary to comply with the local water authority requirements, in addition to those required
to commission and maintain the system.
Flexible pipework for final connections to outlets shall not be used.
All concealed pipework and fittings shall be thermally insulated in full accordance with the standard specification.
Thermal insulation shall be Zero ODP (cfc and hcfc free) phenolic foam installed fully in accordance with the
manufacturers requirements.
A complete vapour seal shall be made to all cold water services pipework, including all valves and fittings, even at
support points on roof.
Provide water hammer arrestors as shown in the drawings to prevent development of water hammer in the
distribution system. Water hammer arrestors shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the
Institute of Plumbing, Good Engineering and Code of Practice.
6.7.8 Valves and Fittings
Generally, all valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer.
All gate, globe, angle, and swing check valves as a group shall be of the same manufacturer. All valves 50 mm and
smaller shall be threaded and have bronze bodies.
All valves 65 mm and larger, unless otherwise indicated, shall be Iron Body Bronze Mounted (IBBM) type, i.e. with
bronze trim, and shall be flanged (or grooved for grooved coupling joints).
All valves and strainers 65mm and larger for use on potable water supply systems shall either have bronze
construction or iron bodies with fusion bonded epoxy coating on all parts in contact with water.
All valves on potable water supply systems shall be tested by the Water Research Centre (WRc) and listed in the water
fittings and material directory.

Each valve shall be marked (engraved, stamped, or cast on each valve or metal tag, permanently attached to the
valve) at the factory with the following minimum information:
A. Manufacturer's Name.
B. Catalogue or Figure No.
C. Size and Pressure Class.
Arrows to indicate direction of flow on check, gate, angle, non-return, and eccentric plug valves.
Gate Valves
a. Gate valves shall be of the full way type with none rising stems and fitted with a hand wheel.
b. 50mm N.B. and below gate valves shall be to B.S. 5154 and shall have B.S 1400-LG2 gunmetal body,
bonnet, stem and wedge. Glands shall be lubricated packed type, capable of re-packing under
pressure. Wedges shall be of the solid type. The bonnet shall be of the screwed type. Pressure rating
shall be PN20. Connections shall be screwed to B.S 21 tapered thread.
c. 65mm N.B. and above gate valves shall be to B.S. 5163 and shall have B.S 1452 Gr 220 cast iron body,
bonnet and wedge. Stems shall be aluminium bronze to B.S. 2874CA 104. Glands shall be lubricated
packed type, capable of re-packing under pressure. Wedges shall be of the solid type with gunmetal
facing ring. Pressure rating shall be PN20. Connections shall be flanged to B.S 4505 table 16/11. The
valve shall be painted to protect it from corrosion.
Check Valves
a. Check valves shall be of the swing pattern, low pressure loss, suitable for horizontal and vertical
installations.
b. 25mm N.B. and below check valves shall have B.S 1400-LG2 gunmetal body. The disk and pin shall be
manufactured from brass to B.S. 2874 CZ121. Pressure rating shall be PN20. Connections shall be
screwed to B.S 21 tapered thread.
c. 32mm N.B. to 50mm N.B. check valves shall have B.S 1400-LG2 gunmetal body. The disk and pin shall
be manufactured from gunmetal to B.S. 1400LG2. Pressure rating shall be PN20. Connections shall be
screwed to B.S 21 tapered thread.
d. 65mm N.B. and above check valves shall have B.S 1452 Gr 220 cast iron body and disk. The pin shall
be manufactured from H.T. Brass to B.S. 2874 CZ114. The disk shall be solid type with gunmetal facing
ring. Pressure rating shall be PN20. Connections shall be flanged to B.S 4505 table 16/11. The valve
shall be painted to protect it from corrosion.
Ball Valves
a. Ball valves shall have a gunmetal body, with stainless steel ball and screwed to B.S 21 tapered thread.

Drain Cocks
a. Drain Cocks shall be lock shield pattern to BS 2879:1980, Type 2. The drain cock body and all parts in contact
with water are to be made from materials resistant to dezincification.
Strainers
a. Strainers shall be “Y” type, complete with either stainless steel or brass screens.
b. 50mm N.B. and below strainers shall have B.S 1400-LG2 gunmetal body. Pressure rating shall be PN20.
Connections shall be screwed to B.S 21 tapered thread.
c. 65mm N.B. and above strainers shall have B.S 1452 Gr 220 cast iron body. Pressure rating shall be
PN20. Connections shall be flanged to B.S 4505 table 16/11. The valve shall be painted to protect it
from corrosion.
The Contractor shall include for making the final connection (CWS & HWS) to all items of sanitary ware and equipment
that require a water supply.
Line size isolation valves shall be provided on the final connection to each draw off, whether or not indicated on the
drawings in accordance with the standard specification.
6.7.9 Thermal Insulation
The Contractor shall include for thermal insulation to the following pipework and in full accordance with the standard
specification.
1) All pipework within the external service trench and external roof areas.
A complete vapour seal shall be made to all cold water services pipework, including all valves and fittings, even at
support points as indicated on the drawings.
All external pipework and within plant rooms shall be finished in aluminium cladding.
6.7.10 Thermostatic Mixing valves
The contractor shall design supply install test and commission compact under basin or above ceiling thermostatic
mixing valves on the hot water final connection to all wash hand basins, sinks, showers, bath tubs and ablution taps.

Thermostatic mixing valves shall be set to limit the maximum draw off temperature to 43 oC (adjustable) to the hot
tap outlet for hand washing purposes.
Thermostatic mixing valves shall be preceded with isolating ball valve strainers on both the mains cold and hot water
service connections.
There shall be a maximum of 2 outlets per TMV.
6.7.11 Shower Thermostatic Mixing valves
The contractor shall supply and install shower heavy duty thermostatic mixing valves where indicated on the
drawings.
Thermostatic mixing valves shall be as specified by the Architect.
6.7.12 Bib Taps
The Contractor shall allow for the supply and installation of an appropriate bib tap located in within the plant rooms,
garbage room, car park area, podium landscape area and roof top plant area connected to the boosted cold water
service. The water supply pipework serving this tap must be kept as short as possible to limit water stagnation. Each
bib tap shall have a local means of isolation, check valves and drain point.
6.7.13 Chlorination and Disinfection
The Contractor shall test, commission and chlorinate the whole of the new hot and cold water services installations
in accordance with TM13, BSEN 806 and the local authority regulations.
Chlorination shall be completed within 24 Hours prior to handover. The contractor shall provide to the engineer a
certificate of chlorination.
The Mechanical Contractor is required to draw off from each outlet for a minimum of 2 minutes once per week to
ensure that fresh water is drawn into the system after chlorination and prior to handover.
A legionella test shall be carried out on the system 14 days prior to client handover. A written report of the results
shall be provided from the Laboratory with comments from the Approved Engineer on the water condition and its
suitability for public use. The report and comments are to be provided prior to the date of hand over.
6.7.14 Cleaning and Disinfection of Potable Water System
Disinfect potable water distribution system and storage tank in accordance with requirements of AWWA and local
authorities. Incase no prescribed method exists, follow the procedure given below.
For Distribution System:

1. After system is flushed, fill with either 50ppm chlorine water solution and let stand for 24 hours or 200ppm

chlorine water solution and let stand for 3 hours.

2. Flush system with clean potable water until no excess chlorine remains in the system.
For Water Storage Tank:

1. Spray walls, floors and underside of top wit a 200ppm chlorine solution.
2. Fill tank with a 10ppm chlorine water solution and let stand for 2 hours.
3. Drain tank completely before refilling with clean potable water.
The Contractor shall supply and install automatic air vents complete with escape pipes within the high points of the
hot water pipework distribution whether or not indicated on the drawings
Care shall be taken to ensure that vents are fitted at the highest points of the sections they are intended to vent. All
automatic air vents shall be preceded by a lockshield valve if not fitted with integral shut off.
6.7.16 Drain Off Cocks
The Contractor shall supply and install drain off cocks’ at all low points of the hot and cold pipework distribution
whether or not indicated on the drawings
Drain off cocks shall be as manufactured by Crane Ltd. The drain off cocks shall be 4 sizes smaller than the pipework
systems in which they are installed from a minimum size of 15mm up to a maximum size of 42mm.
The Contractor shall supply and install, where required, pressure gauges. Pressure gauges shall have 100mm dial
faces. Gauges shall be selected such that the working pressure is mid-point on the scale. Prior to placing orders for
the gauges, the Contractor shall check with the engineer to confirm the ranges of the gauges being proposed. Unless
otherwise detailed, all gauges shall be pipework mounted on U siphon tubes and be preceded by a gauge cock.
6.7.18 Puddle Flanges
Where pipe work passes through the external walls of the buildings, water tanks or trenches below ground level,
the Contractor shall supply and cast or built puddle flanges into the structure.
Puddle flanges are to be manufactured from the same material as the pipe work of which they form a part. Each
puddle flange shall comprise a length of pipe, flanged or screwed at end according to diameter with an undrilled
slip on flange welded on the outside at a point where it will be located midway in the thickness of the wall. The
puddle flange is to be painted externally with two coats of bituminous paint before being built into the structure.

6.7.19 Water Meter
METERS FOR EXTERNAL & INTERNAL WATER CONSUMPTION

A. Positive Displacement-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWAC700 / as per DEWA requirements.
b. Pressure Rating: (1035-kPa) working pressure.
c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In (liters) or (cubic meters) as required by utility company.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections for Meters (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
g. End Connections for Meters (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
B. Remote Registration System: Direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706; modified
with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register
assembly as required by utility company.
C. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with AWWA C707; modified with
signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register
assembly as required by utility company.
D. All meters must have data logging capability and be connected to BMS system so that
information on interior water consumption can be recorded; the monitoring system must
have minimum following capabilities.
E. Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual water consumption for each major use;
F. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analysis;
G. Determine ‘out-of-range’ values to alert building operators to unusually high
consumption; and Record peak water consumption for each major use.
6.7.20 Float Valve
Modulating Float Valves: Angle/Globe pattern, single seated, hydraulically operated, pilot controlled,
diaphragm type, normally closed valve of cast iron construction with flanged ends complete with pilot
assembly, type K copper capillary lines, mounting plate, plastic float and operating rod, adjustable stops etc.
complete.
Equilibrium Type (for panel type GRP Water Tanks): Bronze construction, angle pattern, equilibrium type
float valve with flanged inlet, complete with brass / stainless steel float rod and copper float.

6.8 Above & Below Ground Drainage Installations
The contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission the above & below ground drainage services.
The contractor shall include for the complete above ground drainage pipework installation including connection into
the below ground drainage system, the supply and fixing of all sanitary ware, as indicated on the architect’s drawings,
the installation of overflows from all items of equipment requiring an overflow including WC’s and final testing and
certification upon completion of the works.
The above ground soil and waste installation shall be provided, arranged on a double pipe system to convey soil and
waste water from each and every sanitary fitting to the underground drainage system. The installation shall be in
accordance with BS EN 12056, parts 1, 2, 4 and 5 and local public health authority. Deviation from the materials
specified will only be permitted with written approval from the Contract Administrator.
Pipe systems shown on drawings are diagrammatic to indicate the intent. They need not necessarily show all
components on their true positions.
All pipework shall be installed with local branch connections discharging into stacks all of which shall be arranged
neatly on organized routes and shall be coordinated with the structure and all other services.
Capped off connections into relevant stacks and stub stacks shall be provided within tenant areas to provide a means
of connections for the tenants fit out and minimize builders work with connecting drainage to the external below
ground system.
Pipes will be installed true to line and to a consistent gradient. All vertical drainage pipework will be perpendicular
and branches and changes in direction adequately supported. All branch connections to horizontal runs at high level
will be made using 45 degree branches swept in the direction of flow wherever possible.
Access for cleaning and rodding pipes will be provided at changes of direction and junctions on suspended pipework,
and at the upstream end of horizontal branch soil and waste pipes to ensure that all parts of the systems are accessible
for such purposes. Falls and slopes of branch soil and waste pipes will be in accord with Local Municipality Regulations.
Drainage from below grade areas such as lift pits shall be accomplished by sump pumps that shall lift the wastewater
to ground floor for gravity discharge into the building drainage system.
The pipes and fittings shall comply in all respects with the following British Standards: BS EN 1401-1:2009 Plastic
piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and sewerage. Un-plasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U).
Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system.

BS 4660:2000
Thermoplastics ancillary fittings of nominal sizes 110mm and 160mm for below ground gravity drainage and
sewerage.
Drainage sump pumps shall be installed within the lift sump pits.
Refer to Section 4.12.10 – Sump Pumps & 4.12.11- Submersible Pumps
All drainage pumps shall be fully submersible and shall be suitable for pumping water, drainage and solid material.
The pumps shall consist of integrated single stage centrifugal pump with horizontal discharge. The impellor shall be
closed single channel impellor. The motor shall be fully submersible, operated by float switch operation. The pump
motor housing shall be cast iron GG 25. The impellor shall be cast iron CC25. The wear ring shall be bronze. The
mechanical seal shall be silicon carbide. The rotor shaft and screws shall be stainless steel.
Pumps shall be suitable for high temperature hot water (up to 100 OC), without causing motor burn out.
The pumps shall be complete with control box, automatic pump changeover, automatic level control, overload
protection, HAO switch and integrated capacitor. All control box operations shall be monitored by the BMS.
There shall be low level “pump off” float, high level “pump on” float, high level float alarm and low level pump
emergency shut off and alarm.
The pumps shall be complete with stainless steel guide rails, stand, IV, CV, and all connection pieces. All valves (and
control box) shall be located within a dry valve chamber immediately beside the pump chamber.
The pumps shall be constructed from the following materials:
Motor Housing Aluminium

Motor Jacket Stainless steel
Impeller Cast Iron
Pump Housing Cast Iron
Rotor Shaft Stainless Steel
The systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with CIBSE Guide G section 3 – Sanitary Accommodation,
pipework and drainage, BS EN 12056 - Gravity Drainage systems within buildings, BS EN 752:2008 Drain and sewer
systems outside buildings and Local Drainage Regulation.

6.8.2 Sanitary Plumbing Pipework & Fittings
All materials shall comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the appropriate British Standard
Specifications, including any amendments current at the commencement of the Contract. Pipework and fittings shall
be suitable for the range of temperatures of conveyed fluids to be handled.
Soil pipe connections to WC pan spigots, or similar soil appliance outgo, shall comprise "Multikwik" or similar flexible
connector jointed into plain end pipe.
Soil and waste pipes shall be PVC-U complying with the relevant requirements of BS EN 1329-1 2014. Solvent welded
joints will be permitted but adequate provision shall be made to cater for thermal expansion and dismantling of
pipework, by use of slip joints with rubber gaskets.
6.8.3 Overflows
Pipework shall be PVC-U complying with the relevant requirements of BS EN 1329-1 2014. Solvent weld fittings
complying with BS shall be used.
6.8.4 General Traps
Tubular traps shall be high density polypropylene deep seal two piece pattern complying with the relevant
requirements of BS EN 274:2002 colour white, with universal compression outlet connection. Plastic bottle traps shall
be polypropylene deep seal with adjustable sliding inlet tube, removable base, and universal compression outlet
connection.
6.8.5 Sanitary Plumbing Installation Workmanship
All pipes, fittings and components shall be checked for soundness and freedom from defects and damage prior to
installation.
All stacks shall be installed truly vertical, and horizontal pipework shall be true in alignment and to uniform gradient.
All stacks shall be supported by at least one pipe support bracket in a manner to support the vertical load and in any
case the distance between pipe supports shall not exceed the distances specified in the following clauses of this
specification.
Pipe supports shall be fixed as the pipework installation proceeds. Improperly supported pipework shall not be left
for later fixing of pipe supports.

All suspended pipework shall be positioned as close to the slab soffit as practicable.
Provision shall be made in the fixing of branch pipes to the main vertical stack to prevent shearing or deformation
due to vertical movement of the main pipe.
All bends on soil stacks shall be long radius. All changes of direction and branch connections on suspended soil and
waste pipe runs shall be made with 135° bends and branches, except where this is not practicable, in which case the
fittings shall have the greatest angle possible below 135°.
All pipework joints shall be airtight and watertight.
All pipework shall be securely supported with substantial brackets. Hangers and accessories shall be galvanized or
zinc plated or other equal and approved rust-proof finish.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe axis is parallel with the axis of the pipe ring or bracket and that drop rod
supports are vertical. All supports shall be in alignment and shall not impose side strain on the pipework and shall
provide a uniform pipe gradient.
Additional supports shall be provided at branch connections and changes of direction on suspended pipework
providing a stable and secure pipework system capable of being rodded through without detriment to the system.
Branch connections shall be supported independently and not used to help in the support of its parent main.
6.8.6 PVC-U Pipework Installation
The installation, method of jointing and fixing shall comply in all respects with the manufacturer's site work
instructions.
Solvent welded joints shall be made using the manufacturer's approved cement, after cleaning the areas to be joined
with the manufacturer's cleaning fluid as required. Seal ring fittings shall be used where necessary to accommodate
thermal movement.
Cut ends of pipes shall be formed square with a fine toothed saw and then made smooth. For solvent welded joints
the pipe shall be pushed fully in against the shoulder of the socket.
Standard fittings shall not be altered in any way and if any special fittings prove necessary they are to be made by the
manufacturer.
Branch pipe connection fittings shall comprise boss connections and/or equal and unequal branch fittings.
Joints between PVC-U pipe and other materials shall be made with the fittings and jointing materials recommended
by the PVC-U pipe manufacturer.

Pipes shall be fixed so that they are supported to provide thermal movement with brackets and fittings supplied by
the Pipe system manufacturers. Such fixings shall be provided wherever necessary to locate and stabilize the
pipework in correct alignment and to uniform gradient.
6.8.7 Access to Pipes
The Contractor shall provide access doors, rodding eyes and cleaning eyes at all changes of direction and at the head
of horizontal pipe runs.
All soil and waste pipes shall be provided with a large access door at the base of each pipe immediately before entry
to the below ground drainage system. Where branch connections occur to the stacks at low level, access doors shall
be installed immediately above the highest connection at that level.
All access requirements contained within BSEN 12056.
6.8.8 Fire Collars
The Contractor shall provide intumescent fire collars where plastic based soil and waste pipework penetrates fire
barriers / compartments.
Generally, the intumescent fire collars shall consist of a continuous pressed stainless steel flexible shell containing a
graphite based intumescent material; the fire collar shall be corrosion resistant and shall contain materials tested to
comply with BS 476: Part 20 – 1987 such that the entire assembly maintains fire integrity for up to 4 hours.
All soil and waste penetrations through fire barriers of half hour’s resistance or greater and having a diameter of
50mm or greater shall be provided with a fire collar.
All fire collars shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
6.8.9 Automatic Air Admittance Valves
All valves shall be installed in a vertical position above flood level of the highest appliance served and such that
insulating materials (other than manufacturers insulated cover) are kept clear of the valve body. All valves shall be
fitted using ring seal connections, or in such a way that the valve can be easily removed, to allow the discharge stack
to be rodded. Where installed within builders work ducting due allowance MUST be made for make-up air.
Fit the manufacturer’s insulating cover in roof spaces and other unheated locations.
6.8.10 Storm Water Drainage
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with Local Authority regulations and infrastructure limitations and if required
shall provide ground level collection tanks and soak away pits to retain the water.

In absence of storm water infrastructure network, storm water run-off from roofs for each bldg. blocks shall be
collected via rainwater pipes connected to a sand / silt trap prior to discharged to the irrigation tank for possible
landscape irrigation use.
Rain water system in PVC-U complying with BS 4576 and bearing the Kite mark shall be provided. PVC-U rainwater
systems shall be in gray as approved by the Engineer.
All joints shall remain watertight under working conditions. Pipes inside the building shall be capable of withstanding
the water tightness of a positive pressure of 38 mm water gauge for at least 3 minutes. Rainwater pipes shall be firmly
supported without restricting thermal movement. Rainwater pipes shall not be encased in concrete columns
structural walls and it is important rainwater pipes in casing or ducts are accessible for maintenance, repair and
replacement. Relevant regulations of BS 12056-3:2000 shall be followed to ensure good performance of the rainwater
system. BS 5414 PVC-U soil and vent pipes fittings and accessories and BS EN 12200-1:2016 PVC-U rainwater goods
may be used for rainwater system.
Roof and balcony outlets shall be made PVC-U complying with the BSCP308: 1974 and the Building Regulations 1976.
The rainwater outlets shall incorporate a circular grid domed outlets secured with brass crews and washers. All outlets
are either 178 or 406 mm in diameter. The pipes shall be self-coloured, smooth, gloss and moulded, gray colour to BS
5252: 1976, 10 A.07.
When jointing PVC-U pipes a gap should be left between spigot end of pipe and shoulder of socket that it enters in
order to allow for thermal movement.
PVC-U pipes shall be with solvent weld sockets usable with seal ring adaptor and to be drained free discharge.
All Local Authority drainage regulations related to this service shall be strictly complied with.
6.8.11 Drainage Manholes
All manholes shall be constructed to the requirements of the Drainage Department of Dubai Municipality. Covers are
to be in-situ concrete filled, with surface finish to match surrounding floor. All covers are to be suitable for the loads
they are subjected to and in accordance with BS EN 124.
All covers shall be of ductile iron and shall be painted with solvent free epoxy paint or painted as per project
requirement.
Manhole covers shall have clear opening of 600 x 600 mm. All manholes and gully traps shall be vented as per drainage
department requirements. Gully trap covers shall have clear opening of 300 x 300 mm. All manhole covers and frames
shall comply with BS EN 124. All covers shall be black bitumen coated ductile iron with fiber tray.
Internal Manholes:
All internal manhole covers shall be bolt down air tight double seal recessed type with brass trim, they shall be in situ
concrete filled with surface finish to match surrounding floor. Covers shall be medium duty, locking and sealed.

External Manholes:
Covers in paved areas shall be medium duty, double seal and recessed type. They shall be in situ concrete/pavement
filled with surface finish to match surrounding floor.
Covers subject to vehicular traffic shall be kite marked heavy duty, double seal, non-rock with square push fit seal
plate complete with lifting key-holes.
Manholes to be protected by timber box of same internal dimensions to avoid collection of waste of building materials
in manholes (i.e. concrete & sand) during construction period.
Covers and frames shall be fixed in such a way as to match adjacent surface levels with tolerances not exceeding + or
- 3 mm. Before the maintenance period expires, check all manhole covers and readjust them if they are in excess of
above mentioned tolerances.
6.8.12 Floor Drains / Roof & Balcony Drains / Gullies / Cleanouts / Covers
Floor drains unless otherwise indicated shall have PVC-U traps for pipes in non- false ceiling areas/below ground areas
and sound proof polypropylene floor trap for the pipes running in false ceiling areas. The floor trap shall have of a
minimum water seal of 75mm. The open area of strainer shall be at least two thirds of the cross-sectional area of the
drain line to which it connects. Floor drains shall have heavy duty C.P nickel bronze cover or heavy duty stainless steel
(subject to Engineer Approval) with a removable strainer and cover plate. Floor drain shall have built in rodding eye.
All floor drains / cleanouts shall be coordinated with floor tiling layout. Funnel floor drains, where specified, shall
include a Nickle bronze funnel secured to the floor grating.
Clean outs
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN100. Use DN100 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is
indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN100 & smaller and 30 m for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
5. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame
and cover flush with finished wall.
6. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
Floor type: Stainless steel AISI316 grade body with square or round adjustable, secured, and top with 3mm tile recess.
Wall type: Cast iron body with square nickel bronze smooth wall access cover and frame, 150 x 150mm.
Clean out at high level shall be PVC-U screw cap and washer.
All floor drain and floor/wall cleanouts shall be coordinated with tiling layout.

Area Gully Drains:
Dura coated cast iron body and 12” Dia Top, with bottom outlet, seepage pan and combination membrane flashing
frame clamp and for heavy duty slotted grate with sediment bucket, hinged grate, NEO-LOC gasket.
Rain water outlets:
a) Rain water outlets shall be epoxy coated cast iron body and dome, wide serrated flashing flanged, and
flashing clamp device with integral gravel stop. Rain water outlets shall be selected to suit the type of
roof where installed and shall be provided with a no hub outlet for mechanical jointing to rain water
pipe. Rain water outlets shall be provided with perforated extension assemblies, where required to
match the roof construction.
b) Scupper type rain water outlets shall be dura coated cast iron body with reversible back or bottom
outlet, oblique grate with combination frame and membrane flashing clamp.
c) External catch basins shall be a concrete pit of 60x60x60 cm (LxWxD) with 60x60 Heavy duty ductile
iron (HDDI) grating and GRP perforated basket within the pit. The outlet pipe size from the external
catch basin shall be as shown on drawings.
The internal catch basin shall be similar to above but with 30x30 cm concrete pit and grating size.
Flower bed / planter drain shall be heavy duty, dome type, cast iron body with bottom outlet complete with
combination membrane flashing clamp / gravel guard, low silhouette dome and stainless steel mesh over dome, no
floor trap is required.
6.9 Low Temperature Hot Water Heating
6.10 Chilled Water Cooling
The Contractor shall develop the design, supply, install, test and commission the Chilled water cooling installation
generally indicated on the drawings and described in the specification.
The CHW shall be generated by 6No. equally sized air cooled packaged chillers installed at roof level to serve the
building, 3No. on each roof tower. (450kW/chiller).
The final anticipated peak CHW load for each tower block is as follows 1085kW for Block A and 1118kW for Block B.
The intension shall be to select 3No. equally sized chillers for each block sized at 40% of the peak demand to achieve
the load, and provide the system with redundancy if one chiller was to fail.

6.10.2 Packaged Air Cooled Chiller
The CHW cooling distribution, shall be designed as a constant temperature variable volume system and shall be
installed in a traditional 2 pipe flow and return network utilizing 2 port Pressure Independent Control Valves (PICV)
to control and vary the loads.
The installation shall be complete with all necessary draining, venting, commissioning and isolation valves required
to commission and maintain the system.
The system shall have design flow and return water temperatures of 5.6°C flow and 11.1°C return and shall be
complete with constant primary / variable secondary pumps sets, automatic make up and pressurization units,
pipework, valves, fittings, thermal insulation, automated controls etc.
The chillers, primary and secondary pumps, pressurization unit, low loss header, automatic control panel shall be
located on the roof of the building.
6.10.3 Fan Coil Units
The Contractor shall develop the design, supply, install, test and commission two pipe fan coil comfort air conditioning
cooling systems to the fit out areas as generally indicated on the drawings.
The fan coil units to be installed in all areas identified on the drawings and shall be exposed or ceiling void mounted
(Subject to area located) 2 pipe chassis units with ducted connections to supply air grilles and diffusers.
These shall be arranged to draw air from the room via ceiling mounted extract grilles or exposed void and supply
cooled air to the areas via ductwork from the fan coil unit discharge plenum to ceiling or wall mounted supply air
diffusers.
The units shall each incorporate wall mounted controllers into which each design water flow rate, and both design &
setback air volumes. The controller shall then limits the amount it moves the valve to ensure the PICV doesn't open
beyond what would give design water flow rate, and based on your strategy modulate between design and setback
air volumes.
Fan coil units shall be provided with 2 port pressure independent control valves (PICV) on the Chilled water flow
connections. The fan coil units shall be provided with extended condensate trays to cover the PICV valves and final
pipework connections.
All 2 port PICV shall be protected by inline strainers with facilities for isolation of both the 2 port valve and the fan
coil unit. Final connections to fan coil units shall be flexible pipework connectors. All fan coil units shall be mounted
to prevent transmission of vibration noise to the building structure.

Fan coil units shall be provided complete with semi-washable type filters providing filtration to G3 standard. Fan coil
units shall be arranged to ensure that access to all serviceable components is readily available. Units shall be provided
with an acoustic lined discharge plenum to enable connection to the ceiling mounted diffusers.
Fan coil units shall be controlled by individual room temperature controllers to maintain the design set point
temperature within the space, the room controls shall include for local set point adjustment and be provided with a
digital display to provide indication of fan coil unit status, room set point and achieved temperatures. Each fan coil
unit shall be provided with a control package incorporating 2 PICV control valves and actuators, controllers (as
detailed above), room sensor/set point controller.
The fan coil unit controllers and all 2 port valves, switches, control sensors shall be provided as an integral part of the
fan coil unit package and shall, therefore, be fully fitted to the fan coil unit and fully wired and tested prior to dispatch
from the fan coil unit manufacturers works.
The control package shall also include for the remote sensor/set point controllers which shall also be supplied free
issue within adequate length of control cable for interconnection between the fan coil unit and the location of the
remote sensor controller. In general a remote sensor/controller shall be provided to each local space the FCU is
serving.
Fan coil units shall be provided with an outlet plenum to the appropriate ductwork configuration.
Where possible fan coil unit condensate drainage shall be designed on a gravity basis to avoid the need of individual
condensate pumps on each fan coil unit. In instances where condensate pumps are required the BMS shall be
provided with a means to identify condensate pump faults and will be interlinked with the FCU controls to inhibit
cooling if the pump fails or there is a high water level in the condensate tray.
6.10.4 Chilled Water Primary Pumps
The pumps shall be constant speed driven. The pumps shall have integrated drives and shall have a Modbus RTU
interface for connection to the BMS.
The CHW primary pumps shall be mounted onto purpose made builders work bases of the size and construction
recommended by the pump manufacturer to provide vibration isolation to the structure.
Where indicated on the drawings pumps that are pipeline mounted shall have purpose made independent vibration
isolation support brackets supported from the structure.
The pipework itself shall not be used to support the pump.
The pumps shall be complete with adequate anti-vibration mountings and shall have flexible pipework connections
onto the suction and discharge ports.
First 3 supports of all flow and return chilled water of the pumps is to be supported from spring vibration isolators.
To be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Hangers are to have a minimum static deflection equal to that of the pump(s) and/or within the 15 metre limit. (Any
supports within 15 m of more than one plant item are to have the greater of the alternative static deflections).
From the suction and discharge ports of each pump the contractor shall supply and install 100mm diameter pressure
gauges, pipework mounted in accordance with the standard specification. The gauges shall be complete with gauge
cocks connected to the pipework by a common connection incorporating a lock shield valve.
The common tapping shall also be utilized for the installation of differential pressure switches associated with the
automatic controls installation.
The contractor shall supply and install pumps in the positions indicated on the drawing, described in the specification
and of the types / duties detailed within the Appendices.
6.10.5 Chilled Water Secondary Pumps
The CHW cooling circuit shall incorporate duplex duty/assist Secondary cooling pump sets. The pumps shall be each
individually speed controlled utilizing inverter frequency control drives to aid commissioning and optimize system
operational efficiency by varying the pumping duty dependent upon the building load.
The pumps speed shall be controlled by system pressure sensors that shall vary the pump speed in relation to changes
in system pressure resulting from changes in the system loads that are being controlled by Pressure Independent 2
port Control Valves (PICV).
The pump minimum turndown shall be specified by the pump manufacture and this shall equate to a minimum speed
setting for the inverter below which the pump motor cooling fan efficiency and performance would not be adequate
to cool the motor resulting in overheating and pump trip.
Once the pump has turned down to its minimum speed, the system flow and pressure shall ride the pump curve. To
ensure we always achieve the minimum system water flow rate with the maximum system water volume (hence
maximum thermal mass / heat sink) two additional pressure independent 2 Port control valves shall need to be
allowed for at each of the end legs of the CHW F&R pipework serving the roof top AHU’s and one on the F&R pipework
within the ground floor.
These valves shall modulate open equally to maintain the minimum flow requirements.
To achieve the above it shall be necessary during the commission period to accurately map the pump and system
pressures along with system flow rate and use this information to develop the control strategy for the PICV’s and
inverter speed control.
The CHW cooling Pumps shall be mounted onto purpose made builders work bases of the size and construction
recommended by the pump manufacturer to provide vibration isolation to the structure.
Where indicated on the drawings pumps that are pipeline mounted shall have purpose made independent vibration
isolation support brackets supported from the structure. The pipework itself shall not be used to support the pump.

The pumps shall be complete with adequate anti-vibration mountings and shall have flexible pipework connections
onto the suction and discharge ports, of the types suitable for the application.
First 3 supports of all flow and return chilled water from/to the pumps is to be supported from spring vibration
isolators, with rubber pads for isolation of high frequencies. To be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Hangers are to have a minimum static deflection equal to that of the pump(s)
and/or within the 15 metre limit. (Any supports within 15 m of more than one plant item are to have the greater of
the alternative static deflections).
From the suction and discharge ports of each pump the contractor shall supply and install 100mm diameter pressure
gauges, pipework mounted in accordance with the standard specification. The gauges shall be complete with gauge
cocks connected to the pipework by a common connection incorporating a lock shield valve. The common tapping
shall also be utilized for the installation of differential pressure switches associated with the automatic controls
installation.
The contractor shall supply and install pumps in the positions indicated on the drawing, described in the specification
and of the types / duties detailed within the Appendices.
6.10.6 Chilled Water Buffer Vessel
The Contractor shall develop the design, supply, install, test and commission the chilled water buffer vessels in
positions indicated on the drawings. The each chilled water vessel serving each tower block shall be sized to house
the capacity of, but not limited to 10,500 litres.
6.10.7 Chilled Water Pressurisation Unit
The CHW cooling system shall be provided with a fully automatic pressurization and make up unit incorporating
expansion vessels sized to accommodate the total system. The system expansion vessel shall be complete with relief
valves and removable rubber diaphragm. The vessel shall be gas filled to give the required working pressure for the
system.
The vessel shall be factory tested at twice the maximum working pressure.
The fully automatic unit shall be complete with base frame, softened water supply with sub meter to monitor water
make up and raise an alarm thorough the BMS in the event excessive makeup (leak detection) and over flow
connections. High and Low level pressure switches shall be incorporated into the controls to provide shut down, visual
and audible indication in the event of fault conditions and the unit shall be linked to the BMS for monitoring purposes.
A quick fill valve connection 25mm shall be provided to the system for remote filling via the use of an appropriate
temporary filling device.
The contractor shall supply and install automatic make up and pressurization units in the positions indicated on the
drawing, described in the specification and of the types / duties detailed within the Appendices.

6.10.8 Pipework
The Contractor shall supply and install all pipework and fittings as indicated on the drawings and described in the
specification. All new chilled water pipework and fittings shall be installed in heavy grade steel tube to BS EN
10255:2004.
Pipework in all other areas of the buildings up to and including 50mm shall have screwed joints and fittings whilst
65mm and above shall have welded joints and fittings.
Where required unions shall be used on pipework up to and including 50mm, whilst 65mm and above shall be
flanged.
All new chilled water pipework shall be thermally insulated and vapour sealed as detailed in the Standard
specifications. Thermal insulation shall be foil face mineral wool.
All pipework and fittings shall be duly pressure tested, flushed, cleaned and treated with inhibitors prior to
commissioning.
All new chilled water service pipework shall be installed in a traditional two pipe flow and return system complete
with all necessary draining, venting, commissioning and isolation valves required to commission and maintain the
system.
The contractor shall ensure that all pipework distribution and components shall be fully accessible to facilitate ease
of maintenance.
The CHW system shall be duly pressure tested and cleaned prior to commissioning in accordance with the standard
specification.
6.10.9 Valves and Fittings
The Contractor shall supply and install all valves and fittings as indicated on the drawings and described below, as
manufactured by Crane or equal and approved.
Sub circuit branches shall incorporate sufficient commissioning devices. All emitters shall have the facility to
regulate.
Steel pipework up to and including 50mm
Isolating Valves (IV) (Ball Valve) Fig 100EXT.

Lockshield Valves (LSV) (Ball Valve) Fig 100 LS.
Double Regulating Valve (DRV) (Oblique) Fig 1432.
Strainers (ST) (Y’Type) Fig 807.
Commissioning Stations (CS) (Oblique) Fig 2432.

Steel Pipework 65mm and above
Isolating Valves (IV) (Butterfly) Fig 950.

Double Regulating Valves (DRV) (Butterfly) Fig 953G.
Strainers (ST) (Y’Type) Fig 810.
Commissioning Stations (CS) (Butterfly) Fig 5953G.
None Return Valves (NRV) Fig M651 PN16.
6.10.10 Electrical Wiring
The contractor shall provide all power wiring and control wiring between the chiller and associated plant and
equipment. The chiller shall be electrically fed directly from the electrical switchboard and not via the BMS motor
control panel.
The contractor shall supply and install automatic air vents complete with escape pipes at all high points of the chilled
water pipework.
Care shall be taken to ensure that vents are fitted at the highest points of the sections they are intended to vent. All
automatic air vents shall be preceded by a lock shield valve if not fitted with integral shut off.
6.10.12 Drain Off Cocks
The contractor shall supply and install drain off cocks’ at all low points of the chilled water pipework distribution.
Drain off cocks shall be as manufactured by Crane Ltd or equal and approved. The drain off cocks shall be 4 sizes
smaller than the pipework systems in which they are installed from a minimum size of 15mm up to a maximum size
of 42mm.
The contractor shall supply and install where described in the specification pressure gauges. Pressure gauges shall
have 100mm dial faces. Gauges shall be selected such that the working pressure is midpoint on the scale. Prior to
placing orders for the gauges the contractor shall check with the engineer to confirm the ranges of the gauges being
proposed. Unless otherwise detailed, all gauges shall be pipework mounted on U siphon tubes and be preceded by a
gauge cock.

6.10.14 Temperature Gauges
The contractor shall supply and install in the positions where described in the specification temperature gauges.
Temperature gauges shall have 100mm dial faces. Gauges shall be selected such that the working temperature is
midpoint on the scale. Prior to placing orders for the gauges the contractor shall check with the engineer to confirm
the ranges of the gauges being proposed. Unless otherwise detailed, all gauges shall be pipework mounted.
6.10.15 Water Treatment
Water treatment shall be applied to the internal CHW cooling installation to attain the correct levels of concentration
of a suitably selected corrosion inhibitor following satisfactory testing.
The Contractor shall appoint a specialist contractor to supply and install water treatment and associated dosing
equipment and chemicals in the heating system.
The Contractor shall also allow for visits by the water treatment specialist to carry out the pre-commission cleaning
of the system as called for in the Standard Specification and all necessary services visits to test the system.
Upon satisfactory completion of the testing and pre-commissioning cleaning of the system, as detailed elsewhere in
this Specification, the Contractor shall immediately commence the water treatment operations.
Water treatment shall be applied to the CHW cooling installation to attain the correct levels of concentration of a
suitably selected corrosion inhibitor and biocide treatment following satisfactory testing.
6.10.16 Energy Meters
The Contractor shall provide energy meters in the CHW cooling circuits at each final branch before entering individual
apartments. An energy meter will also be provided at the branch entering the retail space on the ground floor.
Energy meters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations.
The energy meters shall be linked to the dedicated energy meter network used to record, log, trend and analyse the
meter data.
6.10.17 Condensate Drains
The Contractor shall install condensate drains from each of the internal unit’s within the client’s area. Condensate is
to be gravity fed where possible which will be distributed and connected into the above ground drainage system.
Condensate pipework shall be installed in Upvc tube with solvent welded fittings. Where required push fit
joints/unions shall be provided to gain access for maintenance and removable full bore cap end (rodding eyes) shall
be provided.

The contractor shall determine the requirement for thermally insulating condensate pipework, thermal insulation
shall be applied to prevent condensation.
All condensate drains (at the connection point into the main drain) shall be provided with a Hep vo self-sealing running
trap.
6.11 Fire Fighting Systems
This section covers the fire protection services for the project and includes for the design, supply, delivery, erection,
putting into operation and testing of all materials supplied and equipment necessary for the complete installation, as
described hereafter.
The fire protection services shall be designed, supplied, installed and commissioned by a specialty subcontractor
approved by the Civil Defence authorities for all systems included.
6.11.2 Fire Protection Systems
6.11.2.1 Hose Reel System
Hose-reels shall be provided as shown on the drawings, and must be listed by LPCB/BSI, KITE Mark for the whole unit,
reel, hose, valve and nozzle.
Hose reel automatic swinging type, door mounted in a cabinet with lock shield valve, automatic valve, 30 m of 25mm
diameter reinforced rubber hose and jet/spray/off nozzle.
Cabinet of the recessed type with colour finish to be approved by the architect.
With these cabinets the reel shall be mounted on the door. Facia shall be stainless steel; door shall be stainless steel
mirror and part second – part to be wood to steel technology. It shall meet architectural finishes. The back – box to
be electro - galvanized steel.
6.11.2.2 Landing Valves
Landing valves shall be installed in the building as generally indicated on the drawings.
The landing valves will be for the use of fire brigade. Landing valves shall be oblique / straight pattern, brass, 65mm
size, bore fitted with 65mm instantaneous female coupling conforming to BS 336 and have a brass blank cap secured
by a suitable length of chain.

The hand wheel shall be provided in each landing valve with clear marking of OPEN and CLOSED directions (opening
shall be anti –clockwise). The whole valve fittings shall be of sound construction and shall have a minimum working
pressure of 175 psi. Provide landing valve with integral PRV to limit the pressure to the requirements of the local civil
defense, where shown in the drawing. The Landing Valve shall have UL & FM approval or BSI KITE mark approval.
6.11.2.3 Fire Hose
Fire Hose shall be UL listed. It shall be synthetic of 65mm diameter and 30m long equipped with male coupling, for
the connection with the landing valve. It shall be provided where indicated in the drawing. The hoses shall have the
following construction: EDPM rubber lining, jacket of polyester wrap and filtered thread.
6.11.2.4 Breeching Inlet
The inlet breeching piece shall be of horizontal pattern and any of the following types, as indicated in the drawing.
FOUR – WAY: 150mm flanged outlet and 4No. 65mm instantaneous male inlets, complete with blank caps and chains.
The breeching inlet shall have a non – return (check) valve to protect the inlet; couplings complying with BS336 and
25mm drain valve to drain the riser. The breeching inlet must have BSI KITE mark / LPCB approval.
The breeching inlet shall be enclosed in an approved breeching inlet cabinet with wired glass glazed front panel, or
be standalone within the landscaping as indicated on the drawings. The cabinets shall be constructed in such a way
that the operation shall be possible from the inside without the aid of a key, after the glass is broken. It should be
large enough for a hose to be connected to inlets even if the door cannot be opened and the only means of access is
by breaking the glass.
Below are the guidelines for breeching inlets as per latest UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice and shall be followed
accordingly:
a. Breeching inlet (fire department connections) shall be located on the street side of the buildings, near the
building entrance and on the fire access way. Breeching inlet shall be within 18m from the fire vehicle parking
slot.
b. These breeching inlet connections shall be located and arranged such that hose lines can be readily and
conveniently attached to the inlets without interference from any nearby objects, including buildings, fences,
posts, trees or other fire department connections.
c. Breeching inlets shall consist of

i. Four 65mm, (4-Way) direct coupling type fitting for wet riser.
ii. Two 65mm, (2-Way) direct coupling type fitting for sprinkler riser.
iii. Two 65mm, (2-Way) direct coupling type fitting for dry riser.
d. Breeching inlets shall be equipped with caps to protect the system from the entry of debris.
e. Fire department connections shall be located not less than 457mmnor more than 1219mm above the finished
ground level.

f. Each breeching inlet connection to sprinkler/wet riser/dry riser systems shall be clearly designated by a sign
as follows:
i. The sign shall have raised or engraved letters at least 25.4mm in height on a plate or fitting.
ii. The sign shall be both in English and Arabic indicating the service for which the connection is intended and
shall read, for example, as follows: WATER TANK/SPRINKLER/WETRISER/DRYRISER
6.11.2.5 Fire Extinguishers
The contractor is to provide and install portable hand held fire extinguishers, and shall be housed in a cupboard
identical to the fire hose reel.
Extinguishers must be listed and approved by LPCB/BSI or UL listed. Non – listed materials will not acceptable.
Extinguishers shall be of the following sizes: Rating as per BSI
 CO2 5 kg 55 B rating
 Multi-purpose dry chemical 6 kg 34A 8233
 Wet chemical fire extinguisher 6.0 litres 75F and 13A
Fire extinguishers shall be to the approval of the UAE Ministry of the Interior, Civil Defence Department, and shall be
purchased and supplied through an authorized agent.
6.11.2.6 Sprinkler System
A sprinkler system shall be installed throughout the premises designed in accordance with NFPA/LPC rules for Hazard
Group as indicated on the drawings and as per Approval of Local Civil Defense & Local Fire & Life Safety Code.
The system generally comprises of sprinkler systems to all landlord areas, as well as future provision for the individual
buildings to be fitted out under the tenants scope of works.
Pipe sizes and sprinkler locations shall be determined by the specialized fire protection contractor by means of
computer generated hydraulic calculations.
Sprinkler heads in areas without ceilings shall be the upright spray pattern and of nominal 1/2" bore. The temperature

rating shall be 79°C. Sprinkler heads shall be of brass and UL Listed.
Sprinkler heads in areas with false ceilings shall be UL Listed concealed quick response type with ceiling plates to suit
the finish of the ceiling as required by the architect.
A sprinkler alarm valve set shall be provided complete with all trim including inlet shut-off valves, test valves, drain
valves, pressure gauges and a water motor bell.
The pipes used for the entire sprinkler system shall have the approval of Dubai Civil Defence.
6.11.2.7 Above Ground Pipework and Fittings
All above ground pipes shall be of factory galvanized steel to ASTM A53, Sch. 40, Welded steel pipes and fittings.
Threaded Fittings
Fittings for 2” diameter and below shall be 300 psi Ductile Iron, galvanized & threaded. They shall be UL listed and
FM approved.
Grooved Fittings
Fittings 2-1/2” diameter and above shall be galvanized mechanical grooved type. These fittings shall be UL listed and
FM approved with minimum working pressure of 300psi.
Pipe Hangers
All hangers shall be made of steel. Hangers shall be Galvanized and UL/FM approved. The spacing of the hanger
supports shall comply with NFPA requirement.
Fire Protection Service Valves
All Fire protection service valves (Gate valve, Check valves & Butterfly valves) shall be from one source.
The pipe and fitting used for fire-fighting installed above ground shall comply to the following requirements and as
required by the latest UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice 2017.
i. FM 1920, Approval Standard for pipe coupling and fittings for aboveground fire protection service.
ii. ANSI/UL 852, Metallic sprinkler pipe for fire protection service
iii. ANSI/UL 1821, Thermoplastic sprinkler pipe and fittings for fire protection service
iv. FM 1637, Flexible sprinkler hose with fittings
v. FM 1630, Steel pipe for automatic fire sprinkler systems
vi. UL 852, Metallic sprinkler pipe for fire protection service
vii. UL 1821, Thermoplastic sprinkler pipe and fittings for fire protection service
viii. ASTM A53, Galvanized steel ERW pipe, sch 40.
ix. ASTM A53, Galvanized steel seamless pipe, sch 40.
The pipes and fittings used for the entire sprinkler system shall have the approval of Dubai Civil Defence.

6.11.2.8 Backflow Preventer
Backflow preventers shall be of the double check swing pattern, low-pressure loss, suitable for horizontal and vertical
installations. The backflow preventers shall be UL Listed.
25mm N.B. to 50mm N.B. check valves shall have B.S 1400-LG2 gunmetal body. The disk and pin shall be manufactured
from gunmetal to B.S. 1400LG2. Connections shall be screwed to B.S 21 tapered thread.
65mm N.B. and above check valves shall have B.S 1452 Gr 220 cast iron body and disk. The pin shall be manufactured
from H.T. Brass to B.S. 2874 CZ114. The disk shall be solid type with gunmetal facing ring. Connections shall be flanged
to B.S 4505 table 16/11. The valve shall be painted to protect it from corrosion.
6.11.2.9 Flow Switch
Each alarm check valve and zone control valve shall be complete with flow switch. The switch shall be UL Listed/ FM
Approved and suitable for a maximum operating pressure of 27.0 bar. The unit shall contain two single pole, double
throw, snap action switches and instantly recycling pneumatic retard.
The flow switch shall be attached to the pipework via a U bolt with a rugged cast alloy housing rated to NEMA 4.
The flow switch shall be capable of detecting the water flow of a single sprinkler head.
The flow switch shall be connected to the fire alarm system by interface panels to provide indication of sprinkler
actuation in the associated sprinkler zone.
6.11.2.10 Zone Control Valve
Zone control valves shall be installed to serve individual sections/ floors of the buildings. Valves shall be of the
butterfly type with ductile iron body, EPDM seat and aluminium bronze disk. The valve shall be hand wheel operated
via a gearbox with a prominent coloured paddle position indicator. The body shall either be flanged or grooved to
accept mechanical couplings. The valve shall be rated for an operating pressure of
12.1 bar
The valve shall incorporate pre-wired end of position switches terminated on the gearbox enclosure to provide
remote indication of the valve position.
Zone control valves shall be UL Listed
Pressure gauges shall be installed downstream of all zone control valves.

6.11.2.12 Test Drain Valves
Test/ drain valves shall be installed downstream of zone control valve/ flow switch assemblies for the purpose of
proving the operation of the water flow switch, and also for draining the sprinkler zone pipework downstream of the
zone control valve.
The test/ drain valves shall be of the ball type with a cast bronze body and stainless steel ball suitable for a working
pressure of 12.1 bar. The ball shall be wrench operated and incorporate an orifice of equal diameter to represent the
actuation of a single sprinkler head when in the test position. The body shall incorporate a sight glass on the drain
side of the ball valve.
Test drain valves shall be UL Listed.
6.11.2.13 Pressure Reducing Valve
The body shall be bronze for pipeline sizes up to DN 65. For sizes DN 80 and above the body shall be ductile iron with
bronze trim to ASTM A536 / B61 in either globe or angle pattern to suit the pipework configuration. The diaphragm
and disc shall be BUNA-N or EPDM. The pressure reducing valve shall be pilot valve controlled to provide a wide range
of downstream operating pressures. The body shall have flanged or grooved ends.
The pressure reducing valve shall be rated for a minimum operating pressure of PN 20 with a pressure adjustment
range of 2 – 11.3 bar. Where upstream system pressures exceed 18.0 bar the operating pressure rating shall be
increase to suit.
Pilot valves shall be of bronze construction to ASTM B62 with stainless steel trim. Interconnecting pipework shall be
soft copper swaged to brass fittings.
The body shall be externally epoxy coated as shall be all internal wetted surfaces. Pressure reducing valves shall be
UL Listed.
Pressure gauges shall be installed upstream and downstream of all pressure reducing valves.
6.11.2.14 Alarm Check Valve
Each building shall have an alarm apparatus consisting of a UL Listed alarm check valve with the necessary
attachments (gauges, by-pass check valve, drain valve, pressure switch etc.) to give an alarm. The valve shall be rated
for a service pressure of 12.1 bar.
Alarm check valves shall be supplied factory assembled with all pipework nipples etc. All interconnecting pipework
shall be ASTM A53 Schedule 40.
Alarm valves shall have cast iron bodies with stainless steel/ bronze trim. By-pass, alarm check and drain valves, and
control valve shall be of bronze construction.

The body of the alarm check valve shall have flanged ends to PN 16 or grooved to accept mechanical couplings.
The body shall be externally epoxy coated as shall be all internal wetted surfaces.
Alarm check valves shall be supplied and installed complete with a UL Listed hydraulically operated water motor gong.
The gong shall be located in a position approved by the Local Civil Defense Authority.
Water motor gongs shall have their outlets routed to a suitable drain.
6.11.2.15 Isolation Valve
All isolation valves installed on the sprinkler/ hydrant system shall be of the resilient wedge outside screw and yoke
(OS & Y) type.
Isolation valves shall conform to the latest revision of AWWA Standard C 509 for resilient gate valves and shall be UL
Listed/ FM Approved for fire service pressures of up to 13.8 bar; they shall be hydrostatically tested to 34.5 bar.
For high-rise fire-fighting systems with service pressures in excess of 13.8 bar isolation valves shall be suitable for
operation at the system operating pressure with a test pressure at least 1.5 times the operating pressure. The valves
shall be flanged to suit the service operating pressure.
Isolation valves shall have a cast iron body and wedge with solid bronze stem and trim. The wedge shall be completely
encapsulated in resilient rubber with a rubber-tearing bond to ASTM D 429. The seat waterway shall be smooth,
unobstructed and free of any cavities.
The body shall be coated internally and externally with a fusion bonded thermosetting plastic.
All internal parts of isolation valves shall be accessible without having to remove the body from the line. The stem
shall be guided by low friction thrust bearings.
All isolation valves shall be fitted with a tamperproof supervisory switch. The supervisory switch shall be attached to
the valve via a vandal resistant mounting bracket. The switch enclosure shall be of rugged cast alloy rated to NEMA
3R with tamperproof fixings. The flow switch shall be connected to the fire alarm system by interface panels to provide
indication of valve status.
6.11.3 Fire Pumps
The pump head shown on the drawing schedule is an estimate. The Specialist Fire Fighting Sub-Contractor shall select
a pump head to satisfy the fire protection system requirements resulting from the system hydraulic calculations.
Fire pumps shall be UL Listed and FM approved and manufactured and tested by one of the approved specified
vendors, locally assembled fire pumps shall not be accepted.

The fire pumps will comprise one (1) electrically driven main fire pump, one (1) diesel engine driven fire pump and
one (1) electrically driven jockey pump. Each pump shall have a capacity as shown in the equipment schedules,
adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations.
The pump assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., and shall be fully approved by the Associated
Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies, and shall meet all requirements of the National Fire Protection Association
Pamphlet No. 20 and Local Civil Defense.
The pumps shall also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of not less than 65% of rated pressure.
The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 140% of the rated pressure at rated capacity.
Each fire pump shall be of Split – case/ End – suction construction, specifically designed for fire service. The pump
shall be connected to the combined sprinkler/standpipe system. The suction supply for the fire pump shall be from
a storage tank at a maximum pressure of 10 kPa and a minimum pressure of 0 kPa. The pump casing shall be cast iron
and rated to withstand twice the working pressure.
The pump constructed shall comply with the following requirements:
 Construction Materials.
 Pump casing Cast iron
 Impeller Bronze
 Shaft Stainless steel
 Base plate Steel
 Wear rings Bronze
6.11.3.1 Accessories
The fire pumps shall include the following accessories.

1. A flow metering device of the venturi type shall be provided for each pump installation to facilitate fire
pump testing. The water shall be piped back to the fire water storage tank. A regulating and isolation
valve shall be installed on the test line to facilitate generation of a pressure loss to simulate the system
head.
2. Discharge tee.
3. Isolating valves with supervisory switches.
4. Air release valve and fittings.
5. Suction and discharge pressure gauges.
6. Main relief valve with discharge pipes to water tank.
7. Pump casing relief valve.

6.11.3.2 Electric Motor Drive
The electric motor shall be a horizontal IP54 to IEC 529 with Class F insulation, wound for 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz. The
motor shall be of such capacity that 115% of the full-load ampere rating shall not be exceeded at any condition of the
pump load for U.L. Listed fire pump.
With an ambient temperature not exceeding 40°C, the motor shall be designed for a temperature rise not exceeding
60°C when carrying the fully rated load continuously, and shall be capable of operating continuously with an overload
of 15% without stress or excessive rise in temperature. The locked rotor current shall not exceed the values specified
in NFPA 20.
Bearings shall be anti-friction ball or roller type.
6.11.3.3 Electric Fire Pump Controller
The electric fire pump control panel shall be UL Listed and FM Approved. It shall be completely assembled, wired and
tested by the pump manufacturer and have a minimum enclosure protection of IP54 to IEC 529.
The controller shall be located as close as practical and within sight of the motor. The controller shall be so located
or protected that it will not be injured by water escaping from the pump or connection. The controller shall be
complete with,
1. Disconnect switch - externally operable, quick-break type.

2. Circuit breaker - time delay type with trips in all phases set for 300% of the motor full-load current.
3. Motor starter, capable of being energized automatically through the pressure switch or manually by
means of an externally operable handle.
4. Pressure switch, of adjustable type.
5. Running period timer set to keep motor in operation, when started automatically, for a minimum period
of one minute for each 7.5 kW motor rating, but not to exceed 7 minutes.
6. Pilot lamp to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available.
7. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
8. Alarm relay to energize an audible or visible alarm through an independent source of power to indicate
circuit breaker open or power failure.
9. Manual selection station - a two position station shall be provided on the enclosure marked
"Automatic" and Non-automatic".
10. Means shall be provided on the controller to operate an alarm signal continuously while the pump is
running.
11. Control equipment shall meet all requirements of NFPA No. 20.

6.11.4 Tank Controllers
Electronic Water Level Indicator: Electronic water level indicator shall provide remote reading of water level into the
pump control panel. An alarm facility shall be provided for connection to the fire pump control panel to indicate low
water level and to provide a signal to shut down the pumps if the tank is empty.
6.11.5 Jockey Pumps
The jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the pump schedule on the drawings.
Pump shall be 2900 rpm close coupled, centrifugal, electric or vertical multi-stage, complete with pressure relief valve.
Pump controller shall be factory pre-wired and tested. Pressure switch shall sense low pressure in the fire pump
system. Set cut-in pressure 5 psi above main fire pump cut-in pressure. Set cut-out pressure at system pressure.
Provide minimum run timer to operate the pump for a minimum of 3 minutes.
Across the line start, H-O-A selector switch.
Control panel to contain a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic motor contractor and thermal overload relays
with external reset. Enclosure to be wall mounted with hinged door.
6.11.6 Installation
The fire pumps shall be provided with a supervised isolating valve, flowmeter and throttling valve on the test piping.
Test piping shall discharge water to the fire water tank through a galvanized steel diffuser pipe.
Each pump shall be complete with suction and discharge pressure gauges, circulation relief valve, closed relief cone,
automatic air release valve, drain valves coupling guard and its own control panel.
Provide remote annunciation for each pump to the central control room providing indication of electric pump run
and trip status.
The electric motor driven unit shall have the pump, electric motor and control panel mounted on a common base.
The entire unit will be factory tested prior to shipping.
The electric motor driven unit control panel shall be specifically designed for fire pump service. All wiring between
pump, pump devices and controller shall be factory wired and tested. Wiring between controller and the building fire
alarm system shall be by the Contractor.
The control panels shall be securely mounted in an enclosure that will protect the equipment against mechanical
injury and falling drops of water. All switches required to keep the controller in the "automatic" position shall be
within the locked cabinet. Emergency access to the switch shall be by breaking the glass panels.

A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of the each enclosure showing exact wiring
for the controller, including a legend of identifying numbers of individual components. All wiring terminals shall be
plainly marked to correspond with the wiring diagram furnished.
Wiring elements of the controllers shall be designed on a continuous-duty basis. All wiring leading from the panel to
the engine and to the batteries shall have adequate carrying capacity. Such wiring shall be protected against
mechanical injury by metal conduit.
Each operating component of the controllers shall be marked to plainly indicate an identifying number referenced to
the wiring diagram. The markings shall be located so as to be visible after installation.
Complete instructions covering the operation of the controllers shall be provided and conspicuously mounted on the
controllers.
Prior to shipment, the electric pumps and control panels shall be thoroughly shop-tested as a unit by the pump
manufacturer. A characteristic curve showing the pump performance based upon the results of the shop test shall be
submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment, and shall include the performance of the pump. Absence of these test
reports, indicating that the complete unit has been tested in the factory by the driver, will be ample grounds for the
rejection of the equipment.
One of the electric fire pumps shall be the lead fire pump. The other shall be the standby fire pump and will only
operate if the lead fire pump cannot maintain system pressure.
Set jockey pump pressure controls to maintain system pressure. Set excess pressure pumps to maintain zone
pressure.
The field acceptance test results shall be as good as the manufacturer’s certified shop test characteristic curve for the
pump being tested within the accuracy limits of the test equipment.
Overheating: The pump shall operate at peak load conditions without objectionable heating of the bearings or of the
prime mover. The operating pump speed shall be the speed at which the pumping unit would be expected to operate
during a fire.
6.11.7 Controller
The automatic controller shall be put through not less than ten automatic and ten manual operations.
A running interval of at least five minutes at full speed shall be allowed before repeating the starting cycle.
Automatic operation of the controller shall start the pump from all the provided starting features, such as pressure
switches, valves, etc.
The pump shall be in operation not less than one hour (total time) during the foregoing tests. Field wiring of remote
panels, installation and wiring of water level indicators shall be provided by the Contractor. The pump manufacturer
shall assume unit responsibility and shall provide the services of a qualified Technician to supervise the installation

and alignment of equipment. Field tests shall be conducted to satisfy Local Authorities having jurisdiction of
satisfactory operation of pump, driver and controller. The pump manufacturer's Technician shall be at the job site,
supervising the test.
Spare parts and tools necessary for two years operation, as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be provided as
a part of the Contract. A list of these spares shall be included in the offer.
Provide and install water relief valve and test discharge piping and all discharging water back to the fire water tank.
Contractor shall provide exact head calculations based on shop drawings before final selection of pumps. Water
Storage Tank:
Commissioning and testing shall be carried out on completion of the installation and within ten working days of
assembly.
Thoroughly clean and disinfect the tank prior to bringing into service.
6.11.8 Fire Water Storage Tanks
The water storage tanks shall be of Concrete construction of the sizes indicated on the drawings and equipment
schedules from one of the specified vendors.
An approved pattern vortex inhibitor shall be fitted within the storage tank at the start of the suction and drain pipes.
The inhibitor shall prevent a vortex within the tank and be used to overcome a large 'dead- water' area at the bottom
of the tank.
Provide an internal separation panel to divide tank into two separate water compartments such that one half of the
tank can be drained and cleaned while keeping the other half in operation.
Tanks shall be externally flanged.
Provide tappings for all piping connection as indicated on the drawings. All connections to tanks shall be factory
constructed and tested. In no case shall tappings be done on site.
Vent cowls and overflows shall be fitted with a suitable galvanized mesh screen to prevent insects and vermin from
entering the tank.
6.11.9 Fire Hydrants
Not applicable in this project.
6.12 Specialist Gas Supplies.

6.13 Building Automatic Controls
The controls system shall provide and energy efficient, flexible and user friendly method of control and shall fully
comply with the operators requirements for Building Services Automated controls.
The controls system shall provide and energy efficient, flexible and user friendly method of control and shall fully
comply with Building Energy Management requirements for Building Services Automated controls.
Controllers shall execute via software, all the necessary floor optimization, time, temperature, building low limit
protection, demand operation, interlocking and energy control requirements of the mechanical services. The control
shall include but not be limited to;
 Motor Control outstations

 Remote accessories, valve and damper actuators.
 Sensors and Thermostats.
 HV/LV load monitoring and control systems.
 Water management
 Motor control centre incoming power supplies.
6.13.2 Related Documents & References
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
This section forms part of every section of Electrical, Communication & Electronic Safety and Security. Conform to
General Requirements for Electrical Services.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Mechanical
Division Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
6.13.3 Summary Scope of Works
This Section includes supply, installation and testing of Intelligent Building Management System (IBMS).
The BMS shall serve as global facility management system and be integrated to form one project-wide system –
Intelligent Building Management System (BMS) with common operator window.
The BMS shall facilitate intelligent management of all building services. The following system shall be incorporated
into the BMS:

 Mechanical Services (the BMS)

o Air Conditioning
o Ventilation
o Plumbing
o Electrical
 Energy Management
o Water Supply Metering (monitoring)
o Electrical Energy Metering (monitoring)
o BTU Metering (Monitoring)
 Electrical Systems
o Lighting Control (landlord areas & external lighting)
o Generators and associated fuel systems.
o Automatic transfer switch
o UPS
o LV Panels, Sub-main Switchboards, Distribution Boards & Motor Control Centers (MCC)
 The Security Management System (CCTV and Access Control)
 Provisions for future Facility Management
 All Low current systems (PAVA, AV System, etc…)
 Status only of devices and equipment related to Fire mode operation of the building. Fire Detection
and Alarm system will operate independently, but it will be integrated to BMS to provide additional
alarm status notification.
The Automatic Controls (BMS) Specialist shall be responsible for the following,
1. Furnish a totally interoperable BACnet-based system, including a Microsoft latest version compatible
operator's workstation. The operator's workstation, all building controllers, application controllers, and
all input/output devices shall communicate using the protocols and network standards as defined by
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet. Accordingly, all workstations and controllers, including unitary
controllers, shall be native BACnet devices. No gateways shall be used for communication to controllers
installed under this section.
2. The Supervisory Controller should have the capability to communicate on 2 more protocols other than
BACnet, MODbus and Lontalk would be preferred, to communicate to existing systems or to systems
installed under other sections.
3. The Automatic Controls (BMS) Specialist shall provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and
software to meet the system's functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statement (PICS) for Windows-based control software and every controller in system,
including unitary controllers.
4. The Automatic Controls (BMS) Specialist shall prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection
drawings, and software configuration from project design data.
5. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases, graphic displays,
logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and
bid documents.
6. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables

needed, and all associated hardware.
7. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application controllers, and
input/output devices.
8. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator's terminals and peripheral devices
supplied under this section.
9. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of
every item supplied.
10. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system installation,
start-up, and commissioning.
11. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein.
12. Provide as-built documentation, operator's terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated
project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total of
which accurately represents the final system.
13. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No used components
shall be used as any part or piece of installed system.
6.13.4 Integration Functionality
1. Mechanical Services (the BMS)

a. Provide full functionality of all landlord areas equipment
b. Refer to BAS specification
2. Energy Management
a. Provide fully functional integration for monitoring purposes
b. Provide and integrate Mbus/Bacnet based metering solution for chilled water for monitoring
purposes.
c. Provide and integrate Mbus/Bacnet based metering solution for Electrical meters, Water
meters for monitoring purposes.
d. Refer to the Schedule of Points for detailed requirements
e. The BMS shall have the capability to generate reports in the form of billing invoices and/or
graphs as single entity not two different applications.
3. Electrical systems: generators, automatic transfer switch, UPS, MV Panels, Main/ Sub main
Switchboards, Distribution Boards & Motor Control Centers (MCC )
a. Provide full functionality
b. Refer to the Schedule of Points for detailed requirements & specifications.
4. Lighting Control
a. Provide full operational scheduling capabilities for all controlled circuits
b. Refer to the Schedule of Points for detailed requirements and specification.
5. The Security Management System
a. Provide alarm status notification of equipment and devices as defined in the Schedule of Points
6. Miscellaneous telecommunications systems
a. Provide monitoring and alarm only of major LAN equipment
b. Provide coordinated, automatic LAN (e.g. through SNMP protocol) and BMS equipment

shutdown on expiry of UPS battery autonomy time

c. Refer to the Schedule of Points for equipment list
7. Fire Management System
a. Fire Detection and Alarm system will operate independently, but it will be integrated to BMS
to provide additional alarm status notification of equipment and devices related to Fire mode operation
of the building. Coordinate with Fire Alarm System supplier.
b. Refer to Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls, for relationship with smoke control system.
8. All Low Current Systems
a. Provide alarm status notification of the systems and panels as defined in the Schedule of
Points.
b. Provide full monitoring system.
6.13.5 System Architecture
The BMS shall use IEEE 802.3 Standard Local Area Network (LAN) for communications. Seamless integration is
required with guaranteed interoperability for:
 Data sharing
 Alarm and event management

 Scheduling
 Trending
 Device and network management
The BMS shall use a Client Server architecture based on a modular PC network, utilizing industry standard operating
systems and protocols.
The architecture shall support distributed servers in a Distributed Server Architecture (DSA) to allow multiple and
independent systems to communicate together for data exchange in order to provide an easy management and
avoid duplicate work.
The architecture shall provide two levels of processing and control, Central System Level: standard Servers and
Workstations.
Automation Level: local microprocessor based units that can interact between them and communicate with the
Central System Level providing local processing and storage. This level shall be as independent as possible in order
to provide full functionalities even in the event of a failure of the Central System or an outage of communication
links.
6.13.6 Cable Specification
Proprietary specification cables most suited to each application as recommended by manufacturer shall be used.
6.13.7 Project Specific Configuration

There will be an Building Management System Room (BMS Room), The BMS room and Technical equipment room
shall accommodate BMS workstations, central battery system workstation, lighting control system workstation, main
fire alarm control panel, servers, printers UPS and peripherals.
Note: Telephone system and data network, as well as facade & external lighting control, and information display
system are operated as centralized systems with all common equipment located in the BMS Room.
System Control and Monitoring via the Web: for specifically nominated building tenants only or other selected people
of facility management without access to an Operator Workstation, the BMS shall provide the ability to control and
monitor site resources via a standard Intranet site. This Intranet site should be made accessible and properly
formatted for both PCs and PDAs or handhelds.
The system shall perform checks on data integrity of all data acquired from each device. If an invalid or time out
response is received, the data shall be ignored and the system will record the transaction as an error.
Communications statistics shall be displayed as standard on the system and shall also be available as part of the
reporting system or custom displays.
Once a control device is configured and placed in service, the system shall automatically begin background diagnostic
scanning of the device to ensure that communications are monitored independently of any monitoring scanning.
6.13.8 Vendor Requirements
The vendor shall be a recognized leader in Building Automation Systems capable of supplying all necessary support
services including hardware and software support, configuration services, system installation and commissioning and
on-going support.
6.13.9 Quality Assurance
The software supplied, as part of this system shall be developed in an ISO 9001 compliant environment.
 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet.
 Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments.
 UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment. Canada and the US.
 National Electrical Code (NEC).
 FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.
 EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark).
 UL-864 UUKL listing for Smoke Controls for any equipment used in smoke control sequences.
6.13.10 Submittals
The Automatic Controls (BMS) Specialist shall submit for the engineers /project managers review the following,
Product Data:

Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Method statements for installation, testing &
commissioning.
Drawings:
The system supplier shall submit detailed engineering drawings, control sequences/philosophies, and bill of materials
for approval.
Drawings shall be submitted in A1 standard sizes
 Eight complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.

 Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM also including all documentation.
 System Documentation: Include the following in submittal package:
 System configuration diagrams in simplified block format.
 All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing.
Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection points, terminal block layouts, and terminal
identification.
Other documents:
Complete bill of materials, including valve schedule and damper schedule as required.
Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and operation of all purchased items.
Overall system operation and maintenance instructions-including preventive maintenance and troubleshooting
instructions.
For all system elements-operator's workstations, building controllers, application controllers, routers, and repeaters-
provide BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135.
Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary (non-BACnet) services and/or objects used in the
system.
A list of all functions available and a sample of function block programming that shall be part of delivered system.
Project Management: The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings
and details for hardware items.
6.13.11 Building Automation System (BAS)
The Building Automation System (BAS) system shall be designed, installed, commissioned, and serviced by
manufacturer authorized and trained personnel. System provider shall have an in-place support facility within 2 hours
response time of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory, and necessary test and diagnostic equipment.

The contractor shall provide full-time, on-site, experienced project manager for this work, responsible for direct
supervision of the design, installation, start-up and commissioning of the BAS system.
The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the design, installation and maintenance of BAS systems and shall have
demonstrated technical expertise and experience in the design, installation and maintenance of BAS systems similar
in size and complexity to this project. Bidders shall provide a list of projects, similar in size and scope to this project
completed in the past years.
Materials and equipment shall be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification
requirements.
All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local user displays shall be UL Listed under
Standard UL 916, category PAZX.
All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Governing Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Interference and be so labelled.
Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by representative's local office that must
be within 100 miles (161 km) of project site.
6.13.12 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Store products in manufacturer's unopened, labelled packaging until ready for installation. Store products within the
range of manufacturer's absolute limits for environmental conditions including but not limited to temperature and
humidity.
6.13.13 Warranty & Maintenance
Warranty & maintenance shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of two
years from completion of system acceptance. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty and
maintenance agreement shall provide on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the
vendor. The vendor will develop and recommend the system’s annual maintenance plan for Employer’s use. The
maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours, Sunday through Saturday
and 48 hours on Fridays and Public Holidays. In case of emergency, the response time shall be 30 minutes, or
otherwise as approved by the engineers /project manager. Warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and
software.
6.13.14 Manufacturers
Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of establishing minimum quality
standards and performance requirements. Products which are equal to, or better than those specified, and which
conform to the Engineer's design requirements and color selections, may be acceptable subject to Engineer's
approval. Refer approved list of manufacturer’s.

6.13.15 Hardware
Server:
The BMS system server computer shall comprise of the following minimum hardware:
 Min Windows 7 64 bit
 Intel Core i7 running at a minimum of 3.3 GHz
 16 GB RAM
 A Super VGA graphics card capable of at least 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and 65K colors, non-interlaced
(70 Hz or better vertical refresh rate) PCI Express with at least 256MB of graphics memory.
 Selected CCF workstation shall support up to four monitors (LCD Display). This may require a second
graphics card.
 A 1 TB Hard disk drive
 A 12 function-key keyboard Mouse pointing device
 A sound card
 Speakers
 DVD +/-RW drive capable of playing DVD and CDROM discs, and recording on DVDRW, DVDR, and CDRW
disks
 Color LCD Displays
 Color flat screen monitor with display screen size of 32” (subject to final approval of engineers /project
managers).
 The monitor shall output advisories in a dedicated and protected area of the viewing screen, and speakers
sound a unique audible tone in the event of control system hardware malfunctions or restorations, as well
as to sound a unique audible tone in the event of a computer or communications malfunction.
 Individual point information shall be coded via a minimum eight different colors. These colors shall be
defined with respect to system type and condition.
 Individual point information shall include, but not be limited to:
 Point identifier and expanded identifier.
 Analog value.
 engineering units
 Mode units.
Alarm Printers
Independent alarm printers are not required. All alarm notifications shall be securely stored and flagged as part of
the software package and via agreed IP addressable protocols.
Report Printers
High quality, high speed laser printers for hardcopy system printouts. The printer shall be multi font, Colour output.
It shall have a minimum operating speed of 200 characters / second or higher Printer shall be formatted to print on
standard A3 and A4 paper.

6.13.16 System Software
The BMS system server shall be based around the Microsoft Windows 64-bit multi-tasking environment, Windows
latest version. The system shall be a true 64-bit application to take advantage of Microsoft Windows enabling
technologies.
Standard services supported by the server computer operating system will include the following:
 Multi-tasking Multi-user support

 TCP/IP Network Support with firewalls filtering internet traffic.
 Graphic Display Building Editor
 Application software
 Software at the Operator Workstation shall comprise of:
 Windows latest version available.
 TCP/IP Networking
 Graphic Display Building Editor
 Application software
The networking software shall use the industry standard TCP/IP LAN protocol.
All system peripherals shall be capable of being connected to the server computer via the LAN.
6.13.17 Application Server Software
The BMS system server shall consist of BMS application software and database and utilities for backup.
The workstations will come equipped with web browser and graphics applications and run-time libraries, network
management software, intrusion detection software, and virus scan software.
6.13.18 Operator Interface
The operator interface provided by the system shall allow for efficient communication of operational data and
abnormal conditions. Critical areas (such as alarm icons) shall be visible at all times. A predefined area on the screen
shall provide operator messaging, and this area shall also be visible at all times. A set of standard displays for
configuration, and navigation around the system are to be provided with every system and shall not require any
additional engineering. The system shall also provide an unlimited number of custom (facility specific) displays
created to meet the needs of the specific facility. In the graphical display, an ability to zoom in/out on specific areas
of the alarm map will be provided. In the textual display, an ability to sort alarms based on various parameters (e.g.
priority, time, location proximity) will be provided.
The tool bar and pull down menus shall be fully configurable. Similarly, such functions shall also be available via a
standard set of Function-Key based push buttons without requiring configuration. The operator interface shall
support the ability to “full screen lock” the window so users cannot access other applications.

Web Browser Operator Interface (IP addressable protocol)
The operator interface shall also be fully available through a web browser. From a standard browser such as
Microsoft's Internet Explorer, an operator shall be able to perform all functions on the same standard and custom
displays as used in the standard operator interface. The browser interface shall provide login and security
authentication in the same way as the standard operator interface.
Operator Interface Connection
The operator interface shall be flexible in its connection to the system server(s). An Ethernet LAN connection shall be
used between the Server and the Operator Workstations.
The operator interface LAN connection shall also be flexible to support both permanent and casual access to the
system server either through the standard operator interface or through a browser. The application version shall
allow for a max of 100 users on the basis of simultaneous operator connections. Users shall have the functionality of
being automatically disconnect from the FMS server after an idle timeout period.
Operator Interface Characteristics

The system shall provide a Windows operator interface with the following minimum capabilities as standard. No
custom programming or scripting shall be necessary to produce these
 Window re-size, Zoom in, Zoom out

 Dedicated graphics, icons and Pull Down Menus to perform the following management functions:
 Associated Alarm Display
 Alarm or Alert Summary
 Alarm or Alert Acknowledgement
 Display Sequence Forward/Backward
 Previous Display Recall (minimum of 8 displays)
 Alarm Banner show most recent (or oldest) unacknowledged alarm
 System Date and Time Zone
 Current security Level
 Workstation connection number
 Alarm Annunciation
 Communications Fail Annunciation
 Operator Message Zone
 Energy and BAS (HVAC, Mechanical, Electrical, UPS, Generator, Lighting Control, Central Battery System)
Readings. Automatic Alert/Alarm Trigger Programming by the Operator is desirable.
 Fire Alarm Interface
 Security System Interface.
 ELV Systems Interface.
 Maintenance Display and Scheduling
 History and Trending
 Reporting
Operator Security And Sign-On
Security

If necessary, each operator may be assigned a user profile that defines the following: Security and/or Control Level
Operator Identifier
 Unique Password. Password must follow strict guidelines for secure passwords (e.g. must not include
name or substrings or older passwords) and must be change periodically (e.g. each month).
 Area Assignment / Area Profile
 Start display for that operator
 Timeout Value for that operator
Any actions initiated by the operator shall be logged in the Event database by operator identifier. In addition, any
control actions shall only be allowed if the control level configured in the operator's profile exceeds the level assigned
to the controlled point.
Utilities shall be provided to allow administration of the operator passwords.
Security Levels
The system shall support at least six levels of operator security. The functions allowed from each security level shall
be as follows;
 Level 1: Signed Off mode - View start-up display only.

 Level 2: View only - The operator shall be able to view displays. Typically used for an inexperienced
operator.
 Level 3: Permit all Level 1 and 2 functions and in addition the operator shall be permitted to control
points such as start/stop, disable/enable, etc. and acknowledge alarms as they occur.
 Level 4: Permit all Level 1 through Level 3 functions in addition to accessing master time schedules,
system peripherals allocation, change parameters, build reports and use most standard system
configuration displays. This level shall typically be reserved for the system supervisor.
 Level 5: Permit all Level 1 through Level 4 functions in addition to accessing the engineering functions
such as building and linking displays, allocating keyboard push button assignments, etc. (Reserved for
the system engineer).
 Level 6: This is the highest level of station security and shall allow the user unlimited access to all station
functions (Typically reserved for the system manager).
Any operator breach of security shall be visible to the CCF operator. Sign-On/Sign-Off
The operator shall be permitted to sign on to the system if the correct Operator Identity and the Operator Password
have been entered. This password shall be encrypted in the database. It shall also be possible to have the system
linked to Windows such that the operator uses their Windows Account Name and password to sign on to the system.
This ensures that operators only need to remember one set of credentials.
After a series of three unsuccessful attempts to sign-on the Operator Workstation interface shall be locked for a
configurable period of time. This event will be also made visible to the CCF operator. The lockout period shall be set
via system configuration displays. During Operator Workstation lockout the other Windows functions of the computer
running the Operator Workstation software shall not be affected.

It shall be possible to assign operators either single or multi-user passwords. Single user passwords enable the
operator to sign-on to only a single Operator Workstation thus preventing simultaneous sign-on be the same
operator. Operators with the highest sign-on security level who may require simultaneous access to more than one
Operator Workstation would typically use the multi-user password.
Each operator shall be assigned a password and a set of authorized areas and time periods. The operator may sign-
off at any time by issuing a sign-off command.
A keyboard time-out feature shall be provided such that the operator shall be automatically signed off after a defined
period of keyboard inactivity. It shall optionally be possible to configure automatic call-up of a "logged- out" display
when this occurs to hide previously displayed restricted information.
Command Partitioning
It shall be possible to assign to each operator a set of allowed commands for each assigned area, where an area is a
group of points. These commands can be mapped against the output state of any given digital point in the respective
area to determine whether a control command is allowed for the particular operator.
With this feature, it shall for example be possible to configure an operator to set a digital point to ON, but to disallow
the same operator from setting the same digital point to OFF.
6.13.19 Standard System Displays
The following displays shall be included as part of the BMS system:
 Alarm Summary Display
 Event Summary Display

 Point Detail Template Displays (for each point in the database)
 Communications Status Displays
 System Status Displays
 Configuration Displays
 Maintenance Display
The Alarm Summary, Event Summary, Point Detail, Communications Status, System Status shall not require any
configuration.
Systems where standard graphical displays, showing all parameters for each system Point, do not exist shall not be
acceptable.
6.13.20 Custom Displays
The BMS shall include a Graphic Display Building editor for the creation of site specific graphic displays. It shall allow
one-step online building of display static and dynamic objects. It shall allow the displays drawn using the editor to
appear exactly the same when viewed from an Operator Workstation.

Displays shall be created in the HTML format. This is essential so that the displays can also be viewed through a web
browser as well as the normal BMS operator interface. The displays must be saved in the standard HTML format. All
graphic elements shall be available as HTML elements.
It shall be possible to link dynamic objects to the BMS database. They shall allow information to be displayed from
the database or to allow an operator to interact with them in order to make changes in the database and to perform
control actions.
It shall include static and dynamic display objects on the one display. The editor shall allow display objects to be
manipulated by pointing, clicking and dragging. The editor shall allow display objects to be drawn, re-sized, copied,
grouped, rotated, aligned and layered over each other. It shall be possible to copy and paste objects within and
between displays.
Display Scripting: It shall be possible to further animate display elements using standard HTML scripts such as
JavaScript or VBScript. A script editor supporting one of the standard script languages shall be provided. By using
script programs, individual elements on the display may be manipulated. A proprietary scripting language or
additional scripting and drawing package shall not be acceptable.
Web Technology: All displays including custom displays shall be usable in a standard Web Browser such as Microsoft’s
Internet Explorer without modification. All displays shall be usable in this manner enabling operators to completely
operate the system through a web browser if required. Displays may also incorporate data from an intranet, the
Internet, or ActiveX
Dash board to be provided. Documents along with other building data. to view live, real-time building data at a glance.
The innovative dashboard is an interactive learning center that will help you increase your building stakeholders’
awareness of their energy use. It encourages their participation and collaboration in understanding the impact of
energy consumption trends by vividly comparing energy use over days, weeks and years.
6.13.21 Online Help and Documentation
The Operator interface shall also have access to online help and full system documentation. Online help shall be fully
searchable and cross referenced to all relevant sections of the documentation.
6.13.22 Monitoring and Control
Monitoring: the system shall support acquisition of data using the following techniques:
 Periodic Scanning
 Report by Exception
 Data on demand
In order to minimize communications traffic, the system shall automatically block data requests using contiguous
addresses and the scan intervals to generate scan packets, optimizing throughput for a given scanning load. The
system shall also provide utilities to examine scan packet allocation for each scan interval, and compile aggregate
statistics on communication link usage.

6.13.23 System Database
The system shall provide a real-time database incorporating data from all inputs. The database shall be configurable
by the end user without the need for any programming and shall be able to be modified on-line without interrupting
operation of the system. In addition to point-based information, the database shall also provide historization
capabilities for analog, digital, pulse and event based information. This information shall be accessible by all facilities
of the system such as custom displays, reports, trends, user written applications, etc. The operator can issue a series
of database management commands and queries, and back up the database. The database maintains event records,
maintenance records.
The database uses SQL Server, SQL Server support Migration to an Enterprise server improves system performance
and offers a more robust, stable database, giving the better access to data; third-party custom reporting simplifies
connectivity to a BMS system.
The real-time database also triggers alerts to the operator in case of failed transactions, or for routine backup
operations.
Database Structure
The real-time database shall support collection and storage of data.

Database backup shall be possible with the system on-line including backup of historical based data. The backup shall
be possible via standard Microsoft Windows operating system utilities.
Grouping of Points
The BMS system shall provide a means by which a number of alarm inputs, outputs and other related points can be
grouped together for more convenient monitoring and control. Operations on a group of points will be done once
and not repeated on all group members.
History Management
Collection of historical point data shall be configurable as part of the point definition. Once configured, this data shall
be collected automatically.
History shall be able to be archived to an alternative file system or offline media. Different archive settings shall be
available for different history types.
History points should be displayed as line or bar charts and in numeric form. Trending
The system shall provide flexible trending allowing real-time or archived data to be trended in a variety of formats.
In addition, trend data types shall be able to be combined to allow for comparisons between data e.g. current real-
time data versus archived data.
All trend configurations must be possible on-line without interruption to the system.
This information can guide the operator to take further security actions to locations near devices with trends of
frequent or increasing security breaches, or to call for replacement of devices which have raised many false alarms in
the past.

6.13.24 Event Management
It shall be possible to log an event such that it shall be journalized in the event file and optionally printed on the event
printer. The journal shall contain the following event information:
 Alarms and Alerts

 Alarm and Alert Acknowledgements
 Return to Normal
 Operator Control Actions
 Operator Login & Security Level Changes
 On-line database Modifications
 Communications Alarms
 System Restart Messages
 Database changes
Standard Displays shall be provided to show the current journal file with the most recent event at the top of the
display (LIFO). Subsequent page forward actions shall allow display of progressively older events. Sorting and filtering
of the journal shall be possible directly on screen. Filters shall be able to be saved for future use. Filtered events shall
be able to be printed as an event report directly from the Event display. Ideally pull-down buttons with a variety of
sorting and information extraction commands are available to the operator to relief him from typing any commands.
Events may be sorted by time and date, database partition or source of the event. It shall be possible to apply filters
to the list of events to limit the view of events to those that match the filter. Filters may include multiple dimensions
and wildcards and shall also be able to be saved and restored for reuse.
It shall be possible to have an on-line event file as large as the disk capacity can accommodate. For example, given
the appropriate disk space it shall be capable of storing more than 1,000,000 (one million) events on-line.
The event file shall store events online. The system shall be able to automatically or manually archive these online
events periodically, at a time period specified by the user. Operators shall be notified by an alarm that event archiving
is required if manual operation is chosen. Events may be archived to tape, or to other media such as CD, Zip drive,
DVD, externally-attached mobile hard disc, flash memory stick, or to other file systems. If archiving does not take
place, the event system shall continue to collect events until it reaches a nominated disk space limit. It shall then
overwrite the oldest events until archiving takes place or more disk space is made available.
Archived events may be restored to the system at a later time if required for reporting purposes. Multiple archives
shall be able to be restored at any one time. The system shall indicate to the operator the range of events in a
particular archive file.
The event manager operates on the database which records event information such as event type, name, time of
event activation, and various event status changes and their times and the person’s name that made these changes.
Events include alerts such as maintenance alerts, point changes of state, cardholder movement, all operator actions,
and changes in system status.

The event manager is supported by a real-time event and maintenance database system which automatically acts on
the occurrence of alarm and alert events based on pre-programmed actions set by the operator. For instance, upon
the occurrence of an elevator alarm, the database alarm entry for the elevator is set which triggers –if programmed--
a call to the maintenance crew to immediately head to the elevator to evacuate trapped people and to repair the
malfunction.
The system shall also provide the operator with the ability to change the status of the event such as acknowledging
or deactivating alarms and alerts. Moreover, the event management system provides the operator with instant
notification of various entities such as building manager, building engineer, security department, based on the nature
of the event. This notification can be in the format of sms messages, or emails, or pagers.
6.13.25 Alarm Management
Alarm management shall be part of the BMS and based upon common facilities and procedures for all systems, SMS
included.
Alarm Priorities
Each monitored point in the system shall be able to be assigned one of four alarm priorities (Journal, Low, High, and
Urgent) to individual states. The lowest priority changes of status shall only be journalized and optionally printed on
the Alarm/Event printer. Higher priority changes of status will appear in the Alarm Summary and optionally printed
on the Alarm/Event printer.
Within each of the four alarm types there shall be 15 sub-priorities available. Each alarm priority shall have a
configurable color. It shall be possible to configure a time such that if an alarm is not acknowledged within this time
the alarm’s priority is elevated to the next level.
For each alarm priority, it shall be possible to configure a point such that if any alarms of this priority occur, the point
is controlled to the configured state. This could be used to drive external enunciators such as sirens or lights. When
an alarm is acknowledged, it shall be possible to automatically issue a reset to a controller to indicate the alarm is
acknowledged and to attempt to reset the alarm point.
Alarm Enunciation
 Most recent, highest priority alarm message appearing on dedicated alarm banner on the operator
interface. Alarm message appearing on alarm summary display.
 Alarm message printed on the alarm printer
 Alarm indicator flashing on the operator interface
 Alarms shall be enunciated at the Operator Workstation even if there is no operator currently signed-
on.
 Alarm Processing
 Assigning an alarm to the point shall automatically cause the system to perform the following actions
when an alarm occurs:
 The alarm shall be time stamped to the nearest second and logged in the Event database with the Point
Name (source), Alarm type, Alarm Priority, Point Description, New value and Engineering Units

 The point value which is in alarm shall turn red (or other configurable color) and flash on any standard
or custom display which uses that point.
Alarm Summary
Alarms shall be able to be viewed in a consolidated alarm summary which shows all current or pending alarms on the
system. This summary may be sorted by time and date, database partition or source of the alarm. The fields shown
on the alarm summary must be configurable and it shall be easy to move or change the alarms fields displayed. It
shall be possible to apply filters to the list of alarms to limit the view of alarms to those that match the filter. It shall
be possible for the operators to add comments to the alarm and these comments shall be stored with the alarm.
Dedicated Alarm Banner and Alarm Indicator
A dedicated alarm banner shall appear on all displays showing either the most recent or oldest (configurable), highest
priority, unacknowledged alarm in the system. This banner shall be clear when there are no unacknowledged alarms
for the operator to process. An alarm indicator shall also appear on all
displays. Alarm Logging
As well as being logged on the printer, alarms shall be logged to an event file for future retrieval in alarm reports or
archived to removable media.
Alarm Response Function Keys
The following dedicated function keys shall be provided on the keyboard for alarm action:
 ACKNOWLEDGE: After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and selecting the point
the operator shall be able to acknowledge an alarm by pressing this key. This action shall be logged in
the event file and on the printer showing the operator ID with the alarm.
 ALARM SUMMARY: By pressing a dedicated key at any time the operator shall be able to view a display
showing all currently active alarms. The alarm messages shall be color-coded showing priorities. The
operator shall be able to view the alarms according to priority or sorted based on other fields. It shall
be possible to acknowledge alarms from this display and also go to the associated display defined for
the point.
 ASSOCIATED DISPLAY: After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and selecting the
point the operator shall be able to bring up the display applicable to that alarm by pressing this key.
Just selecting the associated display key directly will bring up the associated display for the point
currently on the alarm banner. This is generally a custom graphic showing the location of the alarm in
the facility.
 Print Alarms as a Report The filtered alarm summary should be able to be printed directly as a report.
From the alarm summary page, it shall be possible to view the current filtered list of alarms via a print
preview button. This shows what the alarms will look like when printed to the configured report printer.
From the alarm summary, it shall be possible to print the alarms directly using the print button.

6.13.26 Maintenance Management
The maintenance management system operates on the database which records entries for the site’s devices and
systems, their operation status (working, un-operational, under maintenance), and their scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance system allows the operator to schedule maintenance or replacement of all parts, devices, or systems
based on periodic maintenance needs or as a result of sudden failure, or to query, retrieve or sort any database field,
for instance to help assist the operator in scheduling a group of devices’ maintenance at the same time. Additionally,
the operator may modify device thresholds which automatically trigger maintenance service (e.g. efficiency dropping
below 30%).
6.13.27 Building Management
This facility manages HVAC, Mechanical, Electrical, UPS, Generator, Lighting Control, and the Central Battery System.
Adjusting control levels and checking readings from distributed controllers are the main actions provided by the
building management system.
6.13.28 Reporting
Reporting shall be part of the BMS and based upon common facilities and procedures for all systems.
The system shall support a flexible reporting package to allow easy generation of report data. The reports provided
shall include pre-configured standard reports for common requirements such as Alarm Event reports and custom
report generation facilities that are configurable by the user.
Standard Reports Configuration of standard reports shall only require entry of the schedule information, and other
parameters such as Point Name or wildcard, filter information, time interval for search and destination printer to fully
configure the report. Specifically, no programming or scripting shall be required.
Additional Generic or Custom Reports In addition, configurable report generation facilities must be provided to allow
custom reports to be produced. They shall be able to be configured at any time with the system online, and shall be
able to access any database values. The database reporting facility generates reports on either the event (alarm and
alert), maintenance, or cardholder records of the database. Reports are generated upon request by the operator, or
automatically initiated by the occurrence of some event.
Importing and Exporting
The facility also allows for importing and exporting of data in csv format (for Microsoft Excel) or plain ASCII. Backup
Event reports display the time when various alarms and alerts were activated, and any status changes they have had
as a result of operator action. Report logs are saved on files saved to disk and are periodically backed up on other
media, and are printed for hardcopy. The reporting facility allows these operations to stop if desired by the operator.
Search
Moreover, the event reporting facility can report all points matching some search keywords including status (in alarm,
un-operational), time period (occurred between 1pm and 5pm) and zone (occurred in zone 5). Thus the report will
display all events occurring between certain hours in a certain building. It can also be used to report all activities by a
specific operator between certain times.

6.13.29 Historical Data Archiving
The system shall support archiving of historical data to allow a continuous record of history to be built up over a
period of time. Archived data shall be stored on the hard disk of the system. The number of archives maintained on
the system before transfer to off-line media shall only be limited by the size of the hard disk. The system shall allow
the user to define the specific intervals of history to be archived to avoid archiving of unnecessary data.
Once archived, the data shall be available for re-trending through the system trend facilities in combination with the
current on-line history or other archives. Providing the archived history is present on the BMS Server's hard disk, the
trend facilities must be able to access it transparently for display, when a user scrolls beyond current online history
limits.
6.13.30 Time Schedules
It shall be possible to specify time schedules for the control of all BMS points. A single time schedule shall define the
control to any combination of day and time. The BMS time schedule must also provide the ability to override the
normal schedule for holidays or special occasions.
Configuring time schedules must be done through a graphical user interface whereby the operator selects the
appropriate time span from a calendar.
Where the control device supports an internal time schedule program, the BMS shall be able to upload, display,
modify and download the control device time schedules. Support for the control device time schedules shall be in
addition to the BMS time schedules.
6.13.31 Open Integration
Any of the following Open Protocol Standards shall be used for integration of 3rd party devices or systems other than
HVAC controls. In coordination with other system suppliers include the Open Integration protocols required to
communicate with other systems.
The BMS system shall be capable of communicating to other building subsystems using the ASHRAE standard BACnet.
The BMS shall be capable of acting as both a BACnet Operator Workstation and a BACnet Gateway.
An integrated BACnet Operator Workstation shall be provided which allows the monitoring of BACnet devices via
data acquisition and control. The BMS Supervisory controller shall be able to communicate natively with BACnet.
LonWorks: The BMS server shall provide a LonWorks Client to allow communication to LonWorks Controllers. The
LonWorks interface shall use LonWorks Network Services (LNS) to maintain, monitor, and control LonWorks
networks. The BMS Supervisory controller shall be able to communicate natively with LonWorks.
Modbus: The BMS server shall provide an integrated interface to devices using the Modbus RTU protocol, where the
BMS server shall be the ‘master’ and the external device or system shall be the “slave”. The BMS shall also support
user definable data formats for Modbus devices to accommodate the wide variety of formats in use in the industry.
The BMS Supervisory controller shall be able to communicate natively with Modbus.

Data Exchange (if used on the project) The BMS system shall have the capability to interface to the point database of
other similar BMS systems (i.e. nodes) on a TCP/IP network. This shall enable both the acquiring of point data and
issuing control outputs to other BMS systems.
Data Exchange with Microsoft Excel. The system must be capable of exporting bulk data to Microsoft Excel. As a
minimum the following shall be supported:
 Allow retrieval of data either periodically or snapshot

 Allow retrieval of data via POINT PARAMETER requests
 Allow retrieval of tag names, descriptions etc
 Allow retrieval historical data
 Writing of values from Excel back to the supervisory system
 Accessing the BMS from third party web pages
Web-page controls and a web server interface to the BMS shall be provided, which allow other users to monitor &
control a variety of BMS -supervised functions via their own Web pages created for their own Intranet or Internet and
viewed from a standard web-browser. For example, it shall be possible for building manager to be able to view floor
graphics, and to be able to monitor and control security information from outside of the project.
It shall be possible to limit web browser access to BMS facilities by means of standard web and networking techniques.
Paging and external annunciation of System Alarms The BMS shall optionally provide a facility for sending alarm text
from configured points to the following external systems:
 Alphanumeric pagers
 Digital mobile phones with text message (SMS) support
 Email
Each point’s paging priority threshold shall be individually configurable, and individually enabled or disabled. Each
external device configured in the system shall have individually selectable times and days of operation, an alarm
priority threshold, and an alternative device for use in escalation of unacknowledged alarms.
6.13.32 Diagnostic Capabilities
The BMS system must enable easy diagnostics of the health of the system. All diagnostic information shall be viewable
through an easy to use user interface and shall be able to be easily exported as a standalone collection of material for
later analysis. This information shall include the following:
 Communications traces to selected controllers

 All system log files
 Details on system software installation
 Application status information
It shall not be necessary to be an expert user in the system to gather diagnostic information.

6.13.33 Building Controller
Building Controller shall be approved by the BTL as meeting the BACnet Building Controller requirements.
Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a complete list of the services
that must be directly supported to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used
in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall
be supplied for working with proprietary information.
Building controller shall be of modular construction such that various modules may be selected to fit the specific
requirements of a given project. At a minimum, modules shall consist of a power supply module, a BACnet Ethernet-
MS/TP (master slave token passing) module, a BACnet MS/TP-only module, and a modem module for telephone
communication. Those projects that require special interfaces may use Modbus modules as needed. However, all
Ethernet communications and all controllers-including central plant controllers, advanced application controllers and
unitary controllers-supplied by BAS manufacturer shall utilize the BACnet protocol standard.
Modules shall be selected to fit the particular project application. Up to seven modules shall be powered by a single
power supply module. All modules shall be panel-mounted on DIN rail for ease of addition and shall be interconnected
using a simple plug-in cable. A module in the middle shall be replaceable without removing any other modules.
All modules shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the system based on information from any
objects in the system, regardless if the object is directly monitored by the building controller module or by another
controller. The software program implementing these strategies shall be completely flexible and user-definable.
All software tools necessary for programming shall be provided as part of project software. Any systems utilizing
factory pre-programmed global strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on-site, using a WAN or
downloaded through remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global strategies using firmware changes
is also unacceptable.
Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks, and support DDC functions, 1000 Analog Values
and 1000 Binary Values. All flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. Programming
tool shall be supplied and be resident on workstation. The same tool shall be used for all controllers.
Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real-time as program is executing.
This function may be performed using the operator's workstation or field computer.
Controller shall have a FLASH memory of 4 GB minimum to ensure high performance and data reliability. Battery shall
provide power for orderly shutdown of controller and storage of data in nonvolatile flash memory. Battery backup
shall maintain real-time clock functions for a minimum of 30 days. The controller shall take SDRAM of 1 GB minimum
to be utilized for backups.
Global control algorithms and automated control functions shall execute using 32-bit processor.
The Controller shall have two Ethernet ports one of them shall be dedicated to BACnet connection with application
controllers and third party systems that communicate natively on BACnet/IP.
The Controller shall allow for Wireless communication natively on BACnet/Zigbee, if the site conditions requires such
installation.
The Controller shall have ports to communicate natively on BACnet/MSTP, BACnet/IP, LonWorks and Modbus.

6.13.34 Schedules
Each building controller module shall support a minimum of 80 BACnet Schedule Objects and 80 BACnet Calendar
Objects. Building controller modules shall provide normal seven-day scheduling, holiday scheduling and event
scheduling.
Logging Capabilities
 Each building controller shall log as minimum 320 values. Any object in the system (real or calculated)
may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator's workstation.
 Logs may be viewed both on-site or off-site using WAN or remote communication.
 Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked operator's workstation for long-
term archiving if desired.
 Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party spreadsheet or
database programs.
Alarm Generation:
 Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state (either real or
calculated). This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object state changes, and
various controller communication failures.
 Each alarm may be dialed out as noted elsewhere.
 Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the operator's terminal or
off- site using remote communications.
 Controller must be able to handle up to 320 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrollment objects,
with system destination and actions individually configurable.
 Demand Limiting:
 Demand limiting of energy shall be a built-in, user-configurable function. Each controller module shall
support shedding of up to 200 loads using a minimum of two types of shed programs.
 Load shedding programs in building controller modules shall operate as defined in section 2.3.J of this
specification.
Tenant Activity Logging:
 Tenant Activity logging shall be supported by building controller module. Each independent module
shall support a minimum of 80 zones.
 Tenant Activity logging shall function as defined in this specification.
 Ethernet - MS/TP Module:
 Ethernet - MS/TP Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General
Requirements, of this section and the following.
 All communication with operator's workstation and all application controllers shall be through BACnet.
Building controller Ethernet - MS/TP module shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 2-way
BACnet router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet
10/100MHz) and MS/TP LAN. Ethernet - MS/TP module shall also route messages from all other building
controller modules onto the BACnet Ethernet network.
 MS/TP LAN must be software-configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.
 The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX BACnet over twisted pair
cable (UTP).

6.13.35 Central Plant and Application Controllers
Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each air handler and provide native BACnet application
controllers as needed for central plant control that adequately cover all objects listed in object list. All controllers
shall interface to building controller through either MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol, or Ethernet LAN using BACnet
over Ethernet or BACnet TCP/IP. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained
logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable using graphical
programming blocks. Programming tool shall be resident on operator workstation and be the same tool as used for
the building controller. No auxiliary or non-BACnet controllers shall be used.
BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported
to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working
with proprietary information.
Standard BACnet object types supported shall include, as a minimum, Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog Value,
Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Multi-state Values, Device, File, and Program object types. All proprietary
object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All
necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 12-bit resolution that accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0-
10VDC, Platinum 1000 ohm RTD, 0-5VDC, 4-20mA and dry contact signals. Any input on a controller may be either
analog or digital with a minimum of three inputs that accept pulses. Controller shall also include support and
modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary
and analog outputs on board. Analog outputs with 12-bit resolution shall support either 0-10VDC or 0-20mA. Binary
outputs shall have LED indication of status. Software shall include scaling features for analog outputs.
Application controller shall include 20VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to external sensors.
All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to
retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller up to 20 times per second (minimum of
10 times per second) and capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All calculations shall be
completed using floating-point math and system shall support display of all information in floating-point
nomenclature at operator's terminal.
Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or
remotely using modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on
screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using programming tools as
described in operator's terminal section.
Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section 2.9.B.) Display on intelligent room
sensor shall be programmable at application controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All
button functions and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode, based on
which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room
sensor.

Schedules:
Each central plant/AHU controller shall support a minimum of 50 BACnet Schedule Objects and have a real time clock
on board with battery backup to maintain time through a power loss.
Logging Capabilities:
Each controller shall support a minimum of 200 trendlogs. Any object in the system (real or calculated) may be logged.
Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator's workstation.
Controller shall periodically upload trended data to system server for long-term archiving if desired. Archived data
stored in (MS Jet Database or SQL) database form and shall be available for use in third-party spreadsheet or database
programs.
Alarm Generation:
Alarms may be generated within the controller for any object change of value or state (either real or calculated). This
includes things such as analog object value changes, and binary object state changes.
Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the operator's terminal or off-site using
remote communications.
Controller must be able to handle up to 200 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrolment objects, with system
destination and actions individually configurable.
The controller processor shall be a 32-bit processor.

The packaging of the controller shall provide operable doors to cover the terminals once installation is complete. The
housing of the controller shall provide for DIN rail mounting and also fully enclose circuit board.
6.13.36 Terminal Unit Application controllers (fan-coils)
Provide one native BACnet application controller for each piece of unitary HVAC equipment’s that adequately covers
all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers shall interface to building controller through MS/TP LAN using
BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program
as needed for complete control of unit.
BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard, for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported
to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working
with proprietary information.
Standard BACnet object types supported shall include, as a minimum, Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog Value,
Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File, and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used
in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall
be supplied for working with proprietary information.

Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can accept 3K and 10K thermistors,
0-5VDC, 4-20mA, dry contact signals and a minimum of 3 pulse inputs. Any input on controller may be either analog
or digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor.
Controller shall include binary outputs on board with analog outputs as needed.
All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to retain logic
program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller 10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple
PID loops for control of multiple devices. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the
field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely through modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by
graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be
programmed using same programming tools as building controller and as described in operator workstation section.
All programming tools shall be provided and installed as part of system.
Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section 2.10 B.) Display on room sensor
shall be programmable at controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions
and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is
pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room sensor.
6.13.37 Auxiliary Control Devices
Temperature Sensors:
All temperature sensors to be solid-state electronic, interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall
sensors to be installed as indicated on drawings. Mount 48 inches above finished floor. Duct sensors to be installed
such that the sensing element is in the main air stream. Immersion sensors to be installed in wells provided by control
contractor, but installed by mechanical contractor. Immersion wells shall be filled with thermal compound before
installation of immersion sensors. Outside air sensors shall be installed away from exhaust or relief vents, not in an
outside air intake, and in a location that is in the shade most of the day.
Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with temperature sensor. Controller
shall function as room control unit and allow occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for
override use-all within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow service technician access
to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.
The intelligent room sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside temperature, and
fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to
configure the display to match their application. The site developer should be able to program the unit to display
time-of-day, room humidity and outdoor humidity. Unit must have the capability to show temperatures in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time countdown shall be automatic, but may
be reset to zero by occupant from the sensor. Time remaining shall be displayed. Display shall show the word "OFF"
in unoccupied mode unless a function button is pressed.
See sequence of operation for specific operation of LCD displays and function keys in field service mode and in normal
occupant mode. Provide intelligent room sensors as specified in point list.

Field service mode shall be customizable to fit different applications. If intelligent room sensor is connected to VAV
controller, VAV box shall be balanced and all air flow parameters shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room
sensor with no computer or other field service tool needed.
LCD Operator Terminal:
The LCD operator terminal is a small wall- or panel-mounted operator's terminal that connects directly the Ethernet
and MS/TP communications trunk.
Screen should be of touchscreen type
Operator's terminal should have at least 64Mb of onboard memory and be capable of all trending / scheduling /
alarming tasks without additional hardware required for up to 32 unitary controllers on a single communications
trunk.
Network Connection Tool:
Network connection tool shall allow technician to connect a laptop to any MS/TP network or at any MS/TP device
and view and modify all information throughout the entire BACnet network. Laptop connection to tool shall be
through Ethernet or PTP.
Provide quick connect to MS/TP LAN at each controller. Tool shall be able to adjust to all MS/TP baud rates specified
in the BACnet standard.
Provide XX Network Connection Tools for this project.
6.13.38 Electronic Actuators and Valves
Quality Assurance for Actuators and Valves:

UL Listed Standard 873 and C.S.A. Class 4813 certified.
NEMA 2 rated enclosures for inside mounting, provide with weather shield for outside mounting.
Five-year manufacturer's warranty. Two-year unconditional and three-year product defect from date of installation.
Execution Details for Actuators and Valves:
Furnish a Freeze-stat and install "Hard Wire" interlock to disconnect the mechanical spring return actuator power
circuit for fail-safe operation. Use of the control signal to drive the actuators closed is not acceptable.
Each DDC analog output point shall have an actuator feedback signal, independent of control signal, wired and
terminated in the control panel for true position information and troubleshooting. Or the actuator feedback signal
may be wired to the DDC as an analog input for true actuator position status.
VAV box damper actuation shall be floating type or analog (2-10VDC, 4-20mA). Booster-heat valve actuation shall be
floating type or analog (2-10vdc, 4-20ma). Primary valve control shall be analog (2-10VDC, 4-20mA).
Actuators for damper and control valves 0.5-6 inches (13 mm to 152 mm) shall be electric unless otherwise specified,
provide actuators as follows:
UL Listed Standard 873 and Canadian Standards association Class 4813 shall certify actuators.
NEMA 2 rated actuator enclosures for inside mounting. Use additional weather shield to protect actuator when
mounted outside.

Mechanical spring shall be provided when specified. Capacitors or other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not
acceptable.
Position indicator device shall be installed and made visible to the exposed side of the actuator. For damper short
shaft mounting, a separate indicator shall be provided to the exposed side of the actuator.
Overload Protection: Actuators shall provide protection against actuator burnout by using an internal current limiting
circuit or digital motor rotation sensing circuit. Circuit shall insure that actuators cannot burn out due to stalled
damper or mechanical and electrical paralleling. End switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are
acceptable only for butterfly valve actuators.
A Pushbutton gearbox release shall be provided for all non-spring actuators. Modulating actuators shall be 24VAC and
consume 10VA power or less.
Conduit connectors are required when specified and when code requires it. Damper Actuators:
Outside air and exhaust air damper actuators shall be mechanical spring return. capacitors or other non- mechanical
forms of fail-safe are not acceptable. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit
normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as required.
Economizer actuators shall utilize analog control 2-10VDC, floating control is not acceptable.
Electric damper actuators (including VAV box actuators) shall be direct shaft-mounted and use a V-bolt and toothed
V-clamp causing a cold weld effect for positive gripping. Single bolt or set-screw type fasteners are not acceptable.
One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft-mounted per damper section. No connecting rods or jackshafts shall be
needed. Small outside air and return air economizer dampers may be mechanically linked together if one actuator
has sufficient torque to drive both and damper drive shafts are both horizontal installed.
Multi-section dampers with electric actuators shall be arranged so that each damper section operates individually.
One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft-mounted per damper section.
Valve Actuators 0.5-6 inches (13-152 mm):

Mechanical spring shall be provided on all actuators for pre-heat coil and actuators for AHU heating or cooling coil
when units are mounted outside. See plans for fail-safe flow function: Normal Open or Normal Closed. Capacitors or
other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable.
All zone service actuators shall be non-spring return unless otherwise specified.
The valve actuator shall be capable of providing the minimum torque required for proper valve close-off for the
required application.
All control valves actuators shall have an attached 3 foot (1 m) cable for easy installation to a junction box. Override
handle and gearbox release shall be provided for all non-spring return valve actuators.
Control Valves 0.5-6 inches (13-152 mm):

The BAS contractor shall furnish all specified motorized control valves and actuators. BAS contractor shall furnish all
control wiring to actuators. The plumbing contractor shall install all valves. Equal percentage control characteristic
shall be provided for all water coil control valves. Linear valve characteristic is acceptable for 3-way valves that are
2.5 inches (63.5 mm) and above.

Characterized control valves shall be used for hydronic heating or cooling applications and small to medium AHU
water-coil applications to 100GPM. Actuators are non-spring return for terminal unit coil control unless otherwise
noted. If the coil is exposed to the outside air stream, see plans for spring return requirement.
Leakage is aero percent, close-off is 200psi, maximum differential is 30psi; rangeablity is 500:1. Valves 0.5-2 inches
(13-51 mm) shall be nickel-plated forged brass body, NPT screw type connections.
Valves 0.5-1.25 inches (13-32 mm) shall be rated for ANSI Class 600 working pressure. Valves 1.5 and 2 inches (39 and
51 mm) shall be rated for ANSI Class 400s working pressure.
The operating temperature range shall be 0-250 degrees F (-18-121 degrees C). Stainless steel ball and stem shall be
furnished on all modulating valves.
Seats shall be fiberglass reinforced Teflon.
Two-way and three-way valves shall have an equal percentage control port. Full stem rotation is required for
maximum flow to insure stable BTU control of the coil.
Three-way valve shall be applicable for both mixing and diverting.
The characterizing disc is made of TEFZEL and shall be keyed and held secure by a retaining ring. The valves shall have
a blow-out proof stem design.
The stem packing shall consist of 2 lubricated O-rings designed for on-off or modulating service and require no
maintenance.
The valves shall have an ISO type, 4-bolt flange for mounting actuator in any orientation parallel or perpendicular to
the pipe.
A non-metallic thermal isolation adapter shall separate valve flange from actuator.
One fastening screw shall secure the direct coupling of the thermal isolation adapter between the actuator and the
valve. This will prevent all lateral or rotational forces from affecting the stem and its packing O-rings.
Globe valves 0.5-2 inches shall be used for steam control or water flow applications.
Valves shall be bronze body, NPT screw type, and shall be rated for ANSI Class 250 working pressure.
Valves 0.5 inches (13 mm, DN15) through 2 inches (51 mm, DN50) with spring return actuators shall close off against
50 psi pressure differential with Class III leakage (0.1 percent).
The operating temperature range shall be 20-280 degrees F.

Spring loaded TFE packing shall protect against leakage at the stem. Two-way valves shall have an equal percentage
control port.
Three-way valves shall have a linear control and bypass port.
Mixing and diverting valves must be installed specific to the valve design. Globe Valve 2.5-6 inches (63.5-152 mm):
Valves 2.5 inches (62.5 mm, DN65) through 6 inches (152 mm, DN50) shall be iron body, 125 lb. (57 kg) flanged with
Class III (0.1 percent) close-off leakage at 50 psi differential.
Valves with spring return actuators shall close off against 50 psi pressure differential with Class III leakage (0.1
percent).
Flow type for two-way valves shall be equal percentage. Flow type for three-way valves shall be linear.
Mixing and diverting valves must be installed specific to the valve design. Butterfly Valves:
Butterfly valves shall be sized for modulating service at 60-70 degree stem rotation. Isolation valves shall be line- size.
Design velocity shall be less than 12 feet (3.7 m) per second when used with standard EPDM seats.
Body is cast iron.
Disc is aluminum bronze standard. Seat is EPDM standard.
Body Pressure is 200 psi, -30-275 degrees F (-34-135 degrees C) Flange is ANSI 125/250.
Media Temperature Range is-22-240 degree F(-30-116 degrees C) Maximum Differential Pressure is 200 psi for 2-6
inch (51-152 mm) in size.

Butterfly Valve Industrial Actuators:

Actuators shall be approved under Canadian Standards Association or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
to UL standards. CSA Class 4813 or equal. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4 (weatherproof) enclosure and will have an
industrial quality coating.
Actuator shall have a motor rated for continuous duty. The motor shall be fractional horsepower; permanent split
capacitor type designed to operate on a 120VAC, 1pH, 60Hz supply. Two adjustable cam-actuated end travel limit
switches shall be provided to control direction of travel. A self-resetting thermal switch shall be imbedded in the
motor for overload protection.
Reduction gearing shall be designed to withstand the actual motor stall torque. Gears shall be hardened alloy steel,
permanently lubricated. A self-locking gear assembly or a brake shall be supplied.
Actuator shall have a 6 ft wiring harness provided for ease in field wiring (above 1500 in-lbs). Two adjustable SPDT
cam-actuated auxiliary switches, rated at 250VAC shall be provided for indication of open and closed position.
Actuator shall have heater and thermostat to minimize condensation within the actuator housing.
Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel for manual override to permit operation of the valve in the event of
electrical power failure or system malfunction. Hand wheel must be permanently attached to the actuator and when
in manual operation electrical power to the actuator will be permanently interrupted. The hand wheel will not rotate
while the actuator is electrically driven.
The actuator shall be analog, floating, or two position as called out in the control sequence of operation. All Analog
valves shall be positive positioning, and respond to a 2-10VDC, 4-20mA, or adjustable signal as required. Analog
actuators shall have a digital control card allowing any voltage input for control and any DC voltage feedback signal
for position indication.
Performance Verification Test:

Control loops shall cause productive actuation with each movement of the actuator and actuators shall modulate at
a rate that is stable and responsive. Actuator movement shall not occur before the effects of previous movement
have affected the sensor.
Actuator shall have capability of signaling a trouble alarm when the actuator Stop-Go Ratio exceeds 30 percent.
Actuator mounting for damper and valve arrangements shall comply to the following: Damper actuators: Shall not be
installed in the air stream.
A weather shield shall be used if actuators are located outside. For damper actuators, use clear plastic enclosure.
Damper or valve actuator ambient temperature shall not exceed 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) through any
combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Appropriate air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers,
standoff legs, or insulation shall be provided as necessary.
Actuator cords or conduit shall incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible. Water shall not be allowed to contact
actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in temperatures dropping below dew point shall be avoided to prevent
water from condensing in conduit and running into actuator.

Damper mounting arrangements shall comply to the following:

The ventilation subcontractor shall furnish and install damper channel supports and sheet metal collars. No jack
shafting of damper sections shall be allowed.
Multi-section dampers shall be arranged so that each damper section operates individually. One electronic actuator
shall be direct shaft mounted per section.
Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturer's specific recommendations for face velocity, differential
pressure and damper type.
Multiple section dampers of two or more shall be arranged to allow actuators to be direct shaft mounted on the
outside of the duct.
Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide shall be arranged with a 3-sided vertical channel (8 inches
wide by 6 inches deep (205 mm wide by 152 mm deep) within the duct or fan housing and between adjacent damper
sections. Vertical channel shall be anchored at the top and bottom to the fan housing or building structure for support.
The sides of each damper frame shall be connected to the channels. Holes in the channel shall allow damper drive
blade shafts to pass through channel for direct shaft-mounting of actuators. Open side of channel shall be faced
downstream of the airflow, except for exhaust air dampers.
Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or housing opening shall receive either vertical channel
supports as described above or sheet metal standout collars. Sheet metal collars (12 inch (305 mm) minimum) shall
bring each damper section out of the wall to allow direct shaft-mounting of the actuator on the side of the collar.
Valve Sizing for Water Coil:

On/Off control valves shall be line size.
Modulating control valve body size may be reduced, at most, two pipe sizes from the line size or not less than half the
pipe size. The BAS contractor shall size all water coil control valves for the application as follows:
Booster-heat valves shall be sized not to exceed 4-9psi differential pressure. Size valve for 50 percent valve authority.
Valve design pressure drop is equal to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop.
Primary valves shall be sized not to exceed 5-15psi differential pressure. Size valve for 50 percent valve authority.
Valve design pressure drop is equal to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop.
Butterfly valves shall be sized for modulating service at 60-70 degree rotation. Design velocity shall be 12 feet (3.7m)
per second or less when used with standard EPDM seats.
Valve mounting arrangements shall comply to the following:
Unions shall be provided on all ports of two-way and three-way valves.

Install three-way equal percentage characterized control valves in a mixing configuration with the "A" port piped to
the coil.
Install 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) and above, three-way globe valves, as manufactured for mixing or diverting service to
the coil.

6.13.39 Points Schedule
The BMS specialist shall provide a points schedule showing each proposed connected point to the system. The points
shall be arranged as scheduled showing the points allocated on a plant-by-plant basis, the controller specification(s)
selected, I/O capacity supplied and the spare I/O available for future use. Points schedule supplied below shall be
considered as supporting information only. The BMS specialist shall be responsible for ensuring the correct allocation
of points required for meeting the performance specification without any extra claim.
The BMS specialist shall include a further schedule summarizing the field hardware and indicate the quantities, types,
manufacturer and duties of the devices. Field devices shall be used where possible.
6.13.40 Examination
The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the engineer/project manager for resolution before rough- in work is
started.
The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies, conflicts,
or omissions shall be reported to the engineer/project manager for resolution before rough-in work is started.
6.13.41 General Workmanship
Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls)
wherever possible.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
Install all equipment in readily accessible location. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted
in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed
access for service.
Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for
performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.
6.13.42 Wiring
All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 26 of these
specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ from other sections of the specification, the
requirements of this section shall take precedence.
Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables
not in raceway may be used provided that:
 All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically
for that purpose.
 Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of

interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

 All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to wire
connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be
neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.
 Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the
Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.
 All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only
within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.
 Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all
penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.
 Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor,
in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation.
 Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located
within packaged equipment control panel enclosures.
 Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network
or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.
 Adhere to Division 26 requirements for installation of raceway, conduits & wirings.
 This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built)
wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.
 Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be
supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In
areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall
be used.
6.13.43 Fibre Optic Cable System
All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Minimum cable and unjacketed fibber bend radii as
specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.
Maximum pulling tensions as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during installation. Post
installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacture's specifications.
Fiber optic cabinets, hardware, and cable entering the cabinet shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions. Minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.
6.13.44 Installation of Sensors
Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.
Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.
All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas
affecting sensor readings.
Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.
Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be
installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat
conducting fluid in thermal wells.
Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service
rooms.
Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location.
6.13.45 Flow Switch Installation
Install using a thread-o-let in steel pipe. In copper pipe use C x C x F Tee, no pipe extensions or substitutions allowed.
Mount a minimum of 5 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream or 2 feet whichever is greater,
from fittings and other obstructions.
Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Assure correct flow direction and alignment.
Mount in horizontal piping - flow switch on top of the pipe.
6.13.46 Actuators
Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.

To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to
approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.
Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout
stroke to both open and closed positions.
Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and
adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.
6.13.47 Warning Labels
Affix plastic labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the Control System. Label shall
indicate the following:
CAUTION
This equipment is operating under automatic control and may
start at any time without warning.
6.13.48 Identification of Hardware and Wiring
All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of
termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.

Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Identify control
panels with minimum 1-cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.
Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug- in
components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.
6.13.49 Controllers
Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. Points used for control loop reset such as
outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement.
Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of [20%] spare I/O
point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, [20%] of each type is
required. If outputs are not universal, [20%] of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each
type of point used.
Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points database definition, and
custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare
points.
Supervisor controller shall be selected to provide a minimum of [35%] spare capacity to communicate with extra main
DDC Controller up to (35%) future expansion through at least two communication protocols (LONTalk, BACNET,
Modbus)
6.13.50 Programming
Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum
of 25% of available memory free for future use.
Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a
written point index.
Software Programming
Provide programming for the system as per specifications and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. All other
system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be
provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly
describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of
operations.
Operators' Interface
Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes
each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all
points dynamically as specified in the points list.
The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and trouble-shoot all
operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system

software, the operator interface data base, and any third party software installation and integration required for
successful operation of the operator interface.
As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the operator interface. Test
duration shall be a minimum of [16] hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's
representative.
Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall
be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives
for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint
acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.
6.13.51 Cleaning
This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all
cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be
collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor.
At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free
from dust, dirt and debris, etc.
At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any
factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or
enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
6.13.52 Protection
The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all
damage thus caused.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The
Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment
received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary
covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
6.13.53 Training
Provide classroom training sessions throughout the contract period for personnel designated by the Owner.
Computer based training may be substituted of hands on training. (Training hours shall be selected by
Owner/Consultant at the time of System approval).
Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently operate the system;
create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for the system; add additional panels
when required.

These objectives will be divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending
on level of knowledge required:
 Day-to-day Operators
 System Troubleshooter
 System Manager: parts
 Provide course outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide one copy
of training material per student.
The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material. Classroom training shall
be done using a network of working controllers at the customer’s site.
6.13.54 Field Quality Control
All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal
codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.
Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible
piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.
Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
6.13.55 Acceptance
The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this
specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be
performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion
requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part
of the warranty.
6.13.56 Control Panels
Any new control equipment for this project shall be housed in a purpose built Form 2 control panels.
The panel(s) shall be two-section cabinet with power in one section and control circuitry in the other, with a common
terminal rails.
Any appropriate warning notices shall be provided.
6.15 Pre-Commissioning, Commissioning and Proving of Mechanical Services

6.15.1 ntroduction
This section details the specific requirements for pre-commissioning and commissioning for the mechanical services.
The pre-commissioning shall include flushing and cleaning of pipework and blowing through of ductwork.
The commissioning shall include the setting to work, testing, adjusting and regulation of the mechanical systems in
accordance with the design figures.
The validation of the systems shall be the demonstration to the satisfaction of the Project Manager that the
mechanical services shall meet the design criteria.
This section of the specification shall apply in its entirety to all existing systems modified or drained down as part to
this contract or any new installation.
All associated systems shall be completely re-commissioned.
The Contractor shall allow for full commissioning and testing of all systems, in addition the Contractor shall allow for
mid-season commissioning of all systems during the 12 months following practical completion.
6.15.2 Pre-commissioning Blow Through Ductwork
Prior to the commencement of any final flushing works the ductwork shall be blown through to remove any dirt or
debris which may have accumulated in the system. The dampers in the system shall be modulated to ensure that
each leg of the ductwork system is blown out by high velocity air, i.e. at least 200% of design air volume for that leg.
Once the ductwork has been blown through it shall be offered for inspection to the project manager. The Contractor
shall include for the system to be cleaned on his behalf by a specialist ductwork cleaning company.
6.15.3 Pre-Commissioning, Flushing and Cleaning of Pipework
The Pre-commissioning, flushing and cleaning of the pipework shall be carried out as follows; this shall not include
the existing heating and chilled water systems.
6.15.4 General Requirements
The pipework systems shall be cleaned in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Mechanical Specification
and the BSRIA Applications Guide 1/89 Flushing and Cleaning of Water Systems, Section 4 and 5.

6.15.5 Chemical Used
It is essential that all chemicals used are compatible with one another and that the supplier / manufacturer have a
recognized quality assurance system, preferably approved to BS 5750. Provision should be made for safe storage and
handling of all chemicals which shall be accompanied by safety data sheets and COSHH assessments. All chemical
shall be environmentally acceptable. No chemicals shall be used on the existing heating system.
6.15.6 Method Statement for Flushing
A method statement shall be submitted to the project manager by the Contractor detailing the proposed flushing
procedure, the sequencing of phasing of the operation, the methods of inspecting, reporting and witnessing of the
work. In addition, details shall be submitted in advance on steps which shall be taken in the event of unfavorable
results being obtained.
It should be noted that the contamination of the pipework systems results directly from installation process. As this
contamination can be minimized by good installation practice, no claims shall be entertained for delays or additional
expense incurred whilst cleaning the system.
6.15.7 Witnessing
The flushing process and the quality control checks shall be witnessed by the commissioning Manager. With the
exception of installation and commissioning, no work may be carried out on pipework which has been flushed
without written approval from the project manager.
6.15.8 Approvals
Local Water Authority’s approval shall be sought for the discharge of contaminated water into the public sewers or
surface water drainage system. A copy of the licence to discharge the contaminated water into the public sewers
should be issued to the project manager.
6.15.9 Pre-Flushing Checks
The Contractor shall ensure prior to the commencement of the flushing process that: Adequate water supplies and
drainage facilities are available.

All flushing bypasses, air vents, overflows etc have been fitted.
All pipework being flushed has been pressure tested to the satisfaction of the project manager. Adequate power
supplies are available.
The temporary connections and flushing equipment comply with the Water Supply Bylaws.
6.15.10 Flushing
The Contractor shall not use the system pumps to flush the pipework and a temporary pumping station shall be
employed.
The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary fill connections are isolated and completely disconnected from the
system at the end of each day and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to inspect the works to ensure that
these precautions are taken.
All hose connections shall be capable of withstanding the water pressures developed during flushing.
Full bore flow and return shall be provided through all parts of the system to be cleaned, with no dead legs or by-
passes left in which dirt could be trapped. Strainers shall be installed where indicated on the drawings or required by
manufacturers to extract debris which could resist the flushing process.
Drain cocks shall be re-filled and shall be treated with a non acidic cleaning solvent capable of removing grease and
corrosion products.
There shall be a period of not greater than seven days between the final flushing of a system and the system cleaning.
If a period of greater than seven days elapses, an initial dose of anti-corrosion chemicals shall be added to prevent
on going corrosion.
The non acidic cleaning solvent shall be circulated by the system pumps for a minimum of 24 hours. Samples shall be
taken at several points on the system to ensure that the cleaning agent is present in sufficient concentration. No
solvents shall be used on the existing heating system.
The system shall be emptied, flushed out and refilled until the:
Total dissolved solids Equivalent to incoming water main
pH Equivalent of incoming water main
Iron in Solution Maximum of 10ppm above that of the incoming mains water supply
Appearance Visually clear and bright water, free from suspended solids

After flushing and draining all drain pockets, strainers, dead legs and control valves shall be checked to ensure that
the systems are completely clean and free from dirt prior to being put into commission. During the flushing process
all 3 port control valves shall be manually adjusted to provide circulation via all ports.
The Contractor shall re-fill and vent the systems using a mixture of 65% by weight softened water (200ppm) and
deionised water.
These services are not available on site and the Contractor should make provision to have them brought to site.
Water treatment chemicals shall be added during the final re-filling of the systems. The circuits shall be charged with
the required quantity of corrosion inhibitor.
6.15.11 Pre-Commissioning Checks and Checklists
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval pre-commissioning checklists for each of the mechanical
systems including controls and the associated electrical services. These checklists shall be used to determine if the
systems are ready to be commissioned. The Contractor shall apply to the project manager and obtain in writing for
his agreement that the systems are ready to be commissioned.
Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the pre-commissioning checks, the following items shall be complete
prior to the commencement of commissioning:-
The installation shall be seen to have been installed in accordance with the Specification and manufacturers
requirements and that the final inspections have been completed together with outstanding remedial works.
The pressure testing of each of the systems shall be successfully complete in accordance with the Specification.
The water system shall be flushed and cleaned in accordance with the Specification and BSRIA Applications Guide
1/89.
The water system should be filled treated and vented. The installation shall be safe and ready to set to work.
6.15.12 Commissioning Documents
CIBSE Commissioning Codes
Series A Air Distribution Systems

Series B Boiler Plant
Series C Automatic Control System
Series R Refrigerant Systems
Series W Water Distribution

BSRIA Applications Guides
AG 2/89 The commissioning of Water Systems in Buildings, excluding Part A AG 3/89
The commissioning of Air Systems in Buildings, excluding Part A
BSRIA Technical Memorandum
TM 2/88 A procedure for the commissioning variable air volume systems
BSRIA Technical Note
TM 14/8 Instruments for Building Services Applications
British Standards
All relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice expressed or implied in the above documents.
Manufacturers Literature
All relevant manufacturers’ literature containing recommendations for testing, regulating, setting to work etc.
In unusual cases where such recommendations are at variance with the basic principles of the documents listed
above, the approval of the project manager shall be obtained in writing regarding the procedure to be employed.
In general, however, the manufacturer’s literature and recommendations shall be considered complementary and /
or supplementary and shall be incorporated into the basic methods set out in the above documentation.
6.15.13 Commissioning Results Documentation
The test results shall be recorded by the Contractor on the sheets in a format to be agreed with the project manager.
The original sheets shall be typed and after a successful check be included in the Operation and Maintenance
documents.
6.15.14 Commissioning of the System
The Contractor shall include and make full allowance for carrying out the balancing, commissioning and setting to
work all the installations as indicated on the mechanical services drawings and described in the specification.
The Contractor shall obtain from the relevant manufacturers prior to commissioning on site all current wiring
diagrams for all electrical equipment associated with the plants being commissioned, including motor control circuit
details and interlock arrangements.

The design data for items of plant and equipment is summarized on the design drawings and in the specification. The
Contractor shall develop, prior to the commencement of his work, a method statement detailing how he intends to
commission the works. This method statement shall be submitted to approval to the project manager.
Equipment and commissioning schedules shall be completed by the Contractor, during commissioning, indicating the
design conditions, site test readings and observations.
Upon completion of final balancing and commissioning of the systems the Contractor shall submit his test results in
duplicate to the project manager for approval, prior to witnessing.
The site test measurements shall not be approved by the project manager until they concur with the design
conditions.
Upon arrangement in writing by the project manager of the test results, and observation that the systems are fully
commissioned, the installation can only then be considered for acceptance and as being ready for handover.
The approved equipment and commissioning schedules shall be incorporated into the Operating and Maintenance
Instructions by the Contractor.
The following tolerances shall be applied to site measurements of air flow:-
Terminal/Unit Branch System
Supply Air +20% +10% +10%

-0% -0% -0%
Return Air +20% +10% +10%

-10% -10% -10%
Unitary Plant +10% - +10%

-10% - -0%
The following tolerance shall be applied to site measurements of water flow:-
Plant Main HeadersBranches Terminals
Chilled +5% +5% +5% water

-0% -0% -0%
Low Pressure Hot +5% +5% +5% water
-0% -0% - -0%

The Contractor shall indicate on his working drawings the location of test holes in the ductwork. The location of these
holes shall be agreed with the project manager and where the duct is insulated provision shall be made to frame the
recess for the test holes as detailed in the standard specification.
Should any of the tests shown that the system or its components do not meet the specified requirements, these
shortcomings shall be reported to the project manager together with a report on the action which the Contractor
has taken to determine the cause of the problem. Reporting any shortcomings shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of determining the source of the problem.
Should the Contractor consider that he cannot obtain repeatability or any test at particular locations due to site
constraints, he shall inform the project manager, in writing, prior to the commencement of any commissioning, of
these positions. In the absence of any such notice it shall be assumed that the Contractor has satisfied himself that
the system can be regulated within the tolerances specified.
6.15.15 Commissioning of Controls
The commissioning of control shall fully demonstrate that the controls philosophy as described previously as a
minimum has been fully complied with and that all safety interlocks are incorporated and functional. The Contractor
shall be required to demonstrate this in full to the Project Manager and Independent Certifier.
Where controls or interlocks are wired out or overridden to facilitate commissioning or testing, these modifications
shall be recorded on a copy of the wiring diagrams. Any temporary wiring shall be identified as such on the drawings
and on the cable itself e.g. “Temporary connection between terminal 56 and 62 wiring out frost Stat”.
All temporary wiring shall be removed and control set points re-set upon completion of the commissioning and
testing.
All temporary wiring on adjustments to controls to facilitate testing and commissioning shall be submitted as part of
the method statement for these activities.
6.15.16 Commissioning Company
All of the above works shall be carried out on the contractor’s behalf by a specialist commissioning company.
6.15.17 Commissioning Manager
The contractor shall appoint the services of an approved independent commissioning manager who shall be
responsible for witnessing on the clients behalf prior to handover Point to Point and full Cause and Effect testing of
the complete Mechanical and Electrical services installations.
The Contractor is to account for the commissioning programme, responsibilities and criteria within the main
programme of works.

The contractor shall be required to establish in full consultation with the commission manager to and agreed
programme a full schedule of all point to point tests to be undertaken along with a fully detailed cause and effect
schedule associated with the operation of all Mechanical and Electrical services installation, plant equipment and
controls including a full review of the BMS interfaces, alarm handling procedures and front end BMS graphics.
Handover shall not be accepted without the independent certifiers report along with fully signed point to point, cause
and effect test schedules, copies of which are to be included within the operation and maintenance manuals.
The specialist commissioning manager shall be appointed during the detailed design stage and the scope of their
responsibility shall include:
Design input: commissionability design reviews

Commissioning management input to construction programming Commissioning management input during
installation stages
Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post handover stages.
6.15.18 Final system Proving and Validation Procedure
The mechanical and electrical services shall be commissioned to the design criteria during the commissioning period
as detailed on the agreed construction programme. The contractor shall produce a detailed commissioning
programme in line with the period shown on the construction programme.
Before any commissioning is carried out the building has to be complete with the final snagging and final clean
complete. All client equipment that has a interface with the mechanical and electrical services or building fabric is
also to be completed.
Prior to completion a system proving period shall be established (minimum 1 week continuous fully automatic
operation), the following information shall be placed in a manual and handed over to the commissioning manager
for approval:
Tiny Talk logs detailing the temperature readings in each key space. BMS control logs detailing the
temperature readings.
Noise readings of each space. Lighting lux levels of each space.
Air change rates for each space provide with mechanical ventilation Calibration certificates for the tiny talks,
noise meter and lux level meter.
Noise readings shall be recorded with all new plant running and no workshop equipment / fit out equipment in
operation.
Air change rates shall be calculated from the ventilation commissioning sheets.

Section 6- Appendices
APPENDIX 6A - MAKES OF EQUIPMENT
The technical specification and tender drawings have been prepared on the basis of the following equipment:
The following list is the items of material and equipment manufacturers selected as the basis of design. They have
been selected for their compliance with the specification, performance and appearance.
The Tenderer must base his tender offer on a fully specification-compliant system from one of the listed
manufacturers but may offer alternatives by completing the Schedule of Contractor’s Proposals at the time of tender.
Such alternatives must be equal in performance and appearance to those manufacturers and systems listed and be
in full compliance with the specifications. Technical literature, sufficient for the Engineer to evaluate the proposal
along with the savings in cost for use of alternative materials / manufacturer must be submitted along with the
proposal at the time of tender.
Where no particular item is listed below, such materials and equipment shall be notified to the Engineer by the
tenderer during the tender period.
All equipment and materials shall be issued with test certificates to confirm their manufacture to the appropriate
standards. A copy of the certificates will be passed to the Engineer for approval, with a further copy being
incorporated within the “O+M” manuals.
As copies of materials are common in the Dubai market, no materials will be accepted without the presentation of
delivery note, stating:
Material name
Material reference number Manufacturer contact number Country of origin
Shipment documents Local agent name
The contractor must provide any additional information requested by the Engineer regarding materials, within one
week of the request (verbal or written) being made.
Due to their sub-standard nature, no copies will be accepted for this development. Any contractor using copy
materials will be struck off the Engineer’s future project list.
Material Manufacturer
Above & Below Ground Drainage Pipework & Fittings Polypipe

Terrain
Hepworth
Floor Drain Gratings Wade

Frost

Watts
Dalmer
Zurn
Channel Gratings Wade
ACO
Zurn
Polyethylene Kitchen Waste Pipework & Fittings Wavin

Hepworth
Durapipe
Floor Traps Hepworth

Terrain
Wade
Zurn
Floor Trap Guard Watts

Hydropoint ME
Provent
Roof & Balcony Rain Water Outlets Watts

Wade
Jay R Smith
Manhole Covers & Frames Ducast

Stanton
Glynwed
AQUALID
Crescent
Acoustic Lagging for Drain Pipework Armstrong

Kinetics
Sound Seal
Submersible Lift Pumps Grundfos

KSB
ABS
Copper Pipework Crane Enfield

Wednesbury
Yorkshire
Nibco
Copper Pipework Fittings Yorkshire

Nibco
Mueller
Kembla

PEX Pipework & Fittings Fusiotherm

Hepworth
Aquatherm
PPR Pipework & Fittings Hepworth

Fusiotherm
Aquatherm
HDPE Pipeworks Cosmoplast

Hepworth
Wavin
PVC-U Pressure Pipework & Fittings Hepworth

George Fischer
Durapipe
Terrain
Pressure Reducing Valves Crane

Honeywell
Bailey
Sectional GRP Storage Tanks Sekisui

Balmoral
Mitsubishi
Hydrostatic Contents Gauges Normond

Weiss
Brannon & Son Ltd
Constant Pressure Packaged Pump Sets Grundfos

DP Pumps
Biral
ITT Bell & Gossett
Water Meters RWC

Elster
Actaris
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Watts

Honeywell
Hydropoint ME
Water Hammer Arrestors Watts
Zurn
Hydrotrol
Air Vents, Domestic Water Delta

Flamco
Watts
Spirax Sarco
Test Points Binder

Electric Water Heaters Ariston Water Heater

A.O Smith
HRS Calorifier
Pacific
Mild Steel Pipework, Plain & Galvanised

(Chilled water, steam, firefighting, compressed air) Zenith
Seah
Econosto
Mild Steel Pipework Fittings - Screwed Crane

Nefit
Mild Steel Pipework Fittings, Welded Benkan

Bonney Forge
Nefit
Mechanical Grooved Couplings Victaulic

(Chilled water and firefighting) Grinnell
Virotec
Centrifugal Chillers Carrier

Trane
York
Chilled, Condenser, Cooling Tower Water Pumps/ Grundfos
Domestic water booster & transfer pumps
CHW Pressurisation Unit Pullen

Armstrong
ITT Bell & Gossett
Air Vents, Chilled Water Spirax Sarco

Flamco
Crane
Armstrong
Solid (Sand) Separators & Air Separators Engineering Appliances

Spirax Sarco
Taco
Flamco
ITT Bell & Gosset
Lakos
Armtrol
PEP

Chilled Water Energy Meters Aqua-Metro

Siemens
Onicon
Actaris
Altitude & Temperature Gauges Weiss

Trerice
Dwyer
Brannan
Pipework Supports Hilti

Mupro
Isafix
Flammco
Grinnell
Diamond
Weicco
Valves & Strainers

(Chilled water, PICV) Crane
Oventrop
Danfoss
Flanges & Gaskets Flexitallic

Industrial Seals & Gaskets
Rubber Bellows with Control Rods Proco

Mason
Kinetics
Guided Metallic Expansion Bellow Engineering Appliances

Flexonic
Stourflex
Heat Recovery Units Nuaire

Mitsubish
Flakt-Woods
TROX
Fan Coil Units York

Trane
Carrier
Flaktwoods
VTS Clima
Ventilation Fans AHS
Systemaire
Nuaire

Flakt-Woods TROX
Ventilation Fans for all purposes(Carpark, Kitchen

applications,
Smoke, Fresh Air & general supply/extract) Nuaire
Flakt-Woods TROX
Ductwork Galvanised Steel Sheet Nishin

Sumitomo
Iscor
Hindalco
Aluminium Cladding Tuttle & Bailey

Titus International
Diffusers & Grilles Waterloo

Trox
Tecnalco
Beta
Air Master
Specialty Diffusers & Grilles Trox

(Swirl diffusers, jet nozzles, exhaust valves) Flakt Woods
Nailor
Titus
Louvres Tecnalco
Beta
Tuttle & Bailey
Titus International
EH Price
Trox
Flexible Ductwork Thermaflex

Safid
ATCO
Fire Dampers (UL Listed) KBE

Ruskin
Trox
GMAMCO
Greenheck
Motorised Smoke Fire Dampers & Actuators Ruskin

(UL Listed) KBE

Trox
Greenheck
Actuator Belimo
Actuator Siemens
Volume Control Dampers GMAMCO

KBE
Euro Register
Magnehelic Filter Differential Pressure Gauges Dwyer

Terra Universal
Or Equivalent
Sound Attenuators Euro Register

Seagull Trading
GMAMCO
Safid
Ductwork Acoustic Liner John’s Manville

Manson
Kimmco
Knauff
Vibration Isolators, Pump Inertia bases Mason

Kinetics
VMC
Weicco
Ductwork Insulation Armaflex

K-Flex
Aeroflex
Rubberflex
Thermal Break
Pipe Work Insulation Armaflex

K-Flex
Aeroflex
Rubberflex
Domestic Water Treatment System Hydrotec UK/Overseas

RSW Water Treatment
HydroPUR HydroMAG
Variable Frequency Drives ABB

Danfoss
Siemens
Allen Bradley
ABB
Fire Fighting Pumps (NFPA 20, UL Listed) NAFFCO
ITT Bell & Gosset
Armstrong
Aurora
Patterson
Fire Fighting Valves (UL Listed) Grinnell
Kennedy
Claval
Victaulic
Grinnell
Sprinkler System (UL Listed) Central
Globe
Reliable
Tyco
Viking
Central
Sprinkler System Components (UL Listed) Grinnell
System Sensor
Victaulic
Sure-Test
Claval
Viking
Grinnell
Fire Hose Reels & Cabinets (UL Listed) Norsen
UL Listed Kidde
Angus
Grinnell
Flexible Final Sprinkler Connections (UL Listed) FlexHead Industries

Or equal and approved
FlexHead Industries
Fire Stopping Materials / Fire Rated Ductwork Hilti

3M
Nullifier
Flambar
Firesafe
Promat
Fenland
Insulation Adhesives and Sealants Childers

Flintkote
HB Fuller
Fosters

External Fire Hydrants AVK

Grinnell
Kennedy
External Underground Fire Mains Performance Pipe

Gulf Eternit
The contractor shall use the above manufacturers or equal and approved ones to undertake final selections for the
required mechanical equipment.

Specification Part 3 of 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specification Part 3 of 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEPTEMBER 2018 PROJECT NO.

Q GARDENS BOUTIQUE RESIDENCES

CVTEC PLUS Page 1 of 399 SECTION 3 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES STANDAR SPECIFICATION

Amendment Record Sheet Amendment Record Sheet

Revision Description Date Approved

T0 Issued for Tender 05.05.2018 CT

CVTEC PLUS Page 2 of 399 SECTION 3 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES STANDAR SPECIFICATION

Amendment Record Sheet Amendment Record Sheet ...........................................................................................2

3.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 26

3.0.1 General Electrical Standards .................................................................................................................... 26

3.0.2 General Standards ................................................................................................................................... 26

3.0.3 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................... 27

3.0.4 Electricity Supply ..................................................................................................................................... 27

3.0.5 Facilities for other trades ......................................................................................................................... 27

3.0.6 Position of all Points, switches, etc .......................................................................................................... 27

3.0.7 Mounting Heights .................................................................................................................................... 28

3.0.8 Segregation of wiring systems ................................................................................................................. 28

3.0.9 Fire and smoke barriers ........................................................................................................................... 28

3.0.10 Design Criteria ......................................................................................................................................... 28

3.0.11 Supports and fixings ................................................................................................................................ 29

3.0.12 Expansion Joints ...................................................................................................................................... 29

3.0.13 Quality of Materials ................................................................................................................................. 29

3.0.14 Faulty materials and Workmanship ......................................................................................................... 30

3.0.15 Specialized Tools ...................................................................................................................................... 30

3.1 EARTHING ................................................................................................................................................ 30

3.1.1 Reference Documents .............................................................................................................................. 30

3.1.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 30

3.1.3 Earth Electrodes ....................................................................................................................................... 31

3.1.4 Conductors .............................................................................................................................................. 32

3.1.5 Joints and Connections ............................................................................................................................ 33

3.1.6 Inspection Pits ......................................................................................................................................... 34

3.1.7 Supports and Fixings ................................................................................................................................ 34

CVTEC PLUS Page 3 of 399 SECTION 3 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES STANDAR SPECIFICATION

3.1.9 Extension and alteration to existing installation ...................................................................................... 35

3.1.10 Generator ................................................................................................................................................ 35

3.1.11 TN-C-S Systems ........................................................................................................................................ 35

3.1.12 External Socket Outlets and Equipment ................................................................................................... 36

Section 3.2 LV POWER DISTRIBUTION .................................................................................................................. 36

3.2.1 Reference Documents .............................................................................................................................. 36

3.2.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... 37

3.2.3 Factory Built Assemblies .......................................................................................................................... 37

3.2.4 Switchboards ........................................................................................................................................... 38

3.2.5 Drawings .................................................................................................................................................. 39

3.2.6 Terminations & Switchboard Connections ............................................................................................... 39

3.2.7 Safety and Maintenance Aspects ............................................................................................................. 40

3.2.8 Identification and Notices ........................................................................................................................ 40

3.2.9 Phase Colouring ....................................................................................................................................... 40

3.2.10 Current Transformers and Instruments .................................................................................................... 41

3.2.11 Metering .................................................................................................................................................. 41

3.2.12 Testing ..................................................................................................................................................... 41

3.2.13 Rubber Matting ....................................................................................................................................... 42

3.2.14 Distribution Boards .................................................................................................................................. 42

3.2.15 MCB Distribution Boards ......................................................................................................................... 42

3.2.16 Consumer Units ....................................................................................................................................... 42

3.2.17 Residual Current Device ........................................................................................................................... 43

3.2.18 Air-Break Switches ................................................................................................................................... 43

3.2.19 Moulded-Case Circuit-Breakers ................................................................................................................ 43

3.2.20 Fuses ........................................................................................................................................................ 43

3.2.21 Miniature Circuit-Breakers ....................................................................................................................... 44

3.2.22 Power Factor Correction .......................................................................................................................... 44

CVTEC PLUS Page 4 of 399 SECTION 3 – ELECTRICAL SERVICES STANDAR SPECIFICATION

3.2.23 Surge Protection Device ........................................................................................................................... 45

3.3 HV / LV CABLES AND WIRING ................................................................................................................... 45